Introduction Page 1 of 1

Introduction
The integrated production control system CENTUM VP is the products of distributed control system
(DCS) for large and medium-small scale process control.
This manual is written for use as a part of reference manual describing the functional details of
CENTUM VP. This manual focuses on the function block details. You can read the required chapters
when you need the details of function blocks.
In this user's manual, FFCS, FFCS-L, FFCS-V, and FFCS-C are referred to as "FFCS series" or "FFCS
series FCS." If the individual types of FCS need to be particularly mentioned, the FCSs may be
described respectively with their particular types.
This manual consists of the following chapters:
• Chapter 1 Arithmetic Calculation, Logic Operation
This chapter describes the details of the numeric calculation blocks, analog calculation blocks,
logic operation blocks, general-purpose calculation blocks, and calculation auxiliary blocks.
• Chapter 2 Sequence Control
This chapter describes the details of the sequence table blocks, logic chart blocks, switch
instrument blocks, sequence element blocks, and valve monitoring blocks.
• Chapter 3 Faceplate Blocks
This chapter describes the details of the analog faceplate blocks, sequence faceplate blocks, and
hybrid faceplate blocks.
When you read descriptions of FFCS-C, replace %Z with %Y.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
Safety Precautions for Use Page 1 of 2

Safety Precautions for Use

Safety, Protection, and Modification of the Product
• To protect the system controlled by the Product and the Product itself and to ensure safe
operation, please observe the safety precautions described in this Manual. Yokogawa Electric
Corporation ("YOKOGAWA") assumes no liability for safety if users fail to observe the safety
precautions and instructions when operating the Product.
• If the Product is used in a manner not specified in the User's Manuals, the protection provided by
the Product may be impaired.
• If any protection or safety circuit is required for the system controlled by the Product or for the
Product itself, please install it externally.
• Be sure to confirm the specifications and required settings of the devices that are used in
combination with the Product by referring to the instruction manual or other documents of the
devices.
• Use only spare parts that are approved by YOKOGAWA when replacing parts or consumables of
the Product.
• Do not use the Product and its accessories such as power cords on devices that are not approved
by YOKOGAWA. Do not use the Product and its accessories for any purpose other than those
intended by YOKOGAWA.
• Modification of the Product is strictly prohibited.
• The following symbols are used in the Product and User's Manuals to indicate the accompanying
safety precautions:
Indicates that caution is required. This symbol for the Product indicates the possibility of
dangers such as electric shock on personnel and equipment, and also indicates that the
user must refer to the User’s Manuals for necessary actions. In the User’s Manuals, this
symbol is used together with a word “CAUTION” or “WARNING” at the locations where
precautions for avoiding dangers are described.

Indicates that caution is required for hot surface. Note that the devices with this symbol
become hot. The risk of burn injury or some damages exists if the devices are touched or
contacted.

Identifies a protective conductor terminal. Before using the Product, you must ground the
protective conductor terminal to avoid electric shock.
Identifies a functional grounding terminal. A terminal marked "FG" also has the same
function. This terminal is used for grounding other than protective grounding. Before using
the Product, you must ground this terminal.
Indicates an AC supply.
Indicates a DC supply.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
Safety Precautions for Use Page 2 of 2

Indicates that a component such as a power supply switch is turned ON.

Indicates that a component such as a power supply switch is turned OFF.

Notes on Handling User's Manuals

• Hand over the User's Manuals to your end users so that they can keep the User's Manuals on
hand for convenient reference.
• Thoroughly read and understand the information in the User's Manuals before using the Product.
• For the avoidance of doubt, the purpose of the User's Manuals is not to warrant that the Product
is suitable for any particular purpose but to describe the functional details of the Product.
• Contents of the User's Manuals are subject to change without notice.
• Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of contents in the User's Manuals. However,
should you have any questions or find any errors, contact us or your local distributor. The User's
Manuals with unordered or missing pages will be replaced.

Warning and Disclaimer

• Except as specified in the warranty terms, YOKOGAWA shall not provide any warranty for the
Product.
• YOKOGAWA shall not be liable for any indirect or consequential loss incurred by either using or
not being able to use the Product.

Notes on Software
• YOKOGAWA makes no warranties, either expressed or implied, with respect to the Software
Product's merchantability or suitability for any particular purpose, except as specified in the
warranty terms.
• Purchase the appropriate number of licenses of the Software Product according to the number of
computers to be used.
• No copy of the Software Product may be made for any purpose other than backup; otherwise, it
is deemed as an infringement of YOKOGAWA's Intellectual Property rights.
• Keep the software medium of the Software Product in a safe place.
• No reverse engineering, reverse compiling, reverse assembling, or converting the Software
Product to human-readable format may be performed for the Software Product.
• No part of the Software Product may be transferred, converted, or sublet for use by any third-
party, without prior written consent from YOKOGAWA.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
Documentation Conventions Page 1 of 2

Documentation Conventions
Symbols
The following symbols are used in the User's Manuals.
Indicates precautions to avoid a danger that may lead to death or severe
injury.

Indicates precautions to avoid a danger that may lead to minor or

moderate injury or property damage.

Indicates important information required to understand operations or

functions.
Indicates additional information.

Indicates referenced content.

In online manuals, you can view the referenced content by clicking the
links that are in green text. However, this action does not apply to the
links that are in black text.

Typographical Conventions
The following typographical conventions are used throughout the User's Manuals.

Commonly Used Conventions throughout the User's Manuals

• Character string to be entered
The characters that must be entered are shown in monospace font as follows:
Example:
FIC100.SV=50.0

• ▼ Mark
This symbol indicates the description for an item for which you should make a setting in the
product's engineering window.
While operating an engineering window, the help information for the selected item can be
accessed from "Builder Definition Items" in the Help menu. Listing more than one definition item
after this symbol implies that the paragraph on the page describes more than one definition
items.
Example:
▼ Tag Name, Station Name

• Δ Mark
Indicates that a space must be entered between character strings.
Example:
.ALΔPIC010Δ-SC

• Character string enclosed by braces { }

Indicates character strings that may be omitted.
Example:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
Documentation Conventions Page 2 of 2

.PRΔTAG{Δ.sheet name}

Conventions Used to Show Key or Button Operations

• Characters enclosed by brackets [ ]
When characters are enclosed by brackets in the description of a key or button operation, it
indicates a key on the keyboard, a key on the operation keyboard, a button name in a window,
or an item in a list box displayed in a window.
Example:
To alter the function, press the [ESC] key.

Conventions Used in Command Syntax or Program Statements

The following conventions are used within a command syntax or program statement format:
• Characters enclosed by angle brackets < >
Indicate character strings that user can specify freely according to certain guidelines.
Example:
#define <Identifier> <Character string>

• "..."
Indicates previous command or argument that may be repeated.
Example:
Imax (arg1, arg2, ...)

• Characters enclosed by brackets [ ]

Indicate character strings that may be omitted.
Example:
sysalarm <format character string> [, <output value>…]

• Characters enclosed by separators | |

Indicates character strings that can be selected from more than one option.
Example:

Drawing Conventions
Drawings used in the User's Manuals may be partially emphasized, simplified, or omitted for the
convenience of description.
Drawings of windows may be slightly different from the actual screenshots with different settings or
fonts. The difference does not hamper the understanding of basic functionalities and operation and
monitoring tasks.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
Copyright and Trademark Notices Page 1 of 1

Copyright and Trademark Notices

All Rights Reserved
The copyright of the programs and online manuals contained in the software medium of the
Software Product shall remain with YOKOGAWA.
You are allowed to print the required pages of the online manuals for the purposes of using or
operating the Product; however, reprinting or reproducing the entire document is strictly prohibited
by the Copyright Law.
Except as stated above, no part of the online manuals may be reproduced, transferred, sold, or
distributed to a third party in any manner (either in electronic or written form including, without
limitation, in the forms of paper documents, electronic media, and transmission via the network).
Nor it may be registered or recorded in the media such as films without permission.

Trademark Acknowledgements
• CENTUM, ProSafe, Vnet/IP, PRM, Exaopc, Exapilot, Exaquantum, Exasmoc, Exarqe, Multivariable
Optimizing Control/Robust Quality Estimation, StoryVIEW and FieldMate Validator are the
registered trademarks or trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
• The names of corporations, organizations, products and logos herein are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation and their respective holders.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1. Arithmetic Calculation, Logic Operation Page 1 of 1

1. Arithmetic Calculation, Logic

Operation
The arithmetic calculation and logic operation function blocks perform general-purpose calculation
processing, such as arithmetic calculation, analog calculation and logic operation.
The arithmetic calculation and logic operation blocks include numeric calculation blocks, analog
calculation blocks, general-purpose calculation blocks, calculation auxiliary blocks and logic operation
blocks.
This chapter explains each model of calculation and logic operation function blocks.

Arithmetic Calculation and Logic Operation

The general-purpose calculation processing such as arithmetic calculation, analog calculation and
logic operation (*1) are performed to input signals to improve the regulatory control and sequence
control. The function block that executes arithmetic calculation is referred as the calculation block.
The following figure shows the calculation blocks in basic control architecture.
*1: Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Figure 1-1 Calculation Blocks in Basic Control Architecture

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.1 Common Functions of Calculation Blocks Page 1 of 3

1.1 Common Functions of Calculation Blocks

Calculation blocks provide calculation functions for analog signals and contact signals.
Calculation blocks convert the calculation results into the signals that can be used by other function
blocks.

Calculation Blocks
Calculation blocks receive analog signals (analog values) or contact signals (digital values) as input
values, and perform calculation according to the set parameters. The result of calculation is
outputted as the calculated output value (CPV).
Following diagram shows the architecture of calculation blocks.

Figure 1.1-1 Architecture of Calculation Blocks

All calculation blocks are provided with the following three processing functions.
• Input processing
Receive the signal from the input terminal and convert the signal into the calculation input value
(RV).
• Calculation processing
Read the calculation input value (RV) and perform calculation processing then output the result
as calculated output value (CPV).
• Output processing
Read the calculated output value (CPV) and output the calculation result as an output signal to
the connected destination of the output terminal.
Furthermore, to perform calculation with data of other function blocks via data setting or data
reference functions may bypass the input processing and output processing.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.1 Common Functions of Calculation Blocks Page 2 of 3

SEE For more information about input processing common to calculation block, refer to:
ALSO 3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about output processing common to calculation blocks, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Logic Operation Blocks

Logic operation blocks (*1) receive analog signals (analog values) or contact signals (digital values)
as input values, and perform calculation according to the set parameters. The result of calculation is
outputted as the calculated output value (CPV).
*1: Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

The following diagram shows the architecture of the Logic Operation Block.

Figure 1.1-2 Architecture of Logic Operation Blocks

All calculation blocks are provided with the following three processing functions.
• Input processing
Receive the signal from the input terminal and convert the signal into the calculation input value
(RV).
• Calculation processing
Read the calculation input value (RV) and perform calculation processing then output the result
as calculated output value (CPV).
• Output processing
Read the calculated output value (CPV) and output the calculation result as an output signal to
the connected destination of the output terminal.
Furthermore, to perform calculation with data of other function blocks via data setting or data
reference functions may bypass the input processing and output processing.

SEE For more information about input processing common to calculation blocks, refer to:
ALSO 3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.1 Common Functions of Calculation Blocks Page 3 of 3

For more information about output processing common to calculation blocks, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Output Operation

The calculation output operation is a function that converts the operation results of a calculation
block into actual calculated output values (CPV). There are two types of calculation output
operations: velocity type and positional type.

Positional type
Changes the calculated output value (CPVn) for the present calculation result to the actual calculated
output value (CPVn).

Velocity type
Adds the difference (CPVn) between the calculated output value for the present calculation result
(CPVn) and that for the previous calculation result (CPVn-1) to the value read back (CPVrb) from the
output destination, and determines the actual calculated output value (CPVn).
The arithmetic calculation block and analog calculation block are the only calculation blocks that can
use the velocity type.

Setting the Calculation Output Operation

In the case of an arithmetic calculation block or an analog calculation block, the calculation output
operation is set using the Function Block Detail Builder. Calculation blocks that are neither an
arithmetic calculation block nor an analog calculation block only have the “Positional Output Action”
calculation output operation, so no setting is necessary.
Control Calculation Output Select from either “Velocity Output Action” or “Positional Output
Type: Action”
The default is “Positional Output Action.”

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.2 Data Handled by Calculation Blocks Page 1 of 2

1.2 Data Handled by Calculation Blocks

The calculation blocks can handle both the external data related to outside and the internal data
related only to inside calculation processing.

I/O Data Handled by Calculation Blocks

The I/O data handled by calculation blocks consists of data values and data statuses.

Data Value
The calculation blocks can handle the following types of data: floating-point, double-precision
floating-point, integer and character string.
When exchange data with other function blocks, if the data are in different type, the calculation
block executes the following processing.
• When refer data from a function block
The calculation block converts the data into the type suitable itself.
• When set data to a function block
The calculation block converts the data suitable to the objective function block.
Because of the above processing, the engineer need not worry about the data type difference when
generate and connect calculation blocks in the Function Block Detail Builder.
The I/O data types and set parameters applied to each type of calculation block are shown below.
The calculation precision of each functional block depends upon the data type of each data.
Table 1.2-1 I/O data types and set parameters

Block type Input data Output data Set parameter

Double-precision Double-precision
Arithmetic calculation Not specified
floating-point floating-point
Single-precision Single-precision Single-precision floating-
Analog calculation (*1)
floating-point floating-point point, integer
Logic Operation (*2) integer (logical value) integer (logical value) Not specified
Relational Double-precision
integer (logical value) Not specified
Logic operation floating-point
Operation (*2) Bitwise logic
integer integer Not specified
operation
Double-precision Double-precision
General-purpose calculation Double-precision floating-
floating-point, floating-point,
(*3) point, character string
character string character string
Double-precision Double-precision Double-precision floating-
Calculation auxiliary (*4)
floating-point floating-point point, integer
Calculation auxiliary (for
Character string Character string Character string, integer
character strings only)
*1: The analog calculation blocks handle data in engineering unit so that the internal data is floating type.
*2: Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.
*3: The general-purpose calculation blocks can pre-determine each individual data item type in each
function block.
*4: The calculation auxiliary blocks can pre-determine each individual data item type in each function block.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.2 Data Handled by Calculation Blocks Page 2 of 2

Data Status
The calculated output value (CPV) data status varies depending on whether the builder-specified
item “Output Value Tracking,” is enabled or disabled.
• When output value tracking is “No”
The calculated output value (CPV) is the result of calculation. It does not track to the data of the
output connected destination. Therefore, data statuses for the calculated output value (CPV) are
BAD (invalid), QST (questionable data value) and CAL (calibration).
• When output value tracking is “Yes”
The calculated output value (CPV) is the result of calculation. It tracks to the output connected
destination’s data under the certain status. Therefore, the data status, those often used for other
function blocks but seldom for calculation blocks such as CND (conditional) or NFP (non process
origin), may occur to the calculated output value (CPV).
The status of output value tracking can be indicated from the data status of the calculated output
value (CPV).
When CPV data status is BAD, QST, CAL, NEFV, (IOP+, IOP-, OOP, NRDY, PEAL, LPFL), the CPV
Output value tracking is disabled(*1).
When CPV data status is BAD, QST, CAL, NEFV, CND, NFP, (IOP+, IOP-, OOP, NRDY, PEAL, LPFL),
the CPV Output value tracking is enabled(*1).
*1: The data status in parentheses is only for CPV of the addition, multiplication, division, analog
calculation or general-purpose calculation blocks.

When a process I/O-related data status (IOP+, IOP-, OOP, NRDY) occurs to the calculated input
value (RV), the analog calculation blocks pass the data status to the calculated output value (CPV),
regardless of whether output tracking is enabled or disabled. Thus, the data status occurred on the
input side, such as IOP+ (input open high), is passed to the function block connected to it.
The calculation block will set the status of calculated data as a bad data (BAD) when an error occurs
in the course of calculation.
Calculation error may be generated in the following cases.
• When the calculation result overflows.
• When the divisor of the calculation is zero, the calculation is zero divided.
• When calculate the square root of a negative number in the calculation.

SEE For more information about data status, refer to:

ALSO 6.4, “Data Status” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.3 Types of Calculation Blocks Page 1 of 3

1.3 Types of Calculation Blocks

According to the data type and calculation processing capability, the calculation function blocks are
classified into arithmetic calculation blocks, analog calculation blocks, general-purpose calculation
blocks and calculation auxiliary blocks.

Arithmetic Calculation Blocks

Table 1.3-1 Arithmetic Calculation Blocks

Block type Code Name Input terminals Output terminals(*1)

ADD Addition Block
MUL Multiplication Block 2 2
Arithmetic calculation blocks
DIV Division Block
AVE Averaging Block 8 2
*1: The SUB terminal is counted as one of the output terminals.

Analog Calculation Blocks

Table 1.3-2 Analog Calculation Blocks

Input Output terminals

Block type Code Name
terminal (*1)
SQRT Square Root Block
EXP Exponential Block
LAG First-Order Lag Block
INTEG Integration Block
LD Derivative Block
RAMP Ramp Block
LDLAG Lead/Lag Block 1 2

DLAY Dead-Time Block

Analog calculation
blocks DLAY-C Dead-Time Compensation Block
AVE-M Moving-Average Block
AVE-C Cumulative-Average Block
FUNC- Variable Line-Segment Function
VAR Block
Temperature and Pressure
TPCFL 3 2
Correction Block
ASTM1 ASTM Correction Block: Old JIS
2 2
ASTM2 ASTM Correction Block: New JIS
*1: The SUB terminal is counted as one of the output terminals.

Logic Operation Blocks

Table 1.3-3 Logic Operation Blocks

Block type Code Name

Input Output terminals

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.3 Types of Calculation Blocks Page 2 of 3

terminals (*1)
AND Logical AND Block
2 1
OR Logical OR Block
NOT Logical NOT Block 1 1
SRS1- Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1
S Output
2 1
SRS1- Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with
R 1 Output
SRS2- Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2
S Outputs
2 2
SRS2- Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with
R 2 Outputs
WOUT Wipeout Block 2 1
Logic Operation OND ON-Delay Timer Block
blocks (*2)
OFFD OFF-Delay Timer Block
One-Shot Block (Rising-Edge 1 1
TON
Trigger)
One-Shot Block (Falling-Edge
TOFF
Trigger)
GT Comparator Block (Greater Than)
Comparator Block (Greater Than or
GE
Equal)
2 1
EQ Equal Operator Block
BAND Bitwise AND Block
BOR Bitwise OR Block
BNOT Bitwise NOT Block 1 1
*1: The SUB terminal is counted as one of the output terminals.
*2: Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

General-Purpose Calculation Blocks

Table 1.3-4 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks

Input Output
Block type Code Name
terminals terminals(*1)
CALCU General-Purpose Calculation Block
General-purpose
CALCU- General-Purpose Calculation Block 32 17
calculation blocks
C with String I/O
*1: The SUB terminal is counted as one of the output terminals.

Calculation Auxiliary Blocks

Table 1.3-5 Calculation Auxiliary Blocks

Input Output terminals

Block type Code Name
terminals (*1)
Three-Pole Three-Position Selector
SW-33 9 (3) (*2) 3 (9) (*2)
Switch Block

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.3 Types of Calculation Blocks Page 3 of 3

One-Pole Nine-Position Selector

SW-91 9 (1) (*3) 1 (9) (*3)
Switch Block
DSW-16 Selector Switch Block for 16 Data
DSW- Selector Switch Block for 16 String
0 1
16C Data
DSET Data Set Block
DSET-
Data Set Block with Input Indicator 1 2
PVI
BDSET-
Calculation auxiliary One-Batch Data Set Block
1L
blocks 0 16
BDSET-
One-Batch String Data Set Block
1C
BDSET-
Two-Batch Data Set Block
2L
0 16
BDSET-
Two-Batch String Data Set Block
2C
BDA-L Batch Data Acquisition Block
16 0
BDA-C Batch String Data Acquisition Block
ADL Inter-Station Data Link Block 0 0
*1: The SUB terminal is counted as one of the output terminals.
*2: 3 input terminals and 9 output terminals can be used.
*3: One input terminal and 9 output terminals can be used.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.3.1 Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each C... Page 1 of 5

1.3.1 Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm

Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block
A list of the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing that can be performed
for each calculation block is shown below.

Input Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block

Table 1.3.1-1 Input Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block (1/3)

Model Input signal conversion(*1) Digital filter(*1) Totalizer(*1) PV overshoot(*1) CAL(*1)

ADD BARPPqSb - - x x
MUL BARPPqSb - - x x
DIV BARPPqSb - - x x
AVE B - - - x
SQRT BARPPqSb (*2) - - (*2) x
EXP BARPPqSb (*2) - - (*2) x
LAG BARPPqSb (*2) - - (*2) x
INTEG BARPPqSb (*2) - - (*2) x
LD BARPPqSb (*2) - - (*2) x
RAMP BARPPqSb - - x x
LDLAG BARPPqSb (*2) - - (*2) x
DLAY BARPPqSb (*2) - - (*2) x
DLAY-C BARPPqSb (*2) - - (*2) x
AVE-M BARPPqSb - - x x
AVE-C BARPPqSb - - x x
FUNC-VAR BARPPqSb (*2) - - (*2) x
TPCFL BARPPqSb - - x x
ASTM1 BARPPqSb - - x x
ASTM2 BARPPqSb - - x x
*1: B: No conversion (function block)
A: No conversion (analog input)
R: Square root conversion (analog input)
P: Control priority type pulse-train input conversion
Pq: Exact totalization pulse-train input conversion
Sb: Subsystem input
x: Exists
-: Not exist
*2: The input processing other than the calibration function will not function when data setting is performed to
the PV by cascade connection.

Table 1.3.1-2 Input Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block (2/3) – Logic Operation Block

Model (*1) Input signal conversion(*2) Digital filter(*2) Totalizer(*2) PV overshoot(*2) CAL(*2)
AND - - - - x
OR - - - - x
NOT - - - - x
SRS1-S - - - - x
SRS1-R - - - - x
SRS2-S - - - - x

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.3.1 Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each C... Page 2 of 5

SRS2-R - - - - x
WOUT - - - - x
OND - - - - x
OFFD - - - - x
TON - - - - x
TOFF - - - - x
GT - - - - x
GE - - - - x
EQ - - - - x
BAND - - - - x
BOR - - - - x
BNOT - - - - x
*1: Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.
*2: x: Exists
-: Not exist

Table 1.3.1-3 Input Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block (3/3)

Model Input signal conversion(*1) Digital filter(*1) Totalizer(*1) PV overshoot(*1) CAL(*1)

CALCU BARPPqSbL x x x x
CALCU-C BARPPqSbL x x x x
SW-33 - - - - x
SW-91 - - - - x
DSW-16 - - - - x
DSW-16C - - - - x
DSET - - - - x
DSET-PVI BARPSbL x x x x
BDSET-1L - - - - -
BDSET-1C - - - - -
BDSET-2L - - - - -
BDSET-2C - - - - -
BDA-L - - - - -
BDA-C - - - - -
*1: B: No conversion (function block)
A: No conversion (analog input)
R: Square root conversion (analog input)
P: Control priority type pulse-train input conversion
Pq: Exact totalization type pulse-train input conversion
Sb: Subsystem input
L: PV limit
x: Exists
-: Not exist

Output Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block

Table 1.3.1-4 Output Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block

Output
Output
Output Velocity Clamped Output Auxiliary signal
Model PMV range
limit limit output tracking output(*1) conversion
tracking
(*2)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.3.1 Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each C... Page 3 of 5

ADD - - - - (*3) - CCd BASb

MUL - - - - (*3) - CCd BASb
DIV - - - - (*3) - CCd BASb
AVE - - - - (*3) - CCd BASb
SQRT - - (*4) - (*3) - CCd BASb
EXP - - (*4) - (*3) - CCd BASb
LAG - - (*4) - (*3) - CCd BASb
INTEG - - (*4) - (*3) - CCd BASb
LD - - (*4) - (*3) - CCd BASb
RAMP - - - - (*3) - CCd BASb
LDLAG - - (*4) - (*3) - CCd BASb
DLAY - - (*4) - (*3) - CCd BASb
DLAY-C - - (*4) - (*3) - CCd BASb
AVE-M - - - - (*3) - CCd BASb
AVE-C - - - - (*3) - CCd BASb
FUNC-VAR - - (*4) - (*3) - CCd BASb
TPCFL - - - - (*3) - CCd BASb
ASTM1 - - - - (*3) - CCd BASb
ASTM2 - - - - (*3) - CCd BASb
Logic
Operation - - - - - - - -
Blocks (*5)
CALCU - - - - (*6) - CCd BASb
CALCU-C - - - - (*6) - CCd BASb
SW-33 - - - - - - - -
SW-91 - - - - - - - -
DSW-16 - x - - - - - BASb
DSW-16C - - - - - - - -
DSET - x - - - - - BASb
DSET-PVI - x - - - - CCdSSd BASb
BDSET-1L - - - - - - - -
BDSET-1C - - - - - - - -
BDSET-2L - - - - - - - -
BDSET-2C - - - - - - - -
BDA-L - - - - - - - -
BDA-C - - - - - - - -
*1: C: CPV
Cd: ΔCPV
S: SV
Sd: ΔSV
*2: B: Unconverted output (function block)
A: Analog output
Sb: Subsystem output
*3: Selectable by builder setting.
*4: Only tracking of the CLP ± status of the output destination is performed.
*5: Logic Operation Blocks contain the following models. The Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except
PFCS. If the connection method of an output terminal is “status manipulation,” the operation specification
defined for the output terminal is executed.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.3.1 Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each C... Page 4 of 5

AND, OR, NOT, SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, SRS2-R, WOUT, OND, OFFD, TON, TOFF, GT, GE, EQ, BAND, BOR,
BNOT
*6: Possible if explicitly input using computational expression

Alarm Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block

Table 1.3.1-5 Alarm Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block (1/3)

Common process alarms(*1) Other

Model alarms
NR OOP IOP IOP- HH LL HI LO DV+ DV- VEL+ VEL- MHI MLO CNF (*1)
ADD
MUL
DIV
AVE
SQRT
EXP
LAG
INTEG
LD
RAMP
x - x x - - - - - - - - - - x -
LDLAG
DLAY
DLAY-
C
AVE-M
AVE-C
FUNC-
VAR
TPCFL
ASTM1
ASTM2
*1: x: Available
-: Not available

Table 1.3.1-6 Alarm Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block (2/3) – Logic Operation Block

Common process alarms(*2) Other

Model
alarms
(*1) NR OOP IOP IOP- HH LL HI LO DV+ DV- VEL+ VEL- MHI MLO CNF (*2)
AND
OR
NOT
SRS1-
S
SRS1-
R
SRS2-
S
SRS2-
R

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.3.1 Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each C... Page 5 of 5

WOUT
OND
OFFD
TON
TOFF
GT x - x x - - - - - - - - - - x -
GE
EQ
BAND
BOR
BNOT
*1: Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.
*2: x: Available
-: Not available

Table 1.3.1-7 Alarm Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block (3/3)

Common process alarms(*1) Other

Model alarms
NR OOP IOP IOP- HH LL HI LO DV+ DV- VEL+ VEL- MHI MLO CNF (*1)
CALCU
CALCU- x - x x - - - - - - - - - - x CERR
C
SW-33
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SW-91
DSW-
16
DSW- x - - - - - - - - - - - - - x -
16C
DSET
DSET-
x - x x x x x x - - x x - - x -
PVI
BDSET-
1L
BDSET-
1C
BDSET-
2L x - - - - - - - - - - - - - x -

BDSET-
2C
BDA-L
BDA-C
*1: x: Available
-: Not available

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.3.2 Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block Page 1 of 3

1.3.2 Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block

A list of valid block modes for each calculation block is shown below.

Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block

Table 1.3.2-1 Valid Basic Block Modes for Calculation Blocks (1/3)

Valid basic block modes(*1)

Type Name
O/S IMAN TRK MAN AUT CAS PRD RCAS ROUT
ADD Addition Block
MUL Multiplication Block
DIV Division Block
AVE Averaging Block
SQRT Square Root Block
EXP Exponential Block
LAG First-order Lag Block
INTEG Integration Block
LD Derivative Block
RAMP Ramp Block
LDLAG Lead/Lag Block
x - - - x - - - -
DLAY Dead-Time Block
Dead-Time Compensation
DLAY-C
Block
AVE-M Moving-Average Block
AVE-C Cumulative-Average Block
FUNC- Variable Line-Segment
VAR Function Block
Temperature and Pressure
TPCFL
Correction Block
ASTM1 ASTM Correction Block:Old JIS
ASTM Correction Block:New
ASTM2
JIS
*1: x: Valid
-: Invalid

Table 1.3.2-2 Valid Basic Block Modes for Calculation Blocks (2/3)

Valid basic block modes(*1)

Type Name
O/S IMAN TRK MAN AUT CAS PRD RCAS ROUT
AND (*2) Logical AND Block
OR (*2) Logical OR Block
NOT (*2) Logical NOT Block
SRS1-S Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block
(*2) with 1 Output
SRS1-R Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop
(*2) Block with 1 Output

SRS2-S Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.3.2 Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block Page 2 of 3

(*2) with 2 Outputs

SRS2-R Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop
(*2) Block with 2 Outputs
WOUT
Wipeout Block
(*2)
OND (*2) ON-Delay Timer Block
OFFD
OFF-Delay Timer Block
(*2)
One-Shot Block (Rising-Edge
TON (*2)
Trigger)
TOFF One-Shot Block (Falling-Edge
(*2) Trigger)
Comparator Block (Greater
GT (*2) x - - - x - - - -
Than)
Comparator Block (Greater
GE (*2)
Than or Equal)
EQ (*2) Equal Operator Block
BAND
Bitwise AND Block
(*2)
BOR (*2) Bitwise OR Block
BNOT
Bitwise NOT Block
(*2)
General-Purpose Calculation
CALCU
Block
General-Purpose Calculation
CALCU-C
Block with String I/O
*1: x: Valid
-: Invalid
*2: Logic Operation Blocks can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Table 1.3.2-3 Valid Basic Block Modes for Calculation Blocks (3/3)

Valid basic block modes(*1)

Type Name
O/S IMAN TRK MAN AUT CAS PRD RCAS ROUT
Three-Pole Three-Position
SW-33
Selector Switch Block
- - - - - - - - -
One-Pole Nine-Position
SW-91
Selector Switch Block
Selector Switch Block for 16
DSW-16
Data
DSW- Selector Switch Block for 16
16C String Data
DSET Data Set Block
DSET- Data Set Block with Input
PVI Indicator x - - - x - - - -

BDSET-
One-Batch Data Set Block
1L
BDSET- One-Batch String Data Set
1C Block

BDSET- Two-Batch Data Set Block

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.3.2 Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block Page 3 of 3

2L
BDSET- Two-Batch String Data Set
2C Block
BDA-L Batch Data Acquisition Block
Batch String Data Acquisition
BDA-C
Block
*1: x: Valid
-: Invalid

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.4 Addition Block (ADD) Page 1 of 3

1.4 Addition Block (ADD)

The Addition Block (ADD) is used when performing addition processing or subtraction processing.

Addition Block (ADD)

▼ Connection
The Addition Block (ADD) is a function block that executes addition or subtraction of input data.
Here is the diagram of the Addition Block (ADD).

Figure 1.4-1 Function Block Diagram of Addition Block (ADD)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Addition Block (ADD).
Table 1.4-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Addition Block (ADD)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
IN Main input x Δ x x
Q01 Sub input x Δ x x
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Addition Block (ADD)

The ADD block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The processing timings available for the ADD block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup. Selections
available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-
speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the ADD block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.4 Addition Block (ADD) Page 2 of 3

3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Input Processing of Addition Block (ADD) When a Calculation Input

Value Error is Detected
The ADD block performs special input processing when an abnormal calculation input value is detected.

SEE For more information about the input processing when an abnormal calculation input value is detected,
ALSO refer to:
“ Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection in the Arithmetic Calculation” in “
Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection” in 3.6.2, “Input Processing of the
Calculation Block in Unsteady State” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Addition Block (ADD)

The ADD block performs addition and subtraction using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
The Addition Block (ADD) executes the following calculation processing for addition or subtraction of the
input data.
CPV=GAIN • (RV+ ( (GN1 • RV1) +BS1) ) +BIAS
To perform addition processing of input data, set a positive numeric value for the RV1 gain.
To perform subtraction processing of input data, set a negative numeric value for the RV1 gain.

Set Parameters
The set parameters of the Addition Block (ADD) are shown as follows.
• Gain (GAIN)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00
• Bias (BIAS)
An engineering unit data value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 0.00
• RV1 gain (GN1)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00
• RV1 bias (BS1)
An engineering unit data of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 0.00

Data Items – ADD

Table 1.4-2 Data Items of Addition Block (ADD)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.4 Addition Block (ADD) Page 3 of 3

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
RV1 Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW1 Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
7 - digit real number including sign and
BIAS Bias x 0.00
decimal point
7 - digit real number including sign and
GN1 RV1 gain x 1.00
decimal point
7 - digit real number including sign and
BS1 RV1 bias x 0.00
decimal point
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block mode for ADD block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.5 Multiplication Block (MUL) Page 1 of 3

1.5 Multiplication Block (MUL)

The Multiplication Block (MUL) is used when performing multiplication processing.

Multiplication Block (MUL)

▼ Connection
The Multiplication Block (MUL) is a function block that performs multiplication of input data.
Here is a function block diagram of the Multiplication Block (MUL).

Figure 1.5-1 Function Block Diagram of Multiplication Block (MUL)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Multiplication Block (MUL).
Table 1.5-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Multiplication Block
(MUL)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
IN Main input x Δ x x
Q01 Sub input x Δ x x
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Multiplication Block (MUL)

The MUL block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The processing timings available for the MUL block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup. Selections
available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-
speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the MUL block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.5 Multiplication Block (MUL) Page 2 of 3

For more information about the input processing, refer to:

3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Input Processing of Multiplication Block (MUL) When a Calculation

Input Value Error is Detected
The MUL block performs special input processing when an abnormal calculation input value is detected.

SEE For more information about the input processing when an abnormal calculation input value is detected,
ALSO refer to:
“ Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection in the Arithmetic Calculation” in “
Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection” in 3.6.2, “Input Processing of the
Calculation Block in Unsteady State” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Multiplication Block (MUL)

The MUL block performs multiplication using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
The Multiplication Block (MUL) executes the following calculation processing to perform multiplication of
input data.
CPV=GAIN • (RV • ( (GN1 • RV1) + BS1) ) +BIAS

Set Parameters
The set parameters of the Multiplication Block (MUL) are shown as follows.
• Gain (GAIN)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00
• Bias (BIAS)
An engineering unit data value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 0.00
• RV1 gain (GN1)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00
• RV1 bias (BS1)
An engineering unit data value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 0.00

Data Items – MUL

Table 1.5-2 Data Items of Multiplication Block (MUL)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.5 Multiplication Block (MUL) Page 3 of 3

O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
RV1 Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW1 Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
7 - digit real number including sign and
BIAS Bias x 0.00
decimal point
7 - digit real number including sign and
GN1 RV1 gain x 1.00
decimal point
7 - digit real number including sign and
BS1 RV1 bias x 0.00
decimal point
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for MUL block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.6 Division Block (DIV) Page 1 of 3

1.6 Division Block (DIV)

The Division Block (DIV) is used when performing division processing.

Division Block (DIV)

▼ Connection
The Division Block (DIV) is a function block that performs division of input data.
Here is a function block diagram of the Division Block (DIV).

Figure 1.6-1 Function Block Diagram of Division Block (DIV)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Division Block (DIV).
Table 1.6-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Division Block (DIV)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
IN Main input x Δ x x
Q01 Sub input x Δ x x
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Division Block (DIV)

The DIV block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The processing timings available for the DIV block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup. Selections
available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-
speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the DIV block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.6 Division Block (DIV) Page 2 of 3

3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Input Processing of Division Block (DIV) When a Calculation Input

Value Error is Detected
The DIV block performs special input processing when an abnormal calculation input value is detected.

SEE For more information about the input processing when an abnormal calculation input value is detected,
ALSO refer to:
“ Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection in the Arithmetic Calculation” in “
Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection” in 3.6.2, “Input Processing of the
Calculation Block in Unsteady State” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Division Block (DIV)

The DIV block performs division using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
The Division Block (DIV) executes the following calculation processing for performing division of input data.

Set Parameters
The set parameters of the Division Block (DIV) are shown as follows.
• Gain (GAIN)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00
• Bias (BIAS)
An engineering unit data value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 0.00
• RV1 gain (GN1)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00
• RV1 bias (BS1)
An engineering unit data value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 0.00

Data Items – DIV

Table 1.6-2 Data Items of Division Block (DIV)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.6 Division Block (DIV) Page 3 of 3

O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
RV1 Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW1 Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
7 - digit real number including sign and
BIAS Bias x 0.00
decimal point
7 - digit real number including sign and
GN1 RV1 gain x 1.00
decimal point
7 - digit real number including sign and
BS1 RV1 bias x 0.00
decimal point
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for DIV block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.7 Averaging Block (AVE) Page 1 of 5

1.7 Averaging Block (AVE)

The Averaging Block (AVE) is used when calculate the average value of input data.

Averaging Block (AVE)

▼ Connection
The Averaging Block (AVE) is a function block that obtains the average value of input data.
Here is a function block diagram of the Averaging Block (AVE).

Figure 1.7-1 Function Block Diagram of Averaging Block (AVE)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Averaging Block (AVE).
Table 1.7-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Averaging Block (AVE)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
First
Q01 calculation x Δ x x
input
Second
Q02 calculation x Δ x x
input
Third
Q03 calculation x Δ x x
input
Fourth
Q04 calculation x Δ x x
input
Fifth
Q05 calculation x Δ x x
input
Sixth
Q06 calculation x Δ x x
input

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.7 Averaging Block (AVE) Page 2 of 5

Seventh
Q07 calculation x Δ x x
input
Eighth
Q08 calculation x Δ x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block
(ADL).

Function of Average Block (AVE)

The AVE block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The processing timings available for the AVE block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup. Selections
available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-
speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
ALSO for the AVE block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Input Processing of Average Block (AVE) When a Calculation Input

Value Error is Detected
The AVE block performs special input processing when an abnormal calculation input value is detected.

Calculation Processing of Average Block (AVE)

The AVE block returns the average value of input data using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Input Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection

▼ Calculated Input Value Error Detected
In the Average block (AVE), the detection of calculated input value error is executed for every input terminal. For
each input terminal, when the data status of the connection destination is invalid (BAD), that of corresponding
calculated input value (RVn) becomes invalid (BAD), and the previous calculated input value is held.
The data status of the calculated output value (CPV) becomes invalid (BAD) or questionable (QST) at calculated
input value error detection.
The settings of the detection conditions for calculated input value error detection in the Average block (AVE) and
the data status of the calculated output value (CPV) at calculated input value error detection are executed
with “Calculated input value error detected” on the Function Block Detail Builder.
The method to transfer the data status (IOP, IOP-, OOp, NRDY) of the process I/O relations, which is generated

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.7 Averaging Block (AVE) Page 3 of 5

with the calculated input value (RVn) in connection with the above settings, to the calculated output value (CPV)
is specified.
The table below lists the ranges of the calculated input value error detection. The default value is “1.”
Table 1.7-2 Processing at Calculated Input Value Error Detection in the Average Block (AVE)

Calculated input value error Error detection conditions (Data CPV data Data status transmission
detection specification status of the calculated input value) status origin input value
0 - NR (*1)
RV1 to RVn (n is an average number)
NR (*1)
are all NR (*1). No transmission
At least one of RV1 to RVn (n is an
1 QST
average number) is BAD.
RV1 to RVn (n is an average number)
BAD RV1 to RVn (*2)
are all BAD.
RV1 to RVn (n is an average number)
NR (*1) No transmission
are all NR (*1).
2
At least one of RV1 to RVn (n is an
BAD RV1 to RVn (*2)
average number) is BAD.
*1: NR in the table indicates the state in which the data status is neither BAD nor QST.
*2: The priority of input values is in the order of RV1 to RVn. IOP and IOP- precede in the transfer status. IOP is
transferred when NRDY is generated in the input values of higher priority and IOP is generated in the input values of
lower priority.

When the calculated input value error which causes the invalid (BAD) data status of calculated output value
(CPV) occurs, the calculation processing is halted, and the previous calculated output value (CPV) is held.
When the calculated input value error which causes the questionable (QST) data status of calculated output
value (CPV) occurs, the previous calculated input value is held due to the current calculated input value error.
The calculation processing is continued using the previous value (RV) held and the calculated output value (CPV)
is updated.

Input Processing for Data Status QST: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2

For a calculation block input, if its data status is QST, the QST status can be passed to the calculated output
value. For passing the QST status, check the option of [Pass calculation block's input QST status to CPV] on
[Constant 3] tab of FCS properties sheet.
When the option is checked or unchecked, the behaviors of CPV data status vary as follows:
Table 1.7-3 Relationship of AVE Block's Data Status of Input (RVn) and Data Status of CPV

Error detection conditions CPV data status(*1)

Calculated input value error detection
(Data status of the calculated input QST is QST is not
specification
value)(*1)(*2) passed passed
0 - - -
RV1 to RVn (n is an average number) are
NR NR
all NR
RV1 to RVn (n is an average number) are
BAD BAD
all BAD
At least one of RV1 to RVn (n is an average
1 QST QST
number) is BAD
RV1 to RVn (n is an average number) are
QST NR
all QST
At least one of RV1 to RVn (n is an average
NR NR
number) is QST
RV1 to RVn (n is an average number) are
NR NR
all NR

2 At least one of RV1 to RVn (n is an average

BAD BAD
number) is BAD

At least one of RV1 to RVn (n is an average

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.7 Averaging Block (AVE) Page 4 of 5

number) is QST QST NR

*1: -:Ignore (don’t care)
*2: Conditions are tested starting from the top, and if a condition is met, the subsequent conditions are ignored.

TIP Notice that when this option is checked, the closing processing of trend data and the closing data of report,
the quality flag of OPC may be affected.

SEE For more information about the closing processing of trend data, refer to:
ALSO “ Closing Data Processing Based on Data Status” in 1.7.2, “Structure of the Closing Processed Data” in
Human Interface Stations Reference Vol.2 (IM 33J05A11-01EN)
For more information about the closing data of report, refer to:
“ Detailed Format Design – Closed-Topic Dialog Box Detail Definition Sheet” in 2.4.2, “Detailed Format
Design – Closing Data” in Optional Functions Reference (IM 33J05H10-01EN)
For more information about the quality flag of OPC, refer to:
“ Setting Quality Flag Tables” in “ HIS Setup Window” in 1.2, “Engineering Related to OPC” in Optional
Functions Reference (IM 33J05H10-01EN)

Calculation Algorithm
▼ Number of Averaged, Sampling Candidate Specification
The Averaging Block (AVE) performs the following calculation processing for obtaining the average value of input
data.

“Number of averaged” and “sampling candidate specification” is set using the Function Block Detail Builder.
• Number of Averaged (N)
Any integer between 1 and 8. The default is 1. Set the number of data to be averaged.
• Sampling Candidate Specification
Select from “Regardless of data status,” “other than BAD” or “other than BAD or QST.”
If the data status of the calculated input value (RVn) changes to the status indicating the data is not good, this
data can be excluded from the averaging calculation. The conditions to include or exclude the data for the
averaging calculation can be defined on the builder under the following conditions.
• Regardless of data status
All input data (RVn) regardless of data status
• Other than BAD
All input data (RVn) except for BAD data
• Other than BAD and QST
All input data (RVn) except for BAD and QST data
The calculation block’s behavior is restricted by the input error detection function. When the calculation input
error detection is specified to “2,” only “Regardless of data status” is valid as averaging calculation condition. Or
else, any input detected BAD makes the calculated output value (CPV) become BAD (invalid) and the averaging
calculation stops.
While, when the condition is specified as “other than BAD” or “other than BAD or QST,” the above described
phenomena occur, i.e. the BAD input data stops the averaging calculation.

Set Parameter
The parameters of the Averaging Block(AVE) are shown as follows.
Gain (GAIN): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.7 Averaging Block (AVE) Page 5 of 5

The default is 1.00

Data Items – AVE

Table 1.7-4 Data Items of Averaging Block (AVE)

Entry Permitted or Not

Data Item Data Name Range Default
(*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
Calculated input value
RV1 to RV8 ----- 0
1to 8
RAW1 to Value in the unit at the connection
Raw input data 1to 8 -----
RAW8 destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for AVE block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.8 Square Root Block (SQRT) Page 1 of 3

1.8 Square Root Block (SQRT)

The Square Root Block (SQRT) is used when obtaining the square root of input data.

Square Root Block (SQRT)

▼ Connection
The Square Root Block (SQRT) is a function block that obtains the square root of input data.
Here is a function block diagram of the Square Root Block (SQRT).

Figure 1.8-1 Function Block Diagram of Square Root Block (SQRT)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Square Root Block (SQRT).
Table 1.8-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Square Root Block
(SQRT)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x x x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Square Root Block (SQRT)

The SQRT block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the SQRT block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the SQRT block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.8 Square Root Block (SQRT) Page 2 of 3

For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:

5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Square Root Block (SQRT)

The SQRT block calculates the square root of input data using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Output Processing Specific to Square Root Block (SQRT)

In the output processing of the SQRT block, it is possible to perform “CPV pushback.”

Calculation Algorithm
The Square Root Block (SQRT) executes the following calculation processing to obtain the square root of
input data.

Set Parameter
The parameters of the Square Root Block (SQRT) are shown as follows.
Gain (GAIN): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00

CPV Pushback
The CPV pushback is a function used to prevent a sudden change in an output value to the process control
output when the status of a cascade connection is changed from open to close.
If the SQRT block is connected by means of cascade connection and the cascade connection is opened, the
calculation input value (RV) is calculated back based on a calculation output value (CPV) obtained from a
downstream function block via tracking, thereby making the upstream function block track the value.
The CPV pushback operates only when the output value tracking is set to [Yes].
The following calculation formula is used in the CPV pushback of the SQRT block.

If GAIN is 0, the CPV pushback calculation is bypassed and the calculation input value (RV) retains the
previous value.

SEE For more information about the CPV pushback, refer to:
ALSO 4.11, “CPV Pushback” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Data Items – SQRT

Table 1.8-2 Data Items of Square Root Block (SQRT)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.8 Square Root Block (SQRT) Page 3 of 3

ALRM Alarm status ----- NR

AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for SQRT block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.9 Exponential Block (EXP) Page 1 of 3

1.9 Exponential Block (EXP)

The Exponential Block (EXP) is used when obtaining the result of exponential value of the base of natural
logarithms with the input data.

Exponential Block (EXP)

▼ Connection
The Exponential Block (EXP) is a function block that obtains the result of exponential value of the base of
natural logarithms with the input data.
Here is a function block diagram of the Exponential Block (EXP).

Figure 1.9-1 Function Block Diagram of Exponential Block (EXP)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Exponential Block (EXP).
Table 1.9-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Exponential Block
(EXP)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x x x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Exponential Block (EXP)

The EXP block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the EXP block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan
period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1),
and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the EXP block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.9 Exponential Block (EXP) Page 2 of 3

For more information about the output processing, refer to:

4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Exponential Block (EXP)

The EXP block calculates the value where the base of the natural logarithm is raised to a power given by the
input data using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Output Processing Specific to Exponential Block (EXP)

In the output processing of the EXP block, it is possible to perform “CPV pushback.”

Calculation Algorithm
The Exponential Block (EXP) executes the following calculation processing to the input data.
RV
CPV=GAIN • e
e: Base of a natural logarithm

Set Parameter
The parameters of the Exponential Block (EXP) are shown as follows.
Gain (GAIN): A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00.

CPV Pushback
The CPV pushback is a function used to prevent a sudden change in an output value to the process control
output when the status of a cascade connection is changed from open to close.
If the EXP block is connected by means of cascade connection and the cascade connection is opened, the
calculation input value (RV) is calculated back based on a calculation output value (CPV) obtained from a
downstream function block via tracking, thereby making the upstream function block track the value.
The CPV pushback operates only when the output value tracking is set to [Yes].
The following calculation formula is used in the CPV pushback of the EXP block.

If (CPV/GAIN) ≤ 0, the calculation input value (RV) retains the previous value.

SEE For more information about the CPV pushback, refer to:
ALSO 4.11, “CPV Pushback” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Data Items – EXP

Table 1.9-2 Data Items of Exponential Block (EXP)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)

O/S

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.9 Exponential Block (EXP) Page 3 of 3

MODE Block mode x ----- (AUT)

ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for EXP block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.10 First-Order Lag Block (LAG) Page 1 of 4

1.10 First-Order Lag Block (LAG)

The First-Order Lag Block (LAG) is used when performing filtering processing to the input signals or
simulating process characteristics.

First-Order Lag Block (LAG)

▼ Connection
The First-Order Lag Block (LAG) is a function block that outputs the first-order lag of input signals.
The First-Order Lag Block (LAG) enables filtering processing of input signals as well as simulation of process
characteristics.
Here is a function block diagram of the First-Order Lag Block (LAG).

Figure 1.10-1 Function Block Diagram of First-Order Lag Block (LAG)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the First-
Order Lag Block (LAG).
Table 1.10-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of First-Order Lag
Block (LAG)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x x x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of First-Order Lag Block (LAG)

The LAG block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the LAG block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan
period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1),
and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the LAG block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.10 First-Order Lag Block (LAG) Page 2 of 4

3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of First-Order Lag Block (LAG)

The LAG block performs a first-order lag calculation using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Output Processing Specific to First-Order Lag Block (LAG)

In the output processing of the LAG block, it is possible to perform “CPV pushback.”

Calculation Algorithm
The First-Order Lag Block (LAG) executes the following calculation processing to the input data.

Ti : First-order lag time (Ti = I - Scan period)

I : First-order lag time setpoint
s : Laplace transform operator
When the block mode is switched from O/S (out of service) to AUT (automatic), or when the data status of
the calculated output value (CPV) has returned to normal from CAL (calibration) or BAD (invalid), first-order
lag calculation is initialized with the calculated input value (RV).

Set Parameters
The parameters of the First-Order Lag Block (LAG) are shown as follows.
• Gain (GAIN)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00.
• First-order lag time setpoint (I)
A numeric value between 0.1 and 1000.0. Unit: sec.
The default is 1.
If a time shorter than the scan period is set as the first-order lag time (I), calculation processing is
performed assuming that the first-order lag time setpoint (I) is the same as the scan period.

Action Example
The following figure shows an example of step response action of the First-Order Lag Block (LAG).

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.10 First-Order Lag Block (LAG) Page 3 of 4

Figure 1.10-2 Example of the Step Response Action of First-Order Lag Block (LAG)

CPV Pushback
The CPV pushback is a function used to prevent a sudden change in an output value to the process control
output when the status of a cascade connection is changed from open to close.
If the LAG block is connected by means of cascade connection and the cascade connection is opened, the
calculation input value (RV) is calculated back based on a calculation output value (CPV) obtained from a
downstream function block via tracking, thereby making the upstream function block track the value.
The CPV pushback operates only when the output value tracking is set to [Yes].
The following calculation formula is used in the CPV pushback of the LAG block.

If GAIN is 0, the CPV pushback calculation is bypassed and the calculation input value (RV) retains the
previous value.

SEE For more information about the CPV pushback, refer to:
ALSO 4.11, “CPV Pushback” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Data Items – LAG

Table 1.10-2 Data Items of First-Order Lag Block (LAG)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.10 First-Order Lag Block (LAG) Page 4 of 4

7 - digit real number including sign and

GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
I First - order lag time x 0.1 to 10,000.0 seconds 1
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for LAG block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.11 Integration Block (INTEG) Page 1 of 4

1.11 Integration Block (INTEG)

The Integration Block (INTEG) is used when obtaining the integral value of input data.

Integration Block (INTEG)

▼ Connection
The Integration Block (INTEG) is a function block that integrates input data.
Here is a function block diagram of the Integration Block (INTEG).

Figure 1.11-1 Function Block Diagram of Integration Block (INTEG)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Integration Block (INTEG).
Table 1.11-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Integration Block
(INTEG)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x x x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Integration Block (INTEG)

The INTEG block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the INTEG block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the INTEG block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.11 Integration Block (INTEG) Page 2 of 4

4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Integration Block (INTEG)

The INTEG block calculates the integrated value of input data using its calculation algorithm and setup
parameters.

Output Processing Specific to Integration Block (INTEG)

In the output processing of the INTEG block, it is possible to perform “CPV pushback.”

Calculation Algorithm
The Integration Block (INTEG) executes the following calculation processing for integrating input data.

Ti : Integral time (Ti = I)

s : Laplace transform operator
The Integration Block (INTEG) starts calculation actions in accordance with the values of the manipulation
switch (SW).
If the integral value overflows, the previous maximum value used as the calculation result. When the integral
value overflows, BAD (invalid) is set as the data status of the calculated output value (CPV).
The status of calculation action is indicated by the block status.
The following figure shows the manipulation switch values and the corresponding calculation actions as well
as block status transitions.
• When Manipulation switch (SW) is 0
Starts to initialize calculation block status, then the manipulation switch (SW) changes to 1 when
initialization is completed.
Block status is RUN.
• When Manipulation switch (SW) is 1
Starts the integration calculation. The calculated output value (CPV) is updated by each scan period.
Block status is RUN.
• When Manipulation switch (SW) is 2
Holds the current calculated output value (CPV), the calculation stops.
Block status is STOP.

Set Parameters
The parameters of the Integration Block (INTEG) are shown as follows.
• Gain (GAIN)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00.
• Integral time setpoint (I)
A numeric number between 0.1 and 10000.0. Unit: sec.

Action Example

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.11 Integration Block (INTEG) Page 3 of 4

The following figure shows an action example of the Integration Block (INTEG).

Figure 1.11-2 Action Example of Integration Block (INTEG)

CPV Pushback
The CPV pushback is a function used to prevent a sudden change in an output value to the process control
output when the status of a cascade connection is changed from open to close.
If the INTEG block is connected by means of cascade connection and the cascade connection is opened, the
calculation input value (RV) is calculated back based on a calculation output value (CPV) obtained from a
downstream function block via tracking, thereby making the upstream function block track the value.
The CPV pushback operates only when the output value tracking is set to [Yes].
The following calculation formula is used in the CPV pushback of the INTEG block.

If GAIN is 0, the CPV pushback calculation is bypassed and the calculation input value (RV) retains the
previous value.

SEE For more information about the CPV pushback, refer to:
ALSO 4.11, “CPV Pushback” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Data Items – INTEG

Table 1.11-2 Data Items of Integration Block (INTEG)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.11 Integration Block (INTEG) Page 4 of 4

Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
BSTS Block status ----- RUN
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
SW Manipulation switch x 0, 1, 2 -----
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
I Integral time x 0.1 to 10,000.0 seconds 1
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for INTEG block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

Block Status of Integration Block (INTEG)

Table 1.11-3 Block Status of Integration Block (INTEG)

Block Status
Level Description
Symbol Name
RUN Integration Starts Initialization or integration starts.
1
STOP Integration Stops Integration stopped, the output is held.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.12 Derivative Block (LD) Page 1 of 4

1.12 Derivative Block (LD)

The Derivative Block (LD) is used when obtaining the derivative value of input data.

Derivative Block (LD)

▼ Connection
The Derivative Block (LD) is a function block that differentiates input data.
Here is a function block diagram of the Derivative Block (LD).

Figure 1.12-1 Function Block Diagram of Derivative Block (LD)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Derivative Block (LD).
Table 1.12-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Derivative Block
(LD)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x x x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Derivative Block (LD)

The LD block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the LD block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the scan
period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1),
and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the LD block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.12 Derivative Block (LD) Page 2 of 4

For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:

5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Derivative Block (LD)

The LD block calculates the derivative value of input data using its calculation algorithm and setup
parameters.

Output Processing Specific to Derivative Block (LD)

In the output processing of the LD block, it is possible to perform “CPV pushback.”

Calculation Algorithm
The Derivative Block (LD) executes the following calculation processing to differentiate input data.

Td : Derivative time (Td = D)

s : Laplace transform operator
When the block mode is switched from O/S (out of service) to AUT (automatic), or when the data status of
the calculated input value (CPV) returns to normal from CAL (calibration) or BAD (invalid), derivation
calculation is initialized with the calculated input value (RV).

Set Parameters
The parameters of the Derivative Block (LD) are shown as follows.
• Gain (GAIN)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00.
• Derivative time setpoint (D)
A numeric value between 0.1 and 1000.0. Unit: sec.
If a time shorter than the scan period is set as the derivative time setpoint (D), calculation processing is
performed assuming that the derivative time setpoint (D) is same as the scan period.

Action Example
The following figure shows an action example of the Derivative Block (LD).

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.12 Derivative Block (LD) Page 3 of 4

Figure 1.12-2 Step Response of Derivative Block (LD)

CPV Pushback
The CPV pushback is a function used to prevent a sudden change in an output value to the process control
output when the status of a cascade connection is changed from open to close.
If the LD block is connected by means of cascade connection and the cascade connection is opened, the
calculation input value (RV) is calculated back based on a calculation output value (CPV) obtained from a
downstream function block via tracking, thereby making the upstream function block track the value.
The CPV pushback operates only when the output value tracking is set to [Yes].
The following calculation formula is used in the CPV pushback of the LD block.

If GAIN is 0, the CPV pushback calculation is bypassed and the calculation input value (RV) retains the
previous value.

SEE For more information about the CPV pushback, refer to:
ALSO 4.11, “CPV Pushback” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Data Items – LD
Table 1.12-2 Data Items of Derivative Block (LD)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
D Derivative time x 0.0 to 10,000.0 seconds 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.12 Derivative Block (LD) Page 4 of 4

SEE For more information about valid block modes for LD block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.13 Ramp Block (RAMP) Page 1 of 3

1.13 Ramp Block (RAMP)

The Ramp Block (RAMP) is used to generate an output data to follow the step changes of the input data with
the ramp characteristic (constant velocity).

Ramp Block (RAMP)

▼ Connection
The Ramp Block (RAMP) is a function block that generates an output data to follow the step changes of the
input data with the ramp characteristic (constant velocity).
Here is a function block diagram of the Ramp Block (RAMP).

Figure 1.13-1 Function Block Diagram of Ramp Block (RAMP)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Ramp Block (RAMP).
Table 1.13-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Ramp Block (RAMP)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x Δ x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Ramp Block (RAMP)

The RAMP block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the RAMP block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the RAMP block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.13 Ramp Block (RAMP) Page 2 of 3

4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Ramp Block (RAMP)

The RAMP block performs computation using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
The Ramp Block (RAMP) executes the calculation processing that generates an output data to follow the step
changes of the input data with the ramp characteristic (constant velocity).
The calculated output value (CPV) is the Ramp characteristic output signal multiplied by the gain (GAIN).
CPV = GAIN • (Ramp characteristic)
The ramp characteristic is shown below.

Figure 1.13-2 Ramp Characteristic

The rate of the output data change is determined by the value of the step (STEP) parameter, scan period
and span of the calculated output value (CPV).

Set Parameters
The parameters of the Ramp Block (RAMP) are shown as follows.
• Gain (GAIN)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00.
• Step (STEP)
A numeric number between 0.1 and 10000.0.
The step (STEP) defines in how many scans that the calculated output value (CPV) follows up the full-span
of the input change, in one second scan period. When the scan period is not one second, the number of
scans needed for the full-span input change can be calculated by dividing the step (STEP) by the scan period
(second).

Data Items – RAMP

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.13 Ramp Block (RAMP) Page 3 of 3

Table 1.13-2 Data Items of Ramp Block (RAMP)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specificaton
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
STEP Step x 0.1 to 10,000.0 seconds 1
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for RAMP block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.14 Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) Page 1 of 4

1.14 Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG)

The Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) is used for dynamic compensation in feedforward control.

Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG)

▼ Connection
The Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) is a function block that performs dynamic compensation in feedforward control.
Normally, this block is used in combination with the controller block or Feedforward Signal Summing Block
(FFSUM).
Here is a function block diagram of the Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG).

Figure 1.14-1 Function Block Diagram of Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG).
Table 1.14-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of I/O Terminals of Lead/Lag Block
(LDLAG)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x x x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG)

The LDLAG block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the LDLAG block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the LDLAG block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.14 Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) Page 2 of 4

3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG)

The LDLAG block performs computation using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Output Processing Specific to Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG)

In the output processing of the LDLAG block, it is possible to perform “CPV pushback.”

Calculation Algorithm
The Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) executes the following calculation processing to perform dynamic compensation
of the lead/lag element.

Td : Lead time (Td = D)

Ti : Lag time (Ti = I - Scan period)
s : Laplace transform operator

Set Parameters
The parameters of the Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) are shown as follows.
• Gain (GAIN)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00.
• Lead time setpoint (D)
A numeric value between 0.0 and 10000.0. Unit: sec.
• Lag time setpoint (I)
A numeric value between 0.0 and 10000.0. Unit: sec.
If a time shorter than the scan period is set as the lag time setpoint (I), calculation processing is performed
assuming that the lag time (I) is same as the scan period.

Action Example
The following figure shows the action of the Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG).

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.14 Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) Page 3 of 4

Figure 1.14-2 Action of Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG)

CPV Pushback
The CPV pushback is a function used to prevent a sudden change in an output value to the process control
output when the status of a cascade connection is changed from open to close.
If the LDLAG block is connected by means of cascade connection and the cascade connection is opened, the
calculation input value (RV) is calculated back based on a calculation output value (CPV) obtained from a
downstream function block via tracking, thereby making the upstream function block track the value.
The CPV pushback operates only when the output value tracking is set to [Yes].
The following calculation formula is used in the CPV pushback of the LDLAG block.

If GAIN is 0, the CPV pushback calculation is bypassed and the calculation input value (RV) retains the
previous value.

SEE For more information about the CPV pushback, refer to:
ALSO 4.11, “CPV Pushback” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Data Items – LDLAG

Table 1.14-2 Data Items of Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.14 Lead/Lag Block (LDLAG) Page 4 of 4

7 - digit real number including sign and

GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
D Lead time x 0.0 to 10,000.0 seconds 0
I Lag time x 0.1 to 10,000.0 seconds 1
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for LDLAG block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.15 Dead-Time Block (DLAY) Page 1 of 4

1.15 Dead-Time Block (DLAY)

The Dead-Time Block (DLAY) is used when simulating the dynamic process characteristics.

Dead-Time Block (DLAY)

▼ Connection
The Dead-Time Block (DLAY) is a function block that simulates the dynamic process characteristics using
dead time and first-order lag.
Here is a function block diagram of the Dead-Time Block (DLAY).

Figure 1.15-1 Function Block Diagram of Dead Block (DLAY)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Dead-
Time Block (DLAY).
Table 1.15-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Dead-Time Block
(DLAY)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
IN Main input x x x x
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Dead-Time Block (DLAY)

The DLAY block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the DLAY block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the DLAY block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.15 Dead-Time Block (DLAY) Page 2 of 4

For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:

5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Dead-Time Block (DLAY)

The DLAY block performs computation using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Output Processing Specific to Dead-Time Block (DLAY)

In the output processing of the DLAY block, it is possible to perform “CPV pushback.”

Calculation Algorithm
▼ Number of Sample Points
The Dead-Time Block (DLAY) realizes the dead time characteristic through sampling. For this reason, the
following calculation processing that uses dead time and first-order lag is performed to simulate the dynamic
process characteristics.

L : Dead time L = Sampling interval (SMPL) • (m - 1)

m : Number of sample points
Ti : First-order lag time (Ti = I - Scan period)
I = First-order lag time setpoint
e : Base number of natural logarithm
s : Laplace transform operator
In order to smoothen the calculated output value (CPV), the Dead-Time Block (DLAY) performs
complementary calculation to values between sampled values when obtaining the calculated output value
(CPV).
Initialization of all sampled data (dead time buffer) is done by the reset switch (RST). When the reset switch
(RST) is set to “1,” the dead time buffer is initialized with the calculated input value (RV). When the
initialization is complete, the reset switch (RST) returns to “0” (normal state). When the data status of the
calculated output value (CPV) returns to normal from IOP+ (input open high) or CAL (calibration), the reset
switch (RST) changes to “1” automatically and the dead time buffer is initialized.
The number of sample points is set on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Number of Sample Points: A numeric value between 1 and 60

Set Parameters
The parameters of the Dead-Time Block (DLAY) are shown as follows.
• Gain (GAIN)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
• Sampling interval (SMPL)
A numeric value between 0.1 and 10000.0. Unit: sec.
Set a value which is a multiple of the scan period.
• First-order lag time setpoint (I)
A numeric value between 0.1 and 10000.0. Unit: sec.
If a time shorter than the scan period is set as the first-order lag time (I), calculation processing is
performed assuming that the first-order lag time setpoint (I) is the same as the scan period.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.15 Dead-Time Block (DLAY) Page 3 of 4

Action Example
The following figure shows an action example of the Dead-Time Block (DLAY).

Figure 1.15-2 Action Example of Dead Time Block (DLAY)

CPV Pushback
The CPV pushback is a function used to prevent a sudden change in an output value to the process control
output when the status of a cascade connection is changed from open to close.
If the DLAY block is connected by means of cascade connection and the cascade connection is opened, the
calculation input value (RV) is calculated back based on a calculation output value (CPV) obtained from a
downstream function block via tracking, thereby making the upstream function block track the value.
The CPV pushback operates only when the output value tracking is set to [Yes].
The following calculation formula is used in the CPV pushback of the DLAY block.

If GAIN is 0, the CPV pushback calculation is bypassed and the calculation input value (RV) retains the
previous value.

SEE For more information about the CPV pushback, refer to:
ALSO 4.11, “CPV Pushback” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Data Items – DLAY

Table 1.15-2 Data Items of Dead-Time Block (DLAY)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.15 Dead-Time Block (DLAY) Page 4 of 4

RV Calculated input value ----- 0

Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
RST Reset switch x 0, 1 0
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
SMPL Sampling interval x 0.1 to 10,000.0 seconds 1
I First - order lag time x 0.1 to 10,000.0 seconds 1
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for DLAY block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.16 Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C) Page 1 of 4

1.16 Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C)

The Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C) is used for dead time compensation control.

Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C)

▼ Connection
The Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C) is a function block that is used in combination with the
controller block when performing dead time compensation control.
Here is a function block diagram of the Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C).

Figure 1.16-1 Function Block Diagram of Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C)

The following figure shows an example of dead time compensation control using the Dead-Time
Compensation Block (DLAY-C).

Figure 1.16-2 Example of Dead Time Compensation Control Using Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-
C)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Dead-
Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C).
Table 1.16-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Dead Time
Compensation Block (DLAY-C)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x x x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.16 Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C) Page 2 of 4

Function of Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C)

The DLAY-C block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the DLAY-C block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the DLAY-C block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C)

The DLAY-C block performs computation using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
▼ Number of Sample Points
The Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C) performs the following calculation processing. The dead time
characteristic is realized through sampling.

L : Dead time L = Sampling interval (SMPL) • (m - 1)

m : Number of sample points
Ti : First-order lag time (Ti = I - Scan period)
I = First-order lag time setpoint
e : Base number of natural logarithm
s : Laplace transform operator
In order to smoothen the calculated output value (CPV), the Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C)
performs complementary calculation to the values between the sampled values.
Initialization of all sampled data (dead time buffer) is done by the reset switch (RST). When the reset switch
(RST) is turned to “1,” the dead time buffer is initialized by the calculated input value (RV). When the
initialization is complete, the reset switch (RST) returns to “0” (normal state). When the data status of the
calculated output value (CPV) returns to normal from IOP+ (input open high) or CAL (calibration), the reset
switch (RST) changes to “1” automatically and the dead time buffer is initialized.
The number of sample points is set on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Number of Sample Points: A numeric value between 1 and 60

Set Parameters
The parameters of the Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C) are shown as follows.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.16 Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C) Page 3 of 4

• Gain (GAIN)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
• Sampling interval (SMPL)
A numeric value between 0.1 and 10000.0. Unit: sec.
Set a multiple of the scan period as the value.
• First-order lag time setpoint (I)
A numeric value between 0.1 and 10000.0. Unit: sec.
If a time shorter than the scan period is set as the first-order lag time (I), calculation processing is
performed assuming that the first-order lag time setpoint (I) is the same as the scan period.

Action Example
The following figure shows an action example of the Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C).

Figure 1.16-3 Action Example of Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C)

Data Items – DLAY-C

Table 1.16-2 Data Items of Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C)

Data Entry Permitted or

Data Name Range Default
Item Not(*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specificaton
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value △ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.16 Dead-Time Compensation Block (DLAY-C) Page 4 of 4

RST Reset switch x 0, 1 0

7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
SMPL Sampling interval x 0.1 to 10,000.0 seconds 1
I First - order lag time x 0.1 to 10,000.0 seconds 1
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
Value in the same engineering unit as
SH CPV scale high limit -----
CPV
Value in the same engineering unit as
SL CPV scale low limit -----
CPV
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for DLAY-C block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.17 Moving-Average Block (AVE-M) Page 1 of 4

1.17 Moving-Average Block (AVE-M)

The Moving-Average Block (AVE-M) is used when obtaining the moving average of the input signals that
have been received between the present and a certain time in the past.

Moving-Average Block (AVE-M)

▼ Connection
The Moving-Average Block (AVE-M) is a function block that obtains the moving average of the input signals
that have been received between the present and a certain time in the past.
Here is a function block diagram of the Moving-Average Block (AVE-M).

Figure 1.17-1 Function Block Diagram of Moving-Average Block (AVE-M)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Moving-Average Block (AVE-M).
Table 1.17-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Moving-Average
Block (AVE-M)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x Δ x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Moving Average Block (AVE-M)

The AVE-M block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the AVE-M block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the AVE-M block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.17 Moving-Average Block (AVE-M) Page 2 of 4

3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Moving Average Block (AVE-M)

The AVE-M block calculates the moving average of an input signal using its calculation algorithm and setup
parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
The Moving-Average Block (AVE-M) performs the following calculation processing to obtain the moving
average of input data.

The Moving-Average Block (AVE-M) calculates the average value of past data that have been sampled at a
specified interval. The target input signals of this calculation are the specified number of latest sampled data.
The following shows an action example of the Moving-Average Block (AVE-M) when the specified number of
samples is “6.”

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.17 Moving-Average Block (AVE-M) Page 3 of 4

Figure 1.17-2 Action of Moving-Average Block (AVE-M)

Initialization of the moving average is done by the reset switch (RST). When the reset switch (RST) is turned
to “1,” the buffer is initialized with the calculated input value (RV). When the initialization is complete, the
reset switch (RST) returns to “0” (normal state). When the data status of the calculated output value (CPV)
returns to normal from IOP+ (input open high) or CAL (calibration), the reset switch (RST) changes to “1”
automatically and the moving average is initialized.
The earliest sampled data is stored in the earliest calculation input value (PREV) and is available for
reference.

Set Parameters
The parameters of the Moving-Average Block (AVE-M) are shown as follows.
• Gain (GAIN)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
• Number of Sample Point (NUM)
A numeric value between 1 and 60.
• Sampling interval (SMPL)
A numeric value between 0.1 and 10000.0. Unit: sec.
For the sampling interval (SMPL), set a multiple of the scan period. If any other value is set, sampling is
performed at an interval rounded up to the next larger multiple of the scan period.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.17 Moving-Average Block (AVE-M) Page 4 of 4

How the sampling interval (SMPL) value is rounded up is shown as follows:

Scan period = 1 second SMPL = 0.5 → Action occurs assuming SMPL = 1
Scan period = 1 second SMPL = 1.1 → Action occurs assuming SMPL = 2
Scan period = 1 second SMPL = 2 → Action at SMPL = 2
Scan period = 0.1 second SMPL = 0.5 → Action at SMPL = 0.5

Data Items – AVE-M

Table 1.17-2 Data Items of Moving-Average Block (AVE-M)

Data Entry Permitted or

Data Name Range Default
Item Not(*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
RST Reset switch x 0, 1 0
Earliest calculation input
PREV Value in the same engineering unit as CPV 0
value
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
SMPL Sampling interval x 0.1 to 10,000.0 seconds 1
NUM Number of samples x 0 to 60 1
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for AVE-M block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.18 Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C) Page 1 of 4

1.18 Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C)

The Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C) is used when obtaining the average value (integrated average value)
of the input data received after a specified point in time.

Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C)

▼ Connection
The Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C) is a function block that calculates the average value (integrated
average value) of the input data received after a specified point in time.
Here is a function block diagram of the Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C).

Figure 1.18-1 Function Block Diagram of Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C).
Table 1.18-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Cumulative-Average
Block (AVE-C)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x Δ x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Cumulative Average Block (AVE-C)

The AVE-C block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the AVE-C block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the AVE-C block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.18 Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C) Page 2 of 4

For more information about the input processing, refer to:

3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Cumulative Average Block (AVE-C)

The AVE-C block calculates the cumulative average (integral average value) of input data using its
calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
The Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C) performs the processing that calculates the average value
(integrated average value) of input data.
The Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C) starts calculation actions in accordance with the values of the
manipulation switch (SW). When the manipulation switch is turned to “0,” the current calculated output
value (CPV) is saved as the previous average value (PREV), then average calculation is started again. This is
called initialization of integration calculation.
After that point, the integrated average value of input data for each scan period to the current time
cumulates until the manipulation switch (SW) turns to “0” again.
The calculated output value(CPV) is the cumulated integrated average value multiplied by gain (GAIN).
CPV=GAIN • Cumulated Integrated average value
The status of calculation action is indicated by the block status.
The following figure shows the manipulation switch values (SW), corresponding actions and block status
transitions.
• When Manipulation switch (SW) is 0
Starts to initialize calculation block status, then the manipulation switch (SW) changes to 1 when
initialization is completed.
Block status is RUN.
• When Manipulation switch (SW) is 1
Starts the average calculation. The calculated output value (CPV) is updated by each scan period.
Block status is RUN.
• When Manipulation switch (SW) is 2
Holds the current calculated output value (CPV), the calculation stops.
Block status is STOP.
Start and end of integrated average calculation are set by the manipulation switch (SW). The manipulation
switch can be operated from operation and monitoring functions or other function blocks.
Even when the block mode or alarm status has changed, the Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C) will not
initialize the average value calculation automatically.
There is an integration number counter inside the Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C). When the
manipulation switch (SW) is set to “1,” the value of this counter increases by one for each scan period.
When the counter value becomes 2,147,483,647, calculation will stops and set the manipulation switch (SW)
to “0,” then the calculation restarts.

Set Parameters
The parameters of the Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C) are shown as follows.
• Manipulation switch

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.18 Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C) Page 3 of 4

Specify a numeric value from 0, 1 and 2.

• Gain (GAIN)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00.

Action Example
The following figure shows an action example of the Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C).

Figure 1.18-2 Action Example of Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C)

Data Items – AVE-C

Table 1.18-2 Data Items of Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
BSTS Block status ----- RUN
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
SW Manipulation switch x 0, 1, 2 0
PREV Previous average value Value in the same engineering unit as CPV SL
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.18 Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C) Page 4 of 4

OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0

UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for AVE-C block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

Block Status of Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C)

Table 1.18-3 Block Status of Block Status of Cumulative-Average Block (AVE-C)

Block Status
Level Description
Symbol Name
RUN Averaging Starts Initialization or averaging starts.
1
STOP Averaging Stops Averaging stopped, the output is held.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.19 Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR) Page 1 of 4

1.19 Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-

VAR)
The Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR) converts the input signal into a function by using
arbitrary unequal line segments.
The line segment characteristics can be changed from the Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR)
on operation and monitoring functions.

Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR)

▼ Connection
The Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR) is a function block that converts input signals in
accordance with an arbitrary line-segment function.
Here is a function block diagram of the Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR).

Figure 1.19-1 Function Block Diagram of Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR).
Table 1.19-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Variable Line-
Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x x x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-

VAR)
The FUNC-VAR block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the FUNC-VAR block is a periodic startup. Selections available for
the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan
period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.19 Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR) Page 2 of 4

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the FUNC-VAR block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Variable Line-Segment Function Block

(FUNC-VAR)
The FUNC-VAR block converts the value of an input signal using its calculation algorithm (line-segment
function) and setup parameters.

Output Processing Specific to Variable Line-Segment Function Block

(FUNC-VAR)
In the output processing of the FUNC-VAR block, it is possible to perform “CPV pushback.”

Calculation Algorithm
The Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR) performs the calculation processing that converts the
input signal corresponding to the X coordinate of the set line segment, to the Y coordinate value of the line
segment.
The calculated output value (CPV) is the converted value multiplied by the gain (GAIN).
CPV=GAIN • Variable line-segment function output

Set Parameters
The parameters of the Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR) are shown as follows.
• Number of segments (SECT)
A numeric value between 1 and 14.
• X_axis coordinate (input)
Set the engineering unit input signal after input signal conversion.
X01 to X15 (1 to Number of line-segment divisions + 1)
• Y_axis coordinate (output)
Set the engineering unit calculated output value (CPV).
Y01 to Y15 (1 to Number of line-segment divisions + 1)
Line-segment coordinates can be set from operation and monitoring functions or other function blocks.
Set the X_axis coordinate line-segment function in the continues increasing direction. When the setting does
not allow the X coordinate to increase strictly, the function assumes that the function is represented by the
solid line shown in the figure below.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.19 Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR) Page 3 of 4

Figure 1.19-2 Action When Line-Segment Function Setting Error Occurs

Action Example
The following figure shows an example of the variable line-segment function with six segments.

Figure 1.19-3 Example of a Variable Line-Segment Function with Six segments

CPV Pushback
The CPV pushback is a function used to prevent a sudden change in an output value to the process control
output when the status of a cascade connection is changed from open to close.
If the FUNC-VAR block is connected by means of cascade connection and the cascade connection is opened,
the calculation input value (RV) is calculated back based on a calculation output value (CPV) obtained from a
downstream function block via tracking, thereby making the upstream function block track the value.
The CPV pushback operates only when the output value tracking is set to [Yes].
In the CPV pushback of the FUNC-VAR block, the value RV is obtained by calculating the x-axis coordinate
while using the value obtained by dividing CPV by GAIN as the input on the y-axis.
If GAIN is 0, the CPV pushback calculation is bypassed and the calculation input value (RV) retains the
previous value.

SEE For more information about the CPV pushback, refer to:
ALSO 4.11, “CPV Pushback” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Data Items – FUNC-VAR

Table 1.19-2 Data Items of Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNK-VAR)

Data Entry Permitted or

Data Name Range Default
Item Not(*1)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.19 Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR) Page 4 of 4

O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
SECT Number of segments x 1 to 14 1
X01 to X-axis line-segment
x ----- -----
X15 breakpont
Y01 to Y-axis line-segment
x ----- -----
Y15 breakpont
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
Value in the same engineering unit as
SH CPV scale high limit -----
CPV
Value in the same engineering unit as
SL CPV scale low limit -----
CPV
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for FUNC-VAR block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.20 Temperature and Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL) Page 1 of 5

1.20 Temperature and Pressure Correction Block

(TPCFL)
The Temperature and Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL) are used to correct the flowrate measured by a
differential pressure flowmeter on the basis of temperature and pressure.

Temperature and Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL)

▼ Connection
The Temperature and Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL) are used to correct the flowrate, that measured by a
differential pressure flowmeter, of a gas relative to the ideal gas on the basis of temperature and pressure.
Here is a function block diagram of the Temperature and Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL).

Figure 1.20-1 Function Block Diagram of Temperature and Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Temperature and Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL).
Table 1.20-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Temperature and
Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL).

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Measured
IN x Δ x x
flowrate
Measured
Q01 x Δ x x
temperature
Measured
Q02 x Δ x x
pressure
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block
(ADL).

Function of Temperature and Pressure Correction Block

(TPCFL)
The TPCFL block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the TPCFL block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.20 Temperature and Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL) Page 2 of 5

scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
ALSO for the TPCFL block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Temperature and Pressure Correction Block

(TPCFL)
The TPCFL block performs computation using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
▼ Corrective Computation
The Temperature and Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL) correct the flowrate of a gas relative to an ideal gas
on the basis of temperature and pressure.
The following three types of correction computation algorithms are available:
• Temperature and pressure correction computations
• Temperature correction computation
• Pressure correction computation
Both the input and the output of the correction computation are floating-point data.
The calculated output value (CPV) is the corrected flowrate (F0) multiplied by the gain (GAIN).
CPV = GAIN • F0

Temperature and Pressure Computation

In a temperature and pressure computation, correction computations of both temperature and pressure are
performed. The following is a correction computation expression with the measured flowrate of Fi, reference
pressure of Pb, reference temperature of Tb, measured pressure of P, and when the pressure unit of the
measured temperature T is [kPa].

Fi : Measured flowrate
F0 : Corrected flowrate
P : Measured pressure [kPa]
Pb : Reference pressure [kPa]
T : Measured temperature (°C)
Tb : Reference temperature (°C)
With the pressure unit of kgf/cm2 and the temperature unit of °F, the expression is given below.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.20 Temperature and Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL) Page 3 of 5

Fi : Measured flowrate
2
P : Measured pressure [kgf/cm ]
T : Measured temperature (°F)
F0 : Corrected flowrate
2
Pb : Reference pressure [kgf/cm ]
Tb : Reference temperature (°F)

Temperature Correction Computation

In temperature correction computation, only a correction computation of temperature is performed with the
measured flowrate of Fi, reference temperature of Tb, and measured temperature of T. A correction
computation expression is shown below.

Fi : Measured flowrate
F0 : Corrected flowrate
T : Measured temperature (°C)
Tb : Reference temperature (°C)
The formula for corrective calculation at the temperature unit °F is given below.

Pressure Correction Computation

In pressure correction computation, only a correction computation of pressure is performed with the
measured flowrate of Fi, reference pressure of Pb, and measured pressure of P. The correction computation
expression is as follows when the pressure unit is [kPa].

Fi : Measured flowrate
F0 : Corrected flowrate
P : Measured pressure [kPa]
Pb : Reference pressure [kPa]
2
The expression for corrective calculation at the pressure unit kgf/cm is given below.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.20 Temperature and Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL) Page 4 of 5

Set Parameters
▼ Pressure Unit, Temperature Unit
The parameters of the Temperature and Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL) are shown as follows.
• Reference temperature (TB)
Depends on the temperature unit specified in the builder. Degree C or F.
• Reference pressure (PB)
Depends on the unit specified in the builder.
• Gain (GAIN)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00.
“Correction computation,” “temperature unit” and “pressure unit” are set in the Function Block Detail Builder.
• Corrective Computation
Select from “Temperature and Pressure Correction,” “Pressure Correction,” and “Temperature Correction.”
The default is “Temperature Correction.”
• Temperature Units
Only Deg. C may be selected from the list. If use Fahrenheit degree, F may be manually entered in the
entry box.
• Pressure Units
Select from “Pa,” “kPa,” and “MPa.”
The default is “kPa.”
2
If use kgf/cm , KGF/CM2 may be manually entered in the entry box.

TIP Only F can be manually entered in the temperature’s entry box, and only KGF/CM2 can be entered in the
pressure entry box. Entering other unit or strings may generated entry error.

Figure 1.20-2 Example of Manually Entry of F and KGF/CM2

Data Items – TPCFL

Table 1.20-2 Data Items of Temperature and Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Measured flowrate ----- 0

RAW Raw input data -----

Value in the unit at the connection

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.20 Temperature and Pressure Correction Block (TPCFL) Page 5 of 5

destination
TMP Measured temperature ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW1 Raw input data -----
destination
PRS Measured pressure ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW2 Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
TB Reference temperature x ----- 0
PB Reference pressure x ----- 0
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for TPCFL block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.21 ASTM Correction Block : Old JIS (ASTM1) Page 1 of 3

1.21 ASTM Correction Block : Old JIS (ASTM1)

The ASTM Correction Block: Old JIS (ASTM1) is used when performing correction computation based on the
ASTM correction (old JIS).

ASTM Correction Block : Old JIS (ASTM1)

▼ Connection
The ASTM Correction Block: Old JIS (ASTM1) performs correction computation on the flowrate of crude oil
and petroleum products based on the ASTM correction (Old JIS) based on the measured temperature and
specific gravity.
Here is a function block diagram of the ASTM Correction Block: Old JIS (ASTM1).

Figure 1.21-1 Function Block Diagram of ASTM Correction Block : Old JIS (ASTM1)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the ASTM
Correction Block: Old JIS (ASTM1).
Table 1.21-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of ASTM Correction
Block : Old JIS (ASTM1)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Measured
IN x Δ x x
flowrate
Measured
Q01 x Δ x x
temperature
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block
(ADL).

Function of ASTM Correction Block : Old JIS (ASTM1)

The ASTM1 block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the ASTM1 block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.21 ASTM Correction Block : Old JIS (ASTM1) Page 2 of 3

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
ALSO for the ASTM1 block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of ASTM Correction Block : Old JIS (ASTM1)

The ASTM1 block performs computation using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
▼ Temperature Unit
The ASTM Correction Block: Old JIS (ASTM1) performs temperature correction computation of flowrates at the
measured temperature of t and specific gravity of c, based on the ASTM correction computation (Old JIS).
In a specific gravity range not shown in the ASTM table for the ASTM correction computation (Old JIS), the
same computation can be performed by extending the applicability to Table II of JIS K2249.
The specific gravity ranges and temperature range of the ASTM and Table II of JIS K2249 are shown below.

Figure 1.21-2 Specific Gravity Ranges and Temperature Ranges of the ASTM Correction Computation (Old
JIS) and Table II of JIS K2249 (Old JIS)

ASTM correction computation under the old JIS is shown below.

F0 = Cf • Fi
2
Cf = 1 + α (TMP-15) + β (TMP-15)

Fi : Measured flowrate
F0 : Corrected flowrate
TMP : Measured temperature (°C)
C1 : Specific gravity (15/4 °C)
P1 (TPM) to P4 (TPM) : Parameters determined by temperature
The calculated output value (CPV) is the corrected flowrate (F0) multiplied by the gain (GAIN).

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.21 ASTM Correction Block : Old JIS (ASTM1) Page 3 of 3

CPV = GAIN • F0
The temperature unit is specified in the Function Block Detail Builder.
Temperature Units: Deg. C
Only Deg. C may be selected from the list. If use Fahrenheit degree, F may be manually entered in the entry
box.

Set Parameters
The parameters of the ASTM Correction Block: Old JIS (ASTM1) are shown as follows.
• Specific gravity at 15/4 °C (DEN)
Set within the specific gravity range shown in Table II of JIS K2249.
• Gain (GAIN)
A numeric value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.
The default is 1.00.

Data Items – ASTM1

Table 1.21-2 Data Items of ASTM Correction Block : Old JIS (ASTM1)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Measured flowrate ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
TMP Measured temperature ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW1 Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
DEN Specific gravity x ----- 0
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for ASTM1 block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.22 ASTM Correction Block : New JIS (ASTM2) Page 1 of 3

1.22 ASTM Correction Block : New JIS (ASTM2)

The ASTM Correction Block: New JIS (ASTM2) is used when performing correction computation based on the
ASTM correction (new JIS).

ASTM Correction Block : New JIS (ASTM2)

▼ Connection
The ASTM Correction Block: New JIS (ASTM2) performs correction computation on the flowrate of crude oil
and petroleum products based on the ASTM correction (New JIS) based on the measured temperature and
specific gravity.
Here is a function block diagram of the ASTM Correction Block: New JIS (ASTM2).

Figure 1.22-1 Function Block Diagram of ASTM Correction Block: New JIS (ASTM2)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the ASTM
Correction Block: New JIS (ASTM2).
Table 1.22-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of ASTM Correction
Block: NEW JIS (ASTM2)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Measured
IN x Δ x x
flowrate
Measured
Q01 x Δ x x
temperature
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block
(ADL).

Function of ASTM Correction Block : New JIS (ASTM2)

The ASTM2 block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the ASTM2 block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.22 ASTM Correction Block : New JIS (ASTM2) Page 2 of 3

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
ALSO for the ASTM2 block, see the following:, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of ASTM Correction Block : New JIS (ASTM2)

The ASTM2 block performs computation using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
▼ Type of Oil, Temperature Unit
The ASTM Correction Block: New JIS (ASTM2) calculates the corrected flowrate of the flowrate F at the
measured temperature of t and density of p, based on the ASTM correction computation (New JIS).
ASTM correction computation based on the new JIS is shown below.
F0 = Cf • Fi
2 2
Cf = exp {-α (TMP - 15) - 0.8α (TMP - 15) }

F0 : Corrected flowrate
TMP : Measured temperature (℃)
ρ : Density at 15 ℃ (kg/m3)
Fi : Measured flowrate
K0, K1, A, B : Oil dependent constants
The specific correction computation under the ASTM correction (New JIS) varies depending upon the type of
oil used. Select appropriate constants from the table below.
Table 1.22-2 Types of Oil and Oil Dependent Constants

Density range at 15 ℃ Constants

Type of oil 3
kg/m K0 K1 A B
Crude oil 610.5 ≤ ρ ≤ 1075.0 613.9723 0.0
653.0 ≤ ρ < 770.25 346.4228 0.4388
770.25 ≤ ρ < 787.75 -0.00336312 2680.3206
Fuel oil
787.75 ≤ ρ < 838.75 594.5418 0.0
838.75 ≤ ρ ≤ 1075.0 186.9696 0.4862
Lubricating oil 800.0 ≤ ρ ≤ 1164.0 0.0 0.6278

The calculated output value (CPV) is the corrected flowrate (F0) multiplied by the gain (GAIN).
CPV = GAIN • F0
The “type of oil” and “temperature unit” are set on the Function Block Detail Builder.
• Type of Oil
Select from “Crude,” “Fuel Oil” and “Lubricant.”
• Temperature Units
Deg. C
Only Deg. C may be selected from the list. If use Fahrenheit degree, F may be manually entered in the

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.22 ASTM Correction Block : New JIS (ASTM2) Page 3 of 3

entry box.

Set Parameters
The parameters of the ASTM Correction Block: New JIS (ASTM2) are shown as follows.
• Density at 15 °C (DEN)
3
Data with the unit of kg/m .
• Gain (GAIN)
An actual quantity value of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.

Data Items – ASTM2

Table 1.22-3 Data Items of ASTM Correction Block : New JIS (ASTM2)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Measured flowrate ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
TMP Measured temperature ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW1 Raw input data -----
destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
DEN Density x ----- 0
7 - digit real number including sign and
GAIN Gain x 1.00
decimal point
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
SH CPV scale high limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
SL CPV scale low limit Value in the same engineering unit as CPV -----
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for ASTM2 block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.23 Logical AND Block (AND), Logical OR Block (OR) Page 1 of 3

1.23 Logical AND Block (AND), Logical OR Block

(OR)
AND block (*1) is used to calculated the product of RV1 and RV2. OR block (*1) is used to calculate the
sum of RV1 and RV2.
*1: AND and OR blocks can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Logical AND Block (AND), Logical OR Block (OR)

▼ Connection
AND is the function block to be used to calculate the product of RV1 and RV2 and OR is the function block to
be used to calculate the sum of RV1 and RV2.
Here is a function block diagram of Logical AND Block (AND) and Logical OR Block (OR).

Figure 1.23-1 Function Block Diagram of Logical AND Block (AND) and Logical OR Block (OR)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of Logical
AND Block (AND) and Logical OR Block (OR).
Table 1.23-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of I/O Terminals of Logical AND Block
(AND) and Logical OR Block (OR)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
Q01 x x Δ x x x
input 1
Calculation
Q02 x x Δ x x x
input 2
Calculation
OUT x x Δ x x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Functions of Logical AND Block (AND) and Logical OR Block

(OR)
The AND and OR blocks perform input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The processing timings available for the AND and OR blocks are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup.
Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the
medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.23 Logical AND Block (AND), Logical OR Block (OR) Page 2 of 3

ALSO possible for the AND and OR blocks, refer to:

1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Logical AND Block (AND) and Logical OR

Block (OR)
The AND block calculates the logic product of the calculation input values (RV1, RV2) using its calculation
algorithm. The OR block calculates the logic sum of the calculation input values (RV1, RV2) using its
calculation algorithm.

Calculation Algorithm
The calculated output value (CPV) and the calculated input value (RV1, RV2) have the following relationship.
Table 1.23-2 Relationship of Input and Output of Logical AND Block (AND)

RV1 0 0 ≠0 ≠0
RV2 0 ≠0 0 ≠0
CPV 0 0 0 1

Table 1.23-3 Relationship of Input and Output of Logical OR Block (OR)

RV1 0 0 ≠0 ≠0
RV2 0 ≠0 0 ≠0
CPV 0 1 1 1

Data Items – AND and OR

Table 1.23-4 Data Items of Logical AND Block (AND), Logical OR Block (OR)

Data Data Name Entry Permission(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
AF Alarm detection specification ----- -----
AOFS Alarm masking specification ----- -----
RV1 Calculation input value 1 0
RV2 Calculation input value 2 0
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) 0, 1 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for AND and OR blocks, refer to:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.23 Logical AND Block (AND), Logical OR Block (OR) Page 3 of 3

ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.24 Logical NOT Block (NOT) Page 1 of 2

1.24 Logical NOT Block (NOT)

NOT block (*1) is used to perform the negation calculation.
*1: NOT block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Logical NOT Block (NOT)

▼ Connection
NOT is the function block to be used to calculate the negation of the calculated input value (RV).
Here is a function block diagram of Logical NOT Block (NOT).

Figure 1.24-1 Function Block Diagram of Logical NOT Block (NOT)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of Logical
NOT Block (NOT).
Table 1.24-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of I/O Terminals of Logical NOT Block (NOT)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x x Δ x x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x Δ x x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Logical NOT Block (NOT)

The NOT block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The processing timings available for the NOT block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup. Selections
available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-
speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the NOT block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.24 Logical NOT Block (NOT) Page 2 of 2

Calculation Processing of Negative Block (NOT)

The NOT block performs a negative operation on the calculation input value (RV) using its calculation
algorithm.

Calculation Algorithm
The calculated output value (CPV) and the calculated input value (RV) have the following relationship.
Table 1.24-2 Relationship of Input and Output of Logical NOT Block (NOT)

RV 0 ≠0
CPV 1 0

When the calculation input(RV) is 0, CPV equals to 1, otherwise CPV equals to 0.

Data Items – NOT

Table 1.24-3 Data Items of Logical NOT Block (NOT)

Data Data Name Entry Permission(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
AF Alarm detection specification ----- -----
AOFS Alarm masking specification ----- -----
RV Calculation input value 0
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) 0, 1 SL
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for NOT block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.25 Flip-Flop Blocks (SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, SRS2-R) Page 1 of 3

1.25 Flip-Flop Blocks (SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S,

SRS2-R)
SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S and SRS2-R blocks (*1) are the function blocks used for flip-flop operations.
*1: SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S and SRS2-R blocks can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Flip-Flop Blocks (SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, SRS2-R)

▼ Connection
SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S and SRS2-R blocks are the function blocks give the flip-flop operation output CPV
according the calculated input value of RV1 and RV2. SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S and SRS2-R blocks are classified
as follows.
• Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output (SRS1-S)
• Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output (SRS1-R)
• Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs (SRS2-S)
• Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs (SRS2-R)

Figure 1.25-1 Function Block Diagram of SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S and SRS2-R Blocks

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of SRS1-S,
SRS1-R, SRS2-S and SRS2-R blocks.
Table 1.25-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-
S and SRS2-R Blocks

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
Q01 x x Δ x x x
input 1
Calculation
Q02 x x Δ x x x
input 2
Calculation
J01 x x Δ x x x
output 1
Calculation
J02 x x Δ x x x
output 2
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block
(ADL).

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.25 Flip-Flop Blocks (SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, SRS2-R) Page 2 of 3

Functions of Flip-Flop Blocks (SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, SRS2-

R)
The SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, and SRS2-R blocks perform input processing, calculation processing, output
processing, and alarm processing.
The processing timings available for the SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, and SRS2-R blocks are a periodic startup
and a one-shot startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the
basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing possible
ALSO for the SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, and SRS2-R blocks, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Flip-Flop Blocks (SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S,

SRS2-R)
The SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, and SRS2-R blocks perform a flip-flop operation using their calculation algorithms.

Calculation Algorithm
The calculated output value (CPV) and the calculated input value (RV1, RV2) have the following relationship.
Table 1.25-2 Relationship of Input and Output of Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output (SRS1-S)

RV1 0 ≠0 0 ≠0
Input
RV2 0 0 ≠0 ≠0
CPV1 Hold 1 0 1
Output
- (*1) - (*1) - (*1) - (*1) - (*1)
*1: -: Not exist

Table 1.25-3 Relationship of Input and Output of Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output (SRS1-R)

RV1 0 ≠0 0 ≠0
Input
RV2 0 0 ≠0 ≠0
CPV1 Hold 1 0 0
Output
- (*1) - (*1) - (*1) - (*1) - (*1)
*1: -: Not exist

Table 1.25-4 Relationship of Input and Output of Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs (SRS2-S)

RV1 0 ≠0 0 ≠0
Input
RV2 0 0 ≠0 ≠0
CPV1 Hold 1 0 1
Output
CPV2 Hold 0 1 0

Table 1.25-5 Relationship of Input and Output of Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs (SRS2-R)

RV1 0 ≠0 0 ≠0

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.25 Flip-Flop Blocks (SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, SRS2-R) Page 3 of 3

Input RV2 0 0 ≠0 ≠0
CPV1 Hold 1 0 0
Output
CPV2 Hold 0 1 1

Data Items – SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, SRS2-R

Table 1.25-6 Data Items of SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, SRS2-R flip-flop blocks

Data Data Name Entry Permission(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
AF Alarm detection specification ----- -----
AOFS Alarm masking specification ----- -----
RV1 Calculation input value1 0
RV2 Calculation input value2 0
CPV1 Calculated output value1 Δ (*2) 0, 1 0
CPV2 Calculated output value2 0, 1 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S and SRS2-R blocks, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.26 Wipeout Block (WOUT) Page 1 of 2

1.26 Wipeout Block (WOUT)

The WOUT block (*1) is used for the logical operation to output the AND of the calculation input value1
(RV1) and the NOT of the calculation input value2 (RV2).
*1: WOUT block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Wipeout Block (WOUT)

▼ Connection
The WOUT block is the function block to be used for the logical operation to output the AND of the
calculation input value1 (RV1) and the NOT of the calculation input value2 (RV2).
Here is a function block diagram of Wipeout Block (WOUT).

Figure 1.26-1 Function Block Diagram of Wipeout Block (WOUT)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of Wipeout
Block (WOUT).
Table 1.26-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Wipeout Block
(WOUT)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
Q01 x x Δ x x x
input 1
Calculation
Q02 x x Δ x x x
input 2
Calculation
OUT x x x x x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Wipeout Block (WOUT)

The WOUT block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The processing timings available for the WOUT block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup.
Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the
medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the WOUT block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.26 Wipeout Block (WOUT) Page 2 of 2

3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Wipeout Block (WOUT)

The WOUT block performs computation using its calculation algorithm.

Calculation Algorithm
The calculated output value (CPV) and the calculation input value (RV1, RV2) have the following relationship.
Table 1.26-2 Relationship of Input and Output of Wipeout Block (WOUT)

RV1 0 ≠0 0 ≠0
Input
RV2 0 0 ≠0 ≠0
Output CPV 0 1 0 0

Data Items – WOUT

Table 1.26-3 Data Items of Wipeout Block (WOUT)

Data Data Name Entry Permission(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
AF Alarm detection specification ----- -----
AOFS Alarm masking specification ----- -----
RV1 Calculation input value1 0
RV2 Calculation input value2 0
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) 0, 1 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for WOUT block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.27 ON-Delay Timer Block (OND) Page 1 of 3

1.27 ON-Delay Timer Block (OND)

OND block (*1) is used for the operation to output the logic value 1 as calculated output value (CPV) when
the pre-defined time elapsed after the calculation input value (RV) is changed to a value other than 0.
*1: OND block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

ON-Delay Timer Block (OND)

▼ Connection
OND block is used for the operation to output the logic value 1 when the pre-defined time elapsed after the
calculation input RV is changed to a value other than 0.
The calculated output value (CPV) is 0 when the calculation input value (RV) is 0.
Here is a function block diagram of ON-Delay Timer Block (OND).

Figure 1.27-1 Function Block Diagram of ON-Delay Timer Block (OND)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of ON-Delay
Timer Block (OND).
Table 1.27-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of ON-Delay Timer
Block (OND)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x x Δ x x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x Δ x x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of ON-Delay Timer Block (OND)

The OND block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the OND block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the OND block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.27 ON-Delay Timer Block (OND) Page 2 of 3

4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of ON-Delay Timer Block (OND)

The OND block sets the calculation output value (CPV) to 1 after the pre-defined time (STM) has elapsed
using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
▼ Time Unit
The calculation algorithm of ON-Delay Timer Block may be illustrated as follows.
• The timer is initiated when the calculation input value (RV) is changed to a value other than 0.
• When timer is running, the current elapsed time (PTM) displays.
• When pre-defined time (STM) elapsed, the calculated output value (CPV) changes from 0 to 1.
• When the calculation input value (RV) changes to 0, the calculated output value (CPV) is reset to 0.

Figure 1.27-2 ON-Delay Timer Block (OND) Calculation Algorithm

The time unit of the timer block may be set on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Time Unit: Select between “Second” and “Minute.”
The default is “Second.”

Setting Parameter
OND block has the following setting parameters.
Set Time (STM): 1 to 10000

Data Items – OND

Table 1.27-2 Data Items of ON-Delay Timer Block (OND)

Data Data Name Entry Permission(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
AF Alarm detection specification ----- -----

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.27 ON-Delay Timer Block (OND) Page 3 of 3

AOFS Alarm masking specification ----- -----

RV Calculation input value 0
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) 0, 1 0
STM Pre-defined time x 1 to 10000 1
PTM Elapsed time 0 to 10000 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for OND block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.28 OFF-Delay Timer Block (OFFD) Page 1 of 3

1.28 OFF-Delay Timer Block (OFFD)

OFFD block (*1) is used for the operation to output the logic value 0 as calculated output value (CPV) when
the pre-defined time elapsed after the calculation input value (RV) is changed to 0.
*1: OFFD block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

OFF-Delay Timer Block (OFFD)

▼ Connection
OFFD block is used for the operation to output the logic value 0 when the pre-defined time (STM) elapsed
after the calculation input RV is changed from 1 to 0.
Here is a function block diagram of OFF-Delay Timer Block (OFFD).

Figure 1.28-1 Function Block Diagram of OFF-Delay Timer Block (OFFD)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of OFF-
Delay Timer Block (OFFD).
Table 1.28-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of OFF-Delay Timer
Block (OFFD)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x x Δ x x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x Δ x x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Off-Delay Timer Block (OFFD)

The OFFD block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the OFFD block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the OFFD block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.28 OFF-Delay Timer Block (OFFD) Page 2 of 3

For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:

5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Off-Delay Timer Block (OFFD)

The OFFD block sets the calculation output value (CPV) to 0 after the pre-defined time (STM) has elapsed
using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
▼ Time Unit
The calculation algorithm of OFF-Delay Timer Block may be illustrated as follows.
• The timer is initiated when the calculation input value (RV) is changed to 0.
• When timer is running, the current elapsed time (PTM) displays.
• When pre-defined time (STM) elapsed, the calculated output value (CPV) changes from 1 to 0.
• When the calculation input value (RV) changes to a value other than 0, the calculated output value (CPV)
is reset to 1.

Figure 1.28-2 OFF-Delay Timer Block (OFFD) Calculation Algorithm

The time unit of the timer block may be set on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Time Unit: Select between “Second” and “Minute.”
The default is “Second.”

Setting Parameter
OFFD timer block has the following setting parameters.
Set Time (STM): 1 to 10000

Data Items – OFFD

Table 1.28-2 Data Items of OFF-Delay Timer Block (OFFD)

Data Data Name Entry Permission(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
AF Alarm detection specification ----- -----
AOFS Alarm masking specification ----- -----

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.28 OFF-Delay Timer Block (OFFD) Page 3 of 3

RV Calculation input value 0

CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) 0, 1 0
STM Pre-defined time x 1 to 10000 1
PTM Elapsed time 0 to 10000 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for OFFD block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.29 One-Shot Blocks Rise Trigger (TON), Fall Trigger (TOFF) Page 1 of 3

1.29 One-Shot Blocks Rise Trigger (TON), Fall

Trigger (TOFF)
TON (*1) block is used for the operation to output the logic value 1 as calculated output value (CPV) for one
scan period when the calculation input value (RV) is changed to a value other than 0.
TOFF block (*1) is used for the operation to output the logic value 1 for one scan period when the
calculation input value (RV) is changed to 0.
*1: TON and TOFF blocks can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

One-Shot Blocks Rise Trigger (TON), Fall Trigger (TOFF)

▼ Connection
TON block and TOFF block are used for the operation to output the logic value 1 as calculated output value
(CPV) for one scan period when the calculation input value (RV) of TON block is changed to a value other
than 0, or the calculation input value (RV) of TOFF is changed to 0. Otherwise, the calculated output value
(CPV) is kept as 0.
Here is a function block diagram of One-shot blocks TON and TOFF.

Figure 1.29-1 Function Block Diagram of One-shot Blocks TON and TOFF

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of One-shot
blocks TON and TOFF.
Table 1.29-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of One-shot Blocks
TON and TOFF

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x x Δ x x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x Δ x x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or an inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Functions of One-Shot Block Rising-Edge Trigger (TON) and

Falling-Edge Trigger (TOFF)
The TON and TOFF blocks perform input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the TON and TOFF blocks is a periodic startup. Selections available
for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan
period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.29 One-Shot Blocks Rise Trigger (TON), Fall Trigger (TOFF) Page 2 of 3

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the TON and TOFF blocks, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of One-Shot Block Rising-Edge Trigger (TON)

and Falling-Edge Trigger (TOFF)
The TON and TOFF blocks set the calculation output value (CPV) to 1 for the duration of one scan using their
calculation algorithms.

Calculation Algorithm
The calculation algorithm of One-shot blocks TON and TOFF may be illustrated as follows.

One-Shot Block (Rising-Edge Trigger) (TON)

When the calculation input value (RV) is changed to a value other than 0, the logic value 1 is output as
calculated output value (CPV) for one scan period.

Figure 1.29-2 One-Shot Block (Rising-Edge Trigger) (TON)

One-Shot Block (Falling-Edge Trigger) (TOFF)

When the calculation input RV is changed from 1 to 0, the logic value 1 is output for one scan period.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.29 One-Shot Blocks Rise Trigger (TON), Fall Trigger (TOFF) Page 3 of 3

Figure 1.29-3 One-Shot Block (Falling-Edge Trigger) (TOFF)

Data Items – TON and TOFF

Table 1.29-2 Data Items of One-shot Blocks Rise Trigger (TON), Fall Trigger( TOFF)

Data Data Name Entry Permission(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
AF Alarm detection specification ----- -----
AOFS Alarm masking specification ----- -----
RV Calculation input value 0
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) 0, 1 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for TON and TOFF blocks, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.30 Relational Operation Blocks (GT, GE, EQ) Page 1 of 3

1.30 Relational Operation Blocks (GT, GE, EQ)

GT, GE and EQ blocks (*1) are used to compare the two calculation input values RV1 and RV2.
*1: GT, GE, and EQ blocks can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Relational Operation Blocks (GT, GE, EQ)

▼ Connection
GT, GE and EQ blocks are used to compare the two inputs (RV1, RV2). When the comparison result is True,
the calculated output value (CPV) becomes 1, otherwise the output value (CPV) is 0.
Here is a function block diagram of GT, GE and EQ.

Figure 1.30-1 Function Block Diagram of Relational Operation Blocks (GT, GE, EQ)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of
Relational Operation Blocks (GT, GE, EQ).
Table 1.30-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Relational
Operation Blocks (GT, GE, EQ)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
Q01 x Δ x x
input 1
Calculation
Q02 x Δ x x
input 2
Calculation
OUT x x Δ x x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Functions of Relational Operation Blocks (GT, GE, EQ)

The GT, GE, and EQ blocks perform input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The processing timings available for the GT, GE, and EQ blocks are a periodic startup and a one-shot
startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan
period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the GT, GE, and EQ blocks, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.30 Relational Operation Blocks (GT, GE, EQ) Page 2 of 3

For more information about the output processing, refer to:

4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Relational Operation Blocks (GT, GE, EQ)

The GT, GE, and EQ blocks compare the calculation input values (RV1, RV2) using their calculation
algorithms.

Calculation Algorithm
The calculation algorithm of GT, GE, EQ may be described as follows.

Comparator Block (Greater Than) (GT)

The calculation input values (RV1, RV2) are the floating-point numeric data, while the calculated output
value (CPV) is integer.
When RV1 > RV2, the calculated output value (CPV) becomes 1, otherwise, it is 0.

Comparator Block (Greater Than or Equal) (GE)

The calculation input values (RV1, RV2) are the floating-point numeric data, while the calculated output
value (CPV) is integer.
When RV1 ≥ RV2, the calculated output value (CPV) becomes 1, otherwise, it is 0.

Equal Operator Block (EQ)

The calculation input values (RV1, RV2) are the floating-point numeric data, while the calculated output
value (CPV) is integer.
When RV1 = RV2, the calculated output value (CPV) becomes 1, otherwise, it is 0.
When the connection destination is engineering unit data, the comparison is carried out by floating-point
numeric values.

Data Items – GT, GE, EQ

Table 1.30-2 Data Items of Relational Operation Blocks (GT, GE, EQ)

Data Data Name Entry Permission(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- 0
AF Alarm detection specification ----- 0
AOFS Alarm masking specification ----- 0
RV1 Calculation input value 1 ----- 0
RV2 Calculation input value 2 ----- 0
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) 0, 1 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.30 Relational Operation Blocks (GT, GE, EQ) Page 3 of 3

Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally

*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for GT, GE and EQ blocks, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.31 Bitwise AND Block (BAND), Bitwise OR Block (BOR) Page 1 of 3

1.31 Bitwise AND Block (BAND), Bitwise OR Block

(BOR)
BAND block (*1) is used when the product of the calculation input values (RV1, RV2) is calculated in bitwise.
BOR (*1) block is used when the sum of the calculation input values (RV1, RV2) is calculated in bitwise.
*1: BAND and BOR blocks can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Bitwise AND Block (BAND), Bitwise OR Block (BOR)

▼ Connection
Based on the calculation input values (RV1, RV2), BAND Block calculates the bitwise product of the two
inputs while BOR block the bitwise sum of the two inputs.
Here is a function block diagram of Bitwise AND Block (BAND) and Bitwise OR Block (BOR).

Figure 1.31-1 Function Block Diagram of Bitwise AND Block (BAND) and Bitwise OR Block (BOR)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of Bitwise
AND Block (BAND) and Bitwise OR Block (BOR).
Table 1.31-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Bitwise AND Block
(BAND) and Bitwise OR Block (BOR)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
Q01 x Δ x x
input 1
Calculation
Q02 x Δ x x
input 2
Calculation
OUT x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Functions of Bitwise AND Block (BAND) and Bitwise OR

Block (BOR)
The BAND and BOR blocks perform input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The processing timings available for the BAND and BOR blocks are a periodic startup and a one-shot
startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan
period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.31 Bitwise AND Block (BAND), Bitwise OR Block (BOR) Page 2 of 3

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the BAND and BOR blocks, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Bitwise AND Block (BAND) and Bitwise OR

Block (BOR)
The BAND and BOR blocks perform computation using their calculation algorithms.

Calculation Algorithm
The I/O data of BAND and BOR blocks are integer type.
The calculation algorithm of BAND and BOR may be described as follows.

Bitwise AND Block (BAND)

The bitwise product of calculation input values (RV1, RV2) is calculated.
Example
RV1 = 0xFFFF FF00, RV2 = 0x0000 0FFF
CPV = 0x0000 0F00

Bitwise OR Block (BOR)

The bitwise sum of calculation input values (RV1, RV2) is calculated.
Example
RV1 = 0xFFFF FF00, RV2 = 0x0000 000F
CPV = 0xFFFF FF0F

Data Items – BAND, BOR

Table 1.31-2 Data Items of Bitwise AND Block (BAND) and Bitwise OR Block (BOR)

Data Data Name Entry Permission(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
AF Alarm detection specification ----- -----
AOFS Alarm masking specification ----- -----
RV1 Calculation input value 1 8 digits, hex 0
RV2 Calculation input value 2 8 digits, hex 0
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) 8 digits, hex 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.31 Bitwise AND Block (BAND), Bitwise OR Block (BOR) Page 3 of 3

*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally

Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for BAND and BOR blocks, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.32 Bitwise NOT Block (BNOT) Page 1 of 2

1.32 Bitwise NOT Block (BNOT)

BNOT block (*1) is used when the negation of the calculation input values (RV1, RV2) is calculated in
bitwise.
*1: BNOT block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Bitwise NOT Block (BNOT)

▼ Connection
Based on the calculation inputs (RV), BNOT block calculates the bitwise negation of the inputs.
Here is a function block diagram of Bitwise NOT Block (BNOT).

Figure 1.32-1 Function Block Diagram of Bitwise NOT Block (BNOT)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of Bitwise
NOT Block (BNOT).
Table 1.32-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Bitwise NOT Block
(BNOT)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x Δ x x
input
Calculation
OUT x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Function of Bitwise NOT Block (BNOT)

The BNOT block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm processing.
The processing timings available for the BNOT block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup.
Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the
medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the BNOT block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.32 Bitwise NOT Block (BNOT) Page 2 of 2

5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Bitwise NOT Block (BNOT)

The BNOT block performs computation using its calculation algorithm.

Calculation Algorithm
The calculation input values (RV, CPV) of BNOT blocks is integer type.
The BNOT calculates its CPV according to the bitwise value of calculation input value (RV).
Example
RV = 0xFFFF FF00
CPV = 0x0000 00FF

Data Items – BNOT

Table 1.32-2 Data Items of Bitwise NOT Block (BNOT)

Data Data Name Entry Permission(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
AF Alarm detection specification ----- -----
AOFS Alarm masking specification ----- -----
RV Calculation input value 8 digits, hex 0
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) 8 digits, hex 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for BNOT block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 1 of 17

1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU,

CALCU-C)
The General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) are used when defining arbitrary calculation
algorithms.

General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C)

▼ Connection
The General-Purpose Calculation Block (CALCU) is a function block that executes pre-defined arbitrary
calculation algorithms. Calculation algorithms are defined using the general-purpose calculation expression
description language.
The Calculation Block with String I/O (CALCU-C) has the same function as the General-Purpose Calculation
Block (CALCU), but the former has I/O terminals that can handle string data and a part of the I/O data is
used only for string data.
Here is a function block diagram of the General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C).

Figure 1.33-1 Function Block Diagram of General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C)

The following tables show the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of General-
Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C).
Table 1.33-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of General-Purpose
Calculation Block (CALCU)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x x Δ x x x
input
Q01 nth
to calculation x x Δ x x x
Q07 input
Calculation
OUT x x x x x x
output
J01 nth
to calculation x x Δ x x x
J03 output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x x
output

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 2 of 17

*1: x: Connection available

Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Table 1.33-2 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of General-Purpose
Calculation Block with String I/O (CALCU-C)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x x Δ x x x
input
Q01 nth
to calculation x x Δ x x x
Q03 input
Q04 nth
to calculation x Δ x
Q07 input
Calculation
OUT x x x x x x
output
nth
J01 calculation x x Δ x x x
output
J02 nth
to calculation x Δ x
J03 output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Functions of General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU,

CALCU-C)
The CALCU and CALCU-C blocks perform input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and
alarm processing.
The processing timings available for the CALCU and CALCU-C blocks are a periodic startup and a one-shot
startup. Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan
period, the medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the CALCU and CALCU-C blocks, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 3 of 17

Input Processing of General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU,

CALCU-C) when a Calculation Input Value Error is Detected
The CALCU and CALCU-C blocks perform special input processing when an abnormal calculation input value
is detected.

Exact Totalization Pulse Train Input of General-Purpose Calculation

Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C)
When the input signal conversion is specified with [Exact Totalization Pulse Train Input], the totalization can
use the calculation output value (CPV).

Calculation Processing of General-Purpose Calculation Blocks

(CALCU, CALCU-C)
The CALCU and CALCU-C blocks perform computation using arbitrarily defined calculation algorithms and
their setup parameters.

Alarm Processing Specific to General-Purpose Calculation Blocks

(CALCU, CALCU-C)
The “calculation error alarm check,” which is one of the alarm checks performed by the CALCU and CALCU-C
blocks, is specific to these two function blocks.

Calculation Output Value Range limit of General-Purpose

Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C)
The calculation output value (CPV) can be limited in range between SL-(SH-SL) and SH (*1).
*1: SL= CPV scale low limit; SH= CPV scale high limit

In/Out Data Normalization of General-Purpose Calculation Blocks

(CALCU, CALCU-C): FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2
In CENTUM-XL system, the In/Out data of general-purpose calculation blocks are normalized values. In
CENTUM VP system, the In/Out data of general-purpose calculation blocks can be either normalized values
or engineering unit data values according to the designation on the builder. Designating to use the
normalized In/Out data of general-purpose calculation blocks can retain consistency when migrating a
CENTUM-XL calculations to CENTUM VP system.

Input Processing when a Calculation Input Value Error is

Detected
▼ Calculated Input Value Error Detected
Define the calculation value error detection condition of the CALCU and CALCU-C blocks and the data status
of the calculation output value (CPV) when an error is detected in “Calculated input value error detected” of
Function Block Detail Builder. By default, this setting is set as “0: Non-Detecting Type.”
In connection with these settings, a method by which the data status (IOP, IOP-, OOP, NRDY) related to the
process control input/output generated with the calculation input values (RV, RVn) is communicated to the
calculation output value (CPV) will furthermore be determined. The data status of the calculation output
values (CPV1 to CPV3) is always NR (normal) regardless of the setting in [Calculated input value error
detected] item.
Table 1.33-3 Specification of Calculation Input Value Error Detection of General-Purpose Calculation

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 4 of 17

Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C)

Error detection condition(*1)

CPV data Input value of data status
Specification RV1 to Calculation
RV status communication source
RV7 (*2) processing
BAD – – BAD RV
NR
Compensation- BAD Normal QST
(*3)
computing Type Do not communicate.
NR
NR (*3) Normal NR (*3)
(*3)
BAD – – BAD The priority order is from RV to RVn
– BAD – BAD (*4).
All-detection Type
NR
NR (*3) Normal NR (*3) Do not communicate.
(*3)
Non-detecting Type – – Normal NR (*3) Do not communicate.
*1: -: Ignore (don’t care)
*2: “RV1 to RV7” means the logic sum of the data statuses from RV1 to RV7.
*3: An “NR” entry in the table indicates a condition where the data status is neither BAD nor QST.
*4: The IOP and IOP- of a status to be communicated have higher priority. An IOP will be transmitted if an NRDY
has been generated for an input value with higher priority, and an IOP has been generated at the same time for
an input value with lower priority.

The following processing is performed if the data status of a calculation output value (CPV) becomes a bad
data value (BAD) or a questionable data value (QST) according to the specification of the calculation input
value error detection.
• If the data status of a calculation output value (CPV) becomes a bad data value (BAD)
The calculation processing is aborted, the value immediately before the error is retained and the
connected destination of OUT terminal will hold this retained previous value. The previous good CPV is
held and accessible from SUB terminal. If CPV overshoot is set to the block, the data from the OUT
terminal is not affected by the CPV change caused by main calculation input (RV) abnormality. However,
the CPV after overshoot can be accessed using SUB terminal.
• If the data status of a calculation output value (CPV) becomes a questionable data value (QST)
The calculation input values (RV, RVn) retain the values immediately before the error generation. The
calculation processing is continued using these values and the calculation output value (CPV) is updated.

Input Processing for Data Status QST: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2

For a calculation block input, if its data status is QST, the QST status can be passed to the calculated output
value. For passing the QST status, check the option of [Pass calculation block's input QST status to CPV] on
[Constant 3] tab of FCS properties sheet.
When the option is checked or unchecked, the behaviors of CPV data status vary as follows:
Table 1.33-4 Relationship of CALCU and CALCU-C Block's Data Status of Input (RVn) and Data Status of
CPV

Error detection condition(*1)(*2) CPV data status

Calculated input value error
detection specification RV1 to Calculation QST is QST is not
RV
RV7 (*3) processing passed passed
BAD - - BAD BAD
- BAD Normal QST QST
QST QST Normal QST NR
Compensation-computing Type
QST NR Normal QST NR
NR QST Normal NR NR
NR NR Normal NR NR
BAD - - BAD BAD

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 5 of 17

- BAD - BAD BAD

QST QST Normal QST NR
All-detection Type QST NR Normal QST NR
NR QST Normal QST NR
NR NR Normal NR NR
Non-detecting Type - - Normal NR NR
*1: -:Ignore (don’t care)
*2: Conditions are tested starting from the top, and if a condition is met, the subsequent conditions are ignored.
*3: If any one of RV1 to RV7 input statuses is BAD, it is denoted as BAD. If none of RV1 to RV7 input statuses is bad
while one of them is QST, it is denoted as QST.

TIP Notice that when this option is checked, the closing processing of trend data and the closing data of
report, the quality flag of OPC may be affected.

SEE For more information about the closing processing of trend data, refer to:
ALSO “ Closing Data Processing Based on Data Status” in 1.7.2, “Structure of the Closing Processed Data”
in Human Interface Stations Reference Vol.2 (IM 33J05A11-01EN)
For more information about the closing data of report, refer to:
“ Detailed Format Design – Closed-Topic Dialog Box Detail Definition Sheet” in 2.4.2, “Detailed
Format Design – Closing Data” in Optional Functions Reference (IM 33J05H10-01EN)
For more information about the quality flag of OPC, refer to:
“ Setting Quality Flag Tables” in “ HIS Setup Window” in 1.2, “Engineering Related to OPC” in
Optional Functions Reference (IM 33J05H10-01EN)

Data for Totalization when Input Signal Conversion is Exact

Totalization Pulse Train
▼ Data Item for Totalization
When the input signal conversion is specified with [Exact Totalization Pulse Train Input], the totalization can
use the calculation outut value (CPV) instead of the integration of the calculation input value (RV).
[Exact Totalization Pulse Train Input] can be specified on the Function Block Detail builder for the item of
[Input Signal Conversion].
Data Item for Totalization: Choose [RV] or [CPV].
The default is [RV].
Moreover, if the [Input Signal Conversion] is specified with another type of conversion, the totalization can
only use the calcaulation output [CPV], cannot use the calculation input [RV].

Calculation Algorithm
The General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) execute algorithms that are defined using the
general-purpose calculation expression description language.
The calculation input values, calculated output values and set parameters of the General-Purpose Calculation
Block (CALCU) all use double-precision floating-point data type.
The calculation input values (RV4 to RV7) and calculated output values (CPV2, CPV3) of the General-Purpose
Calculation Block with String I/O (CALCU-C) all use string data type. When data of other function block is
referred or set using element symbols and a description of data items without specifying I/O terminal
connections in a calculation expression description, terminal connections of the specified I/O data are
performed automatically during compiling. The I/O terminals used here are different from those connected in
the Function Block Detail Builder.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 6 of 17

The input signals that are directly specified in the calculation expression description become the target of
calculation input error detection.

SEE For more information about the general-purpose calculation expression description language, refer to:
ALSO 1.47, "General-Purpose Arithmetic Expressions"

Restriction on the General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU,

CALCU-C)
• Up to eight input terminal connections and four output terminal connections can be defined on the
Function Block Detail Builder.
• Up to 24 input data and 12 output data can be referred or set as the element symbols and data items in a
calculation expression.
• However, for using alphanumeric strings in CALCU-C, a maximum of 6 character strings and 6 numeric
strings can be used.
• Data of other FCS cannot be used in an arithmetic/logic calculation expression.

Set Parameters
The parameters of the General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) are shown as follows.
• Calculation parameters 1 to 4 (P01 to P 04)
Engineering unit data values.
• Calculation parameters 5 to 8 (P05 to P08)
Engineering unit data values in the case of General-Purpose Calculation Block (CALCU).
A string data of up to 16 standard-width characters or 8 double-width characters can be used for the
General-Purpose Calculation Block with String I/O (CALCU-C).

Computation Error Alarm Check

A computation error alarm (CERR) is generated if a calculation error occurs during the processing of a user-
defined calculation formula.
If a computation error alarm (CERR) is generated, the calculation processing stops and an error message
containing an error generation statement number and an error code is output. The error occurrence
statement number is set to the data item ERRL, and the previous value is held as the calculated output value
(CPV). The ERRL can be accessed from other function block, since it is handled as a parameter. Under this
circumstance, the system alarm may occur. However, if the setting item of [Suppress system alarm when
CALCU calculation error occurs] is specified on the builder, the system alarm message will not occur.
If a computation error occurs, the computation executes again from the beginning of the calculation in the
next scan. If the second computation is completed correctly, the computation error alarm (CERR) returns to
normal. The value at the error occurrence is held in ERRL.
On the builder, if the setting item of [Suppress system alarm when CALCU calculation error occurs] is
specified, when the calculation error occurs, the CPV data status will not change to BAD but the alarm status
will change to CERR.

SEE For more information about suppressing the system alarms on calculation error, refer to:
ALSO " Suppress System Alarm when CALCU Calculation Error Occurs : FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2" in
1.33, "General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C)"
For more information about the description of calculation errors and the calculation error handling, refer
to:
1.47.7, "Error Handling"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 7 of 17

Suppress System Alarm when CALCU Calculation Error

Occurs : FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2
▼ Suppress system alarm when CALCU calculation error occurs
When running the CALCU or CALCU-C calculations, if a calculation error occurs, a system alarm message will
be initiated. However, this message can be suppressed by specifying the setting item of [Suppress system
alarm when CALCU calculation error occurs] on the “Constant 3” tab of FCS Properties. By default, this
option is not enabled.

SEE For more information about the calculation errors, refer to:
ALSO 1.47.7, "Error Handling"

CPV Range Limit: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2

▼ CPV range limit
The CPV Range Limit can be applied to limit the calculation output value (CPV) within a specified range. The
CPV can be limited in range between SL-(SH-SL) and SH.
When CPV is smaller than the low limit of SL-(SH-SL), the low limit will be used. When CPV is greater than
the high limit of SH, the high limit will be used.
The CPV range limit is different from the PV range limit, only limit the calculation output value (CPV). The
limited calculation output value will go through digital filter and used for totalization. The CPV Range Limit
functions only when the block mode is AUT.
The CPV Range Limit can be specified on Function Block Detail builder.
CPV Range Limit: Choose [Valid] or [Invalid].
The default is [Invalid].

SEE For more information about PV range limit, refer to:

ALSO “ PV Range Limit: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2” in 3.1.1, “Input Signal Conversions Common to
Regulatory Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Data Items – CALCU, CALCU-C

The table below shows the data items of the General-Purpose Calculation Block (CALCU):
Table 1.33-5 Data Items of General-Purpose Calculation Block (CALCU)

Entry Permitted or Not

Data Item Data Name Range Default
(*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 8 of 17

Calculated input value 1

RV1 to RV7 ----- 0
to 7
RAW1 to Value in the unit at the connection
Raw input data 1 to 7 -----
RAW7 destination
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
Value in the same engineering unit
SUM Totalizer value 0
as CPV
CPV1 to Calculated output value
----- 0
CPV3 1 to 3
Calculation parameters 1
P01 to P08 x ----- 0
to 8
EERL Error statement number ----- 0
ERRC (*3) Error code ----- 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL
*3: ERRC denotes a detailed error code and a class error code

The table below shows the data items of the General-Purpose Calculation Block with String I/O (CALCU-C):
Table 1.33-6 Data Items of General-Purpose Calculation Block with String I/O (CALCU-C)

Entry Permitted or Not

Data Item Data Name Range Default
(*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
RV Calculated input value ----- 0
Value in the unit at the connection
RAW Raw input data -----
destination
Calculated input value 1
RV1 to RV3 ----- 0
to 3
RAW1 to Value in the unit at the connection
Raw input data 1 to 3 -----
RAW3 destination
Calculated input value 4
RV4 to RV7 16Byte NULL
to 7
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
Value in the same engineering unit
SUM Totalizer value 0
as CPV
CPV1 Calculated output value 1 16Byte NULL
CPV2 to Calculated output value 2
----- 0
CPV3 and 3
Calculation parameters 1
P01 to P04 x ----- 0
to 4
Calculation parameters 5
P05 to P08 x 16Byte NULL
to 8

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 9 of 17

EERL Error statement number ----- 0

ERRC (*3) Error code ----- 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL
*3: ERRC denotes a detailed error code and a class error code

SEE For more information about valid block modes for CALCU block and CALCU-C block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

Calculation Block In/Out Data Normalization

▼ Normalization of Input/Output Signal
By designating on the builder, the calculation can be performed using the normalized values for the data
connected to the IN terminal, Q01 to Q07 terminals, OUT terminal, J01 to J03 terminals of a general-purpose
calculation block and the data set to or referenced by the general-purpose calculation block according to the
PV range (SH, SL), SV range (SSH, SSL), MV range (MSH, MSL) of the data.
The I/O terminals for numerical data and the numerical variables in the CALCU-C function block are also
affected by this feature. The numerical input and output terminals of CALCU-C function block are as follows:
• Input Terminals for Numerical Data: IN, Q01 to Q03
• Output Terminals for Numerical Data: OUT, J01
• Numerical variables that referenced or defined by the expressions in the CALCU-C function block

Even though the I/O normalization is specified on the builder, the CENTUM-XL
calculation expressions are not free from problems. After the CENTUM-XL migration,
the application debugging is necessary.

In Data Normalization
The input engineering unit data (RV) of a calculation block can be normalized before used in the calculation.
When normalizing the RV, the range of the general-purpose calculation block will be ignored but the range of
the block connected to IN terminal or Q01 to Q07 terminal will be used. The normalization is performed with
the following formula:
RVN = (RV – SLi) / (SHi – SLi)
RVN: After normalization
RV: Before normalization (Engineering Unit Data)
SHi: Scale high-limit of the connected data
SLi: Scale low -limit of the connected data
For the data item, such as DV or DL, that is differentiated from other data items, the normalization is
performed with the following formula:
RVN = RV / (SHi – SLi)
RVN: After normalization
RV: Before normalization
SHi: Scale high-limit of the connected data
SLi: Scale low -limit of the connected data

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 10 of 17

Convert Output Data to Engineering Unit Data

When outputing the calculated data, the normalized data can be converted to engineering unit data. When
converting CPV to an engineering unit data, the range of the CPV will be used. When converting CPV1 to
CPV3 and other internal variables to engineering unit data, the ranges of the blocks connected to J01 to J03
terminal will be used.
The conversion is performed with the following formula:
CPV = CPVN x (SHo – SLo) + SLo
CPV: Before normalization (Engineering Unit Data)
CPVN: After normalization
SHo: Scale high-limit of the connected data (for CPV1 to CPV3 and other internal variables)
Scale high-limit of CPV (for CPV)
SLo: Scale low-limit of the connected data (for CPV1 to CPV3 and other internal variables)
Scale low-limit of CPV (for CPV)
For the data item, such as DV or DL, that is differentiated from other data items, the conversion is
performed with the following formula:
CPV = CPVN x (SHo – SLo)
CPV: Before normalization (Engineering Unit Data)
CPVN: After normalization
SHo: Scale high-limit of the connected data (for CPV1 to CPV3 and other internal variables)
Scale high-limit of CPV (for CPV)
SLo: Scale low-limit of the connected data (for CPV1 to CPV3 and other internal variables)
Scale low-limit of CPV (for CPV)
The formulas for normalizing the input data and for converting the output data to engineering unit data in
related to ranges are shown in the table below:
Table 1.33-7 In/Out Data Normalization

Formula Converting output to engineering

Range Normalizing input data
number unit data
1 SH:SL RVN = (RV - SL) / (SH - SL) CPV = CPVN × (SH - SL) + SL
2 SSH:SSL RVN = (RV - SSL) / (SSH - SSL) CPV = CPVN × (SSH - SSL) + SSL
RVN = (RV - MSL) / (MSH -
3 MSH:MSL CPV = CPVN × (MSH - MSL) + MSL
MSL)
4 SH:SL (Difference) RVN = RV / (SH - SL) CPV = CPVN × (SH - SL)
5 SSH:SSL (Difference) RVN = RV / (SSH - SSL) CPV = CPVN × (SSH - SSL)
6 MSH:MSL (Difference) RVN = RV / (MSH - MSL) CPV = CPVN × (MSH - MSL)
7 DSH:DSL RVN = (RV - DSL) / (DSH - DSL) CPV = CPVN × (DSH - DSL) + DSL
8 DSH:DSL (Difference) RVN = RV / (DSH - DSL) CPV = CPVN × (DSH - DSL)
RVN = (RV - MSL1) / (MSH1 -
9 MSH1:MSL1 CPV = CPVN × (MSH1 - MSL1) + MSL1
MSL1)
MSH1:MSL1
10 RVN = RV / (MSH1 - MSL1) CPV = CPVN × (MSH1 - MSL1)
(Difference)
RVN = (RV - MSL2) / (MSH2 -
11 MSH2:MSL2 CPV = CPVN × (MSH2 - MSL2) + MSL2
MSL2)
MSH2:MSL2
12 RVN = RV / (MSH2 - MSL2) CPV = CPVN × (MSH2 - MSL2)
(Difference)

Input Limitation
If “Normalization of Input/Output Signal” is defined with Yes, the input data will be restricted as follows:
• If the connected data or referenced data is a non-difference type data.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 11 of 17

The data value will be restricted within the range of SH and SL-(SH-SL).
(SH/SL: Range of the connected or referenced data)
• If the connected data or referenced data is a difference type data.
The data value will be restricted within the range between positive and negative of (SH-SL).
(SH/SL: Range of the connected or referenced data)
However, the values beyond the limitation can be visualized on Tuning View.

Output Limitation
If “Normalization of Input/Output Signal” is defined with Yes, the output will be restricted as follows:
• CPV
The data value will be restricted within the range of SH and SL-(SH-SL).
(SH/SL: Range of the CPV)
• If the connected data or referenced data is a non-difference type data.
The data value will be restricted within the range of SH and SL-(SH-SL).
(SH/SL: Range of the connected or manipulated data)
• If the connected data or referenced data is a difference type data.
The data value will be restricted within the range between positive and negative of (SH-SL).
(SH/SL: Range of the connected or manipulated data)
However, the values after limitation can be visualized on Tuning View.

Designating In/Out Data Normalization

Data normalization can be designated for each calculation block on the Function Block Detail Builder of the
general-purpose calculation block.
Normalization of input/output signal: Select “No” or “Yes”
Default: “No”
The settings regarding the calculation block in/out data normalization as well as the general-purpose
calculation details and function block details can be printed out on the builder and printed out through self-
documentation.

Regarding DT or NX terminal of BDA-L, BDSET-1L/BDSET-2L Block

When a general-purpose calculation block is referencing or setting the data of a DT01 to DT16 or a NX01 to
NX16 terminal of a BDA-L, BDSET-1L/BDSET-2L block, the data normalization and the range limitation will be
performed according to the range of the data connected to the corresponding J01 to J16 terminal.
The data normalization and range limitation according to the range of the data connected to the J01 to J16
terminals are performed only when the connected data is normalizable.
When the data connected to the J01 to J16 terminal is changed, CALCU that referencing the previously
connected data may become invalid element. In this case, you need to perform the operations for resolving
the invalid elements.

Normalizable Data (Data Connection)

What data item can be normalized is automatically determined on the control drawing builder.
The normalizable data items (Data Connection) are listed below. In this table, the numbers that represent
different formulas are the same as in the table of In/Out Data Normalization.
• Regulatory Control Blocks
Table 1.33-8 Relevant Data Item: Regulatory Control Blocks (Data Connection)

Model Fomula
Relevant data item Range
name number

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 12 of 17

HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / PVP SH:SL 1
PVI
VL SH:SL (Difference) 4
HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / PVP / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
PVI-DV
DL / DV / VL SH:SL (Difference) 4
CSV / HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / PVP / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
PID MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / PMV / RLV1-2 / RMV MSH:MSL 3
DB / DL / GW / VL / DV SH:SL (Difference) 4
CSV / HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / PVP / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
MH / ML / MSH / MSL / MV / OPHI / OPLO / PMV / RLV1-
PI-HLD MSH:MSL 3
2 / RMV
DB / DL / GW / VL / DV SH:SL (Difference) 4
CSV / HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / PVP / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / PMV / RLV1-2 / RMV MSH:MSL 3
PID-BSW
DL / LK / VL / DV SH:SL (Difference) 4
BIAS MSH:MSL (Difference) 6
CSV / HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / PVP / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
ONOFF MV / PMV / RMV MSH:MSL 3
DL / VL / DV SH:SL (Difference) 4
CSV / HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / PVP / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
ONOFF-E MV / PMV / RMV MSH:MSL 3
DL / VL / DV SH:SL (Difference) 4
CSV / HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / PVP / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
ONOFF-G MV / PMV / RMV MSH:MSL 3
DB / DL / VL / DV SH:SL (Difference) 4
CSV / HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / PVP / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
ONOFF-GE MV / PMV / RMV MSH:MSL 3
DB / DL / VL / DV SH:SL (Difference) 4
CSV / HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / PVP / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
PID-TP MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / PMV / RLV1-2 / RMV MSH:MSL 3
DB / DL / GW / VL / DV SH:SL (Difference) 4
CSV / HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / PVP / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
PD-MR CALC / MH / ML / MR / MV / OPHI / OPLO / PMV / RMV MSH:MSL 3
DL / VL / DV SH:SL (Difference) 4
CSV / HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / RSV / SVH / SVL / SV SH:SL 1
MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / PMV / RMV MSH:MSL 3
PI-BLEND
RP MSH:MSL (Difference) 6
DL / VL / DV DSL:DSH (Difference) 8
CSV / HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / PVP / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
PID-STC MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / PMV / RLV1-2 / RMV MSH:MSL 3
DB / DL / GW / VL / DV SH:SL (Difference) 4
MLD MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO MSH:MSL 3
HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / PVP SH:SL 1
MLD-PVI MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO MSH:MSL 3
VL SH:SL (Difference) 4
CSV / SV / SVH / SVL SSH:SSL 2
MLD-SW
MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / PMV MSH:MSL 3

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 13 of 17

BIAS / RP SSH:SSL (Difference) 5

MC-2 ANSP / FV / PH / PL SH:SL 1
MC-2E ANSP / FV / PH / PL SH:SL 1
MC-3 ANSP / FV / PH / PL SH:SL 1
MC-3E ANSP / FV / PH / PL SH:SL 1
HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / PVP SH:SL 1
CSV / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SSH:SSL 2
CALC / MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / PMV / RMV MSH:MSL 3
RATIO
VL SH:SL (Difference) 4
RP SSH:SSL (Difference) 5
BIAS MSH:MSL (Difference) 6
PG-L13 (*1) CALC / MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / Y01-14 MSH:MSL 3
LL / PH / PL / PV SH:SL 1
BSETU-2
MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / PRE MSH:MSL 3
LL / PH / PL / PV SH:SL 1
BSETU-3
MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / PRE MSH:MSL 3
CSV / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SSH:SSL 2
VELLIM MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / PMV / RMV MSH:MSL 3
DL / DMVM / DMVP / DV SSH:SSL (Difference) 5
SS-H/M/L PV / RV1-3 SH:SL 1
PV / RV1-3 SH:SL 1
AS-H/M/L
MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / PMV MSH:MSL 3
HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / PVP / RV1-2 / SV SH:SL 1
SS-DUAL
DL / DV / VL SH:SL (Difference) 4
FOUT CSV / SV SSH:SSL 2
PV SH:SL 1
CSV / SV / SVH / SVL SSH:SSL 2
FFSUM
MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / PMV MSH:MSL 3
RP MSH:MSL (Difference) 6
MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / PMV / PV MSH:MSL 3
XCPL
RP MSH:MSL (Difference) 6
CSV / RSV / SRH1-2 / SRL1-2 / SV / SVH / SVL SSH:SSL 2
MV1 MSH1:MSL1 9
MSH1:MSL1
RP1 10
SPLIT (Difference)
MV2 MSH2:MSL2 11
MSH2:MSL2
RP2 12
(Difference)
PH / PV SH:SL 1
PTC
DL SH:SL (Difference) 4
ALM-R Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
CSV / PH / PL / PV / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
SLCD
DL / DV SH:SL (Difference) 4
CSV / PH / PL / PV / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
SLPC
DL / DV SH:SL (Difference) 4
CSV / PH / PL / PV / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 14 of 17

SLMC DL / DV SH:SL (Difference) 4

SMST-111 CSV / PH / PL / PV / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
SMST-121 PH / PL / PV SH:SL 1
PH / PL / PV SH:SL 1
SMRT CSV / RSV / SV / SVH / SVL SSH:SSL 2
DL SH:SL (Difference) 4
SBSD PH / PL / PV SH:SL 1
SLBC PH / PL / PV SH:SL 1
PV SH:SL 1
SLCC RSV / SV SSH:SSL 2
DV SH:SL (Difference) 4
STLD PV SH:SL 1
*1: SV, X02 to X14, PH, PL of PG-L13 are not normalizable.

• Calculation Blocks
Table 1.33-9 Relevant Data Item: Calculation Blocks (Data Connection) (1/2)

Model name Relevant data item Range Fomula number

ADD CPV SH:SL 1
MUL CPV SH:SL 1
DIV CPV SH:SL 1
AVE CPV SH:SL 1
SQRT CPV SH:SL 1
EXP CPV SH:SL 1
LAG CPV SH:SL 1
INTEG CPV SH:SL 1
LD CPV SH:SL 1
RAMP CPV SH:SL 1
LDLAG CPV SH:SL 1
DLAY CPV SH:SL 1
DLAY-C CPV SH:SL 1
AVE-M CPV / PREV SH:SL 1
AVE-C CPV / PREV SH:SL 1
FUNC-VAR CPV SH:SL 1
TPCFL CPV SH:SL 1
ASTM1 CPV SH:SL 1
ASTM2 CPV SH:SL 1
AND Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
OR Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
NOT Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
SRS1-S Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
SRS1-R Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
SRS2-S Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
SRS2-R Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
WOUT Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
OND Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
OFFD Irrelevant to normalization ― ―

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 15 of 17

TON Irrelevant to normalization ― ―

TOFF Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
GT Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
GE Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
EQ Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
BAND Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
BOR Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
BNOT Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
CALCU CPV SH:SL 1
CALCU-C CPV SH:SL 1

Table 1.33-10 Relevant Data Item: Calculation Blocks (Data Connection) (2/2)

Model name Relevant data item Range Fomula number

SW-33 Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
SW-91 Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
DSW-16 CPV / SD01-16 SH:SL 1
DSW-16C Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
DSET SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
CPV / HH / LL/ PH / PL/ PVP / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
DSET-PVI
VL SH:SL (Difference) 4
BDSET-1L DT01-DT16 Depending on the connected data 1 to 12
BDSET-1C Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
BDSET-2L DT01-DT16 / NX01-NX16 Depending on the connected data 1 to 12
BDSET-2C Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
BDA-L DT01-DT16 Depending on the connected data 1 to 12
BDA-C Irrelevant to normalization ― ―

• Faceplate Blocks
Table 1.33-11 Relevant Data Item: Faceplate Blocks (Data Connection)

Model name Relevant data item Range Fomula number

INDST2 PV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
INDST2S
MH / ML / MV MSH:MSL 3
PV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
INDST3
MH / ML / MV MSH:MSL 3
BSI Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
PBS5C Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
PBS10C Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
PV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
HAS3C
MH / ML / MV MSH:MSL 3

• SFC Blocks
Table 1.33-12 Relevant Data Item: SFC Blocks (Data Connection)

Model name Relevant data item Range Fomula number

_SFCSW Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
_SFCPB Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
PV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 16 of 17

_SFCAS MH / ML / MV MSH:MSL 3

• UNIT Instrument Blocks

Table 1.33-13 Relevant Data Item: UNIT Instrument Blocks (Data Connection)

Model name Relevant data item Range Fomula number

_UTSW Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
_UTPB Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
PV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
_UTAS
MH / ML / MV MSH:MSL 3
_UTSW-SN Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
_UTPB-SN Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
PV / SV / SVH / SVL SH:SL 1
_UTAS-SN
MH / ML / MV MSH:MSL 3

• Valve Pattern Monitors

The valve pattern monitor block does not have normalizable data item.
• Off-site Blocks
Table 1.33-14 Relevant Data Item: Off-site Blocks (Data Connection)

Model name Relevant data item Range Fomula number

PV / SV / SVH / SVL / SVPR SH:SL 1
FSBSET MV / OPHI / OPLO MSH:MSL 3
DL1 / DL2 / DV SH:SL (Difference) 4
BLEND MPSV / PV / SV / SVH / SVL / SVPR SH:SL 1

• FF Faceplate Blocks
Table 1.33-15 Relevant Data Item: FF Faceplate Blocks (Data Connection)

Model Fomula
Relevant data item Range
name number
FF-AI HH / LL / OUT_V / PH / PL / PV SH:SL 1
FF-DI Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
BKCL_IN / MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / SEL1- SEL3 /
FF-CS MSH:MSL 3
BKCL_SL1 - BKCL_SL3
BKCL_OUT / CSV / HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / RCAS_OUT / RSV SH:SL 1
BKCL_IN / MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO / RMV / ROUT_OUT MSH:MSL 3
FF-PID
SH:SL
DH 4
(Difference)
BKCL_OUT / CSV / HH / LL / PH / PL / PV / RCAS_OUT / RSV SH:SL 1
BKCL_IN / MH / ML / MV / OPHI / OPLO MSH:MSL 3
FF-RA
SH:SL
DH 4
(Difference)
BKCL_OUT / CSV / FST_VAL / PV / RCAS_OUT / RSV SH:SL 1
FF-AO
MV / OPHI / OPLO / READBACK MSH:MSL 3
FF-DO Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
FF-OS CSV / SV SSH:SSL 2
FF-SC OUT1_V / OUT2_V SH:SL 1
FF-IT CPV SH:SL 1
FF-IS CPV SH:SL 1
FF-MDI Irrelevant to normalization ― ―

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.33 General-Purpose Calculation Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C) Page 17 of 17

FF-MDO Irrelevant to normalization ― ―

FF-MAI Irrelevant to normalization ― ―
FF-MAO Irrelevant to normalization ― ―

Normalizable Data (Terminal Connection)

CPV is normalized or converted according to the range of itself.

SEE For more information about terminal connection, refer to:

ALSO 2.2, “Terminal Connection” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Data That Irrelevant to Data Normalization

The following data are irrelevant to data normalization.
• Data connected through switch blocks (SW-33, SW-91)
• Data connected through inter-station data link block
• Data connected through process I/O
• Data connected through software I/O
• Data connected to SUB terminal
• Data connected through sequence connection
• Data connected to MI, NB, CR and GM terminals of self-tuning PID controller block (PID-STC)
• Data connected to MV1 to MV8 items of a cascade signal distributor block (FOUT)
• Data connected to MV, MSH, MSL, MH, ML and RMV items of YS blocks
• Data items that indicating the high and low limits
(SH/SL/SSH/SSL/MSH/MSL/DSH/DSL/MSH1/MSL1/MSH2/MSL2)
If you want to normalize the above data, you can connect the data to a PVI block first and then connect to
the calculation block.

CENTUM-XL Compatible Action if CPV is not substituted in

Calculation
If the normalization of input/output signal is enabled and the CPV is not substituted in the calculation, at the
end of the calculation script, CPV=RV will be affixed.
In this case, the action will be as follows:
CPV: CPV is substituted by RV and output through OUT terminal.
digital filter: Activated (*1)
totalization: Activated (*1)
*1: In CENTUM-XL, the calculation blocks do not have digital filter and totalization features.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.34 Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33) Page 1 of 3

1.34 Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch

Block (SW-33)
The Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33) is used when changing three-position signal
paths.

Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33)

▼ Connection
The Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33) is a function block that changes signal paths in
accordance with the switch command sent from the operation and monitoring functions or other function
blocks. Up to three three-position switches can be handled simultaneously by one Three-Pole Three-Position
Selector Switch Block (SW-33).
Here is a function block diagram of the Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33).

Figure 1.34-1 Function Block Diagram of Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33).
Table 1.34-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Three-Pole Three-
Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O
terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
I/O
S10 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S11 x x x x x x
terminal

S12 x x x x x x
I/O

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.34 Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33) Page 2 of 3

terminal
I/O
S13 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S20 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S21 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S22 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S23 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S30 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S31 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S32 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S33 x x x x x x
terminal
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available

TIP Condition check and status manipulation signals of sequence connection cannot be handled by the Three-
Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33). Inter-station data link cannot be performed via the
block, either.

Function of 3-Pole 3-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33)

The SW-33 block performs input processing and calculation processing.
The SW-33 block does not have its own processing timing. The SW-33 block is never subject to scans. The
signal path of the SW-33 block is used at the timing when a function block at the connection destination is
executed.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing possible for the SW-33 block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of 3-Pole 3-Position Selector Switch Block

(SW-33)
The SW-33 block changes the 3-pole signal path via the operation and monitoring function or other function
blocks.

Calculation Algorithm
The Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33) changes signal paths in accordance with the
switch command sent from the operation and monitoring functions or other function blocks.
There is no restriction on the I/O direction of signals. S10, S20 and S30 terminals as well as the remaining
terminals can be used for input. However, as the three three-position switches are linked with one another,

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.34 Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33) Page 3 of 3

each three-position switch is always connected to a terminal at the same switch position.

Set Parameters
The parameters of the Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33) are shown as follows.
• Selector switch (SW)
A numeric value between 0 and 3
• Switch high limit (SWH)
A numeric value between 0 and 3
• Switch low limit (SWL)
A numeric value between 0 and 3
When setting the selector switch (SW) from the operation and monitoring functions, if the set selector switch
(SW) exceeds the switch high limit (SWH) or the switch low limit (SWL), a confirmation message appears.
When the operator performs confirmation operation, the content of the setting becomes effective.

Data Items – SW-33

Table 1.34-2 Data Items of Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-33)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

SW Selector switch x 0 to 3 0
SWH Switch high limit x 0 to 3 3
SWL Switch low limit x 0 to 3 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.35 One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-91) Page 1 of 3

1.35 One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block

(SW-91)
The 1-Pole 9-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-91) is used when changing nine-position signal paths.

One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-91)

▼ Connection
The One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-91) is a function block that changes signal paths in
accordance with the switch command sent from the operation and monitoring functions or other function
blocks. Only one nine-position switch can be handled by the One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block
(SW-91).
Here is a function block diagram of the One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-91).

Figure 1.35-1 Function Block Diagram of One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-91)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the One-
Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-91).
Table 1.35-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of One-Pole Nine-
Position Selector Switch Block (SW-91)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O
terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
I/O
S10 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S11 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S12 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S13 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S14 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S16 x x x x x x
terminal

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.35 One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-91) Page 2 of 3

I/O
S17 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S18 x x x x x x
terminal
I/O
S19 x x x x x x
terminal
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available

TIP Condition check and status manipulation signals of sequence connection cannot be handled. Inter-station
data link cannot be performed, either.

Function of 1-Pole 9-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-91)

The SW-91 block performs input processing and calculation processing.
The SW-91 block does not have its own processing timing. The SW-91 block is never subject to scans. The
signal path of the SW-91 block is used at the timing when a function block at the connection destination is
executed.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing possible for the SW-91 block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of 1-Pole 9-Position Selector Switch Block

(SW-91)
The SW-91 block changes the 9-pole signal path via the operation and monitoring function or other function
blocks.

Calculation Algorithm
The One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-91) changes signal paths in accordance with the
switch command sent from the operation and monitoring functions or other function block.
There is no restriction on the I/O direction of signals for the One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block
(SW-91). The terminals S11 to S19 can be used as the output terminal while the terminals S10 is used as the
input terminals, or vice versa, the terminal S10 can be used as the input terminal while the terminals S11 to
S19 are used as the output terminals.

Set Parameters
The parameters of the One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-91) are shown as follows.
• Selector switch (SW)
A numeric value between 0 and 9
• Switch high limit (SWH)
A numeric value between 0 and 9
• Switch low limit (SWL)
A numeric value between 0 and 9
When setting the selector switch (SW) from the operation and monitoring functions, if the set selector switch
(SW) exceeds the switch high limit (SWH) or the switch low limit (SWL), a confirmation message appears.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.35 One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-91) Page 3 of 3

When the operator performs confirmation operation, the content of the setting becomes effective.

Data Items – SW-91

Table 1.35-2 Data Items of One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block (SW-91)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

SW Selector switch x 0 to 9 0
SWH Switch high limit x 0 to 9 9
SWL Switch low limit x 0 to 9 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.36 Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-16) Page 1 of 3

1.36 Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-16)

The Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-16) is used when switching output constants (numeric data)
from one to the other is required.

Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-16)

▼ Connection
The Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-16) is a function block that outputs a constant (numeric value
data) in accordance with the switch command sent from the operation and monitoring functions or other
function blocks.
Here is a function block diagram of the Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-16).

Figure 1.36-1 Function Block Diagram of Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-16)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-16).
Table 1.36-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Selector Switch
Block for 16 Data (DSW-16)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available

Functions of Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-16)

The DSW-16 block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the DSW-16 block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the DSW-16 block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.36 Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-16) Page 2 of 3

4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-

16)
The DSW-16 block performs computation using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
▼ Output Velocity Limiter
The Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-16) outputs one of the values of the constants 1 through 16 in
accordance with the switch command sent from the operation and monitoring functions or other function
blocks. The value of the constant to be output can be limited by the output velocity limiter function.
When the selector switch (SW) is turned OFF (0), the previous value is held as the calculated output value
(CPV).
The output velocity limiter value can be defined in the Function Block Detail Builder.
Output Velocity Limiter: An allowed change per scan in the calculated output value (CPV).
The default is the scale span value.

Set Parameters
The parameters of the Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-16) are shown as follows.
• Selector switch (SW)
A numeric value between 0 and 16
• Constants 1 to 16 (SD01 to SD16)
Engineering unit data values

Data Items – DSW-16

Table 1.36-2 Data Items of Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-16)

Entry Permitted or Not

Data Item Data Name Range Default
(*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) CPV engineering unit value SL
SW Selector switch x 0 to 16 0
SD01 to Value in the same engineering unit
Constants 1 to 16 x 0
SD16 as CPV
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
Value in the same engineering unit
SH CPV scale high limit -----
as CPV

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.36 Selector Switch Block for 16 Data (DSW-16) Page 3 of 3

Value in the same engineering unit

SL CPV scale low limit -----
as CPV
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for DSW-16 block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.37 Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data (DSW-16C) Page 1 of 2

1.37 Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data (DSW-

16C)
Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data (DSW-16C) is used when switching outputting constants (text string
data) from one to the other.

Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data (DSW-16C)

▼ Connection
The Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data (DSW-16C) is a function block that outputs a constant (string
data) in accordance with the switch command sent from the operation and monitoring functions or other
function blocks.
Here is a function block diagram of the Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data (DSW-16C).

Figure 1.37-1 Function Block Diagram of Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data (DSW-16C)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data (DSW-16C).
Table 1.37-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Selector Switch
Block for 16 String Data (DSW-16C)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available

Functions of Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data (DSW-

16C)
The DSW-16C block performs input processing, calculation processing, and alarm processing.
The only processing timing available for the DSW-16C block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the EXP block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.37 Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data (DSW-16C) Page 2 of 2

3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data

(DSW-16C)
The DSW-16C block performs computation using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
The Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data (DSW-16C) executes the processing that outputs one of the
constants from data 1 to data 16 in accordance with the switch command sent from the operation and
monitoring functions or other function blocks.
When the selector switch (SW) is turned OFF (0), the previous value is held in the calculated output value
(CPV).

Set Parameters
The parameters of the Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data (DSW-16C) are shown as follows.
• Selector switch (SW)
A numeric value between 0 and 16
• Constants 1 to 16 (SD01 to SD16)
Set string data of up to 16 standard-width characters or 8 double-width characters.

Data Items – DSW-16C

Table 1.37-2 Data Items of Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data (DSW-16C)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
AF Alarm detection specification ----- -----
AOFS Alarm masking specification ----- -----
CPV Calculated output value Δ (*2) 16Byte NULL
SW Selector switch x 0 to 16 0
SD01 to SD16 Constants 1 to 16 x 16Byte NULL
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for DSW-16C block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.38 Data Set Block (DSET) Page 1 of 3

1.38 Data Set Block (DSET)

The Data Set Block (DSET) is used as buffers for engineering unit data entered from the operation and
monitoring functions.

Data Set Block (DSET)

▼ Connection
The Data Set Block (DSET) is a function block that outputs the engineering unit data entered from the
operation and monitoring functions.
Here is a function block diagram of Data Set Block (DSET).

Figure 1.38-1 Function Block Diagram of Data Set Block (DSET)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of Data
Set Block (DSET).
Table 1.38-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Data Set Block
(DSET)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O
terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Setting
OUT x x x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available

Functions of Data Set Block (DSET)

The DSET block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the DSET block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan
period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the DSET block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation
Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.38 Data Set Block (DSET) Page 2 of 3

Calculation Processing of Data Set Block (DSET)

The DSET block outputs arbitrary engineering unit data that is input via the operation and monitoring
function using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
▼ Output Velocity Limiter
The Data Set Block (DSET) outputs the data setpoint (SV) entered via key operation from the operation
and monitoring functions. The output is restricted by velocity limiting processing.
The output velocity limiter value is set on the Function Block Detail Builder.
Output Velocity Limiter: The allowed change per scan in the calculated output value (CPV).
The default is the scale span value.

Set Parameters
The parameters of Data Set Block (DSET) are shown as follows.
• Data setpoint (SV)
An engineering unit data value
• Data setpoint high limit (SVH)
An engineering unit data value
• Data setpoint low limit (SVL)
An engineering unit data value

SEE For more information about the setpoint value limiter, refer to:
ALSO “ Actions in the Automatic or Manual Mode” in “ Setpoint Value Limiter” in 1.4, “Control
Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks” in Function Blocks Reference Vol.1 (IM
33J15A30-01EN)

Data Items – DSET

Table 1.38-2 Data Items of Data Set Block (DSET)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
SV Data setpoint x SV engineering unit value SL
Value in the same engineering unit
SVH Data high - limit setpoint x SH
as SV
Value in the same engineering unit
SVL Data high - low setpoint x SL
as SV

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.38 Data Set Block (DSET) Page 3 of 3

OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0

UAID User application ID x ----- 0
Value in the same engineering unit
SH CPV scale high limit -----
as SV
Value in the same engineering unit
SL CPV scale low limit -----
as SV
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

SEE For more information about valid block modes for DSET block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.39 Data Set Block with Input Indicator (DSET-PVI) Page 1 of 3

1.39 Data Set Block with Input Indicator (DSET-

PVI)
Data Set Block with Input Indicator (DSET-PVI) is used when the function of the data set block (DSET) and
Input Indicator Block (PVI) applied to regulatory control are required simultaneously.

Data Set Block with Input Indicator (DSET-PVI)

▼ Connection
The Data Set Block with Input Indicator (DSET-PVI) is a function block that has the function of the Data Set
Block (DSET) as well as that of the Input Indicator Block (PVI) used for regulatory control.
This block performs the following two different processing simultaneously:
• Outputs arbitrary engineering unit data entered from the operation and monitoring functions.
• Indicate input signals sent from Process I/O and other function blocks.
Here is a function block diagram of the Data Set Block with Input Indicator (DSET-PVI).

Figure 1.39-1 Function Block Diagram of Data Set Block with Input Indicator (DSET-PVI)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of Data Set
Block with Input Indicator (DSET-PVI).
Table 1.39-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Data Set Block with
Input Indicator (DSET-PVI)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Calculation
IN x Δ x x
input
Calculation
OUT x x x x
output
Auxiliary
SUB x Δ x x
output
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Functions of Data Set Block with Input Indicator (DSET-PVI)

The DSET-PVI block performs input processing, calculation processing, output processing, and alarm
processing.
The only processing timing available for the DSET-PVI block is a periodic startup. Selections available for the
scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the medium-speed scan period
(*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.39 Data Set Block with Input Indicator (DSET-PVI) Page 2 of 3

SEE For more information about the types of input processing, output processing, and alarm processing
ALSO possible for the DSET-PVI block, refer to:
1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the input processing, refer to:
3., “Input Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the output processing, refer to:
4., “Output Processing” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Data Set Block with Input Indicator (DSET-

PVI)
The DSET-PVI block performs computation using its calculation algorithm and setup parameters.

Calculation Algorithm
▼ Output Velocity Limiter
The data setpoint (SV) set by the operation and monitoring functions is output under the restriction of
velocity limiting processing.
The value input from the IN terminal is converted to the calculated output value (CPV) and displayed.
The output velocity limiter value is defined in the Function Block Detail Builder.
Output Velocity Limiter: The allowed change per scan in the calculated output value (CPV).
The default is the scale span value

Set Parameters
The parameters of the Data Set Block with Input Indicator (DSET-PVI) are shown as follows.
• High-high limit alarm setpoint (HH)
An engineering unit data value.
• Low-low limit alarm setpoint (LL)
An engineering unit data value.
• High-limit alarm setpoint (PH)
An engineering unit data value.
• Low-limit alarm setpoint (PL)
An engineering unit data value.
• Velocity limit alarm setpoint (VL)
An engineering unit data value within the span of 0 to ± CPV.
• Data setpoint (SV)
An engineering unit data value.
• Data setpoint high limit (SVH)
An engineering unit data value.
• Data setpoint low limit (SVL)
An engineering unit data value.

SEE For more information about the setpoint value limiter, refer to:
ALSO “ Actions in the Automatic or Manual Mode” in “ Setpoint Value Limiter” in 1.4, “Control
Computation Processing Common to Controller Blocks” in Function Blocks Reference Vol.1 (IM

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.39 Data Set Block with Input Indicator (DSET-PVI) Page 3 of 3

33J15A30-01EN)

Data Items – DSET-PVI

Table 1.39-2 Data Items of Data Set Block with Input Indicator (DSET-PVI)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(MAN)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
AOFS Alarm masking specification ----- -----
Value in the same engineering unit
CPV Calculated input value Δ (*2) SL
as CPV
Value in the same engineering unit
SUM Totalizer value 0
as CPV
SV Data setpoint x Real quantity SL
SVH Data high - limit setpoint x Real quantity SH
SVL Data low - limit setpoint x Real quantity SL
High - high limit alarm Value in the same engineering unit
HH x SH
setpoint as CPV
Low - low limit alarm Value in the same engineering unit
LL x SL
setpoint as CPV
Value in the same engineering unit
PH High - limit alarm setpoint x SH
as CPV
Value in the same engineering unit
PL Low - limit alarm setpoint x SL
as CPV
VL Velocity limit alarm setpoint x 0 to ± CPV span (SH - SL)
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
Value in the same engineering unit
SH CPV scale high limit -----
as CPV
Value in the same engineering unit
SL CPV scale low limit -----
as CPV
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

SEE For more information about valid block modes for DSET-PVI block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.40 One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L) Page 1 of 3

1.40 One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L)

The One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L) is used to set numeric batch set data for a single batch in a group
or by selecting items.

One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L)

▼ Connection
The One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L) is a function block that selects and outputs arbitrary numeric
batch set data using a command switch (SW).
By using the command switch (SW), various setpoint values and control parameters for the feedback control
loop in the batch control loop, as well as setpoint values of the timer and counter used for sequence control
can be set.
In the One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L), the batch data including numeric data only can be stored up to
16 batch data.
Here is a function block diagram of the One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L).

Figure 1.40-1 Function Block Diagram of One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the One-Batch Data Set Block
(BDSET-1L).
Table 1.40-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of One-Batch Data Set
Block (BDSET-1L)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
J01
Calculation
to x Δ x x
output
J16
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Functions of 1-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L)

The BDSET-1L block performs calculation processing and alarm processing.
The processing timings available for the BDSET-1L block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup.
Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.40 One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L) Page 2 of 3

medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.

*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of alarm processing possible for the BDSET-1L block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of 1-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L)

The BDSET-1L block performs calculation processing based on the action of the command switch (SW). In
addition, it has the “setpoint value limiter function,” which is related to the calculation processing.

Action of the Command Switch (SW)

The One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L) performs the following processing in accordance with the value of
the command switch (SW).
Table 1.40-2 Processing Contents of One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L)

Operation example
SW Status
Processing content Operation source
(1)Sets batch data. Operation and monitoring
0 Setting up data
(2)Switches the SW from “0” to “1.” functions
(1)Waits for the completion of setup.
1 Waiting for the batch sequence Sequence control block
(2)Switches the SW from “1” to “2.”
(1)Distributes data to the output
Distributing data to the output
2 destinations. BDSET-1L block
destinations
(2)Switches the SW from “2” to “3.” (*1)
(1)Waits for the completion of batch
3 Operating the batch sequence operation. Sequence control block
(2)Switches the SW from “3” to “0.”
*1: Switching of the switch position from “2” to “3” is performed automatically by the BDSET-1L block.

Action during Status Manipulation via Sequence Connection

When a status manipulation signal is received from other function block connected via sequence connection,
data setting is performed. However, the value of the manipulation switch (SW) will not change.
The formats of the status manipulation command sent from other function block and the content of the
corresponding processing performed by the One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L) are shown below.
Element symbol.ACT.n
n=0 : All batch data (DT01 to DT16) are changed to “0.”
n = 1 to 16 : The specified data (DTnn) is set to the output destination.
n = 17 : All batch data (DT01 to DT16) are set to all output destinations.

Set Limit Function

The set limit function is a function that limits the value of the batch data (DTnn) set from outside to values
within a specified range (between high/low limits).
If the set value is outside the high/low limit range, a setting error occurs.
The high limit value (DHnn) and low limit value (DLnn) represent the high limit and low limit of Set data,
respectively. The high limit value (DHnn) and low limit value (DLnn) must be consistent with the range of the

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.40 One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L) Page 3 of 3

output destination.
The set limit function only checks the data set via the operation and monitoring functions. Data set from
other function blocks are not checked.
Setting to the output destination is performed even when batch data (DTnn) exceed the specified limits.

Set Parameters
The parameters of the One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L) are shown as follows.
• Batch data (DT01 to DT16)
Engineering unit data values at output destinations
• Command switch (SW)
A value between 0 and 3
• Set limit high limit (DH01 to DH16)
Engineering unit data values at output destinations
• Set limit low limit (DL01 to DL16)
Engineering unit data values at output destinations

Data Items – BDSET-1L

Table 1.40-3 Data Items of One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L)

Entry Permitted or Not

Data Item Data Name Range Default
(*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
SW Command switch x 0 to 3 0
DT01 to
Batch data x DLnn to DHnn 0
DT16
DH01 to Value in the unit at the connection
Set limit high limit x 10000
DH16 destination
DL01 to Value in the unit at the connection
Set limit low limit x 0
DL16 destination
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

SEE For more information about valid block modes for BDSET-1L block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.41 One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C) Page 1 of 3

1.41 One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C)

The One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C) is used to set string-type batch set data for a single batch
are set in a group or by selecting items.

One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C)

▼ Connection
The One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C) is a function block that selects and outputs arbitrary string-
type batch set data using a command switch (SW).
The One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C) can store up to 16 batch data, each containing only string
data.
Here is a function block diagram of One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C).

Figure 1.41-1 Function Block Diagram of One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the One-Batch String Data
Set Block (BDSET-1C).
Table 1.41-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of One-Batch String
Data Set Block (BDSET-1C)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
J01
Calculation
to x Δ x
output
J16
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ:Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link block
(ADL).

Functions of One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C)

The BDSET-1C block performs calculation processing and alarm processing.
The processing timings available for the BDSET-1C block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup.
Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the
medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.41 One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C) Page 2 of 3

SEE For more information about the types of alarm processing possible for the BDSET-1C block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-

1C)
The BDSET-1C block performs calculation processing based on the action of the command switch (SW).

Action of the Command Switch (SW)

The One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C) performs the following processing in accordance with the
value of the command switch (SW).
Table 1.41-2 Processing Contents of One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C)

Operation example
SW Status
Processing content Operation source
(1) Sets batch data. Operation and monitoring
0 Setting up data
(2) Switches the SW from “0” to “1.” functions
(1) Waits for the completion of setup.
1 Waiting for the batch sequence Sequence control block
(2) Switches the SW from “1” to “2.”
(1) Distributes data to the output
Distributing data to the output
2 destinations. BDSET-1C
destinations
(2) Switches the SW from “2” to “3.” (*1)
(1) Waits for the completion of batch.
3 Operating the batch sequence Sequence control block
(2) Switches the SW from “3” to “0.”
*1: Switching of the switch position from “2” to “3” is performed automatically by the One-Batch String Data Set
Block (BDSET-1C).

Action during Status Manipulation via Sequence Connection

Data setting is performed when a status manipulation signal is received from other function block connected
via sequence connection. However, the value of the command switch (SW) will not change.
The format of the status manipulation command sent from other function block and the content of the
processing performed by the One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C) are shown below.
Element symbol.ACT.n
n=0 : All batch data (DT01 to DT16) are replaced with null.
n = 1 to 16 : The specified data (DTnn) is set to the output destination.
n = 17 : All batch data (DT01 to DT16) are set to all output destinations.

Set Parameters
The parameters of the One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C) are shown as follows.
• Batch data (DT01 to DT16)
Set string data of up to 16 standard-width characters or 8 double-width characters.
• Command switch (SW)
A numeric value between 0 and 3.

Data Items – BDSET-1C

Table 1.41-3 Data Items of One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.41 One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C) Page 3 of 3

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
AF Alarm detection specification ----- -----
AOFS Alarm masking specification ----- -----
SW Command switch x 0 to 3 0
DT01 to DT16 Batch data x 16Byte -----
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

SEE For more information about valid block modes for BDSET-1C block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.42 Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L) Page 1 of 4

1.42 Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L)

The Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L) is used to set numeric-type batch data for two batches in a group
or by selecting specific items.

Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L)

▼ Connection
The Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L) is a function block that selects and outputs arbitrary batch set
data using a command switch (SW).
Various setpoint values and control parameters of the feedback control loop, as well as setpoint values of the
time and counter used for sequence control can be set.
Up to 16 current batch data and up to 16 next batch data can be stored. By switching the value of the
command switch (SW), the stored next batch data can be moved to the current batch data, or the current
batch data can be set to the output destination. The Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L) can only set
numeric data.
Here is a function block diagram of the Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L).

Figure 1.42-1 Function Block Diagram of Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the Two-Batch Data Set Block
(BDSET-2L).
Table 1.42-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of I/O Terminals of Two-Batch Data Set
Block (BDSET-2L)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
J01
Calculation
to x Δ x x
output
J16
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Functions of Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L)

The BDSET-2L block performs calculation processing and alarm processing.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.42 Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L) Page 2 of 4

The processing timings available for the BDSET-2L block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup.
Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the
medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of alarm processing possible for the BDSET-2L block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L)

The BDSET-2L block performs calculation processing based on the action of the command switch (SW) and
batch status (NXBS). In addition, it has the “setpoint value limiter function,” which is related to the
calculation processing.

Action of the Command Switch (SW) and Batch Status

(NXBS)
The Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L) performs the processing shown in the table below, in accordance
with the value of the command switch (SW).
The batch status (NXBS) indicates the status of the next batch data. When the value of the batch status
(NXBS) is other than “0,” it indicates that the setting of the next batch data (NX01 to NX16) has been
completed and the current batch data is ready for transfer. If the value of the batch status (NXBS) is “0,” it
indicates that the next batch data is not yet ready to be transferred to the current batch data.
If the batch status (NXBS) is left at “0,” the Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L) ignores the next batch
data. While the batch status (NXBS) remains “0,” the Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L) can be used
temporarily as the One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L).
Table 1.42-2 Processing Contents of Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L)

Operation example
SW Status Operation Operation from HIS
Processing content
source
(1)Moves the next data to
Transferring the next the current data.
0 data to the current (2)Switches the SW BDSET-2L (*1)
data from “0” to “1.”
(3)Sets NXBS to “0.”
(1)Waits for the setup to
Waiting for the batch be completed. Sequence
1
sequence (2)Switches the SW control block
from “1” to “2.”
(1)Distributes the current
(1)Set the next batch data from an
data to the output
Distributing the operation and monitoring functions, when
2 destinations. BDSET-2L
current data SW is “1,” “2,”or “3.”
(2)Switches SW from “2”
(2)Set a value other than “0” to NXBS.
to “3.”
(1)Waits for the
Operating the batch completion of batch. Sequence
3
sequence (2)Switches SW from “3” control block
to “0.”
*1: The Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L) transfers the next data to the current data when the command
switch (SW) becomes “0” and the value of the batch status (NXBS) becomes other than “0.” If the command
switch (SW) changes to “0” when the next batch data is yet to be set at the operation and monitoring functions,

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.42 Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L) Page 3 of 4

the Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L) waits for the value of the batch status (NXBS) to become other than “0.”
When a value other than “0” is set to the batch status (NXBS) after the next data has been set at the operation
and monitoring functions, the Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L) moves the next data to the current data,
then sets the value of the command switch (SW) to “1” to wait for the batch sequence.

Action during Status Manipulation via Sequence Connection

Data setting is performed when a status manipulation signal is received from other function block connected
via sequence connection. However, the value of the command switch (SW) will not change.
The format of the status manipulation command outputted from other function block and the content of the
processing performed by the Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L) are shown below.
Element symbol.ACT.n
n=0 : All current set data are changed to “0.”
n = 1 to 16 : Only the specified current data (DTnn) is set.
n = 17 : All current set data are set.

Set Limit Function

The set limit function is a function that limits the value of the current batch data (DTnn) and next batch data
(NXnn), both of which are set from outside, within a specified range (between high/low limits).
If the set value is outside the high/low limit range, a setting error occurs.
The high and low limit values (DHnn, DLnn) represent the high limit and low limit of set data, respectively.
The high and low limit values (DHnn, DLnn) must be consistent with the range of the output destination.
The set limit function only checks the data set via the operation and monitoring functions. Data set from
other function blocks are not checked.
Setting to the output destination is even allowed with the batch data (DTnn) exceeding the specified limits.

Set Parameters
The parameters of the Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L) are shown as follows.
• Current batch data (DT01 to DT16): Engineering unit data values of output destinations.
Arbitrary values can be selected and set as long as they can be indicated in the double-precision floating
format. Whether the value is within the range of the output destination is not checked during setting.
• Next batch data (NX01 to NX16): Engineering unit data values of output destinations.
Arbitrary values can be selected and set as long as they can be indicated in the double-precision floating
format. Whether the value is within the range of the output destination is not checked during setting.
• Command switch (SW): A numeric value between 0 and 3.
• Batch status (NXBS):
An integer value other than “0” set from the operation and monitoring functions.
Automatically changes to “0” when batch data setting action is performed.
• Set limit high (DH01 to DH16): Engineering unit data values of output destinations.
• Set limit low (DL01 to DL16): Engineering unit data values of output destinations.

Data Items – BDSET-2L

Table 1.42-3 Data Items of Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L)

Entry Permitted or Not

Data Item Data Name Range Default
(*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.42 Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L) Page 4 of 4

AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----

Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
SW Command switch x 0 to 3 0
NXBS Batch status x Integer of 0 or higher 0
DT01 to
Current batch data x DLnn to DHnn 0
DT16
NX01 to
Next batch data x DLnn to DHnn 0
NX16
DH01 to Value in the unit at the connection
Set limit high limit x 10000
DH16 destination
DL01 to Value in the unit at the connection
Set limit low limit x 0
DL16 destination
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

SEE For more information about valid block modes for BDSET-2L block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.43 Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C) Page 1 of 3

1.43 Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C)

The Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C) is used to set string batch data for two batches in a group
or by selecting items.

Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C)

▼ Connection
The Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C) is a function block that selects and outputs arbitrary batch
set data using a command switch (SW).
Up to 16 batch data can be stored for current output and for next output, respectively.
By changing the value of the command switch (SW), the stored next batch data can be moved to the current
batch data, or the current batch data can be set to the output destination. The Two-Batch String Data Set
Block (BDSET-2C) can only set string data.
Here is a function block diagram of the Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C).

Figure 1.43-1 Function Block Diagram of Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the Two-Batch String Data
Set Block (BDSET-2C).
Table 1.43-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of I/O Terminals of Two-Batch String Data
Set Block (BDSET-2C)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
J01
Calculation
to x Δ x
output
J16
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Functions of Two-Batch Data Set Block: Strings (BDSET-2C)

The BDSET-2C block performs calculation processing and alarm processing.
The processing timings available for the BDSET-2C block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup.
Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.43 Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C) Page 2 of 3

medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.

*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of alarm processing possible for the BDSET-2C block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Two-Batch Data Set Block: Strings (BDSET-

2C)
The BDSET-2C block performs calculation processing based on the action of the command switch (SW) and
batch status (NXBS).

Action of the Command Switch (SW) and Batch Status

(NXBS)
The Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C) performs the processing shown in the table below, in
accordance with the value of the command switch (SW).
The batch status (NXBS) indicates the status of the next batch data. When the value of the batch status
(NXBS) is other than “0, “ it indicates that the setting of the next batch data (NX01 to NX16) has been
completed and the current batch data is ready for transfer. If the value of the batch status (NXBS) is “0,” it
indicates that the next batch data is not yet ready to be transferred to the current batch data.
If the batch status (NXBS) is left at “0,” the Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C) ignores the next
batch data. While the batch status (NXBS) remains “0,” the Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C) can
be used temporarily as the One-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-1C).
Table 1.43-2 Processing Contents of Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C)

Operation example
SW Status Operation Operation from HIS
Processing content
source
(1)Moves the next data to
Transferring the next the current data.
BDSET-2C
0 data to the current (2)Switches the SW (*1)
block
data from “0” to “1.”
(3)Sets NXBS to “0.”
(1)Waits for the setup to
Waiting for the batch be completed. Sequence
1
sequence (2)Switches the SW control block
from “1” to “2.”
(1)Distributes the current
(1)Set the next batch data from an
data to the output
Distributing the BDSET-2C operation and monitoring functions, when
2 destinations.
current data block SW is “1,” “2,”or “3.”
(2)Switches SW from “2”
(2)Set a value other than “0” to NXBS.
to “3.”
(1)Waits for the
Operating the batch completion of batch. Sequence
3
sequence (2)Switches SW from “3” control block
to “0.”
*1: The Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C) transfers the next data to the current data when the command
switch (SW) becomes “0” and the value of the batch status (NXBS) becomes other than “0.” If the command
switch (SW) changes to “0” when the next batch data has yet to be set at the operation and monitoring
functions, the Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C) waits for the value of the batch status (NXBS) to
become anything other than “0.” When a value other than “0” is set to the batch status (NXBS) after the next

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.43 Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C) Page 3 of 3

data has been set at the operation and monitoring functions, the Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C) moves
the next data to the current data, then sets the value of the command switch (SW) to “1” to resume the batch
sequence.

Action during Status Manipulation via Sequence Connection

Data setting is performed when a status manipulation signal is received from other function block connected
via sequence connection. However, the value of the manipulation switch (SW) will not change.
The format of the status manipulation command outputted from other function blocks and the content of the
processing performed by the Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C) are shown below.
Element symbol.ACT.n
n=0 : All current set data are replaced with a null.
n = 1 to 16 : Only the specified current data (DTnn) is set.
n = 17 : All current set data are set.

Set Parameters
The parameters of the Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C) are shown as follows.
• Current batch data (DT01 to DT16)
Set string data of up to 16 standard-width characters or 8 double-width characters.
• Next batch data (NX01 to NX16)
Set string data of up to 16 standard-width characters or 8 double-width characters.
• Command switch (SW)
A numeric value between 0 and 3.
• Batch status (NXBS)
An integer value other than “0” set from the operation and monitoring functions.
Automatically changes to “0” when batch data setting action has been performed.

Data Items – BDSET-2C

Table 1.43-3 Data Items of Two-Batch String Data Set Block (BDSET-2C)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
AF Alarm detection specification ----- -----
AOFS Alarm masking specification ----- -----
SW Command switch x 0 to 3 0
NXBS Batch status x Integer of 0 or higher 0
DT01 to DT16 Current batch data x 16Byte -----
NX01 to NX16 Next batch data x 16Byte -----
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

SEE For more information about valid block modes for BDSET-2C block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.44 Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L) Page 1 of 3

1.44 Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L)

The Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L) is used to acquire numeric batch data.

Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L)

▼ Connection
The Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L) is a function block that acquires various control parameters of the
feedback control loop as well as data of the timer and counter used for sequence control, as batch data. The
Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L) only acquires numeric batch data.
Here is a function block diagram of the Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L).

Figure 1.44-1 Function Block Diagram of Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the Batch Data Acquisition
Block (BDA-L).
Table 1.44-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of I/O Terminals of Batch Data Acquisition
Block (BDA-L)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
J01
Calculation
to x Δ x x
output
J16
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Functions of Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L)

The BDA-L block performs calculation processing and alarm processing.
The processing timings available for the BDA-L block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup.
Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the
medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of alarm processing possible for the BDA-L block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.44 Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L) Page 2 of 3

For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:

5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L)

The BDA-L block performs calculation processing based on the action of the command switch (SW). In
addition, it has the “setpoint value limiter function,” which is related to the calculation processing.

Action of the Command Switch (SW)

The Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L) acquires engineering unit data from the connection destinations of
I/O terminals, when a value is set to the command switch (SW).
Data acquisition processing actions are shown below:
• When a value between 1 and 16 is set to the command switch (SW)
Acquire data from the I/O terminal (J01 to J16) which corresponds to the value of the manipulation
switch (SW), and changes the value of the command switch (SW) to “0.”
• When “17” is set to the command switch (SW)
Acquire data from all input terminals, and changes the value of the command switch (SW) to “0.”
• When “0” is set to the command switch (SW)
Data acquisition is not performed.

Set Parameter
The parameters of the Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L) are shown as follows.
Command switch (SW): An integer value between 0 and 17

Action during Status Manipulation via Sequence Connection

Data acquisition is performed when a status manipulation signal is received from other function block
connected via sequence connection. However, the value of the command switch (SW) will not change.
The format of the status manipulation command output from other function block and the content of the
processing performed by the Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L) are shown below.
Element symbol.ACT.n
n=0 : All acquired data are changed to “0.”
n = 1 to 16 : Only the specified data (DTnn) is acquired.
n = 17 : All data are acquired.

Set Limit Function

The set limit function is a function that limits the value of the batch data (DTnn), which is set from outside of
the Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L), within a specified range between high and low limits.
If the set data value is outside the high/low limit range, a setting error occurs.
The high limit value (DHnn) and low limit value (DLnn) represent the high limit and low limit of set data,
respectively.
The set limit function only checks the data set via the operation and monitoring functions. Data set from
other function blocks are not checked.
Therefore, as long as the data acquired by the Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L) has been received from
the input source through normal batch data acquisition, each value is stored in the batch data (DTnn) as is
even if the limits are exceeded.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.44 Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L) Page 3 of 3

Data Items – BDA-L

Table 1.44-2 Data Items of Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L)

Entry Permitted or Not

Data Item Data Name Range Default
(*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
Alarm detection
AF ----- -----
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS ----- -----
specification
SW Command switch x 0 to 17 0
DT01 to
Acquired data x DLnn to DHnn 0
DT16
DH01 to Value in the unit at the connection
Set limit high limit x 10000
DH16 destination
DL01 to Value in the unit at the connection
Set limit low limit x 0
DL16 destination
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

SEE For more information about valid block modes for BDA-L block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.45 Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C) Page 1 of 3

1.45 Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C)

The Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C) is to acquire string-type batch data.

Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C)

▼ Connection
The Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C) is a function block that acquires string-type batch data. The
Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C) only acquires string-type batch data.
Here is a function block diagram of the Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C).

Figure 1.45-1 Function Block Diagram of Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C)

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the Batch String Data
Acquisition Block (BDA-C).
Table 1.45-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of I/O Terminals of Batch String Data
Acquisition Block (BDA-C)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
J01
Calculation
to x Δ x
output
J16
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91) or inter-station data link
block (ADL).

Functions of Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C)

The BDA-C block performs calculation processing and alarm processing.
The processing timings available for the BDA-C block are a periodic startup and a one-shot startup.
Selections available for the scan period used to execute a periodic startup include the basic scan period, the
medium-speed scan period (*1), and the high-speed scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about the types of alarm processing possible for the BDA-C block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.1, "Input Processing, Output Processing, and Alarm Processing Possible for Each Calculation Block"
For more information about the alarm processing, refer to:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.45 Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C) Page 2 of 3

5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Calculation Processing of Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-

C)
The BDA-C block performs calculation processing based on the action of the command switch (SW).

Action of the Command Switch (SW)

The Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C) acquires string data from the connection destinations of I/O
terminals, when a value is set to the command switch (SW).
Data acquisition processing actions are shown below:
• When a value between 1 and 16 is set to the command switch (SW)
Acquire data from the I/O terminal (J01 to J16) which corresponds to the value of the manipulation
switch (SW), and changes the value of the command switch (SW) to “0.”
• When “17” is set to the command switch (SW)
Acquire data from all input terminals, and changes the value of the command switch (SW) to “0.”
• When “0” is set to the command switch (SW)
Data acquisition is not performed.

Action by Other Function Block Connected via Sequence

Connection
Data acquisition is performed when a status manipulation signal is received from other function block
connected by sequence connection. However, the value of the command switch (SW) will not change.
The format of the status manipulation command outputted from other function blocks and the content of the
processing performed by the Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C) are shown below.
Element symbol.ACT.n
n=0 : All acquired data are replaced with null.
n = 1 to 16 : Only the specified data (DTnn) is acquired.
n = 17 : All data are acquired.

Set Parameter
The set parameters of the Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C) are shown as follows.
Command switch (SW): An integer value between 0 and 17.

Data Items – Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C)

Table 1.45-2 Data Items of Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- -----
AF Alarm detection specification ----- -----
AOFS Alarm masking specification ----- -----
SW Command switch x 0 to 17 0
DT01 to DT16 Acquired data x 16Byte -----

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.45 Batch String Data Acquisition Block (BDA-C) Page 3 of 3

OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0

UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

SEE For more information about valid block modes for BDA-C block, refer to:
ALSO 1.3.2, "Valid Block Modes for Each Calculation Block"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.46 Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL) Page 1 of 5

1.46 Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL)

The Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL) is used for referencing data or relaying set data between
function blocks that belong to different FCS. This function block is automatically created when inter-
station data link is specified.

Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL)

The Inter-Station Data Link (ADL) is a function block that relays reference data or set data between
function blocks that belong to different FCS.
In addition to simple data reference and data setting, this block can be used for cascade connection
between controller function blocks.
Here is a function block diagram of the Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL).

Figure 1.46-1 Function Block Diagram of Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL)

Even in the case of connection between function blocks that belong to different FCS, if a connection
is specified using the same method for connecting function blocks belonging to the same FCS, the
Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL) is automatically created and inserted between the function
blocks specified for the connection. The Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL) is created on the FCS
with the function block that is the source of reference or setting.
However, the Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL) will not be created if any of the following
connection methods is used:
• Sequence connection (condition testing, status manipulation)
• Referencing from/setting to a process I/O other than contact I/Os, and referencing from/setting
to word data of a communication I/O or expanded communication I/O

TIP Expanded communication I/Os are available in FFCS-C and FFCS-V.

• Terminal connection to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91)

• Data link from the connection terminal which corresponds to the block mode or status of a
faceplate block
• Connection to an alarm input terminal of a Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.46 Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL) Page 2 of 5

• Setting character string data (Character string data may be referenced.)

• Connecting with OUT terminal of FOUNDATION fieldbus Faceplate Block.

TIP After downloading the engineering data in which portions not relating to the Inter-Station Data
Link Block (ADL) have been modified by a builder, a difference may be detected, indicating that
some changes have occurred to the Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL). This difference is
generated because the inter-station data link is recreated dynamically.

Function blocks in the control stations belonging to different projects can be connected in the same
way as for inter-station connection in the same project by using a multiple-project tag name for the
tag name of that function block. However, the HIS must be installed with the Multiple-Project
connection packages. Multiple-project tag names are specified in the following format:
tag name@project ID
Project ID can be defined on the Multiple-Project Connection builder for the upper level project. The
project ID can not be more than two alphanumeric characters. The maximum number of characters
that can be used for the entire multiple-project tag name is 16, including the @ mark and the
project ID.
An example of inter-station connection using Multiple-Project tags is illustrated as follows.

Figure 1.46-2 Example of Inter-Station Connection Using Multiple-Project Tag Names

SEE For more information about calling the tags that have identical tag names among the multiple
ALSO projects, refer to:
“ Identical Tag Names” in 6.2.1, “Operation and Monitoring Multiple Projects” in Optional
Functions Reference (IM 33J05H10-01EN)

Control Action
Three types of processing are available with the Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL): “data reference
only,” “data setting only” and “data reference and setting.”
Which processing is performed is determined automatically in accordance with the data that has
been linked when I/O connection was specified in the Function Block Detail Builder. The processing
types and corresponding I/O connections are shown below.
Processing type: I/O connection
Data reference: Data reference connection
Data reference and setting: Data setting connection, cascade connection
Data setting: Data setting connection from a specific function block
The cycle of periodic communication processing (processing timing) performed by the Inter-Station
Data Link Block (ADL) is specified by the FCS Constants Builder for each FCS to which the Inter-

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.46 Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL) Page 3 of 5

Station Data Link Block (ADL) belongs.

When the communication error occurs, NCOM (communication failure) is transmitted as the data
status to the function blocks or the data buffers connect to it.
Communication failure alarm is initiated only when the communication error occurred for a specified
number of times. So far, this specified number is fixed as 1, i.e., the alarm occurs whenever the
error is detected.

Data Reference
When processing type is “reference” or “reference and setting,” data is referred from the specified
reference destination. An example of data reference action is shown below.

Figure 1.46-3 Data Reference Action of Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL)

Data Setting
When processing type is “setting” or “reference and setting,” data is set to the specified setting
destination. When data with data status is set, its data status is transmitted just like the connection
between function blocks that both belong to the same FCS.
Before setting data, function blocks read back the set data. This readback action is also performed
when data is set between different FCS. Therefore, data reference (readback) is performed to every
data specified for “reference and setting” prior to setting. The referenced value in this readback
action is returned when a readback request is received from the setting source function block.
The data set examples in the case of data setting connection are shown as follows.

Figure 1.46-4 Data Setting Action

Figure 1.46-5 Cascade Connection

When the cascade connection between controller function blocks involves

different FCS, use the Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL) in accordance with
the following conditions.
• Set the control output action type of the upstream function block in
cascade to “positional.”
• The control period of the upstream function block in cascade should be set

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.46 Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL) Page 4 of 5

longer than the inter-station communication period.

Inter-Station Communication Period

▼ Inter-Station Data Link Communication Period
The inter-station communication period is a time required to complete all inter-station data link
processing within a FCS. It is specified in the FCS Constants Builder as a FCS-specific constant. The
default is one second.
During inter-station data link processing, inter-station data link processing at all points is completed
within the time in seconds corresponding to the “inter-station communication period.” The number
of inter-station communications points executed in one second is shown below. Points obtained by
rounding up the result of the following equation to the nearest multiple of 8.

The effective inter-station data link points are the points of the inter-station data link actually wired
in Control Drawing Builder or in Function Block Detail Builder or in Function Block Overview Builder
within each FCS. When the definition (wire connection) of the inter-station data link is changed, the
inter-station data link points to be processed in one second will be set again based on the set inter-
station data link points.

TIP • The inter-station communication period must be set so that the number of inter-station data
link points that can be communicated in one second, which is explained above, is 256 or less.
If the period is set such as to exceed 256 points, the actual inter-station communication
period will be longer than the set period.
• When the inter-station communication period is changed, online downloading will be required.

Re-Transmission Skip when Communication Error Detected

▼ Re-Transmission Skip when Inter-Station Data Link Error
When a communication error is detected during inter-station data link processing, inter-station
communication transmission skips for a period of time then retry the transmission in the interval of
this skip period. This re-transmission skip period is expressed as follows:
Re-transmission skip period =
(Inter-station communication period) • (re-transmission skip times)
The re-transmission skip times can be defined in the FCS Constants Builder as a FCS constant. The
default is 60.
If the inter-station communication period extends, the re-transmission skip period extends
accordingly.

Tag list reference

To identify destination stations of the ADL block, place tag list queries to the HIS that is specified in
the tag list reference station of FCS Properties.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.46 Inter-Station Data Link Block (ADL) Page 5 of 5

TIP Although ADL block has tag name information of the connected tags, it does not have information
about which tags are present in which station. Therefore, when tag name queries are placed to
the HIS with tag list, destination stations can be identified. This process is called tag list reference.

Control stations perform tag list referencing under the following conditions:
• When FCS is started for the first time
• When ADL block is added to online maintenance
• When destination station fails and when accessing data from other stations through control
station fails

TIP • If HIS of tag list reference fails, control station switches the tag list reference to a different
HIS. If HIS of a tag list reference does not have the tag list of the destination tag, control
station does not switch the tag list reference to a different HIS. As a result, communication
between the stations with these tags returns communication errors.
• You must specify only the HIS with the tag list of other station tags in the tag list reference
station of the FCS provider. If you have selected an HIS without the tag list of other station
tags, accessing other station data through control station fails.

SEE For more information about specifying tag list referenced station, refer to:
ALSO “ Specify Reference Station for Tag List” in 2.4.1, “Creating a New FCS” in Engineering
Reference Vol.1 (IM 33J10D10-01EN)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47 General-Purpose Arithmetic Expressions Page 1 of 1

1.47 General-Purpose Arithmetic Expressions

The general-purpose arithmetic expression description language is a programming language to
describe the arithmetic algorithm of the general-purpose calculation blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C).

General-Purpose Arithmetic Expressions

The general-purpose arithmetic expressions are used in order to define the calculation algorithm of
the general-purpose calculation blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C).
The following section describes the features of the general-purpose arithmetic expressions.
• Data items of an arbitrary function block can be referred to or set through the I/O terminal of the
general-purpose calculation blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C).
• Arithmetic expressions which handle character strings such as messages and block mode can be
described.
• Processing such as conditional jumps can be described by using control statements.
• Built-in functions which execute calculations for the temperature correction or pressure
correction, etc., can be used.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.1 Basic Items of the General-Purpose Arithmetic Expressions Page 1 of 4

1.47.1 Basic Items of the General-Purpose Arithmetic

Expressions
This section explains the basic items of the general-purpose arithmetic expressions.

Identifiers in the General-Purpose Arithmetic

Expressions
▼ Basic of Arithmetic Calculation Description
The identifiers in the general-purpose arithmetic expressions are the character strings that represent
the arithmetic expressions and variables and labels used by arithmetic expressions.
Various variables used by the labels of the arithmetic expressions or in the arithmetic expressions
require identifiers. They cannot become the object of calculation without identifiers.
The names of the identifiers have the following restrictions:
• Only the following characters are allowed to use; alphabet (A to Z and a to z), numbers (0 to
9), “_” (underscore), “$”, and “%.”
• Use an alphabet or “%” for the first character of the identifier name.
• Even though there is no limit to the length of the identifier, only the first eight characters are
valid for identification. Identifiers that have the same first eight-characters are treated as the
same identifier.
• Upper case and lower case of the alphabets are not distinguished.
• The identifiers which are defined as reserved words for the numerical calculation expressions
cannot be used other than the reserved purposes.

SEE For more information about the reserved words of the general-purpose arithmetic expression,
ALSO refer to:
1.47.9, "Reserved Words for Numerical and Logical Arithmetic Expressions"

Configuration of the General-Purpose Arithmetic

Expression
The general-purpose arithmetic expression consists of a program statement, which indicates the
start of an arithmetic expression; declaration statement, which declares variables; executable
statements, which execute calculations; and an end statement, which indicates the end of an
arithmetic expression.
The program statement and end statement can be omitted.
The following lines give the example of the order that each statement in the arithmetic expression:
program
declaration statement
executable statement
end

Express in Multiple Lines

When one statement is too long and does not fit in one line, use “\” or “//” in the end of the line.
One statement can be written in multiple lines if “\” or “//” is followed by a line break.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.1 Basic Items of the General-Purpose Arithmetic Expressions Page 2 of 4

The following example shows a statement in multiple lines:

program
{PIC100.MODE.MAN)=//
{TIC100.ALRM.HI}
{SW100.SV.3}=\
{TIC100.MODE.AUT}
end

Comment
When a line is headed by a “*” mark, the contents of the entire line are treated as a comment.
When “!” mark appears in the middle of a line, the texts from the right-hand side of “!” mark till the
end of the line are treated as a comment.
The following examples show a comment and a comment statement:
program !This portion is comment.
*This line is for comment.
if ({SW100.SW.3})then

Label
A label can be attached to a statement as a mark. A label can be used as a branch destination of a
goto statement.
The labels are written in the following format:
<identifier>:<statement>
An example of label is shown below:
program
label: if({SW100.SW.3})then

If there is no statement to the right-hand side of a label, it means that the label is for the next
statement. An example when no statement is written to the right-hand side of the label is shown
below:
program
label:
if({SW100.SW.3})then

Maximum Number of Lines for an Arithmetic Expression

A maximum number of lines for an arithmetic expression are 250 including comment and empty
lines. Among them, only 20 lines can be used for the statement descriptions. The lines listed below,
however, are excluded from the statement description lines:
• Program, end, else, end if, case, otherwise, end switch, labels, comments, and lines that consist
of declaration statements only.
• The second line and thereafter of a statements where ended with “\” or “//” mark.
• Empty lines
When a “case” statement and another statement are written in the same line, such as “case 1:i=1,”
the line is treated as a statement line.

Engineering Index
Even if the statement is written in 20 lines or less, a capacity overflow error may occur during the
compilation. This phenomenon occurs due to the limitation on the used variables, constants and the
number of operators.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.1 Basic Items of the General-Purpose Arithmetic Expressions Page 3 of 4

The possibility of a capacity overflow error is lowered if approximately 20 lines of assignment

statements with four terms, as shown below, are written:
A = A1 + A2 + A3 + A4

Data Types of the General-Purpose Arithmetic

Expression
The variables used in the general-purpose arithmetic expression have the same data types as other
programming languages.
The data types of variables are as follows:

Figure 1.47.1-1 Data Types

Range of values for each data type is shown below.

Table 1.47.1-1 Data Type

Data type Bits Minimum value Maximum value

Character string (*1) 8•n Not applicable Not Applicable
Integer 16 -32768 32767
Long integer 32 -2147483648 2147483647
38 38
Single-precision floating point (*2) 32 -3.402823 • 10 3.402823 • 10
308 308
Double-precision Floating point (*3) 64 -1.79769313486231 • 10 1.79769313486231 • 10
*1: 16 bytes maximum for a character string
*2: The number of digits may be displayed for a single-precision floating point is seven.
*3: The number of digits may be displayed for a double-precision floating point is fifteen.

The bit format of data for each data type is shown below. Integers and the mantissa part of real
numbers are two’s complement representation.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.1 Basic Items of the General-Purpose Arithmetic Expressions Page 4 of 4

Figure 1.47.1-2 Data Format of Each Data Type

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.2 Constants in General-Purpose Arithmetic Expressions Page 1 of 2

1.47.2 Constants in General-Purpose Arithmetic

Expressions
Constants in general-purpose arithmetic expressions are character strings which represent values
themselves. Three kinds of constants can be used, as follows:
• Integer constant (10, 20, etc.)
• Floating-point constant (1.5, 100.0, 1.5E10, etc.)
• Character string constant (“ABC”, “character string”, etc.)

Integer Constants in General-Purpose Arithmetic

Expressions
▼ Constant
The integer constants are the constants represented by integers.
The data type of integer constant is the long type. An integer constant can be represented by a
decimal number or a hex number. It is normally represented by a decimal number. When the hex
notation is used, add “$” at the beginning of a constant.
A decimal integer constant is represented by characters “0” through “9”. In addition to the numbers,
alphabets between “A” and “F” as well as between “a” and “f” are used for the hex notation.
Examples of constants are as follows:
Decimal integer constants: 5 10 65535
Hex integer constants: $5 $A $FFFF

Floating-Point Constants in the General-Purpose

Arithmetic Expressions
The floating-point constants are the constants represented by the mantissa field and exponent field.
The data type of floating-point constants is the double type. Only the decimal notation is allowed for
the floating point.
The following shows the expression methods of the floating point:
• Describe a decimal number with a decimal point.
• Describe in the <mantissa field>E<exponent field> format or <mantissa field>e<exponent field>
format.
<Mantissa field>: A decimal number with or without decimal point.
<Exponent field>: A decimal number without or with a sign.
When the <mantissa field> is x and the <exponent field> is y, the value of the constant is x •
y
10 .
The following shows examples of floating-point constants:
• Description of a decimal number with decimal point.
1.0, 15.8, 0.05
• Description in the <mantissa field>E<exponent field> format or <mantissafield>e<exponent
field> format.
1.0E5, 1.0e-5, 123E3

Character String Constants in General-Purpose

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.2 Constants in General-Purpose Arithmetic Expressions Page 2 of 2

Arithmetic Expressions
The character string constant is a constant that can represent a character string. A character string
constant can use both single-byte characters and double-byte characters.
A character string constant is represented by a character string enclosed by double quotes (“”). The
double quotations, line break, horizontal tab and back slash have to be replaced by the following
character strings:
Table 1.47.2-1 Notations of Special Characters

Special character Symbol Notation

Line break NL \n
Horizontal tab HT \t
Back slash \ \\
Double quote ” \”

Examples of the character string constants are as follows:

“abc”, “This is a character string”
“character string”, “1-st line\n2-nd line\n3-rd line”

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.3 Variables Page 1 of 6

1.47.3 Variables
A variable is a data which has a name and data type. A value can be referred to and set by a
variable.
There are two kinds of variables: I/O variables and local variables.

I/O Variables of the General-Purpose Arithmetic

Expressions
▼ Variables
The I/O variables are data items of the General-Purpose Calculation Block (CALCU, CALCU-C), such
as the calculated input value (RVn), calculation output value (CPVn), parameter (Pn), etc.
The data type of the calculated input value (RVn) and calculation output value (CPVn) is
automatically determined by the data item of the connection destination. In addition, the data type
of the parameter (Pn) is automatically determined by the type of the general-purpose calculation
block and the data item. It is not necessary to declare the parameter (Pn), which is used as the I/O
variable, in the arithmetic expression.

TIP • The block mode and alarm status are integer data.
• The size of the character string I/O variable is 16 bytes.

Usage of I/O Variables

The I/O variables are used for referring to or setting data of the connection destination of the I/O
terminal.

When Referencing by Wiring the I/O Terminals

If the I/O terminals are connected to other function blocks using the Function Block Detail Builder,
the data of other function blocks can be referred or set by way of I/O variables.
In order to refer or to set an I/O variable, use the data item name that corresponds to the
connected I/O terminal.
A maximum of eight input variables and four output variables can be declared by wiring the I/O
terminal.

Figure 1.47.3-1 Example of I/O Variables and Arithmetic Expression when Wired by the Builder

TIP • When the same data is connected to the input connection terminal and output connection

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.3 Variables Page 2 of 6

terminal, separate input variable and output variable are allocated.

• The I/O variables can be used in an expression. However, input variables (RV, RV1, RV2, ...)
cannot be used on the left-hand side of the assignment statement.

When the Data of Other Function Block is Specified by an

Element Symbol
Data of other function block can be specified by an element symbol and data item name.
A maximum of 24 input variables and 12 output variables can be declared as element symbol and
data item name.
There are three kinds of formats for handling the data of other function block (connection
information) in arithmetic expressions, as follows:
• Data connection (Data reference and setting)
<element symbol>.<data item name>
• Sequence connection (Data value reference and data value modification)
{<element symbol>.<data item name>.<condition specification|operation specification>}
• Sequence connection (Data status reference)
{<element symbol>.<data item name>=<condition specification>}
When a tag name is used as the element symbol, if a tag name starts with a number or “-” sign, the
computation may not be correct. Define an alias to use the tag.
The element symbols and data item names represent the data from other blocks can be assigned to
variables by compiler. The data items assigned to variables according to the following conditions:
• If the data of other function block is written on the left-hand side of an assignment statement, it
is assigned to an output variable.
• If the data of other function block is written both on the left-hand side of an assignment
statement, it is assigned to an input variable.
• If the same data as other function block is written both on the left-hand side of an assignment
statement and another place in the data connection format, it is assigned to an output variable.
• If the same data as other function block is written both on the left-hand side of an assignment
statement and another place in the sequence connection format, it is assigned to a separate
input variable and output variable.
• If the data of another function block is written at a place other than the left-hand side of an
assignment statement in the sequence connection format, the condition testing of the sequence
connection is always executed even if the statement is not executed.

Data Connection Using the Element Symbol (Data Reference

and Setting)
The following example shows an arithmetic expression by which the data reference and setting of
other function block are executed, using the element symbol.
program
TIC100.VN=FIC100.CPV*0.1
end

The second line is a statement which sets the calculation output value (CPV) of FIC100 multiplied by
0.1 to the I/O compensation value (VN).
When data reference and setting of other function block are executed by using the element symbol
instead of terminal connected by the Function Block Detail Builder, the following restrictions apply:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.3 Variables Page 3 of 6

• Connection between terminals and connection between stations cannot be specified because the
connection is not established by the builder.
• The I/O variable that the element symbol is assigned to is unknown, because the compiler
automatically assigns the element symbol to the I/O variable other than RV, RV1 through RV7,
CPV, CPV1 through CPV3.

Sequence Connection Using the Element Symbol (Data Value

Reference and Data Value Modification)
The following example shows an arithmetic expression which executes the sequence connection with
other function block using the element symbol.
program
{PIC100.MODE.MAN}={TIC100.ALM.HI}
{SW100.SV.3}={TIC100.MODE.AUT}
end

The second line is a statement which changes the block mode of PIC100 to MAN when the alarm
status of TIC100 is HI.
The third line is a statement which modifies the signal path by changing SV of the selector switch to
3 when the block mode of TIC100 is in the automatic (AUT) mode.

Sequence Connection by Using the Element Symbol (Data

Status Reference)
The following example shows an arithmetic expression for a sequence connection by using the
element symbol.
program
if({SW100.SW.3})then
{PIC100.MODE.AUT}={CAL100.ACT.ON}
end if
end

The second line is an “if” statement which tests whether SV of the selector switch is 3 or not. The
third line is a statement executed when the if statement in the second line is true. In this statement,
the block mode of PIC100 is switched to the automatic (AUT) mode when the CAL100 block is
started by a one-shot command.
The one-shot command to start the CAL100 might be triggered by any other blocks or occurs at the
time even before this block starts. It is irrelevant to this calculation block. In the other word, the
CAL100 started by the one-shot command have no relation with statement in the second line in this
calculation block.
On the contrary, the statement on the left-hand side which changes PIC100 to AUT is not executed
unless the result of the if statement in the second line is true and the third line condition written at
right-hand side is true at the same time.

Local Variables in General-Purpose Arithmetic

Expressions
The local variables in a general-purpose arithmetic expression are the variables declared in the
function block. They can be used only in the general-purpose calculation block where they were
declared. In order to use local variables, use them as intermediate variables after declaring the type.
The local variables do not retain values from the previous execution of the arithmetic expression. In
addition, the initial value is undefined. A maximum of ten local variables can be used in one general-
purpose arithmetic expression.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.3 Variables Page 4 of 6

Declaration of Local Variables

The local variables are declared as follows:
<type specifier><variable name>[,<variable name> .. ]
• <type specifier>: Specify the variable type.
The type specifiers include char *n, integer, long, float, and double. Use char *n as the type
specifier to declare a character string. By using this description, it is possible to use a character
string variable which is capable of expressing a character string of a maximum of n bytes.
• <variable name>: Specify a variable name as the identifier.
When multiple variable names are listed and separated by commas, more than one variable of
the same data type can be declared at once.

TIP • Specify the number of bytes, n, of the character string when a character string variable is
declared. When a character string variable where characters which require two bytes per
character, such as the Japanese character code, are stored, specify a value n by taking
characters that require two bytes into account.
• The maximum size of local variable of the character string type is sixteen bytes.

Implicit Declaration of Local Variables

When an undeclared variable is encountered, the data type of the variable is automatically decided
based on the first character of the variable name, and the variable is treated as a local variable. This
is called implicit declaration.
The relationship between the first character of the local variable name and the data type is as
follows:
• I: Integer
• L: Long integer
• F: Single-precision floating point
• C: Character string
• Others: Double-precision floating point
If the compiler control command, #implicit none is given, the implicit declaration of the local variable
is disabled. Then a compiler error occurs if a variable not declared is used.
Use the “#implicit none” instruction between the program statement and the end statement.

Tag Name of the General-Purpose Arithmetic

Expressions
When an undeclared variable name is followed by “.” (period), the variable is treated as a tag name.
When an arithmetic expression is compiled, whether or not the tag name has been defined by the
builder before is checked. A compiler error occurs if the tag name has not been defined.
In addition, the arithmetic expression cannot be compiled correctly if a tag name that starts with a
number or includes “-” (hyphen) even if the tag name has been registered. To define an alias or
replace the tag name with the one does not start with a number and does not include “-.”

Alias Definition of the General-purpose Arithmetic

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.3 Variables Page 5 of 6

Expressions
Alias definition is to substitute the name of an I/O variable with another character string. When an
alias of input variable is defined, I/O variables and data of other function block can be handled by
different name in the arithmetic expression. Write alias definitions at the beginning of arithmetic
expression.
The format of the alias definition is as follows:
alias <alias><word list>
How to write the word list is shown below.
Table 1.47.3-1 Word List of Alias Definition

Type of word list Format of word list Description example

Input variable RV, RV1 to RV7 alias FLOW RV1
Output variable CPV, CPV1 to CPV3 alias HOSEI CPV
Data connection <element symbol>.<data item> alias PRESS FIC001.PV
{<element symbol>.<data item>.<condition alias SEQ1
specification>} {TAG001.MODE.AUT}
{<element symbol>.<data item>.<operation alias SEQ2
Sequence specification>} {TAG002.MODE.AUT}
connection {<element symbol>.<data item> =<condition
alias SEQ3 {TAG003.PV=BAD}
specification>}
{<element symbol>.<data item> =<operation
alias SEQ4 {TAG004.PV=CAL}
specification>}

An example of arithmetic expression which includes alias definitions is shown below:

program
alias FLOW RV1
alias HOSEI CPV1
HOSEI=FLOW*0.1
end

An example of arithmetic expression which uses aliases for data reference and data setting of other
function block is shown blow:
program
alias FLOW FIC100.CPV
alias HOSEI TIC100.VN
HOSEI=FLOW*0.1
end

Character String Substitution

The character string substitution is to assign a specific character string to an identifier. Character
string substitution is executed by using the compiler control instruction, “#define.”
The format of the character string substitution is shown below:
#define<identifier><character string>
Conditions of a range which is recognized as a <character string> is as follows:
• Character string up to a line break. Continuous spaces immediately before the line break and
comment part are excluded.
• When “\” or “//” is used, the contents in the following line are recognized as a substituting
character string as well.
When the arithmetic expression is compiled, the identifier defined by the compiler control
instruction “#define” is replaced by assigned character string prior to compilation. Even if the

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.3 Variables Page 6 of 6

identifier appears in the character string, however, substitution is not performed.

An example of character string substitution is shown below:
program
#define OPEN 2
......
SI0100.MV=OPEN
SI0200.MV=OPEN
end

The “OPEN” identifier in this arithmetic expression is the substitution of “2”.

Using a literal string to substitute a numeric string, the program scripts become more intelligible.
In order to define a character string which includes an arithmetic expression using the “#define”
compiler control instruction, enclose the arithmetic expression by “( )”. It might be necessary to
enclose the corresponding arithmetic expression by “( )” to obtain the desired arithmetic expression,
because the “#define” compiler control instruction is a substitution of the character string. The
following example shows an improper substitution of arithmetic expression:
program
#define MAXLEN 256
#define GOOD (MAXLEN-1)! Good example
#define BAD MAXLEN-1! Bad example
......
i1=GOOD*5!(MAXLEN-1)*5Calculated like this
i2=BAD*5!Calculated as MAXLEN-1*5, i.e., calculated as MAXLEN-(1*5)
......
end

In this example, (256-1) • 5=1275 is expected as the result of the calculation.

But, i2 is resulted in 251 incorrectly while i1 is resulted in 1275 correctly because of different
calculation priorities.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.4 Operators Page 1 of 3

1.47.4 Operators
The following operators can be used in the general-purpose arithmetic expressions:
• Binomial operator
• Unary arithmetic operator
• Relational operator
• Equality operator
• Binary logical operator
• Unary logical operator
• Bitwise logical operator
• Bitwise shift operator

Binomial Arithmetic Operator

▼ Operators
Calculation with a binomial arithmetic operator can be executed to any numerical data.
Usable binomial arithmetic operators are as follows:
• +: Addition
• -: Subtraction
• *: Multiplication
• /: Division
• mod: Remainder
When an integer is divided by another integer, the digits to the right of the decimal point are
truncated for the quotient.
If the operand of a mod calculation is a real number, the fractional part of the operand is rounded
off and the operand is converted to a long integer (long) type prior to the calculation.
Insert a space before and after “mod.”

Unary Arithmetic Operator

Calculation with an unary arithmetic operator can be executed to any numerical data.
Usable unary arithmetic operators are as follows:
• +: Positive
• -: Negative
+ retain the sign of the operand.
- switch the sign of the operand from positive to negative or negative to positive.

Relational Operators
Calculation with a relational operator can be executed to any numerical data and any character
string data.
Usable unary relational operators are as follows:
• <: Smaller than
• >: Greater than
• <=: Equal to or smaller than

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.4 Operators Page 2 of 3

• >=: Equal to or larger than

The result of the calculation by a relational operator is the integer type. The value of the calculation
result becomes true (1) if the relationship between the two sides connected by the relational
operator is satisfied, or becomes false (0) if it is not satisfied.

Equality Operators
Calculation with an equality operator can be executed to any numerical data and any character
string data.
Usable equality operators are as follows:
• ==: Equals
• <>: Not equals
The result of the calculation with the equality operator is the integer data. The value of the
calculation result becomes 1 if the relationship between the two sides connected by the equality
operator is satisfied, or becomes 0 if it is not satisfied. When both the equality operator and
relational operator are used in the same arithmetic expression, the relational operator is evaluated
first.
When a comparison of real numbers is executed by the equality operator, it is determined to be
different even if the values of both sides differ slightly. Use relational operators (>=, <=, >, <) to
compare real numbers.

Binary Logical Operators

Calculation with a binary logical operator can be executed to any numerical data.
Usable binary logical operators are as follows:
• and: AND
• or: OR
• eor: Exclusive OR
The logical values of both sides become true if any value other than 0, and false if 0. The value of
the calculation result becomes 1 if the logical calculation result is true and 0 if false.
The calculation result is the integer type.
Insert a space before and after a binary logical operator.

Unary Logical Operator

Calculation with the unary logical operator can be executed to any numerical data.
Usable unary logical operator is as follows:
• not: Negation
The logical value of the operand becomes true if the value is anything other than 0, and false if 0.
The value of the calculation result becomes 1 if the result of the logical calculation is true, and 0 if
false.
The calculation result is the integer type.
Insert a space before and after the unary logical operator.

Bitwise Logical Operators

Calculation with a bitwise logical operator can be executed to any numerical data.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.4 Operators Page 3 of 3

Usable bitwise logical operators are as follows:

• &: Bitwise AND
• |: Bitwise OR
• ^: Bitwise exclusive OR
• –: One’s complement (unary operator)
If the operand of a bitwise binary logical calculation is a real number, the fractional part of the
operand is rounded off and the operand is converted to the long integer (long) type prior to
calculation.
The logical calculation is executed bit-by-bit to the values on both sides.

Bitwise Shift Operators

Calculation by a bitwise shift operator can be executed to any numerical data.
Usable bitwise shift operators are as follows:
• <<: Leftward bit shift
• >>: Rightward bit shift
• <@: Leftward cyclic shift
• >@: Rightward cyclic shift
An example of the calculation operation when described as <expression 1><shift
operation><expression 2> is as follows:
• <expression 1> is shifted by bit or cyclic-shifted for the number of times specified by the value of
<expression 2>. Arithmetic shift is executed for the bit shift. When the bits are shifted rightward,
the original most significant bit is duplicated as the new most significant bit. 0 is always entered
to the least significant bit when the bits are shifted leftward.
• When <expression 1> or <expression 2> is the floating point type, the fractional part of the
operand is rounded off and the operand is converted to the long integer (long) type prior to
calculation.
• When <expression 1> is the integer type, the remainder of <expression 2> divided by 16 is used
as the number of shift applied to <expression 1>.
• When <expression 1> is the long type or real type, the remainder of <expression 2> divided by
32 is used as the number of shift applied to <expression 1>.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.5 Arithmetic Expressions Page 1 of 4

1.47.5 Arithmetic Expressions

An arithmetic expression refers to a statement which satisfies one of the following conditions:
• It is a function, constant, or variable.
• It is a statement which connects functions, constants and variables by an operator.
• It is a statement which connects arithmetic expressions by an operator.

Arithmetic Expressions
▼ Arithmetic Expressions
An arithmetic expression can be described using the following format in general-purpose arithmetic
expressions:
• <function>
• <constant>
• <variable>
• (<expression>)
• <expression><binomial operator><expression>
• <unary operator><expression>
• <expression><equality operator><expression>
• <expression><relational operator><expression>
• <expression><binary logical operator><expression>
• <unary logical operator><expression>
• <expression><bitwise binary logical operator><expression>
• <bitwise unary logical operator><expression>
• <expression><bitwise shift operator><expression>

Priority Order
The priority order of the calculations is shown in the following table:
Table 1.47.5-1 Priority Order of the Calculations

Calculation Symbol (Operator) Association rule Priority

Parenthesis () Left to right 1 (Highest)
Function Function Left to right 2
Unary operator — (not) - (negative) + (positive) Right to left 3
Multiplication and division * / MOD Left to right 4
Addition and subtraction +- Left to right 5
Shift operation << >> <@>@ Left to right 6
Relational operator < <= > >= Left to right 7
Equality operator == <> Left to right 8
Logical operator & Left to right 9
Logical operator ^ Left to right 10
Logical operator | Left to right 11
Logical operator and Left to right 12
Logical operator eor Left to right 13

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.5 Arithmetic Expressions Page 2 of 4

Logical operator or Left to right 14 (Lowest)

Data Type Conversion

When the operands on both sides of the operator that requires two operands have different data
types, the data type of one operand is automatically converted to match the other data type which
can handle larger data. The rules of data type conversion are shown in the following table. The table
shows the data types of the operands and calculation results.
Table 1.47.5-2 Data Type Conversion Rules

Right-hand side(*1)
Left-hand side(*1)
integer long float(*2) double
integer I•I→I L•L→L D•D→D D•D→D
long L•L→L L•L→L D•D→D D•D→D
float(*2) D•D→D D•D→D D•D→D D•D→D
double D•D→D D•D→D D•D→D D•D→D
*1: I: integer type
L: long type
D: double type
*2: The float type is converted to the double type unconditionally.

TIP • Calculation is not allowed if the character string data and numerical data are mixed. Also, no
data type conversion is executed between the character string type and numerical type.
• If either operand is the double type, the other operand will also be converted to the double
type. Accordingly, the calculation result becomes the double type.
• If either operand is the long type and the other is integer, the other operand is converted to
the long type. The calculation result becomes the long type.
• If both operands are integer type, the calculation result remains integer type.

Comparison of Character Strings

Character strings can be compared as a character string operation. The relational operator and
equality operator can be used for character comparison. Character strings cannot be processed by
the general-purpose arithmetic expression description.

Character String Comparison Method

The character string comparison method follows the rules below:
• The comparison of characters is executed by comparing the internal codes of the characters. The
internal codes are compared as unsigned 8-bit values.
• Spaces is subject to comparison.
• Comparison of character strings is executed character-by-character from the first character of the
left-hand side and right-hand side.

Test Conditions of the Character String Comparison

Testing of large and small between character strings follows the rules below:
• When both sides are exactly the same character strings, the two sides are evaluated as equal.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.5 Arithmetic Expressions Page 3 of 4

• When at least one character is different, the comparison starts from the character closest to the
beginning among the different characters. The character string with a character which has a
larger internal code as a result of comparison is evaluated as the larger one.
• When the lengths of the character strings are different, the longer character string is evaluated
as the larger one.

Assignment Statement
An assignment statement refers to a statement which has a variable on the left-hand side and an
expression on the right-hand side, and they are connected by the “=” symbol. An assignment
statement substitutes the left-hand side variable by the calculation result of the right-hand side
expression.
It is necessary in the assignment statement for both of the right side and left side to be the
numerical type or character string type.
The format of the assignment statement is as follows:
<variable> = <expression>
• <variable>: Variable to which the value of <expression> calculation should be assigned.
• <expression>: Expression that calculates the substituting value for the <variable>.

Numerical Value Substitution

Two variables put on each side of “=” symbol forms a substitution formula. If the data types on
each side of expression are different, the data type of the right-hand side expression is converted to
the data type of the left-hand side variable.
Combinations of the left hand and right hand which may cause an overflow or loss of digits are
shown in the following table:
Table 1.47.5-3 Combinations of the Left-hand Side and Right-hand Side which may Cause an
Overflow or Loss of Digits

Right-hand side(*1)
Left-hand side(*1)
integer long float double
integer A A A
long A A
float B A, B
double
*1: Blank: No problem
A: An overflow may occur.
B: Loss of digits may occur.

TIP • Extend the sign of the value before assigning a value of the integer type to a long-type
variable.
• An overflow error occurs when the substituting value exceeds the handling range for the
integer type.
• When a variable of the integer type is substituted by a value of the real type, round off the
substituting value at the first digit after the decimal point prior to substitution. Use the “int”
built-in function to truncate after the decimal point.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.5 Arithmetic Expressions Page 4 of 4

Character String Substitution

When the entered character string longer than the allowed size of the character string variable, the
characters for the character string size are inserted from the beginning of the character string.
Characters which cannot fit are discarded.
When a character string shorter than the size of the character string variable is entered to a
character string variable, a terminator is added to the end of the character string. The size of the
substituted character string variable becomes the size of the character string before the terminator.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.6 Control Statements Page 1 of 3

1.47.6 Control Statements

The control statement is a statement for controlling the execution order of arithmetic expressions.
There are four kinds of control statements for testing conditions and selections as follows:
• if statement
Condition testing
• switch statement
Multiple-branches processing
• goto statement
Unconditional jump
However, jump cannot be specified if the execution of the arithmetic expression goes backwards.
• exit statement
Jumps to the “end” statement unconditionally.

if
▼ Control Statements
The “if” statement is used to control the execution of arithmetic expressions by the condition(s) of
the expression.
The format of the “if” statement is shown below:

Format 1
if (<expression>)<statement>
• <expression>: Give the expression to be evaluated in the numerical or character string format.
• <statement>: A statement which will be executed when the expression is true.
When the “if” statement above is executed, <expression> is calculated. <statement> is executed
only when the result of the <expression> is true (<>0).

Format 2
if (<statement>)then
....
[else
....
]
....
end if
....

When the “if” statement above is executed, <expression> is evaluated first. Further processing will
be determined depending on the evaluation result.
• When the result of <expression> is true (<>0), after executing the statements from the one
after “then” to the one before “else”, the execution jumps to the statement after the “end if”
statement. When the “else” statement does not exist, the statements after “then” will be
executed.
• When the result of <expression> is false (==0), if the “else” statement exists, the statements
after “else” will be executed. When the “else” statement does not exist, the statements
after “end if” statement will be executed.

Format 3

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.6 Control Statements Page 2 of 3

if (<expression>)then
....
else if (<expression>)then
....
[else
....
]
....
end if
....

When the “if” statement above is executed, the <expression> is evaluated first. Further processing
will be determined depending on the evaluation result.
• When the result of the <expression> in the “if” statement is true (<>0), after executing the
statements starting from the statement after “then” which corresponds to <expression>, to the
statement before the “else if” statement, the execution jumps to the statement after the “end if”
statement.
• When the result of the <expression> in the “if” statement is false (==0), the conditional
expression in the next “else if” statement is evaluated.
• When the result of the <expression> in the “if” statement is false (==0) and the result of the
<expression> in the “else if” statement is true (<>0), if there is an “else if” statement after
the “then” statement, the statements starting from the one after “then” statement to the one
before “else if” statement will be executed, and the execution jumps to the statement after
the “end if” statement.
If there is no “else if” statement after “then” statement and an “else” statement exists, the
statements starting from the one after the “then” statement to the one before the “else”
statement will be executed, and the execution jumps to the statement after the “end if”
statement.
If there is no “else if” statement nor “else” statement after the “then” statement, the statements
following the “then” statement will be executed.
• When the result of the <expression> in the “if” statement is false (==0) and the result of the
<expression> in the “else if” statement is false (==0), if an “else if” statement exists after
the “then” statement, the “else if” statement will be executed in the same way as in the case
described above.
If there is no “else if” statement exists after the “then” statement but the “else” statement exists,
the statements following the “else” statement will be executed.
If there is no “else if” statement or “else” statement, the statements following the “end if”
statement will be executed.
While the processing can jump out of the “if” to “end if” statement range by a “goto” statement, the
execution cannot jump to inside the “if” to “end if” statement range from outside of the “if”
statement.

switch
The switch statement is used to branch depending on the matching condition of expression with any
of the multiple constant values.
switch (<expression>)
case <constant>[,<constant>]...:
....
[case <constant>[,<constant>...]:
....
[otherwise:
....
]]
end switch

• <expression>

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.6 Control Statements Page 3 of 3

Give the expression to be evaluated in the integer or character string format.

• <constant>
A constant to be compared with the <expression>. Specify a value of the same data type as that
of the <expression> in the “switch” statement. Multiple constants can be listed.
When the switch statement above is executed, the value of the <expression> is calculated first. The
processing will be branched depending on the result of the comparison between the <expression>
value and the <constant>. The branch algorithm is shown below:
• When a <constant> of the same value as that of the <expression> exists, the processing
branches to the statement after the “case” statement which includes the <constant> of the same
<expression> value. After executing to the statement before the next “case” statement, the
processing jumps to the statement after the “end switch” statement.
• When there is no <constant> that is the same as the <expression> value and there is
an “otherwise” statement, the processing branches to the statement after the “otherwise”
statement.
• When there is no <constant> that is the same as the <expression> value and there are
no “otherwise” statement, the processing branches to the statement after the “end switch”
statement.
While the processing can jump out of the “switch” to “end switch” statement range by a “goto”
statement, the execution cannot jump to inside the “switch” to “end switch” statement range from
outside of the “switch” statement.
The statement following the “case” statement can be written in the same line as the “case”
statement. Even though a line which only has a “case” statement is not counted as an execution
statement, it will be counted as an execution statement if a statement is written in the same line as
the “case” statement.

goto
The “goto” statement unconditionally jumps to the line with the specified label.
The “goto” statement, however, cannot specify a label before the “goto” statement itself.
goto <label>
A compiler error will occur if the label specified by the “goto” statement is located prior to the “goto”
statement, or if the specified label does not exist in the arithmetic expression.

exit
The “exit” statement unconditionally jumps to the “end” statement. The “exit” statement can be
placed anywhere in the arithmetic expression.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.7 Error Handling Page 1 of 3

1.47.7 Error Handling

This section describes the causes of errors occurred during the execution of general-purpose
arithmetic expression and how to handle the errors as well as the details of error codes.

Error in the Arithmetic Processing

▼ Error Handling
The cause of errors occurred during the execution of the assignment processing and calculation
processing, as well as how to handle the errors will be explained.

Causes of Computation Errors

Causes of the computation errors are as follows:
• When the computation result overflows.
• When division by 0 is executed.
• When a calculation is executed to an imaginary number.
• When X ≤ 0 in log (X).
• When X < 0 and Y is a decimal fraction in power (X, Y).
• When X < 0 in sqrt (X).
• When larger than X≈709.783 in exp (X).

Computation Error Handling

The handling when a computation error occurs is as follows:
• The calculation processing and the assignment processing are immediately stopped.
The value in the variable does not change.
• The following maintenance information is saved in the General-Purpose Calculation Block (CALCU,
CALCU-C).
Statement number where the error occurred. (ERR)
Error code
All local variables

Error in Conditional Expression

If an error occurs during the calculation of a conditional expression, the calculation is stopped due to
a calculation error.

Arithmetic Expression Interpreter Error Code

The arithmetic expression interpreter error codes, which occur when statements are executed, are
as follows:
• Category error code
This error code indicates the cause of the error.
• Detailed error code
The contents are different depending on the category error code.
If [Suppress system alarm when CALCU calculation error occurs] is not enabled, a system alarm will
be initiated over a calculation error.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.7 Error Handling Page 2 of 3

The category error code and the detailed error code are output to the operation and monitoring
functions output as a system alarm message. The output format of the error code is shown below.
tag_name tag_comment CALCULATION ERROR LINE=nnnnnn CODE=xxxxxx-yyyy
nnnnnn : Line number
xxxxxx : Category error code (decimal)
yyyy : Detailed error code (hex)
The category error codes include the calculation error, errors specific to the arithmetic expression,
execution control error, general error of the built-in function, and other errors.
The details of the category error and detailed error codes are shown below.

Calculation Error Codes

Table 1.47.7-1 Calculation Error Codes

Code Description Remark

1 Overflow caused by calculation
2 Overflow caused by data type conversion
3 Division by 0
4 Underflow (reserved)
Including a division by 0 for a
5 Invalid calculation occurred.
real number.
10 Array index is out of range.
11 Attempted to set a value to a constant.
The character string type is specified to a part where only the
12
numerical type is allowed.
The numerical type is specified to a part where only the character
13
string type is allowed.
14 The numerical type and the character string type are mixed.
20020 Calculation stack overflow.
Exceeded the range of character string area to be used by
20021
calculation.

Error Codes Specific to the Arithmetic Expression

The following table shows the error codes specific to the arithmetic expression.
Table 1.47.7-2 List of Error Code Specific to the Arithmetic Expression

Detailed error code

Code Description
(*1)
70 Exceeded the maximum number of executable lines.
71 Attempted to execute a program which does not follow the grammar.
80 to
Reserved
82
83 Attempted to access the input variable whose number is out of range. x
84 Attempted to access the output variable whose number is out of range. x
Attempted to access the parameter variable whose number is out of
85 x
range.
86 Attempted to set to the input variable. x

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.7 Error Handling Page 3 of 3

87 Attempted to set to the pulse count value. x

*1: x: Detailed error code exists
Blank: Detailed error code does not exist

The detailed error code is a code that indicates the serial number of the data item name where the
error occurred.
The following table is a list of detailed error codes:
Table 1.47.7-3 List of Detailed Error Codes

Code Data item name

0 RV of CALCU or CALCU-C, CPV
1 to 31 RVn, CPVn
0 to 7 P01 to P08

Execution Control Error Codes

Table 1.47.7-4 List of Execution Control Error Codes

Code Description
20430 Attempted to execute an unsupported statement.
20431 Attempted to execute an unsupported built-in function.
20432 Attempted to access an unsupported variable.
20433 Attempted to use an unsupported operator.

Built-In Function Generic Error Codes

Table 1.47.7-5 List of Built-In Function Generic Error Codes

Code Description
800 Overflow was detected in the built-in function calculation.
801 Division by zero was detected in the built-in function calculation.
802 The square root of a negative value was calculated by a built-in function.
803 Error in the argument of power() or log().
804 The absolute value of an argument to a trigonometric function is too large to calculate.
805 An error occurred by the mathematical built-in function.
807 The low-limit value is larger than the high-limit value.
810 The number of arguments for a built-in function is incorrect.
811 The type of the argument for a built-in function is incorrect.
895 The first argument of stpvcalc is not between “00” and “99.”
896 The result of stpvcalc is out of the range “00” to “99.”

Other Errors
Table 1.47.7-6 List of Other Error Codes

Code Description
-1 to 32767 Internal error

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.8 Built-In Functions Page 1 of 6

1.47.8 Built-In Functions

The built-in functions of the general-purpose arithmetic expression execute calculations according to
the given arguments and return calculation results.
The details of the built-in functions that can be used in the general-purpose arithmetic expression
description language are described in this section.

Built-In Functions
▼ Built-In Functions
The built-in functions are the applicable functions already built in the system. The built-in functions
include general arithmetic functions, bit operation functions, trigonometric functions, natural
logarithm, temperature and pressure correction functions and so on.
Specify one variable or constant to the built-in function as a parameter. Expressions such as i+1 and
d/10.0, or built-in function calls may not be specified as an argument.

SEE For more information about The causes of errors occurred during the execution of built-in
ALSO functions and how to handle the errors as well as the details of error codes, refer to:
1.47.7, "Error Handling"

Arithmetic Functions
These functions execute arithmetic calculations.
The details of the arithmetic functions are as follows.

Absolute Value – labs(arg)

“labs” is a function that returns the absolute value of the argument. Both the argument and result
are the long type.

Absolute Value – dabs(arg)

“dabs” is a function that returns the absolute value of the argument. Both the argument and result
are the double type.

Maximum Value – lmax(arg1,arg2,...)

“lmax” is a function that returns the maximum value in an argument list. The maximum number of
arguments is 32. The argument and result are both the long types.

Maximum Value – dmax(arg1,arg2,...)

“dmax” is a function that returns the maximum value in an argument list. The maximum number of
arguments is 32. The argument and result are both the double types.

Minimum Value – lmin(arg1,arg2,...)

“lmin” is a function that returns the minimum value in an argument list. The maximum number of

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.8 Built-In Functions Page 2 of 6

arguments is 32. Both the argument and result are the long type.

Minimum Value – dmin(arg1,arg2,...)

“dmin” is a function that returns the minimum value in an argument list. The maximum number of
arguments is 32. Both the argument and result are the double type.

Power – power(arg1, arg2)

“power(arg1, arg2)” is a function that returns a value after multiplying arg1 for arg2 times. Both the
argument and result are the double type.

Truncation After Decimal Point – int(arg)

“int” is a function that truncates after the decimal point. Both the argument and result are the
double type.

Bit Operation Function

These functions execute bit operations.
The details of bit operation functions are listed below.

Bit Position Search Function – bitpstn(arg1,arg2)

“bitpstn(arg1,arg2)” is a function that searches the bit position. The position of the bit whose value
is 1 is searched in the integer variable specified by arg1. The result is the long type.
“bitpstn” returns -1 as the return value when two or more bits are 1 in arg1.

Bit Position Search Function – bitsrch(arg1,arg2)

“bitsrch(arg1,arg2)” is a function that searches the bit position. The position of the bit whose value
is 1 is searched in the integer variable specified by arg1. The result is the long type.
“bitsrch” searches the value of each bit, starting start from the most significant bit. The search stops
when a bit with a value of 1 is found, and the position of the bit whose value is 1 is returned.
The return value of the normal end will be the bit position. The return value will be 0 when all bits
are 0, and -1 when an error occurs.
The “arg2,” an argument for “bitpstn” and “bitsrch,” is a variable prepared for the functional
extension in the future. “arg2” is ignored even if it is specified.

Trigonometric Functions
These functions execute calculations related to the trigonometric functions.
The details of the trigonometric functions are as follows:

Sine – sin(arg)
“sin” is a function that calculates the sine of the argument. The unit of the argument is in radian.
Both the argument and result are the double type.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.8 Built-In Functions Page 3 of 6

Cosine – cos(arg)
“cos” is a function that calculates the cosine of the argument. The unit of the argument is in radian.
Both the argument and result are both double types.

Tangent – tan(arg)
“tan” is a function that calculates the tangent of the argument. The unit of the argument is in
radian. Both the argument and result are the double type.

Arctangent – atan(arg)
“atan” is a function that calculates the arctangent of the argument. The unit of the argument is in
radian. Both the argument and result are the double type.

Square Root – sqrt(arg)

“sqrt” is a function that calculates the square root of the argument. Both the argument and result
are the double type.

Exponent – exp(arg)
“exp(arg)” is a function that calculates the result of the exponential function (the value after
multiplying e for arg times). Both the argument and result are the double type.

Natural Logarithm – log(arg)

“log” is a function that calculates the natural logarithm (logarithm of base e) of the argument. Both
the argument and result are the double type.

Temperature and Pressure Correction Function

This function executes the correction calculation to the measured flowrate by the differential-
pressure type flow gauge which employs the orifice. The correction calculation to the ideal gas is
executed. The details of the temperature and pressure correction function are shown blow.

Temperature Correction – TC(Fi,T,Tb)

TC(Fi,T,Tb) is a function that only executes temperature correction to the measured flowrate Fi,
measured temperature T and reference temperature Tb. Each input data and calculation result are
the double type.
The correction arithmetic formula is as follows:

Fi : Measured flowrate
T : Measured temperature (°C)
Tb : Reference temperature (°C)
Instead of TC (°C), TCF (°F) maybe used in the above formula.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.8 Built-In Functions Page 4 of 6

Pressure Correction – PCKP(Fi, P, Pb)

PCKP(Fi,P,Pb) is a function that only executes the pressure correction to the measured flowrate Fi,
measured pressure P and reference pressure Pb. Each input data and the calculation result are the
double type.
The correction arithmetic formula is as follows:

Fi : Measured flowrate
P : Measured pressure (kPa)
Pb : Reference pressure (kPa)
Even though PCKP (pressure unit: kPa) is used in the description above, PCP (pressure unit: Pa),
2
PCMP (pressure unit: MPa) and PC (pressure unit:kgf/cm ) can alternatively be used. When Pa or
5 -1
MPa is used, the constant of the pressure correction term is 1.01325 • 10 and 1.01325 • 10
respectively.
2
When PC is used, the constant of pressure term becomes 1.0332 • 10 .

Temperature and Pressure Correction – TPCKP(Fi,T,P,Tb,Pb)

TPCKP(Fi,T,P,Tb,Pb) is a function that executes the correction of both temperature and pressure for
the measured flowrate Fi, measured temperature T, measured pressure P, reference temperature Tb
and reference pressure Pb. Each input data and the calculation results are the double type.
The correction arithmetic expression is as follows:

Fi : Measured flowrate
P : Measured pressure (kPa)
T : Measured temperature (°C)
Pb : Reference pressure (kPa)
Tb : Reference temperature (°C)
Even though the TPCKP(pressure unit: kPa) is used in the description above, TPCP(pressure unit:
2
Pa), TPCMP(pressure unit: MPa) and PC (pressure unit :kgf/cm ) can alternatively be used. When Pa
5
or MPa is used as the pressure unit, the constant of the pressure correction term is 1.01325 • 10
-1
and 1.01325 • 10 respectively.
2
When PC is used, the constant of pressure term becomes 1.0332 • 10 .

ASTM Correction Function

This function executes the correction calculation of the liquid flow.
The details of the ASTM correction function are as follows:

ASTM Correction (Old JIS) – ASTM1(t,F,C1)

ASTM1(t,F,C1) calculates the correction flowrate of flowrate F based on the ASTM correction (old
JIS) for the measured temperature t (°C) and the specific gravity (15/4 °C specific gravity) C1. The

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.8 Built-In Functions Page 5 of 6

argument and result are both the double types.

The correction arithmetic expression is shown below:
F0 = Cf • Fi
2
Cf = 1 + α (t - 15) + β (t - 15)

Fi : Measured flowrate
t : Measured temperature
C1 : 15/4 °C specific gravity
F0 : Corrected flow
P1(t) to P4(t) : Temperature-dependent parameters

ASTM Correction (New JIS) – ASTM2, ASTM3, ASTM4

ASTMn(t,F,ρ) calculates the correction flowrate of flowrate F based on the ASTM correction (new JIS)
3
for the measure temperature t(°C) and the density ρ(kg/m ).
“n” of ASTMn can be 2, 3 or 4. ASTM2 is used for the crude oil, ASTM3 for the fuel oil, and ASTM4
for the lubricating oil. The argument and result are both the double types.
The correction arithmetic expression is shown below:
F0 = Cf • F1

F0 : Corrected flowrate
t : Measured temperature
3
ρ : Density at 15 °C (kg/m )
Fi : Measured flowrate
K0, K1 : Oil type specific constants

High and Low Limit – llimit, dlimit

This function is used to limit the input data value within the limit value range.
The details of the high and low limit function are shown below.

High and Low Limit

llimit(arg1,arg2,arg3) and dlimit(arg1,arg2,arg3) are used to limit data within the specified high limit
and low limit range. Specify data to arg1, low limit to arg2, and high limit to arg3.
When data, min, and max are used as the arguments, the return value of the llimit(data,min,max) or
dlimit(data,min,max) is shown as follows:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.8 Built-In Functions Page 6 of 6

Because the arguments of “llimit” are converted to the long type, the result will be the long type.
Because the arguments of “dlimit” are converted to the double type, the result will be the double
type.
An error occurs when arg2 (low limit value) is larger than arg3 (high limit value). In this case, the
return value of the function will be the data value.

Step Name Calculation – stpvcalc(arg1,arg2)

stpvcalc(arg1,arg2) is a function that calculates the step name of the sequence table. “arg1” is
converted to a numerical value and the increment of arg2 is added, then the value is returned after
converting to a character string (“00” to “99”).
• arg1: Current step name (char*2 type)
Specify a 2-digit decimal number between “00” and “99” by a character string constant or a
character string variable. If the value is between 0 and 9, add a 0 to make it a two-digit number.
• arg2: increment (integer type)
Specify the increment by a numeric variable or constant.
The result of “stpvcalc” is always 2-digit decimal number between “00” and “99” (char*2 type). If
the value is between 0 and 9, 0 is added. An error occurs if the result of the addition becomes
negative or exceeds 99.
An example of changing PV (step name) of the sequence table SEQ001 is shown below:
program
.....
!Assume SEQ001.PV as “03”.
SEQ001.PV=stpvcalc(SEQ001.PV,1)
* SEQ001.PV becomes “04” after applying +1 to “03.”
......
SEQ001.PV=stpvcalc(SEQ001.PV,2)
* SEQ001.PV becomes “06” after applying +2 to “04.”
......
SEQ001.PV=stpvcalc(SEQ001.PV,-4)
* SEQ001.PV becomes “02” after applying -4 to “06.”
......
end

If “00” is specified to arg1, a character string value converted from the arg2 number can be
obtained.
An example of setting a step name to PV of the sequence table SEQ002 is shown below:
program
......
SEQ002.PV=stpvcalc(“00”,8)
* SEQ002.PV becomes “08.”
......
SEQ002.PV=stpvcalc(“00”,12)
* SEQ002.PV becomes “12.
......
end

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.9 Reserved Words for Numerical and Logical Arithmetic Expressions Page 1 of 2

1.47.9 Reserved Words for Numerical and Logical

Arithmetic Expressions
The reserved words for the numerical and logical arithmetic expression are the identifiers that are
used as reserved words by the numerical and logical arithmetic expression compliers.

Reserved Words for Numerical and Logical Arithmetic

Expressions
▼ Reserved Words
The following table shows the list of reserved words for numerical and logical arithmetic expression:
Table 1.47.9-1 Reserved Word List

ALIAS (D) DMAX (B) P04 (V) RV02 (V)

AND (O) DMIN (B) P05 (V) RV03 (V)
ASTM1 (B) DOUBLE (D) P05C (R) RV04 (V)
ASTM2 (B) ELSE (S) P06 (V) RV05 (V)
ASTM3 (B) ELSE IF (S) P06C (R) RV06 (V)
ASTM4 (B) END (S) P07 (V) RV07 (V)
ATAN (B) ENDIF (S) P07C (R) RV1 (V)
BITPSTN (B) END SWITCH (S) P08 (V) RV2 (V)
BITSRCH (B) EOR (O) P08C (R) RV3 (V)
CASE (S) EXIT (S) P1 (V) RV4 (V)
CHAR (D) EXP (B) P2 (V) RV5 (V)
COS (B) FLOAT (D) P3 (V) RV6 (V)
CPV (V) GOTO (S) P4 (V) RV7 (V)
CPV01 (V) IF (S) P5 (V) SIN (B)
CPV02 (V) INT (B) P5C (R) SQRT (B)
CPV03 (V) INTEGER (D) P6 (V) STPVCALC (B)
CPV04 (V) LABS (B) P6C (R) SWITCH (S)
CPV05 (V) LLIMIT (B) P7 (V) TAN (B)
CPV06 (V) LMAX (B) P7C (R) TC (B)
CPV07 (V) LMIN (B) P8 (V) TCF (B)
CPV1 (V) LOG (B) P8C (R) THEN (S)
CPV2 (V) LONG (D) PC (B) TPC (B)
CPV3 (V) MOD (O) PCKP (B) TPCF (B)
CPV4 (V) NOT (O) PCMP (B) TPCFP (B)
CPV5 (V) OR (O) PCP (B) TPCKP (B)
CPV6 (V) OTHERWISE (S) POWER (B) TPCMP (B)
CPV7 (V) P01 (V) PROGRAM (S) TPCP (B)
DABS (B) P02 (V) RV (V)
DLIMIT (B) P03 (V) RV01 (V)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
1.47.9 Reserved Words for Numerical and Logical Arithmetic Expressions Page 2 of 2

TIP The letter in parentheses ( ) indicates in which part of the program the reserved word is used.
(D): Declaration statement (S): Statement (B): Built-in function
(O): Operator (V): Variable name (R): Reserved

Even though the data item name such as PV and MV are not included in reserved words by the
compiler, it takes greater program resource to find out when a data item name is used in the place
beyond data item names. It is advised not to use the same character string of data item names in
the program scripts.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2. Sequence Control Page 1 of 2

2. Sequence Control
Sequence Control Blocks which execute the sequence control include Sequence Table Blocks, Logic
Chart Blocks, SFC Blocks, Switch Instrument Blocks, Sequence Element Blocks, and Valve Monitoring
Block.
This chapter explains details of each type of sequence control block except SFC Blocks.

SEE For more information about SFC functions, refer to:

ALSO 1., “Sequential Function Chart” in Function Blocks Reference Vol.3 (IM 33J15A32-01EN)

Sequence Control
The sequence control follows each control step in sequence according to predefined conditions and
order. The function block that executes sequence control function is referred to as the sequence
control block.
The figure below describes the positioning of the sequence control in the basic control.

Figure 2-1 Positioning of Sequence Control in Basic Control

With sequence control function blocks, the following types of sequence control can be applied.
• Condition control (monitoring)
Monitors process status and controls it according to pre-defined conditions.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2. Sequence Control Page 2 of 2

• Program control (phase steps)

Controls according to pre-defined programs (phases).

Sequence Control Description Method

The description of the sequence control may be applied to the following function blocks.

Sequence Table Block

The conditions and operations are arranged in the table format and specifies which operation is
performed by the combination of conditions. This is suitable for the description of all sequences such
as the parallel operation, interlock operation and sequence operation.

Logic Chart Block

In a logic chart block, the conditions and operations are listed, and the combination of conditions
with the logic operators corresponding to the logic requirement may manipulate the operation
signals. This block can be used as the description of an interlock sequence control or a logic chart.

SFC Block
SFC (Sequential Function Chart) block is a function block using SFC for sequence control.
The SFC (Sequential Function Chart) block is a graphical flow diagram suitable for describing a
process control sequence. It is standardized by the international standard, IEC SC65A/WG6.
The SFC block is used for relatively large-scaled sequence controls and for controlling devices. The
flow of the entire sequence is defined by the SFC block. Each step in the SFC is described by the
sequence table and SEBOL (SEquence and Batch Orientated Language).

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.1 Types of Sequence Control Blocks Page 1 of 3

2.1 Types of Sequence Control Blocks

Sequence Control Blocks include Sequence Table Blocks, Logic Chart Blocks, SFC Blocks, Switch
Instrument Blocks, Sequence Element Blocks and Valve Monitoring Block.

Types of Sequence Control Blocks

The table below lists various sequence control blocks.

Sequence Table Block

This function block realizes sequence control by operating other function blocks and/or process I/O
or software I/O.
The following two models of blocks are categorized as Sequence Table Block.
• Sequence Table Block (ST16)
• Rule Extension Block (ST16E)

TIP In KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, RFCS5 and RFCS2, the following types of sequence table blocks
are also available other than the above mentioned sequence table blocks.
• Sequence Table Block (M_ST16)
Capacity: Condition Signals: 32 to 64 / Action Signals: 32 to 64 / Total: 96
• Rule- Extension Sequence Table Block (M_ST16E)
• Sequence Table Block (L_ST16)
Capacity: Condition Signals: 64 / Action Signals: 64 / Total: 128
• Rule-Extension Sequence Table Block (L_ST16E)

Logic Chart Block

This function block performs interlock sequence control programmed in the expression of a logic
chart diagram.
The following model of block is categorized as Logic Chart Block.
• Logic chart with 32 inputs, 32 outputs and 64 logic elements (LC64)
• External Connection Logic Chart Block (LC64-E)

SFC Block
This function block realizes sequence control by the program described in sequential function chart.
The following three models of blocks are categorized as SFC Block.
• Three-Position Switch SFC Block (_SFCSW)
• Pushbutton SFC Block (_SFCPB)
• Analog SFC Block (_SFCAS)

Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument

Block
The switch instrument block monitors and operates devices such as opening/closing valves,

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.1 Types of Sequence Control Blocks Page 2 of 3

start/stop motors or pumps, and final control elements for contacts. 11 types of blocks are available
with various I/O points and output methods, usually used in combination with a sequence table.
The following eleven models of blocks are categorized as Switch Instrument Block.
• Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input (SI-1)
• Switch Instrument Block With 1 Input Discrete-status Alarm (SI-1ALM)
• Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs (SI-2)
• Switch Instrument Block with 1 Output (SO-1)
• Switch Instrument Block with 2 Outputs (SO-2)
• Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 1 Output (SIO-11)
• Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input , 2 Outputs (SIO-12)
• Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 1 Output (SIO-21)
• Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs , 2 Outputs (SIO-22)
• Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input , 2 One-Shot Outputs (SIO-12P)
• Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs , 2 One-Shot Outputs (SIO-22P)
Enhanced switch instrument block (*1)is a switch instrument block with enhanced capabilities for
connecting to FF faceplate blocks and fieldbus function blocks and for connecting to the I/O
terminals not next to each other.
*1: Enhanced switch instrument block can be applied to all Field control stations except standard PFCS.
When using enhanced switch instrument block, it is necessary to add the option [DIOENH] on the
[Constant] tab of the FCS properties sheet.

The following ten models of blocks are categorized as Enhanced Switch Instrument Block.
• Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input (SI-1E)
• Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs (SI-2E)
• Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Output (SO-1E)
• Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Outputs (SO-2E)
• Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 1 Output (SIO-11E)
• Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 2 Outputs (SIO-12E)
• Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 1 Output (SIO-21E)
• Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 2 Outputs (SIO-22E)
• Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 2 One-Shot Outputs (SIO-12PE)
• Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 2 One-Shot Outputs (SIO-22PE)

Sequence Element Blocks

This function block assists with sequence control. It is activated by the sequence table.
The following blocks are categorized as Sequence Element Block.
• Timer Block (TM)
• Software Counter Block (CTS)
• Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP)
• Code Input Block (CI)
• Code Output Clock (CO)
• Relational Expression Block (RL)
• Resource Scheduler Block (RS)
• Local Switch Block (LSW)

Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.1 Types of Sequence Control Blocks Page 3 of 3

This function block monitors valve opening and closing, and starts an alarm when abnormal
conditions are detected.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.1.1 Alarm Processing of Sequence Control Blocks Page 1 of 2

2.1.1 Alarm Processing of Sequence Control Blocks

The following table lists the alarms that are available in each sequence control block.
Table 2.1.1-1 Alarm Processing of Sequence Control Blocks

Process alarms(*1)

Model Other
NR OOP IOP IOP- HH LL HI LO DV+ DV- VEL+ VEL- MHI MLO CNF process
alarms
ST16 x - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ST16E - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LC64 x - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LC64-
x - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
E
SI-1 x - x x - - - - - - - - - - x -
SI-
x - x x - - - - - - - - - - - ALM
1ALM
SI-2 x - x x - - - - - - - - - - x -
SO-1
x x - - - - - - - - - - - - x -
SO-2
SIO-
11
SIO-
12
SIO-
21 PERR
x x x x - - - - - - - - - - x ANS+
SIO- ANS-
22
SIO-
12P
SIO-
22P
SI-1E
x - x x - - - - - - - - - - x -
SI-2E
SO-1E
x x - - - - - - - - - - - - x -
SO-2E
SIO-
11E
SIO-
12E
SIO-
21E PERR
x x x x - - - - - - - - - - x ANS+
SIO- ANS-
22E
SIO-
12PE
SIO-
22PE
TM x - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CTS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.1.1 Alarm Processing of Sequence Control Blocks Page 2 of 2

CTP x - x x - - - - - - - - - - x -
CI
CO
RL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
RS
LSW
VLVM x - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
*1: x: available
-: Not available

The alarm status of ST16, LC64, LC64-E, TM, and VLVM blocks are always indicated as NR (normal
status).

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.1.2 Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks Page 1 of 2

2.1.2 Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks

The following table lists the block modes that are valid in each sequence control block.
Table 2.1.2-1 Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks

Valid basic block modes(*1)

Model Name of function block
O/S IMAN TRK MAN AUT CAS PRD RCAS ROUT
Sequence table (basic section)
ST16
block x - - x x - - - -
ST16E Rule extension block
LC64 Logic chart block x - - x x - - - -
LC64-E Logic chart block x - - x x - - - -
Switch instrument block with 1
SI-1
input
SI- Switch instrument block with 1
x - - - x - - - -
1ALM input discrete-status alarm
Switch instrument block with 2
SI-2
inputs
Switch instrument block with 1
SO-1
output
Switch instrument block with 2
SO-2
outputs
Switch instrument block with 1
SIO-11
input and 1 output
Switch instrument block with 1
SIO-12
input and 2 outputs
Switch instrument block with 2 x x x x x x - - x
SIO-21
inputs and 1 output
Switch instrument block with 2
SIO-22
inputs and 2 outputs
Pulse type switch instrument
SIO-
block with 1 input and 2
12P
outputs
Pulse type switch instrument
SIO-
block with 2 inputs and 2
22P
outputs
Enhanced switch instrument
SI-1E
block with 1 input
x - - - x - - - -
Enhanced switch instrument
SI-2E
block with 2 inputs
Enhanced switch instrument
SO-1E
block with 1 output
Enhanced switch instrument
SO-2E
block with 2 outputs
SIO- Enhanced switch instrument
11E block with 1 input and 1 output
Enhanced switch instrument
SIO-
block with 1 input and 2
12E
outputs
Enhanced switch instrument

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.1.2 Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks Page 2 of 2

SIO- block with 2 inputs and 1

21E output
Enhanced switch instrument
SIO-
block with 2 inputs and 2
22E
outputs
Enhanced pulse type switch x x x x x x - - x
SIO-
instrument block with 1 input
12PE
and 2 outputs
Enhanced pulse type switch
SIO-
instrument block with 2 inputs
22PE
and 2 outputs
TM Timer block
CTS Software counter block
CTP Pulse train input counter block
CI Code input block x - - - x - - - -
CO Code output block
RL Relational expression block
RS Resource scheduler block
LSW Local switch block - - - - - - - - -
VLVM 16-valve monitor block x - - - x - - - -
*1: x: valid
-: Invalid

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2 Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E) Page 1 of 3

2.2 Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E)

Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E) controls the monitoring of processing and the phase step
sequences by connecting with other function blocks, process I/O, and software I/O.

Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E)

Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E) is a decision table type function block that describes the
relationship between input signal and output signal in a Y/N (yes/no) fashion. By making sequence
connection with other function blocks, they control the monitoring of processing and phase step
sequences. Sequence Table Blocks include the basic ST16, and ST16E that is only used for rule
extension.
The figure below shows the function block diagram of Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E).

Figure 2.2-1 Function Block Diagram of Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E)

The table below lists connection methods and destinations for Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E) I/O
terminals.
Table 2.2-1 Connection Methods and Destinations for Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E) I/O
Terminals

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O
terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Q01 to
x x x x
Q56
J01 to
x x x x
J56
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available

I/O connection is set by describing connection information and data in the input connection information
setting area, condition specification setting area, output connection information setting area, and
operation specification setting area of the sequence table displayed in the sequence table edit window of
the Function Block Detail Builder.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2 Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E) Page 2 of 3

Figure 2.2-2 Conceptual Diagram of Sequence Table

Two types of blocks are available in the Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E).
• ST16
Sequence Table Block
• ST16E
Rule Extension Block

Sequence Table Block (ST16)

The Sequence Table Block (ST16) has a sequence control function that handles a total of 64 I/O signals,
32 rules. It can also change distribution of the 64 I/O signals and output signals in the 8-signal unit. The
total number of I/O signals is fixed to 64. Thus, a sequence table with only eight inputs and eight
outputs cannot be created.

Rule Extension Block (ST16E)

This function block is used for rule extensions of the Sequence Table Block (ST16). It connects to an
extending Sequence Table Block (ST16) as an extended sequence table to form a sequence table group.
Because the Rule Extension Block (ST16E) is managed by the Sequence Table Block (ST16) that is an
extending sequence table, it cannot be activated independently.
The Rule Extension Block (ST16E) only allows connection to a step-type extending Sequence Table Block
(ST16) on which step labels is described. Nonstep-type Sequence Table Blocks (ST16) cannot be
connected.

Rule Expansion
When the phase step sequence table is used, the number of processes (number of steps) may be
insufficient depending on the process that is being performed. At this time, use the rule expansion
format Sequence Table Block (ST16E) which enables the number of rules to be expanded. The following
figure shows when the rule expansion of sequence tables.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2 Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E) Page 3 of 3

Figure 2.2-3 Example of Sequence Table Expansion

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.1 Sequence Table Configuration Page 1 of 4

2.2.1 Sequence Table Configuration

Sequence tables consist of condition signals, action signals, rule numbers, condition rules, action
rules and step labels.

Complete Sequence Table Configuration

▼ Sequence Table Configuration
The figure below shows the complete sequence table.

Figure 2.2.1-1 Conceptual Diagram of Complete Sequence Table

Outline of Sequence Table Elements

The following describes various sequence table elements.

Condition Signal
Enter the element symbol and data item into the Tag name. Data item column as the input
connection information, then enter the condition specification to Data column.

Action Signal
Enter the element symbol and data item into the Tag name. Data item column as the input
connection information then enter the action specification to Data column.

Rule Number

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.1 Sequence Table Configuration Page 2 of 4

Up to 32 rules per block may be used. The output is based on each rule condition and condition
testing result.

Condition Rule
Describe the Y/N (Y: true, N: false) pattern (combination) to condition rule. If the testing result of
condition signal corresponds with the Y/N pattern, the condition of the rule is satisfied.

Action Rule
Describe the Y/N ( Y: Positive action; N: Negative action) pattern (combinations) to action rule.
Perform manipulated output according to the Y/N pattern of the action rule for the rule number
whose condition is satisfied.

Step Label
▼ Step
These labels are attached for phase identification purposes when performing step sequence control
using a sequence table. Step labels are character strings that combine two or less alphanumeric
characters (A to Z, 0 to 9).
If two characters are combined while one is not alphanumeric and the other is alphanumeric, the
label is managed as the same step name, even if the order of characters is reversed (e.g., “_A”
and “A_”).
Up to 100 steps can be described in one sequence table group. However, same step labels cannot
be described at multiple locations inside the sequence table group.
The step labeled 00 is activated every scan cycle.

Next Step Label

▼ THEN, ELSE
Describe the step label that is to be executed in the next scan.
Next step labels include THEN and ELSE labels according to case conditions being true or false. If
both labels are blank, the step does not transfer.
• THEN label
Describe the next step label when the corresponding rule condition status is true. Transition to
the step described in the THEN label is executed after the manipulated output is completed.
• ELSE labels
Describe the next step label when the corresponding rule status is false.
The described step labels must exist in the same sequence table group. To execute a step from
another sequence table group at the next scan, it must be described as an action signal.

Tag Name.Data Item

Describe the input connection information of the condition signal or the output connection
information of the action signal.

Data
Describe the condition specification of the condition signal or the operation specification of the

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.1 Sequence Table Configuration Page 3 of 4

action signal.

Comment
Comments are defined by users for the condition and action signals. The meaning of symbols and
the contents of status manipulation may be put in these texts, by using up to 24 single-byte
alphanumeric characters, or 12 double-byte characters.
By clicking the task [Referencing Signal Comment] from the [Tool] menu, the user-defined comment
text may be displayed at the right area of signals. By this Referencing Signal Comment operation,
the comment texts defined by users for the condition signals and action signals and the tag
comments are all displayed. The comment text for the referenced signals can not be edited on the
sequence table editing window.

Specify an element number with the number of digits specified for each
element to a condition or action signal. If the number without the highest
digit’s “0” is specified to a condition or action signal, a reference signal
comment is not displayed.

TIP A referenced signal comment is not stored in a builder file. To reference a comment, select
[Referencing Signal Comment] from the [Tool] menu.

Processing Timing
The processing timing of a sequence table consists of start timing and output timing.
Start timing refers to the timing at which control algorithms of the sequence table are executed
upon receipt of input signals. Output timing indicates the conditions under which action signals are
output at the time a periodic start type or one-shot start type sequence table is executed.
“Start Timing” and “Output Timing” are set for each sequence table.
• Start Timing
Select either “Periodic Execution Type (T),” “One-shot Processing Type (O),” “Startup at Initial
Cold Start/Restart (I)” or “Restricted Initial Execution Type (B).”
• Output Timing
Select either “Output Only When Conditions Change (C)” or “Output Each Time Conditions are
Satisfied (E).”

Scan Period
Periodic start sequence tables are activated at defined scan period. Among the periodic started
sequence tables, the sequence tables activated in the basic period have the items “Control Period”
and “Control Phase” to be defined in addition to scan period.
“Scan Period,” “Control Period,” and “Control phase” can be defined for each sequence table.
• Scan Period
Select from “Basic Scan”, “Medium-speed Scan” (*1) or “High-speed Scan.”
• Control Period
1 to 16 seconds.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.1 Sequence Table Configuration Page 4 of 4

• Control Phase
0 to 15 seconds.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

Extension Rule Tag Name

▼ NEXT
Described by 16 or less alphanumeric characters.

SEE For more information about sequence block processing timing, refer to:
ALSO 7.3, “Process Timing for Sequence Control Block” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-
01EN)
For more information about scan period, refer to:
7.1.1, “Scan Period” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about control period and control phase, refer to:
7.3.5, “Control Period and Control Phase for Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E)” in
Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Sequence Description Example

The basic logical circuit figure for the AND and OR commands is described in the sequence table as
shown in the following figure.

Figure 2.2.1-2 AND Circuit Example

In the example in this figure, for AND operator, only when two condition signals are satisfied, the
operation may be performed.

Figure 2.2.1-3 OR Circuit Example

In the example in this figure, for OR operator, any one of the two conditions is established, the
operation may be performed.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.2 Creating a Sequence Table Page 1 of 3

2.2.2 Creating a Sequence Table

To create a sequence table, enter the input information for sequence control in each setting area of
the sequence table edit window of the Function Block Detail Builder.

Configuration of Sequence Table Edit Window

The figure below shows the configuration of the sequence table edit window.

Figure 2.2.2-1 Configuration of Sequence Table Edit Window

To create a sequence table, the information (condition signals, action signals, condition rule and
action rules) for sequence connection and the information (condition rule and action rules) for logic
calculation should be entered to each setting area of the sequence table edit window.
The setting area are listed below.
• Processing timing setting area
• Step label setting area
• Condition signal setting and action signal setting area
• Condition rule setting and action rule setting area
• Extension table setting area
• Next step label setting area (THEN, ELSE)

Processing Timing Setting Area

Processing timing and scan period are displayed in the processing timing setting area. Processing
timing and scan period may be defined on the processing timing setting dialog box.
A display example of processing timing setting dialog is shown below.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.2 Creating a Sequence Table Page 2 of 3

Figure 2.2.2-2 Processing Timing Setting Dialog

SEE For more information about processing timing, refer to:

ALSO 7.3, “Process Timing for Sequence Control Block” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-
01EN)

Step Label Setting Area

Enter the step label in the step label setting area using 2 or less alphanumeric characters.

Condition Signal Setting Area and Action Signal Setting

Area
Enter the condition signal and action signal into each line that displays the signal number in the
condition signal setting area and action signal setting area.

Condition Rule Setting Area and Action Rule Setting

Area
Enter Y/N pattern condition rule and action rule respectively, in the condition rule setting area and
the action rule setting area.
To enter the condition rule and action rule, click on the input location. The display alternates
between “Y,” “N” and “.” as it is clicked. When a “.” is displayed, it means that no Y/N pattern has
been entered yet.

SEE For more information about condition rules, refer to:

ALSO 2.2.5, "Condition Rule Processing of Sequence Table"
For more information about action rules, refer to:
2.2.6, "Action Rule Processing of Sequence Table"

Extension Table Setting Area

Enter the tag name of the extended sequence table in the extended sequence table setting area.
The rules of the extending and extended sequence tables are connected and the rule numbers that
can be used in the sequence table are then extended, if the tag name of the extended sequence

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.2 Creating a Sequence Table Page 3 of 3

table is entered.

SEE For more information about rule extension, refer to:

ALSO 2.2.9, "Rule Extension"

Next Step Label Setting Area (THEN, ELSE)

Enter a 2 digits alphanumeric number directly to the next step label setting area.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.3 Sequence Table Processing Flow Page 1 of 8

2.2.3 Sequence Table Processing Flow

In the sequence table, condition rule processing and action rule processing are performed based on
the results of input processing. Output processing is then performed for the action target.

Sequence Table Processing Flow

▼ Sequence Table Processing Flow
The figure below shows the sequence table processing flow.

Figure 2.2.3-1 Sequence Table Processing Flow

Input Processing
The true/false status of the condition signal is determined by performing condition testing based on
the input signal.

Condition Rule Processing

The true/false status of the rule condition is determined by comparing the true/false status of the
condition signal with the Y/N pattern of the condition rule described in the sequence table.

Action Rule Processing

The action signal output is determined by the Y/N pattern of the action rule when the status of
condition is true.

Output Processing
Status manipulation of the action target is performed based on the description of the action signal.
The status manipulation, start command transmission, data setting, and status change can be
performed to the contact outputs and other function blocks.
There are two types of sequence tables: step and nonstep. Rule processing differs by the type of
sequence table.

Operations of Non-Step Sequence

In a non-step sequence table, all 32 rules are subject to condition testing, and the operation is

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.3 Sequence Table Processing Flow Page 2 of 8

performed according to the conditions. The following shows the operation of a non-step sequence
table.

Figure 2.2.3-2 Operation of NonStep Sequence Table

• As for condition testing, a condition is satisfied when all conditions (Y or N) for the same rule
number are true. A sequence table whose rule columns are all blank is considered true
unconditionally.
• Operations are executed according to the operation contents of Y or N described for the rule
number whose conditions are satisfied.
• When the output timing is specified as “Output Only When Conditions Change,” the operation is
executed only once when the condition is switched from false to true. However, if non-latched
output is specified for the operation signal, the operation changes when the condition is switched
from true to false.
• When the output timing is specified as “Output Each Time Conditions are Satisfied,” the operation
is executed during each period as long as the condition remains true.
• When the conditions of multiple rules are satisfied simultaneously with respect to the same
operation signal, if requests for both Y and N are detected as the resultant operations, the
request for Y takes precedence, and the operation for N will not be executed.

Figure 2.2.3-3 Example of Operation for Simultaneous Requests

Example of the Non-Step Format Sequence Using the

Sequence Table
An example of the sequence that normally monitors operations to prevent the buffer tank in the
processing piping system from overflow is shown in the following figure. In this sequence, LI100
(indication block) alarm status is used.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.3 Sequence Table Processing Flow Page 3 of 8

Figure 2.2.3-4 Example of Process Flow Figure

Figure 2.2.3-5 Example of Condition Logic Diagram

The condition logic diagram of the previous page is described as below used the sequence table.

Figure 2.2.3-6 Non-step Sequence Table Example

The sequence table in the figure shown above monitors the conditions in rule numbers 01 to 04
simultaneously. Any condition in one of the 4 rules becomes true, the operation in the same rule will
be executed again. The monitoring continues after the execution.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.3 Sequence Table Processing Flow Page 4 of 8

Action of Step Sequence

▼ Sequence Table Algorithm
In a step sequence table, the process control sequence of a phase-step process is divided into the
smallest phase units (steps) of the condition monitoring and operation, then these steps are
executed one by one.
In a step sequence table, only step label 00 and the rule corresponding to the current step number
are subject to condition testing and operation. The following shows the action of a step sequence
table.

Figure 2.2.3-7 Action of Step Sequence Table

• Step label 00 is executed during each period. Step 00 may only be described at the head of a
sequence table group. Step 00 cannot be described as a next step label.
• When the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] in the [Sequence Table
Algorithm] setting area of [Constant] tab on FCS Properties sheet is checked(*1), if the step00
exists in the same table of the execution step, both the step00 and the execution step will be
activated at the same time after the condition testing. If the table is expanded to another table
and the execution step is on the expansion table, the condition of the step00 will be tested first
and then the action of the step00 will be activated before testing and activating the execution
step.
However, if the check box of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] is not checked, the
condition of the step00 will be tested first and then the action of the stepp00 will be activated
before testing and activating the execution step even when the sequence table is not expanded.
By default, this check box is not checked.
• For step sequences, the next execution step label must be described in THEN/ELSE in order to
advance the steps. The step will not be advanced if both next step labels in THEN/ELSE are
blank. If there is no description for the next step label, the same step is executed each time, the
sequence does not move step.
• The next step specified in THEN is the step to advance when the condition test result in positive.
When all operations for the corresponding rules are completed, the step proceeds to the next
step.
• The next step specified in ELSE is the step to advance when the condition test result in negative.
When conditions for the corresponding rules are established, the step proceeds to the next step
without executing the operation rules.
• When the check box of [THEN/ELSE Has Higher Precedence] in the [Sequence Table Algorithm]
setting area of [Constant] tab on FCS Properties sheet is checked (*1), if the next step is
directed by THEN/ELSE, the next step directed in the action rule with the script of <Sequence
Table Name>.PV will be ignored. However, if the next step is not directed by THEN/ELSE, the
next step directed in the action rule will be activated. If the next step is directed by THEN/ELSE,

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.3 Sequence Table Processing Flow Page 5 of 8

and the next step is also directed in the action rule with the script of <Sequence Table Name>.SA,
the step designated by <Sequence Table Name>.SA will be executed first, and the step directed
by THEN/ELSE will be executed after even the option of [THEN/ELSE Has Higher Precedence] is
checked.
Vice versa, when the check box of [THEN/ELSE Has Higher Precedence] is not checked, the next
step directed in the action rule will be activated and the next step directed by THEN/ELSE will be
ignored. By default, this check box is not checked.
• If there are multiple requests for step transition in the same step, the step advances to the next
step label that is described for the smallest rule number.
• When a step is advanced, the conditions for the rules are initialized once. In other words, all the
conditions become false with respect to the previous execution.
• The timing in which the next step is actually executed after a step is advanced, is the next scan
period.
*1: The check boxes of [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] and [THEN/ELSE Has Higher
Precedence] are available in the [Sequence Table Algorithm] setting area of Constant tab on FCS
Properties sheet of FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2 only.

• The same step label can be assigned to multiple rules. In this case, branched operations can be
performed according to the condition.

Figure 2.2.3-8 Example of Conditional Branch

Example of a Step Sequence that Uses the Sequence

Table
This figure shows an example of the phase step sequence that combines the water injection
processing and drain processing.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.3 Sequence Table Processing Flow Page 6 of 8

Figure 2.2.3-9 Example of Process Flow

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.3 Sequence Table Processing Flow Page 7 of 8

Figure 2.2.3-10 Example of Sequence Flow Chart

The sequence flow chart of the previous page is described as below used the sequence table.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.3 Sequence Table Processing Flow Page 8 of 8

Figure 2.2.3-11 Example of Step Sequence Table

In the above sequence table, rule numbers 01 and 02 are step A1. Rule numbers 03 and up are step
A2. Rule numbers 05 and beyond do not have any description for the condition rule, operation rule
or move-destination step label, so they are not subject to condition testing nor operation.
Step A1 monitors the conditions for rule numbers 01 and 02 simultaneously. Of rule numbers 01 and
02, whichever the condition is satisfied will be executed. Executing the operation of rule 01 does not
advance the step, since there is no designation in the move-destination step label. After executing
the operation, A1 resumes monitoring rule numbers 01 and 02 again. On the other hand, if the
condition for rule number 02 becomes true, the operation of rule 02 will be executed, and the step
advances to A2 because the move-destination step label has a designation.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.4 Input Processing of Sequence Table Page 1 of 2

2.2.4 Input Processing of Sequence Table

In input processing, the true/false status of a condition signal is determined by performing condition
testing on each of the multiple input terminals.

Input Processing of Sequence Table

In input processing, condition testing is performed on the condition signal of the rules subject to
execution, in order to retain the true/false status of the condition signal in the form of a logical
value. The label of a step that is to be executed is described on the rule subject to execution. When
the step label is not described in the step column of the sequence table, all rules are subject to the
execution rule.
For all rule conditions except those subject to execution, the status of the condition signal is
considered “false” regardless of the status of the connection destination.
The table below lists the results of condition testing when error occurs during input processing.
Table 2.2.4-1 Descriptions of Input Processing Errors and Condition Testing Results

Input processing results and effect on condition signal

Error Descriptions
processing
• When the condition signal is not
• The status of the condition signal is set “true”
described
• The result of the condition signal processing is set
• When there is an error in the testing
unconditionally “true” regardless of the Y/N pattern
condition of the condition signal
• When the necessary input signal for
• Maintain the state of previous input processing
condition testing was unavailable (*1)
• Condition signal processing is performed based on the
• When one-shot execution was not
previous test result
available
*1: The following describes factors that do not allow input signals.
• When the database of the connection destination or element is abnormal.
• When the connection destination or process I/O is undergoing online maintenance.

A system alarm occurs when referencing the result of one-shot execution at the connection
destination fails due to the following:
• When the nest referring from a referenced sequence table to other sequence table exceeds seven
levels including the referencing sequence table;
• When the connection destination block mode is out of service (O/S); or
• When the connection destination is undergoing maintenance.

When a function block of the connection destination and/or a process I/O is

undergoing maintenance, input signals cannot be obtained. When performing
maintenance, and before performing online loading, be sure to set related
function blocks to manual (MAN) mode or perform any processing that stops
executions in order to execute an online load.
The true/false status of the condition signal is maintained as the previous
input value within the sequence table. However, when the necessary input
signal for condition testing is unavailable, or when one-shot execution of the
connection destination function block is unavailable, the previous input value
used in condition testing as in the case shown below will not be the expected
value.
• When the sequence table itself is a one-shot execution type, or when the
function block of the connection destination is a one-shot execution type

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.4 Input Processing of Sequence Table Page 2 of 2

while the block mode is out of service (O/S), it might have been long since
the previous input value was obtained. If so, the value obtained from the
previous one-shot execution remains to be the previous input value.
• When the sequence table itself is a one-shot execution type, or when the
function block of the connection destination is a one-shot execution type
while the block mode is out of service (O/S), if no one-shot execution was
performed, the previous input value is 0.
• Immediately after a step is changed in the step-type sequence table,
always set the previous input value to 0 (false) before performing the
condition testing.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.5 Condition Rule Processing of Sequence Table Page 1 of 1

2.2.5 Condition Rule Processing of Sequence Table

In the condition rule processing, the true/false status of each rule condition is determined by
comparing for each rule the true/false status of condition signals and the condition rules.

Condition Rule Processing of Sequence Table

An example of condition rule processing is shown below.

Figure 2.2.5-1 Example of Condition Rule Processing

Comparing the True/False Status of Condition Signals and

Condition Rules
The comparison content differs by the Y/N pattern of the condition signal described in the condition
rule.
• When Y is described in the condition signal.
If the status of the condition signal obtained by input processing is true (1), the condition is
satisfied.
• When N is described in the condition signal.
If the status of the condition signal obtained by input processing is false (0), the condition is
satisfied.

Determining the True/False Status of Conditions

Only rules with satisfied conditions are subject to action rule processing. When all Y/Ns of a
condition described in the rule of the same number are satisfied, the status of the rule condition is
true (1). If even one of them is not satisfied, the status is false (0).

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.6 Action Rule Processing of Sequence Table Page 1 of 1

2.2.6 Action Rule Processing of Sequence Table

For each rule number for which the condition part is true (satisfied), the corresponding output
signals are decided by the Y/N pattern in the action part of the rule.

Action Rule Processing of Sequence Table - ST16, ST16E

The output action signal based on the Y/N pattern is determined in the action rule processing.

Figure 2.2.6-1 Example of Condition Rule Processing

Of the rules with true status of condition, only action signals described with Y or N in action rules will
be output targets.
When “Output Only when Conditions Change” is specified for output timing, rules whose true/false
status of condition is changed can be action targets.
The content of status manipulation in the sequence table is decided by the Y/N pattern, while those
of status manipulation in other sequence control blocks differ by the true/false logical calculation
result.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.7 Output Processing of Sequence Table Page 1 of 1

2.2.7 Output Processing of Sequence Table

In output processing, the action target is manipulated by outputting the action signal obtained by
action rule processing.

Output Processing of Sequence Table

In output processing, by outputting action signals, the action target is manipulated based on the
action target and action specifications described in the action signal column. The manipulation for
the action target is called status manipulation.
When errors occur in output processing while performing operations such as changing the block
mode of a function block for which a block mode change interlock is specified, status manipulations
to the target blocks are not performed.
If one action signal is tested by multiple rules, and both Y and N actions are requested, Y has higher
priority. In this case, Y is executed but N is ignored.
Also, a system alarm occurs when one-shot execution fails due to the reasons indicated below:
• When the nest executing from an executed sequence table to other sequence table exceeds
seven levels including the executing sequence table;
• When the connection destination block mode is out of service (O/S); or
• When the connection destination is undergoing maintenance.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.8 Number of Condition Signals and Action Signals Page 1 of 1

2.2.8 Number of Condition Signals and Action Signals

Up to 32 condition signals and 32 action signals for a total of 64 signals can be described in one
Sequence Table Block (ST16).
When more than 32 condition signals or 32 action signals must be described, the allocation of the
number of condition signals and action signals totaling 64 can be changed in units of eight signals.

Number of Condition Signals and Action Signals

▼ Number of Signals
There are 32 action signals and 32 condition signals in each Sequence Table Block (ST16). However,
allocation of the number of signals can be changed in the 8-signal unit using the signal selection
dialog which is called from the Function Block Detail Builder.
• Select Number of Signals: Sets allocation of the number of I/O signals in the 8-signal unit.
Table 2.2.8-1 Combination of Condition Signal and Action Signal Counts

Condition signal count Action signal count

8 56
16 48
24 40
32 (default) 32 (default)
40 24
48 16
56 8

The signal count selection dialog box is displayed by selecting [Change Number of Signal Lines] from
the [View] menu in the Function Block Detail Builder.
A display example of the signal line selection dialog box is shown below.

Figure 2.2.8-1 Example of Signal Line Selection Dialog Box

Condition signal and action signal information may be lost if the signal count
is decreased by changing signal count allocation. The message shown below
is displayed when information may be lost.
• Type
warning
• Description
“Some of the existing definition information will be lost by changing this
setting. Is it OK to change?”

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.9 Rule Extension Page 1 of 2

2.2.9 Rule Extension

In the sequence table, up to 32 rules can be set to test condition signals and action signals.
When describing information in the sequence table, if more than 32 rules are required in one phase
of a sequence control that is being described in the sequence table, the number of rules can be
extended.

Rule Extension
The number of rules in one sequence table is fixed at 32 and cannot be modified. However, if the
number of rules in a sequence table is not enough to describe one phase unit, it can be extended in
the 32-rule unit by connecting to another sequence table. The number of rules can be extended for
a step-type sequence table.

Method of Rule Extension

To extend the number of rules, specify a tag name for the rule extension block (ST16E) in the
sequence table setting area of the extending sequence table (ST16). It does not matter if the
number of signals and signal contents are different between the extending sequence table (ST16)
and extended sequence table (ST16E).
The number of rules can be extended in the 32-rule unit per block.
An example of the number of rules extended to 64 is shown below.

Figure 2.2.9-1 Examples of Rule Extension

Sequence Table Group

Multiple sequence tables connected for rule extension are referred to as a sequence table group.
Up to 100 steps can be described in one sequence table group. The number of rules cannot be
extended over 100 steps. A step name cannot be described more than once in a sequence table
group (not in both extending table and extended table).

Editing an Extended Sequence Table

An extended sequence table (ST16E) can be opened by selecting [Open the next extension table]
from the [display] menu in the Function Block Detail Builder. To enter information for sequence
connection, the method used in an extended sequence table (ST16E) can also be used in the
extending sequence table (ST16).

Restrictions on Rule Extension

This section explains the restrictions on rule extension.

Restrictions on the Number of Steps

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.9 Rule Extension Page 2 of 2

Rule extension is required in the step-type sequence tables. Up to 100 steps can be described in the
step-type sequence table. Even when the step-type sequence table is extended for rule extension,
the maximum number of describable steps is limited to 100 within a sequence table group.
If it is necessary to describe over 100 steps in a step-type sequence table, create another step-type
sequence table to allow execution of the second table continued from the first table.
There are no restrictions on the number of tables. However, in consideration of the performance of
sequence table execution, the number of connected tables in the sequence table group should be as
small as possible.

Restrictions on Step Label

The same step label cannot be described in more than one step label setting area within a sequence
table group. The step executed over two sequence tables or more cannot be described, either.
If a step cannot be described within one sequence table, decrease processing to be executed in a
step and describe a step label indicating that the next step starts from a newly extended sequence
table.

Restrictions on Rule Extension Table

The rule extension sequence table block should be created in the same control drawing with the
original sequence table block. If the rule extension sequence block is created in a drawing different
from the original sequence block, on the sequence table view of HIS, the status display of the
original sequence block can not be extended to the rule extension sequence block.

SEE For more information about control drawings, refer to:

ALSO 5., “Control Drawing Builder” in Engineering Reference Vol.1 (IM 33J10D10-01EN)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 1 of 20

2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other

Function Blocks and I/O Data
In the condition testing of a sequence table block, various data values, block mode, and status of
other function blocks can be referenced. I/O data such as process I/O, software I/O,
communication I/O and expanded communication I/O (*1) can also be referenced.
*1: Expanded communication I/Os are available in FFCS-C and FFCS-V.

Function Blocks and I/O Data that can be Referenced

from a Sequence Table
▼ Conditional Signal Description
The function blocks that can be referenced from a sequence table are as follows:
• Switch Instrument Blocks
• Timer Block (TM)
• Software Counter Block (CTS)
• Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP)
• Code Input Block (CI)
• Code Output Block (CO)
• Relational Expression Block (RL)
• Resource Scheduler Block (RS)
• Local Switch Block (LSW)
• Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)
• Regulatory Control Blocks
• Calculation Blocks
• Faceplate Blocks
• SFC Blocks
• Unit Instrument Blocks
• Sequence Table Blocks
• Logic Chart Blocks
In addition, the following I/O data can also be referenced from a sequence table:
• Process I/O (contact I/O)
• Software I/O (internal switch, annunciator message)
• Communication I/O and expanded communication I/O
Note the following points when referencing other function blocks or I/O data:
• When O/S is specified in the condition specification for block mode reference, the test result will
be false in the compound block mode in which O/S and another basic block mode are established
simultaneously.
• When MAN or AUT is specified in the condition specification for block mode reference, the test
result is true even in the compound block mode as long as the specified basic block mode is
established.
• The status of pulse width output cannot be referenced.

Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch

Instrument Block Reference

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 2 of 20

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of switch instrument block and enhanced switch instrument block as well as the conditions for
true Y/N described in the condition rule.
Table 2.2.10-1 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Condition rule

Conditions for true status
Input signal Condition specification column

Answerback value coincides with

Y
Element specification.
0, 1, 2
symbol.PV Answerback value does not coincide
N
with specification.
Data status coincides with
Y
Element specification.
=Data status
symbol.PV Data status does not coincide with
N
specification.
Output value coincides with
Y
Element specification.
0, 1, 2
symbol.MV Output value does not coincide with
N
specification.
Data status coincides with
Y
Element specification.
=Data status
symbol.MV Data status does not coincide with
N
specification.
Y Tracking switch is in specified state.
Element
0, 1 Tracking switch is not in specified
symbol.TSW N
state.
Data status coincides with
Y
Element specification.
=Data status
symbol.TSW Data status does not coincide with
N
specification.
Y Backup switch is in specified state.
Element
0, 1 Backup switch is not in specified
symbol.BSW N
state.
Block mode coincides with
Y
Element AUT, MAN, CAS, ROUT, TRK, specification.
symbol.MODE O/S Block mode does not coincide with
N
specification.
Y Block is in ROUT (MAN) mode.
BUM
N Block is not in ROUT (MAN) mode.

Element Y Block is in ROUT (AUT) mode.

BUA
symbol.XMODE N Block is not in ROUT (AUT) mode.
Y Block is in ROUT (CAS) mode.
BUC
N Block is not in ROUT (CAS) mode.
Block status coincides with
Y
Element specification.
NR, SIM, ANCK
symbol.BSTS Block status does not coincide with
N
specification.
Y Specified alarm is activated.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 3 of 20

Element NR, IOP, OOP, ANS+, ANS-,

N Specified alarm is not activated.
symbol.ALRM PERR, CNF, ALM
Y Alarm is in IOP or IOP- status.
Element
IOP Alarm is in neither IOP nor IOP-
symbol.XALRM N
status.

Element PERR, AFL (*1), NR, IOP, Y Specified alarm is flashing.

symbol.AFLS OOP, ANS+, ANS-, CNF, ALM N Specified alarm is not flashing.

Element NR, IOP, OOP, ANS+, ANS-, Y Specified alarm detection is off.
symbol.AF PERR, CNF, ALM N Specified alarm detection is on.

Element Y IOP or IOP- detection is disabled.

IOP
symbol.XAF N IOP or IOP- detection is enabled.

Element NR, IOP, OOP, ANS+, CNF, Y Specified alarm is masked.

symbol.AOFS ANS-, PERR, AOF (*2), ALM N Specified alarm is unmasked.
Sequence setting value coincides
Y
Element with specification.
0, 1, 2
symbol.CSV Sequence setting value does not
N
coincides with specification.
Data status coincides with
Y
Element specification.
=Data status
symbol.CSV Data status does not coincides with
N
specification.
Remote manipulated output value
Y
coincides with specification.
Element
0, 1, 2 Remote manipulated output value
symbol.RMV
N does not coincides with
specification.
Data status coincides with
Y
Element specification.
=Data status
symbol.RMV Data status does not coincides with
N
specification.
Y Bypass switch is in specified state.
Element
0, 1 Bypass switch is not in specified
symbol.BPSW N
state.
Data status coincides with
Y
Element specification.
=Data status
symbol.BPSW Data status does not coincides with
N
specification.
Answerback input median coincides
Y
Element with specification.
0, 2
symbol.RV Answerback input median does not
N
coincides with specification.
Data status coincides with
Y
Element specification.
=Data status
symbol.RV Data status does not coincide with
N
specification.
*1: Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status.
*2: Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 4 of 20

Timer Block Reference (TM)

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of the Timer Block (TM) and the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule.
Table 2.2.10-2 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Condition rule

Conditions for true status
Input signal Condition specification column

Block mode coincides with

Y
Element specification.
AUT, O/S
symbol.MODE Block mode does not coincide with
N
specification.
Y Block status is in specified state.
Element STOP, RUN, PAUS, NR,
symbol.BSTS PALM, CTUP Block status is not in specified
N
state.
Y Alarm status is in specified state.
Element
NR Alarm status is not in specified
symbol.ALRM N
state.

Element Y Specified alarm is flashing.

AFL (*1), NR
symbol.AFLS N Specified alarm is not flashing.
Y Specified alarm detection is off.
Element symbol.AF NR
N Specified alarm detection is on.

Element Y Specified alarm is masked.

NR, AOF(*2)
symbol.AOFS N Specified alarm is unmasked.
*1: Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status.
*2: Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.

Software Counter Block Reference (CTS)

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of the Software Counter Block (CTS) as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the
condition rule is shown below.
Table 2.2.10-3 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification
Block mode coincides with
Y
Element specification.
AUT, O/S
symbol.MODE Block mode does not coincide with
N
specification.

Element STOP, RUN, NR,PALM, Y Block status is in specified state.

symbol.BSTS CTUP N Block status is not in specified state.

Pulse Train Input Counter Block Reference (CTP)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 5 of 20

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) as well as the conditions for true Y/N described
in the condition rule.
Table 2.2.10-4 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column Condition rule

Conditions for true status
Input signal Condition specification column

Block mode coincides with

Y
Element specification.
AUT, O/S
symbol.MODE Block mode does not coincide with
N
specification.

Element STOP, RUN, PAUS, NR, Y Block status is in specified state.

symbol.BSTS PALM, CTUP N Block status is not in specified state.
Y Alarm status is in specified state.
Element
CNF, NR, IOP Alarm status is not in specified
symbol.ALRM N
state.
Y Alarm is in IOP or IOP- status.
Element
IOP Alarm is in neither IOP nor IOP-
symbol.XALRM N
status.

Element Y Specified alarm is flashing.

AFL (*1), CNF, NR, IOP
symbol.AFLS N Specified alarm is not flashing.
Y Specified alarm detection is off.
Element symbol.AF CNF, NR, IOP
N Specified alarm detection is on.
Y IOP or IOP- detection is disabled.
Element symbol.XAF IOP
N IOP and IOP- detection is enabled.

Element Y Specified alarm is masked.

CNF, NR, IOP, AOF (*2)
symbol.AOFS N Specified alarm is unmasked.
Data status coincides with
Y
specification.
Element symbol.PV =Data status
Data status does not coincide with
N
specification.
*1: Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status.
*2: Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.

Code Input Block Reference (CI)

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of the Code Input Block (CI) as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition
rule.
Table 2.2.10-5 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification
Y Block mode coincides with specification.
Element
AUT, O/S Block mode does not coincide with
symbol.MODE N
specification.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 6 of 20

Block status coincides with

Y
Element specification.
NR, LO, HI, ERR
symbol.BSTS Block status does not coincide with
N
specification.
Y Data status coincides with specification.
Element symbol.PV =Data status Data status does not coincide with
N
specification.

Code Output Block Reference (CO)

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of the Code Output Block (CO) as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the
condition rule.
Table 2.2.10-6 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification
Y Block mode coincides with specification.
Element
AUT, O/S Block mode does not coincide with
symbol.MODE N
specification.
Block status coincides with
Y
Element specification.
NR, LO, HI
symbol.BSTS Block status does not coincide with
N
specification.
Y Data status coincides with specification.
Element symbol.PV =Data status Data status does not coincide with
N
specification.

Relational Expression Block Reference (RL)

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of the Relational Expression Block (RL) as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the
condition rule.
Table 2.2.10-7 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification
Relationship between two data is in
Y
Element symbol.X01 EQ, GT, GE, LT, LE, specified state.
to 16 AND Relationship between two data is not in
N
specified state.

The table below lists the description of condition specifications.

Table 2.2.10-8 Description of Condition Specifications

Symbol Name Description

EQ (*1) equal data 1 = data 2

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 7 of 20

GT greater than data 1 > data 2

GE great than or equal to data 1 ≥ data 2
LT less than data 1 < data 2
LE less than or equal to data 1 ≤ data 2
AND logical product bitwise logical product of data 1 and 2
*1: When using EQ relation by comparing the two variables with real numbers, the condition may not be
established because of a trivia difference. It is better to use GT, GE, LT and LE instead of EQ when
comparing the two variables with real numbers.

Resource Scheduler Block Reference (RS)

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of the Resource Scheduler Block (RS) as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the
condition rule.
Table 2.2.10-9 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification
Y Block mode coincides with specification.
Element
AUT, O/S Block mode does not coincide with
symbol.MODE N
specification.
Usage request status coincides with
Y specification.
Element (0: Not requested, 1: Requesting)
0, 1
symbol.RQ01 to 32
Usage request status does not coincide
N
with specification.
Permission status coincides with
Y specification.
Element (0: Not permitted, 1: Permitted)
0, 1
symbol.PM01 to 32
Permission status does not coincide with
N
specification.
Maximum permissible number coincides
Y
with specification.
Element symbol.RMH 0 to 32
Maximum permissible number does not
N
coincide with specification.

Local Switch Block Reference (LSW)

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of the Local Switch Block Reference (LSW) as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in
the condition rule.
Table 2.2.10-10 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification

Y
Switch status coincides with

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 8 of 20

specification. (0: OFF, 1: ON)

Element symbol.PV01
0, 1 Switch status does not coincide with
to 32 N
specification.

Valve Monitoring Block Reference (VLVM)

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of the Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the
condition rule.
Table 2.2.10-11 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description

column Condition
Conditions for true status
Condition rule column
Input signal
specification

Element Y Block mode coincides with specification.

AUT, O/S
symbol.MODE N Block mode does not coincide with specification.

Element Y Specified alarm is activated.

NR
symbol.ALRM N Specified alarm is not activated.

Element Y Alarm is flashing.

NR, AFL (*1)
symbol.AFLS N Alarm is not flashing.

Element Y Specified alarm detection is off.

NR
symbol.AF N Specified alarm detection is on.

Element Y Specified alarm is masked.

NR, AOF (*2)
symbol.AOFS N Specified alarm is unmasked.
Valve normal/abnormal state coincides with
Element Y
specification. (0: Normal, 1: Abnormal)
symbol.PV01 to 0, 1
16 Valve normal/abnormal state does not coincide with
N
specification.
Representative valve normal/abnormal state
Y coincides with specification. (0: All valves are normal,
Element 1: At least one of the alarms is abnormal)
0, 1
symbol.PVR
Representative valve normal/abnormal state does not
N
coincide with specification.
Message suppression coincides with specification. (0:
Y
Element Not suppressed, 1:Suppressed)
0, 1
symbol.MCSW Message suppression does not coincide with
N
specification.
*1: Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status.
*2: Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.

Regulatory Control Block Reference

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the block mode, block
status, alarm status, and data status of the regulatory control block as well as the conditions for true
Y/N described in the condition rule.
Table 2.2.10-12 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 9 of 20

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification
Y Block mode is in specified state.
Element symbol.MODE Block mode
N Block mode is not in specified state.
Block is in ROUT (MAN) or RCAS
Y
(MAN) mode
BUM
Block is not in ROUT (MAN) or RCAS
N
(MAN) mode
Block is in ROUT (AUT) or RCAS
Y
Element (AUT) mode
BUA
symbol.XMODE Block is not in ROUT (AUT) or RCAS
N
(AUT) mode
Block is in ROUT (CAS) or RCAS (CAS)
Y
mode
BUC
Block is not in ROUT (CAS) or RCAS
N
(CAS) mode
Y Block status is in specified state.
Element symbol.BSTS Block status
N Block status is not in specified state.
Y Specified alarm is activated.
Element symbol.ALRM Alarm status
N Specified alarm is not activated.
Y Alarm is in IOP or IOP- status.
IOP Alarm is in neither IOP nor IOP-
N
Element status.
symbol.XALRM Y Alarm is in VEL+ or VEL- status.
VEL Alarm is in neither VEL+ nor VEL-
N
status.
Y Specified alarm is flashing.
Element symbol.AFLS Alarm status, AFL (*1)
N Specified alarm is not flashing.
Y Specified alarm detection is off.
Element symbol.AF Alarm status
N Specified alarm detection is on.
Y IOP or IOP- detection is disabled.
Element symbol.XAF IOP
N IOP and IOP- detection is enabled.

Alarm status, AOF Y Specified alarm is masked.

Element symbol.AOFS
(*2) N Specified alarm is unmasked.
Y Data value coincides with specification.
Element symbol.Data
Data value Data value does not coincide with
item N
specification.
Data status coincides with
Y
Element symbol.Data specification.
=Data status
item Data status does not coincide with
N
specification.
*1: Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status.
*2: Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.

Regulatory Control Block that can Describe Data Values in

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O D... Page 10 of 20

Condition Specifications
The table below lists the regulatory control blocks that can describe data values in condition
specifications and the setting ranges of data items.
Table 2.2.10-13 Regulatory Control Blocks that can Describe Data Values in Condition
Specifications and the Setting Ranges of Data Items (1/3)

Block code Name Data item Setting range

TSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PID PID Controller Block PSW 0 to 3
RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PID-HLD Sampling PI Controller Block PSW 0 to 3
RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PID-BSW PID Controller Block with Batch Switch PSW 0 to 3
RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PID-TP Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block PSW 0 to 3
BSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF-E Enhanced 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF-G 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF-GE Enhanced 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
PD-MR PD Controller Block with Manual Reset
RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
PI-BLEND Blending PI Controller Block RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
RST 0, 1
TSW 0, 1

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O D... Page 11 of 20

CSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
PID-STC Self-Tuning PID Controller Block RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
STC -1 to 3
TSW 0, 1
MLD Manual Loader Block
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
MLD-PVI Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
MLD-SW Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW PSW 0 to 3
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
BPSW 0 to 4
MC-2 2-Position Motor Control Block SIMM 0 to 1
CSV 0 to 2
PV 0 to 2
MV 0 to 2
TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
BPSW 0 to 4
MC-2E Enhanced 2-Position Motor Control Block SIMM 0 to 1
CSV 0 to 2
PV 0 to 2
MV 0 to 2
TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
BPSW 0 to 4
MC-3 3-Position Motor Control Block SIMM 0 to 1
CSV 0 to 2
PV 0 to 2
MV 0 to 2
TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
BPSW 0 to 4
MC-3E Enhanced 3-Position Motor Control Block SIMM 0 to 1
CSV 0 to 2
PV 0 to 2
MV 0 to 2
TSW 0, 1
RATIO Ratio Set Block PSW 0 to 3

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O D... Page 12 of 20

RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
ZONE 1 to 13
PG-L13 13-Zone Program Set Block ZSTR 1 to 13
ZEND 1 to 13
SW 0 to 4
BSETU-2 Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block EMSW 0, 1
ZONE 0 to 11
SW 0 to 4
BSETU-3 Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block EMSW 0, 1
ZONE 0 to 11
PSW 0 to 3
VELLIM Velocity Limiter Block BSW 0, 1
BPSW 0, 1
SW 0 to 4
SS-H/M/L Signal Selectors
SEL 0 to 3
PSW 0 to 3
AS-H/M/L Auto Selectors SW 0 to 4
SEL 0 to 3
SW 1 to 3
SS-DUAL Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block
SEL 1 to 2
TSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
FFSUM Feedforward Signal Summing Block
FSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
XCPL Non-Interference Control Output Block PSW 0 to 3
RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
SPLIT Control Signal Splitter Block
SW 0 to 3
SW 0 to 5
ALM-R Representative Alarm Block
SV 0 to 15
SBSD Ys Instrument Batch Set Station Block SV 0 to 8
SLBC Ys Instrument Batch Set Controller Block SV 0 to 8

Calculation Block Reference

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the block mode of
calculation block, block status, alarm status, and data status, as well as the conditions for true Y/N
described in the condition rule is shown below.
Table 2.2.10-14 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O D... Page 13 of 20

Condition column
Input signal Conditions for true status
specification
Y Block mode coincides with specification.
Element
AUT, O/S Block mode does not coincide with
symbol.MODE N
specification.
Y Block status coincides with specification.
Element
RUN, STOP Block status does not coincide with
symbol.BSTS N
specification.

Element Y Alarm status is in specified state.

Alarm status
symbol.ALRM N Alarm status is not in specified state.
Y Alarm is in IOP or IOP- status.
IOP
Element N Alarm is in neither IOP nor IOP- status.
symbol.XALRM Y Alarm is in VEL+ or VEL- status.
VEL
N Alarm is in neither VEL+ nor VEL- status.

Alarm status, AFL Y Specified alarm is flashing.

Element symbol.AFLS
(*1) N Specified alarm is not flashing.
Y Specified alarm detection is off.
Element symbol.AF Alarm status
N Specified alarm detection is on.
Y IOP or IOP- detection is disabled.
Element symbol.XAF IOP
N IOP and IOP- detection is enabled.

Element Alarm status, AOFS Y Specified alarm is masked.

symbol.AOFS (*2) N Specified alarm is unmasked.
Y Calculation result is not 0.
Element symbol.ACT ON
N Calculation result is 0.
Y Data value coincides with specification.
Element
Data value (*3) Data value does not coincide with
symbol.data item N
specification.
Data status coincides with the status of
Y
Element specified data.
=Data status
symbol.data item Data status does not coincide with the
N
status of specified data.
*1: Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status.
*2: Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.
*3: Only integers can be a data value. If the data item is a floating decimal point, the value is rounded off
for comparison.

Calculation Blocks that can Describe Data Values in Condition

Specifications
The table below lists the data items of Calculation Blocks that can describe data values in condition
specifications and their setting ranges.
Table 2.2.10-15 Calculation Blocks that can Describe Data Values in Condition Specifications and
Setting Range of Data Items

Block code Name Data item Setting range

DLAY Dead-Time Block
RST 0, 1
DLAY-C Dead-Time Compensation Block

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O D... Page 14 of 20

AVE-M Moving-Average Block

INTEG Integration Block
SW 0, 1, 2
AVE-C Cumulative-Average Block
SW-33 Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block SW 0 to 3
BDSET-1L One-Batch Data Set Block
BDSET-1C One-Batch String Data Set Block
SW 0 to 3
BDSET-2L Two-Batch Data Set Block
BDSET-2C Two-Batch String Data Set Block
SW-91 One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block SW 0 to 9
DSW-16 Selector Switch Block for 16 Data
SW 0 to 16
DSW-16C Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data
BDA-L Batch Data Acquisition Block
SW 0 to 17
BDA-C Batch String Data Acquisition Block
RV1 0, 1
AND (*1) Logical AND Block RV2 0, 1
CPV 0, 1
RV1 0, 1
OR (*1) Logical OR Block RV2 0, 1
CPV 0, 1
RV 0, 1
NOT (*1) Logical NOT Block
CPV 0, 1
RV1 0, 1
SRS1-S (*1) Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output RV2 0, 1
CPV1 0, 1
RV1 0, 1
SRS1-R (*1) Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output RV2 0, 1
CPV1 0, 1
RV1 0, 1
RV2 0, 1
SRS2-S (*1) Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs
CPV1 0, 1
CPV2 0, 1
RV1 0, 1
RV2 0, 1
SRS2-R (*1) Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs
CPV1 0, 1
CPV2 0, 1
RV1 0, 1
WOUT (*1) Wipeout Block RV2 0, 1
CPV 0, 1
RV 0, 1
OND (*1) ON-Delay Timer Block
CPV 0, 1
RV 0, 1
OFFD (*1) OFF-Delay Timer Block
CPV 0, 1

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O D... Page 15 of 20

RV 0, 1
TON (*1) One-Shot Block (Rising-Edge Trigger)
CPV 0, 1
RV 0, 1
TOFF (*1) One-Shot Block (Falling-Edge Trigger)
CPV 0, 1
GT (*1) Comparator Block (Greater Than) CPV 0, 1
GE (*1) Comparator Block (Greater Than or Equal) CPV 0, 1
EQ (*1) Equal Operator Block CPV 0, 1
*1: Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Calculation Blocks that can Reference Calculation Results by

One-Shot Execution
The table below lists Calculation Blocks that can reference calculation results by one-shot execution
of the condition signal, “element symbol. ACT.ON.”
Table 2.2.10-16 One-Shot Executable Blocks for Condition Testing

Block type Code Name

ADD Addition Block
MUL Multiplication Block
Arithmetic calculation
DIV Division Block
AVE Averaging Block
AND Logical AND Block
OR Logical OR Block
NOT Logical NOT Block
SRS1-S Set-Dominant Flip-Flop with 1 Output
SRS1-R Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop 1 Output
SRS2-S Set-Dominant Flip-Flop with 2 Outputs
SRS2-R Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop 2 Outputs
Logic Calculation (*1)
WOUT Wipeout Block
GT Comparator Block (Greater Than)
GE Comparator Block (Greater Than or Equal)
EQ Equal Operator Block
BAND Bitwise AND Block
BOR Bitwise OR Block
BNOT Bitwise NOT Block
CALCU General-Purpose Calculation Block
General-Purpose Calculations
CALCU-C General-Purpose Calculation Block with String I/O
*1: Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Faceplate Block Reference

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of the faceplate block, as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule.
Table 2.2.10-17 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O D... Page 16 of 20

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification
Y Block mode coincides with specification.
Element symbol.MODE Block mode Block mode does not coincide with
N
specification.
Block is in ROUT (MAN) or RCAS (MAN)
Y
mode.
BUM
Block is not in ROUT (MAN) or RCAS
N
(MAN) mode.
Block is in ROUT (AUT) or RCAS (AUT)
Y
Element mode.
BUA
symbol.XMODE Block is not in ROUT (AUT) or RCAS
N
(AUT) mode.
Block is in ROUT (CAS) or RCAS (CAS)
Y
mode.
BUC
Block is not in ROUT (CAS) or RCAS
N
(CAS) mode.
Y Block status coincides with specification.
Element symbol.BSTS Block status Block status does not coincide with
N
specification.
Y Specified alarm is on.
Element symbol.ALRM Alarm status
N Specified alarm is not on.
Y Alarm is in IOP or IOP- status.
IOP
Element N Alarm is in neither IOP nor IOP- status.
symbol.XALRM Y Alarm is in VEL+ or VEL- status.
VEL
N Alarm is in neither VEL+ nor VEL- status.
Y Specified alarm is flashing.
Element symbol.AFLS Alarm status, AFL (*1)
N Specified alarm is not flashing.
Y Specified alarm detection is off.
Element symbol.AF Alarm status
N Specified alarm detection is on.
Y Specified alarm is masked.
Element symbol.AOFS Alarm status, AOF (*2)
N Specified alarm is unmasked.
Phase step number coincides with
Y
1 to 99 (Only BSI specification.
Element symbol.SV
block is valid) Phase step number does not coincide
N
with specification.
Switch status coincides with
Y
Element symbol.PV01 specification.
0, 1
to 10 Switch status does not coincide with
N
specification.
Operation command coincides with
Y
Element symbol.MV01 specification.
0, 1
to 10 Operation command does not coincide
N
with specification.
Y Data status coincides with specification.
=Data status
Element symbol.Data Data status does not coincide with

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O D... Page 17 of 20

item N specification.
Switch display color coincides with
Y
Element symbol.SWCR specification.
0 to 15
[n] (*3) Switch display color does not coincide
N
with specification.
Switch flashing status coincides with
Y
Element symbol.SWST specification.
0, 1
[n](*3) Switch flashing status does not coincide
N
with specification.
Switch operation disabled status
Y
Element symbol.SWOP coincides with specification.
-15 to 15
[n](*3) Switch operation disabled status does
N
not coincide with specification.
*1: Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status.
*2: Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.
*3: n is the subscript of the 1 dimensional array. This subscript is the number of the push button switches
on a faceplate block. This number varies with the type of faceplate block.

SFC Block Reference

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of the SFC block as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule.
Table 2.2.10-18 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification
Y Block mode is in specified state.
Element symbol.MODE MAN, SEMI, AUT, O/S
N Block mode is not in specified state.

RUN, PAUS, STOP, Y Block status is in specified state.

Element symbol.BSTS
ABRT N Block status is not in specified state.
Y Specified alarm is activated.
Element symbol.ALRM Alarm status
N Specified alarm is not activated.
Y Specified alarm is flashing.
Element symbol.AFLS Alarm status, AFL (*1)
N Specified alarm is not flashing.
Y Specified alarm detection is off.
Element symbol.AF Alarm status
N Specified alarm detection is on.

Alarm status, AOF Y Specified alarm is masked.

Element symbol.AOFS
(*2) N Specified alarm is unmasked.
Data value coincides with
Y
Element symbol.Data specification.
Data value
item Data value does not coincide with
N
specification.
Data status coincides with
Y
Element symbol.Data specification.
=Data status
item Data status does not coincide with
N
specification.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O D... Page 18 of 20

*1: Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status.

*2: Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.

Setting Range of Data Item When Describing Data Value in

Condition Specification
The table below lists the data items of SFC block that can describe data values in condition
specifications and their setting ranges.
• STEPNO: 1 to 99
• SWCR[5]: 0 to 15
• SWST[5]: 0, 1
• SWOP[5]: -15 to 15

Unit Supervision Reference

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of the unit instrument block as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition
rule.
Table 2.2.10-19 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification

Element Y Unit mode is in specified state.

MAN, SEMI, AUT, O/S
symbol.MODE N Unit mode is not in specified state.
Y Unit status is in specified state.
Element symbol.BSTS Unit status
N Unit status is not in specified state.

Element Y Specified alarm is activated.

Alarm status
symbol.ALRM N Specified alarm is not activated.

Alarm status, AFL Y Specified alarm is flashing.

Element symbol.AFLS
(*1) N Specified alarm is not flashing.
Y Specified alarm detection is off.
Element symbol.AF Alarm status
N Specified alarm detection is on.

Alarm status, AOF Y Specified alarm is masked.

Element symbol.AOFS
(*2) N Specified alarm is unmasked.
SFC step number coincides with
Y
Element specification.
1 to 99
symbol.STEPNO SFC step number does not coincide with
N
specification.
*1: Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status.
*2: Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.

Processing I/O Reference

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of the processing I/O block as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition
rule.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O D... Page 19 of 20

Table 2.2.10-20 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description

column Condition rule
Conditions for true status
Condition column
Input signal
specification
ON/OFF status of contact I/O coincides with
Y
Element specification.
ON, OFF
symbol.PV ON/OFF status of contact I/O does not
N
coincide with specification.
Data status of contact I/O coincides with
Y
Element specification.
=Data status
symbol.PV Data status of contact I/O does not coincide
N
with specification.

Global Switch Reference

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a global switch as condition test
reference signal in a sequence table and the True/False representation of Y/N in the condition rule
columns of the sequence table are shown as follows.
Table 2.2.10-21 Syntax for condition signal description and True/False representation of Y/N in
condition rule columns

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification
Y Specified global switch status is True.
Element
ON, OFF Specified global switch status is
symbol.PV N
False.
Y Data status of global switch is BAD.
Element
=BAD Data status of global switch is not
symbol.PV N
BAD.

Common Switch Reference

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of the common switch as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule.
Table 2.2.10-22 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description

column Condition rule
Conditions for true status
Condition column
Input signal
specification
ON/OFF status of common switch coincides
Y
Element with specification.
ON, OFF
symbol.PV ON/OFF status of common switch does not
N
coincide with specification.

Annunciator Message Reference

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.10 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O D... Page 20 of 20

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of the annunciator message as well as the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition
rule.
Table 2.2.10-23 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description

column Condition rule
Conditions for true status
Condition column
Input signal
specification
Annunciator occurrence status coincides with
Y
Element specification. (ON: Occurred, OFF: Not occurred)
ON, OFF
symbol.PV Annunciator occurrence status does not coincide
N
with specification.

element Y Flashing status

AFL
symbol.AFLS N Normal status (not flashing)

element Y Alarm masking status

AOF
symbol.AOFS N Normal status (no alarm masking status)
Repeated warning status coincides with
Y specification. (ON: Waiting for repeated warning,
element OFF: NR)
ON, OFF
symbol.RP
Repeated warning status does not coincide with
N
specification.

Communication I/O and Expanded Communication I/O

Reference
The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing various data and
status of communication I/O and expanded communication I/O as well as the conditions for true Y/N
described in the condition rule.
Table 2.2.10-24 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification
All relevant bits are in the same
Y
Element symbol.PV ON/OFF status.
ON, OFF
(*1) Relevant bits are not in the same
N
ON/OFF status.
All relevant bits are in the same data
Y
status.
Element symbol.PV =Data status
Relevant bits are not in the same data
N
status.
*1: Only discrete type element may be referred.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.11 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table Page 1 of 12

2.2.11 Condition Signal Description: Referencing

Sequence Table
In a condition testing referencing a sequence table, in addition to the sequence table block mode
and status, the true/false status of condition can also be referenced by performing one-shot
execution of the referenced sequence table.
To reference a sequence table whose number of rules is extended over multiple sequence tables,
specify a tag name for the extending sequence table.

Referencing an Entire Sequence Table

▼ Conditional Signal Description - Sequence Table
The true/false status of condition for the entire sequence table specified is referenced.
The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the entire sequence
table and the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule.
Table 2.2.11-1 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification
At least one target condition rule is
Y
Element symbol. satisfied.
R
SD None of the target condition rules is
N
satisfied.

The condition rule subject to referencing varies by the type of sequence tables at reference source
and destination (step type/nonstep type) as shown below.
Table 2.2.11-2 Reference Target Rules by Sequence Table Type

Reference Reference
Reference target rule
source destination
Nonstep type All rules
Nonstep type
Step type Rule of Step 00
Nonstep type All rules
Step type Rule of Step 00 and that of the same step name as reference
Step type
source

The following should be taken into account when referencing the entire sequence table.
• When referencing the entire sequence table, only condition signal descriptions of the referenced
sequence table are valid. Ignore any action signal description.
• If no Y/N pattern exists in the condition rule of referenced sequence table, the status of rule
condition is false. If the Y/N pattern of such condition rule is unspecified, the status becomes
unconditionally true in the periodic processing of the above sequence table.
• When there exist no steps to be executed in the referenced sequence table, the previous
true/false status of condition is maintained as a current reference result.
• When Step 00 exists in the reference destination, rules that belong to Step 00 will also be
executed. However, when no steps exist as an execution target, the reference result of Step 00
is ignored.
• Other sequence tables can be referenced in the referenced sequence table condition column. In

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.11 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table Page 2 of 12

this case, up to seven levels of nests (including the first sequence table) are possible.
The following points must be considered when displaying sequence table view of reference sequence
table.
• Y/N pattern
The color of the Y/N pattern of the reference target rule is based on the condition testing.
The color of the Y/N pattern of the rule which is not to be referenced is the color when condition
is false. However, the color of the Y/N pattern of condition signal which is the same as reference
target rule is based on the condition testing.

TIP The color of the step-type referenced sequence table is the color when condition is false. When
the referenced sequence table is a step type, all the rules are not referenced as shown in the
table “Reference Target Rules by Sequence Table Type.”

• Displaying the true status of step label

The background color before the entire reference is retained.
The following figure shows a display example when the referenced sequence table is a step-type.

Figure 2.2.11-1 Display example sequence table view of referenced sequence table

The display content in the sequence table view in the display example given above are as follows:
• For step-type referenced sequence table, step 3 which is the same as the reference source
sequence table is referenced.
• The color of “Y” of step 3 condition signal DI0036.PV.ON depends on the condition testing of the
condition signal DI0036.PV.ON.
• The colors of “Y” and “N” of the condition signals of steps 1, 2, and 4 also depend on the
condition testing of the condition signal DI0036.PV.ON.
• The color of other “Y” and “N” are false colors because condition testing is not performed.

TIP For the periodic sequence table that runs on AUT mode, if entire referencing is performed from a
different sequence table, it is difficult to decide whether the Y/N pattern displayed in the

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.11 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table Page 3 of 12

sequence table view is the result is from periodic processing or from entire sequencing.

When the Referenced Sequence Table is a Nonstep Type

A description example of the nonstep-type referenced sequence table is shown below.

Figure 2.2.11-2 Description Example of Referencing the Entire Nonstep-Type Sequence Table

The following describes the condition testing processing for the above example.
• When “Y” is described in the condition rule of the condition signal ST010.SD.R.
In the description of the condition signal of the referenced sequence table, if there exists at least
one rule with a true status, the status of condition signal is true. If no such rules exist, the
condition of the referencing sequence table is false.
As for Rule 01 in Table ST003 listed above, the output signal of DO0001 is ON if the condition
signal DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is true, DI0018.PV.ON is false, and one of the
conditions at rules 01 to 32 of Table ST010 is true.
• When “N” is described in the condition rule of the condition signal ST010.SD.R.
In the description of the condition signal of the referenced sequence table, if there exists no rule
with a true status, the status of condition signal is true. If there exists at least one rule with a
true status, the condition of the referencing sequence table is false.
As for Rule 03 in Table ST003 listed above, the output signal of DO0001 is OFF if the condition
signal DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is false, and none of the conditions at rules 01 to 32
of Table ST010 is true.
• The condition of rules that has no Y/N patterns in Table ST010 is false.

When the Referenced Sequence Table is a Step Type

A description example of the step-type referenced sequence table is shown below.
When both sequence tables at reference source and destination are a step type, the true/false
status of Step 00 rule condition and that of the rule with the same step name as the reference
source is referenced.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.11 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table Page 4 of 12

Figure 2.2.11-3 Description Example of Referencing the Entire Nonstep-Type Sequence Table

The following describes the condition testing processing for the above example.
• As for Rule 01 in Table ST003, the output signal of DO0001 is ON if the condition signal
DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is true, DI0018.PV.ON is false, and one of the conditions at
Rule 01 or 02 of Table ST010 is true.
• As for Rule 03 in Table ST003, the output signal of DO0001 is OFF if the condition signal
DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is false, and the condition at Rule 04, Step 3 of Table
ST010 is false.

When Step 00 and Step n Exist in a Referenced Sequence Table

A description example of when Step 00 and Step n exist in a referenced sequence table is shown
below.

Figure 2.2.11-4 Description Example of Referencing the Entire Step-Type Sequence Table

The following describes the condition testing processing for the above example.
• The reference range of the referenced table at Rule 01, Table ST003 is steps 00 and 1 of Table
ST010.
As for Rule 01 in Table ST003 listed above, the output signal of DO0001 is ON if the condition
signal DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is true, DI0018.PV.ON is false, and one of the

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.11 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table Page 5 of 12

conditions at Step 00 Rule 01/02 or Step 1 Rule 03 of Table ST010 are true.
• The reference range of the referenced table at Rule 03 of Table ST003 are steps 00 and 3 of
Table ST010.
As for Rule 03 in Table ST003 listed above, the output signal of DO0001 is OFF if the condition
signal DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is false, and the condition at Step 00 Rule 01/02 or
Step 3 Rule 05 of Table ST010 are false.

Referencing Sequence Table Corresponding Rule

Number
The true/false status of condition for the same rule number as the current rule number in the
referencing sequence table is referenced. Use this to extend the number of condition signals beyond
64 in a nonstep-type sequence table.
The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the true/false status of
the conditions for the corresponding rule number and the conditions for true Y/N status described in
the condition rule.
Table 2.2.11-3 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification
Condition for the same rule number is
Y
Element symbol. satisfied.
C
SD Condition for the same rule number is
N
not satisfied.

• When the referenced sequence table is a non-step type and the referencing sequence table is a
step type
Although referencing a corresponding rule number is meaningless, condition reference to the
corresponding rule is executed.
• When the referenced sequence table is a step type
Referencing the same rule is meaningless and therefore causes an error. However, the status of
condition signal is true.
The following should be taken into account when referencing a corresponding rule number.
• When referencing the entire sequence table, only condition signal descriptions of the referenced
sequence table are valid. Ignore any action signal description.
• If no Y/N pattern exists in the condition rule of referenced sequence table, the status of rule
condition is false. If the Y/N pattern of such a condition rule is unspecified, the status becomes
unconditionally true in the periodic processing of the above sequence table.
• Other sequence tables can be referenced in the referenced sequence table condition column. In
this case, up to seven levels of nests (including the first sequence table) are possible.
A description example of when referencing the true/false status of conditions for a corresponding
rule number is shown below.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.11 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table Page 6 of 12

Figure 2.2.11-5 Description Example of Referencing the Corresponding Rule Number

The following describes the condition testing processing for the above example.
• As for Rule 01 in Table ST003, the output signal of DO0001 is ON if the condition signal
DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is true, DI0018.PV.ON is false, and the conditions at Rule
01 of Table ST010 are true.
• As for Rule 03 in Table ST003, the output signal of DO0001 is OFF if the condition signal
DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is false, and the conditions at Rule 03 of Table ST010 are
false.

When referencing a corresponding rule number, do not describe the step

number on the step label of the referenced sequence table.
When referencing a corresponding rule number, referencing cannot be
properly performed if the step number is described on the step label of the
referenced sequence table.

The following points must be considered when displaying sequence table view of reference sequence
table.
• Y/N pattern
The color of the referenced target rule number depends on the condition testing.
The color of the Y/N pattern of the rule that is not referenced is the color when condition is false.
However, the color of the Y/N pattern of the condition signal that is the same as the referenced
target rule number is the color when condition is false.
• Displaying the true condition status of step label
The background color before the target rule number is referenced is retained.
The following figure shows the display example of sequence table view of the referenced sequence
table.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.11 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table Page 7 of 12

Figure 2.2.11-6 Display example sequence table view of referenced sequence table

The display content in the sequence table view in the display example given above are as follows:
• The color of “Y” of rule 03 condition signal DI0036.PV.ON depends on the condition testing of the
condition signal DI0036.PV.ON.
• The colors of “Y” or “N” of the condition signals of rules 01, 02, and 4 also depend on the
condition testing of the condition signal DI0036.PV.ON.
• The color of other “Y” and “N” are false colors because condition testing is not performed.

TIP For the periodic sequence table that runs on AUT mode, if target rule number is referenced from
a different sequence table, it is difficult to decide whether the Y/N pattern displayed in the
sequence table view is the result from periodic processing or from target rule number referencing.

Referencing a Particular Step in a Sequence Table

The true/false status of conditions for a particular step of a specified sequence table is referenced.
The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the true/false status of
conditions for a particular step, and the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule. The
step label is specified in the condition specification.
Table 2.2.11-4 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status(*1)
Input signal column
specification(*1)
At least one of the conditions for steps 00
Y
Element and xx is satisfied.
xx
symbol. SA None of the conditions for steps 00 and xx
N
is satisfied.
*1: xx: Specify a step label using 2 or less alphanumeric characters.

The condition rule subject to referencing varies by the type of sequence table at reference source

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.11 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table Page 8 of 12

and destination (step-type/nonstep type) as shown below.

Table 2.2.11-5 Reference Target Rules by Sequence Table Type

Reference source Reference destination Reference target condition rule

Nonstep type All rules
Nonstep type
Step type Rules of a specified step
Nonstep type All rules
Step type
Step type Rules of a specified step

• When the specified step does not exist in the referenced sequence table, the reference result will
be the previous true/false condition status that has been latched.
• When Step 00 exists in the reference destination, the rules belonging to Step 00 will also be
executed. However, when the specified step does not exist in the referenced sequence table, the
reference result of Step 00 is ignored.
The following should be taken into account when referencing a particular step.
• When referencing a particular step in the sequence table, only condition signal descriptions of the
referenced sequence table are valid. Ignore any action signal description.
• If no Y/N pattern exists in the condition rule of referenced sequence table, the status of rule
condition is false. If the Y/N pattern of such a condition rule is unspecified, the status becomes
unconditionally true in the periodic processing of the above sequence table.
• Other sequence tables can be referenced in the referenced sequence table condition column. In
this case, up to seven levels of nests (including the first sequence table) are possible.
A description example of referencing the true/false status of conditions for a particular step number
is shown below.

Figure 2.2.11-7 Description Example of Referencing a Particular Step Number

The following describes the condition testing processing for the above example.
• As for Rule 01 in Table ST003, the output signal of DO0001 is ON if the condition signal
DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is true, DI0018.PV.ON is false, and the conditions for Step
2, or Rule 03 of Table ST010 are true.
• As for Rule 03 in Table ST003, the output signal of DO0001 is OFF if the condition signal
DI0010.PV.ON is true, DI0015.PV.ON is false, and the conditions for Step 2, or Rule 03 of Table
ST010 are false.
The following points must be considered when displaying sequence table view of reference sequence
table.
• Y/N pattern

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.11 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table Page 9 of 12

The color of the Y/N pattern of the condition rule to be referenced is based on the condition
testing.
The color of the Y/N pattern of the condition rule which is not referenced is the color when
condition is false. However, the color of the Y/N pattern of the condition signal that is the same
as the condition rule to be referenced depends on the condition testing.
• Displaying the true condition status of step label
The background color before referencing the specific step is retained.
The following figure shows the display example of sequence table view of the referenced sequence
table.

Figure 2.2.11-8 Display example sequence table view of referenced sequence table

The display content in the sequence table view in the display example given above are as follows:
• The color of “Y” of step 3 condition signal DI0036.PV.ON depends on the condition testing of the
condition signal DI0036.PV.ON.
• The colors of “Y” or “N” of the condition signals of steps 1, 2, and 4 also depend on the condition
testing of the condition signal DI0036.PV.ON.
• The color of other “Y” and “N” are false colors because condition testing is not performed.

TIP For the periodic sequence table that runs on AUT mode, if specific step is referenced from a
different sequence table, it is difficult to decide whether the Y/N pattern displayed in the
sequence table view is the result from periodic processing or from specific step referencing.

When Steps 00 and n Exist in the Referenced Sequence Table

A description example of the sequence table when steps 00 and n exist in the referenced sequence
table are shown below.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.11 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table Page 10 of 12

Figure 2.2.11-9 Description Example of Referencing a Particular Step Number

The table reference range for the rule number 01 of Table ST003 are steps 00 and 2 of Table ST010
in the above example.

Sequence Table Step Label Reference

The progress status of a sequence phase can be confirmed by referencing the sequence table step
label. However, such confirmation does not involve the true/false status of step conditions since it
only determines whether or not a specified step processing is being performed in the referenced
sequence table.
The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the step label and the
conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule.
Table 2.2.11-6 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition specification Conditions for true status(*1)
Input signal column
(*1)
Y Current execution step label is xx.
Element
xx Current execution step label is other
symbol.PV N
than xx.
*1: xx: Specify a step label using 2 or less alphanumeric characters.

A description example of referencing the execution status of Step 1 processing in Table ST010 is
shown below.

Figure 2.2.11-10 Description Example of Step Label Reference

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.11 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table Page 11 of 12

Sequence Table Block Mode Reference

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the sequence table
block mode, and the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule.
Table 2.2.11-7 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification
Block mode is in the specified
Y
Element state.
O/S, MAN, AUT
symbol.MODE Block mode is not in the specified
N
state.

A description example of restarting Table ST005 from the stop status is shown below.

Figure 2.2.11-11 Description Example of Block Mode Reference

The following should be taken into account when referencing a sequence table block mode.
• When O/S is specified in the condition specification for block mode reference, the test result will
be unsatisfied in the compound block mode in which O/S and another basic block mode are
satisfied simultaneously.
• When MAN or AUT is specified in the condition specification for block mode reference, the test
result is satisfied even in the compound block mode as long as the specified basic block mode is
satisfied.

Sequence Table Alarm Status Reference

The table below lists the condition signal symbolic convention for referencing the sequence table
alarm status and the conditions for true Y/N described in the condition rule.
Table 2.2.11-8 Condition Signal Symbolic Convention and Conditions for True Y/N Described in
Condition Rule

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification
Y Alarm status is in the specified state.
Element
NR Alarm status is not in the specified
symbol.ALRM N
state.
Y Specified alarm is flashing.
AFL (*1), NR
Element

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.11 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table Page 12 of 12

symbol.AFLS N Specified alarm is not flashing.

Specified alarm detection is
Y
Element symbol.AF NR canceled.
N Specified alarm is being detected.

Element Y Specified alarm is masked.

NR, AOF (*2)
symbol.AOFS N Specified alarm is unmasked.
*1: Condition Specification AFL references the group flashing status.
*2: Condition Specification AOF references the alarm group mask status.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.12 Syntax for Condition Signal Description: Logic Chart Reference in Sequence T... Page 1 of 2

2.2.12 Syntax for Condition Signal Description: Logic

Chart Reference in Sequence Table
When using logic chart for condition test, a block mode of a logic chart and an alarm status of a
logic chart can be used as a reference signal in a sequence table.

Logic Chart Block Mode Reference

▼ Conditional Signal Description - Logic Chart
The specified logic chart block mode can be used as reference signal in a sequence table.
The syntax for applying the logic chart block mode as condition test reference signal in a sequence
table and the True/False representation of Y/N in the condition rule columns of the sequence table
are shown as follows.
Table 2.2.12-1 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation of Y/N in
Condition Rule Columns

Condition signal description column

Condition rule column Conditions for true status
Input signal Condition specification
Y Specified Block mode is True.
Element symbol.MODE O/S, MAN, AUT
N Specified Block mode is False.

The following points should be taken into consideration when referencing a logic chart block mode.
• When O/S is specified as the condition specification for block mode reference, the test result will
be False when the block is in the compound block mode, i.e., O/S and another basic block mode
exist simultaneously.
• When MAN or AUT is specified as the condition specification for block mode reference, the test
result will be True even in the compound block mode as long as the specified basic block mode
exists.

Logic Chart Alarm Status Reference

The specified alarm status of logic chart can be used as reference signal in a sequence table.
The syntax for applying the alarm status of logic chart as condition test reference signal in a
sequence table and the True/False representation of Y/N in the condition rule columns of the
sequence table are shown as follows.
Table 2.2.12-2 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation of Y/N in
Condition Rule Columns

Condition signal description column

Condition rule
Condition Conditions for true status
Input signal column
specification
Y Specified Alarm Status is True.
Element symbol.ALM NR
N Specified Alarm Status is False.
Y Specified Alarm symbol is flashing.
Element
AFL (*1), NR Specified Alarm symbol is not
symbol.AFLS N
flashing.
Y Alarm Detection Disabled is True.
Element symbol.AF NR
N Alarm Detection Disabled is False.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.12 Syntax for Condition Signal Description: Logic Chart Reference in Sequence T... Page 2 of 2

Element Y Alarm Inhibition is True.

NR, AOF (*2)
symbol.AOFS N Alarm Inhibition is False.
*1: The condition test for Alarm Symbol Flashing can only test the flashing status of each block or symbol,
can not test the flashing status of each alarming item.
*2: The condition test for Alarm Inhibition can only test the inhibition status of each block or symbol, can
not test the inhibition status of each alarming item.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 1 of 19

2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation

for Other Function Blocks and I/O Data
Sequence Table Block may manipulate the mode or status change of other function blocks. In
addition, it can also manipulate the status change of process I/O, software I/O, communication I/O
and expanded communication I/O.(*1)
*1: Expanded communication I/Os are available only in FFCS-C and FFCS-V.

Function Blocks and I/O Data for Which Status

Manipulation can be Performed from Sequence Table
▼ Action Signal Description
The function blocks for which status manipulation can be performed from a sequence table are as
follows:
• Switch Instrument Blocks
• Timer Block (TM)
• Software Counter Block (CTS)
• Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP)
• Code Input Block (CI)
• Code Output Block (CO)
• Resource Scheduler Block (RS)
• Local Switch Block (LSW)
• Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)
• Regulatory Control Blocks
• Calculation Blocks
• Faceplate Blocks
• SFC Blocks
• Unit Instrument Blocks
• Sequence Table Blocks
• Logic Chart Blocks
In addition, status manipulation can be performed from a sequence table for the following I/O data:
• Process I/O
• Software I/O (internal switch, annunciator message, sequence message output)
• Communication I/O and Expanded Communication I/O

Status Manipulation of Switch Instrument Block and

Enhanced Switch Instrument Block
The table below lists the symbolic convention of action signal and action description for executing
status manipulation on various functions of switch instrument block and enhanced switch instrument
block.
Table 2.2.13-1 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Action rule

Action description
Output signal Action specification column (Y/N)

Y
Element Block mode change

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 2 of 19

symbol.MODE command
MAN, AUT, CAS, ROUT, O/S
N No action
Cancel specified alarm
Y
ANS+, ANS-, IOP, PERR, OOP, CNF, detection
Element symbol.AF
ALM Execute specified alarm
N
detection
Disables IOP and IOP-
Y
Element detection
IOP
symbol.XAF Enables IOP and IOP-
N
detection

Element ANS+, ANS-, PERR, CNF, IOP, AOF Y Mask specified alarm
symbol.AOFS (*1), OOP, ALM N Unmask specified alarm
Perform alarm group
Element Y
AFL confirmation
symbol.AFLS
N No action
Set the sequence setpoint
Y
0, 1, 2 (CSV) (*2)
N No action
Y Set CSV to 0
P0
Element N Set CSV to 2
symbol.CSV
Y Set CSV to 1
P1
N No action
Y Set CSV to 2
P2
N Set CSV to 0
Tracking switch (0: OFF,
Element Y
0, 1 1: ON)
symbol.TSW
N No action
Bypass switch (0: OFF, 1:
Element Y
0, 1 ON)
symbol.BPSW
N No action
Backup switch (0: OFF, 1:
Element Y
0, 1 ON)
symbol.BSW
N No action
Switch to CAL or release
Y
Element symbol.PV =XCAL (*3) CAL
N No action
*1: AOF specification is only effective for changing the alarm masking specification. This action performs
alarm masking on all alarms except NR.
*2: To set a manipulated output value for the switch instrument from other function block, write data to
the sequence setpoint (CSV). If the switch instrument block or enhanced switch instrument block is
either in AUT or CAS state, the output will be performed after the value of CSV is written to the
manipulated output value (MV).
*3: The Output Timing of the sequence table that =XCAL is applied should be set to [Output Only When
Condition Changes (C)].

Status Manipulation of Timer Block (TM)

The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 3 of 19

manipulate the status of various functions of the Timer Block (TM).

Table 2.2.13-2 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule column (Y/N) Action description
Output signal Action specification
Y Timer stop command
STOP
N No action
Y Timer start command
START
N Timer stop command
Element symbol.OP
Y Restart command
RSTR
N No action
Y Pause command
WAIT
N Restart command

Status Manipulation of Software Counter Block (CTS)

The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to
manipulate the status of various functions of the Software Counter Block (CTS).
Table 2.2.13-3 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule column
Action Action description
Output signal (Y/N)
specification
Software counter operation
Y
ON command

Element symbol.ACT N No action

Y Software counter stop command
OFF
N No action
Trigger software counter (One
Element Y
ON Count)
symbol.XACT
N Stop software counter

Status Manipulation of Pulse Train Input Counter Block

(CTP)
The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to
manipulate the status of various functions of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP).
Table 2.2.13-4 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule column
Action Action description
Output signal (Y/N)
specification
Pulse input counter stop
Y
STOP command
N No action
Element symbol.OP
Pulse input counter start
Y
command
START
Pulse input counter stop

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 4 of 19

N command
Y Restart command
RSTR
N No action
Y Pause command
WAIT
N Restart command
Y Cancel specified alarm detection
Element symbol.AF IOP, CNF Execute specified alarm
N
detection
Y Disables IOP and IOP- detection
Element symbol.XAF IOP
N Enables IOP and IOP- detection

Element Y Mask specified alarm

IOP, CNF, AOF(*1)
symbol.AOFS N Unmask specified alarm
Perform alarm group
Element Y
AFL confirmation
symbol.AFLS
N No action
*1: AOF specification is only effective for changing the alarm masking specification. This action operates
alarm masking on all alarms except NR.

Status Manipulation of Code Input Block (CI)

The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to
manipulate the status of various functions of the Code Input Block (CI).
Table 2.2.13-5 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule column (Y/N) Action description
Output signal Action specification
Y Code input read command
Element symbol.ACT ON
N No action

Status Manipulation of Code Output Block (CO)

The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to
manipulate the status of various functions of the Code Output Block (CO).
Table 2.2.13-6 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule
Action Action description
Output signal column (Y/N)
specification
Code output command to contact output signal
Element Y
ON or internal status switch
symbol.ACT
N No action

Status Manipulation of Resource Scheduler Block (RS)

The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to
manipulate the status of various functions of the Resource Scheduler Block (RS).
Table 2.2.13-7 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 5 of 19

Action signal description column

Action rule
Action Action description
Output signal column (Y/N)
specification
Specified number usage cancel/request
Element Y
0, 1 command (1: Request, 0: Cancel)
symbol.RQ01 to 32
N No action

Element Y Set the maximum allowable number (m≤32)

0 to 32
symbol.PMH N No action
Entire resource group request/cancel (ON:
Y
Element symbol.ACT ON, OFF Request, OFF: Cancel)
N No action

Status Manipulation of Local Switch Block (LSW)

The table below lists the symbolic convention of action signal and action description for executing
status manipulation on various functions of the LSW block.
Table 2.2.13-8 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule column
Action Action description
Output signal (Y/N)
specification
Set an individual switch to ON
Y
Element symbol.PV01 (Latched)
H
to 32 Set an individual switch to OFF
N
(Latched)
Set an individual switch to ON
Y
Element symbol.PV01 (Unlatched)(*1)
L
to 32 No action
N
Set an individual switch to OFF(*2)
Y Set 32 switches at a time
Element symbol.PVA ON, OFF
N No action
*1: When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box on the Constant tab of the FCS
Properties sheet is selected while the process timing of the sequence table is TC (Periodic Execution
and Output only when the condition changes) or TE (Periodic Execution and Output every time the
condition becomes true), the unlatched-type switch that was turned on when the condition became
true will be turned off when the step moves to another and the condition becomes false.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box is clear, the unlatched-type switch that
was turned on when the condition became true will not be turned off even if the step moves to another
and the condition becomes false.
As long as the step does not move to another, the switch will be turned off when the condition
becomes false regardless of whether the check box is selected.
By default, the check box is clear.
*2: When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box on the Constant tab of the FCS
Properties sheet is selected, the switch is turned off while the condition is true. The action of N will be
ignored if the condition is false.
When the check box is clear, no action is performed for N.
By default, the check box is clear.

Status Manipulation of Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)

The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 6 of 19

manipulate the status of various functions of the Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM).
Table 2.2.13-9 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule column
Action Action description
Output signal (Y/N)
specification
Message suppression (1: Suppress, 0:
Element Y
0, 1 Cancel)
symbol.MCSW
N No action

Status Manipulation of Regulatory Control Block

The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to
manipulate the status of various functions of the regulatory control block.
Table 2.2.13-10 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Action rule column

Action description
Output signal Action specification (Y/N)

Block mode change

Element MAN, AUT, CAS, RCAS, ROUT, Y
command
symbol.MODE PRD, O/S
N No action
Cancel specified alarm
Y
detection
Element symbol.AF Alarm status except NR
Execute specified alarm
N
detection
Disables IOP and IOP-
Y
detection
Element symbol.XAF IOP
Enables IOP and IOP-
N
detection

Alarm status except NR, AOF Y Mask specified alarm

Element symbol.AOFS
(*1) N Unmask specified alarm
Perform alarm group
Y
Element symbol.AFLS AFL confirmation
N No action

Element symbol.data Y Set data

Data value
item N No action
Y Switch PV to CAL status
Element symbol.PV =CAL Release PV from CAL
N
status
Switch to CAL or release
Y
Element symbol.PV =XCAL (*2) CAL
N No action
Switch to CAL or release
Element Y
=XCAL (*2) CAL
symbol.SUM0
N No action
*1: AOF specification is only effective for changing the alarm masking specification. This action performs
alarm masking on all alarms except NR.
*2: The Output Timing of the sequence table that =XCAL is applied should be set to [Output Only When
Condition Changes (C)].

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 7 of 19

Regulatory Control Block that can Describe Data Values in

Action Specifications
The table below lists the regulatory control blocks that can describe data values in action
specifications and the setting ranges of data items.
Table 2.2.13-11 Regulatory Control Blocks that can Describe Data Values in Action Specifications
and the Setting Ranges of Data Items

Block code Name Data item Setting range

TSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PID PID Controller Block PSW 0 to 3
BSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PI-HLD Sampling PI Controller Block PSW 0 to 3
BSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PID-BSW PID Controller Block with Batch Switch PSW 0 to 3
BSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PID-TP Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block PSW 0 to 3
BSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF-E Enhanced 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF-G 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF-GE Enhanced 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
PD-MR PD Controller Block with Manual Reset
BSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
PI-BLEND Blending PI Controller Block BSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 8 of 19

RST 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
PID-STC Self-Tuning PID Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
STC -1 to 3
TSW 0, 1
MLD Manual Loader Block
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
MLD-PVI Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
MLD-SW Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW PSW 0 to 3
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
MC-2 2-Position Motor Control Block BPSW 0 to 4
SIMM 0 to 1
CSV 0, 1, 2, P0, P1, P2 (*1)
TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
MC-2E Enhanced 2-Position Motor Control Block BPSW 0 to 4
SIMM 0 to 1
CSV 0, 1, 2, P0, P1, P2(*1)
TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
MC- 3 3-Position Motor Control Block BPSW 0 to 4
SIMM 0 to 1
CSV 0, 1, 2, P0, P1, P2 (*1)
TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
MC- 3E Enhanced 3-Position Motor Control Block BPSW 0 to 4
SIMM 0 to 1
CSV 0, 1, 2, P0, P1, P2 (*1)
TSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
RATIO Ratio Set Block
BSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
ZONE 1 to 13
PG-L13 13-Zone Program Set Block ZSTR 1 to 13
ZEND 1 to 13
SW 0 to 4

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 9 of 19

EMSW 0, 1
BSETU-2 Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block
ZONE 0 to 11
SW 0 to 4
BSETU-3 Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block EMSW 0, 1
ZONE 0 to 11
PSW 0 to 3
VELLIM Velocity Limiter Block BSW 0, 1
BPSW 0, 1
SS-H/M/L Signal Selectors SW 0 to 4
PSW 0 to 3
AS-H/M/L Auto Selectors
SW 0 to 4
SS-DUAL Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block SW 1 to 3
TSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
FFSUM Feedforward Signal Summing Block
FSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
XCPL Non-Interference Control Output Block PSW 0 to 3
RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
SPLIT Control Signal Splitter Block
SW 0 to 3
RST 0, 1
PTC Pulse Count Input Block
HSW 0, 1
SW 0 to 5
ALM-R Representative Alarm Block
SV 0 to 15
SBSD YS Instrument Batch Set Station Block SV 0 to 8
SLBC YS Instrument Batch Controller Block SV 0 to 8
*1: The value set for the CSV varies depending on the values of action rules and setting range.
0: CSV = 0 when the action rule is [Y], Disable when [N]
1: CSV = 1 when the action rule is [Y], Disable when [N]
2: CSV = 2 when the action rule is [Y], Disable when [N]
P0: CSV = 0 when the action rule is [Y], CSV = 2 when [N]
P1: CSV = 1 when the action rule is [Y], Disable when [N]
P2: CSV = 2 when the action rule is [Y], CSV = 0 when [N]

Status Manipulation of Calculation Block

The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to
manipulate the status of various functions of the calculation block.
Table 2.2.13-12 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Action rule column

Action description
Output signal Action specification (Y/N)

One-shot execution (with

Y
mm (*1) parameter)
N No action

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks... Page 10 of 19

One-shot execution (without

Y
Element symbol.ACT ON parameter)
N No action
Cancel specified alarm
Y
detection
Element symbol.AF Alarm status except NR
Execute specified alarm
N
detection
Disables IOP and IOP-
Y
Element symbol.XAF IOP detection
N Enables IOP and IOP- detection

Alarm status except NR, Y Mask specified alarm

Element symbol.AOFS
AOF (*2) N Unmask specified alarm
Perform alarm group
Y
Element symbol.AFLS AFL confirmation
N No action

Element symbol.data Y Set data

Data value
item N No action
Change CPV’s data status to
Y
Element symbol.CPV =CAL CAL
N Cancel CPV’s CAL data status
Y Switch to CAL or release CAL
Element symbol.CPV =XCAL (*3)
N No action
Y Switch to CAL or release CAL
Element symbol.CPV1 =XCAL (*3)
N No action
Y Switch to CAL or release CAL
Element symbol.CPV2 =XCAL (*3)
N No action
*1: mm is a parameter required for one-shot execution of the batch data setting block and the batch data
acquisition block. The data set at the one-shot execution varies depending on the mm value.
mm=0: Set 0 to all data.
mm=1 to 16: Set specified data only (DTn).
mm=17: Set all data.
*2: AOF specification is only effective for changing the alarm masking specification. This operation
performs alarm masking on all alarms except NR.
*3: The Output Timing of the sequence table that =XCAL is applied should be set to [Output Only When
Condition Changes (C)].

Calculation Blocks That Can Describe Data Values In Condition

Specifications
The table below lists the data items of regulatory control blocks that can describe data values in
condition specifications and their setting ranges.
Table 2.2.13-13 Calculation Blocks that can Describe Data Values in Action Specifications and
Setting Range of Data Items

Block code Name Data item Setting range

DLAY Dead-Time Block
DLAY-C Dead-Time Compensation Block RST 0, 1
AVE-M Moving-Average Block

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks... Page 11 of 19

AVE-C Cumulative Average Block

SW 0, 1, 2
INTEG Integration Block
SW-33 Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch SW 0 to 3
SW-91 One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch SW 0 to 9
DSW-16 Selector Switch Block for 16 Data
SW 0 to 16
DSW-16C Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data
BDSET-1L One Batch Data Set Block
BDSET-1C One-Batch String Data Set Block
SW 0 to 3
BDSET-2L Two Batch Data Set Block
BDSET-2C Two-Batch String Data Set Block
BDA-L Batch Data Acquisition Block
SW 0 to 17
BDA-C Batch String Data Acquisition Block
ADL Inter-Station Data Link Block SIMM 0, 1

Executable Calculation Block for One-Shot Execution

The table below lists the calculation blocks that can specify one-shot execution as an action
specification.
Table 2.2.13-14 One-Shot Executable Calculation Block

Block type Code Name

ADD Addition Block
MUL Multiplication Block
Arithmetic Calculation
DIV Division Block
AVE Averaging Block
AND Logical AND Block
OR Logical OR Block
NOT Logical NOT Block
SRS1-S Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output
SRS1-R Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output
SRS2-S Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs
SRS2-R Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs
Logic Operation (*1)
WOUT Wipeout Block
GT Comparator Block (Greater Than)
GE Comparator Block (Greater Than or Equal)
EQ Equal Operator Block
BAND Bitwise AND Block
BOR Bitwise OR Block
BNOT Bitwise NOT Block
CALCU General-Purpose Calculation Block
General-Purpose Calculations
CALCU-C General-Purpose Calculation Block with String I/O
BDSET-1L One-Batch Data Set Block
BDSET-1C One-Batch String Data Set Block
BDSET-2L Two-Batch Data Set Block

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks... Page 12 of 19

BDSET-2C Two-Batch String Data Set Block

Calculation auxiliary BDA-L Batch Data Acquisition Block
BDA-C Batch String Data Acquisition Block
*1: Logic Operation Block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Calculation Block that Requires mm Parameter for One-Shot

Execution
The table below lists the calculation blocks that are required to specify one-shot execution
parameter mm as an action specification.
Table 2.2.13-15 Calculation Blocks That is Required to Specify Parameter mm in the Action
Specification

Block Parameter setting range (mm)

Name Remarks
code (*1)
BDSET-1L One-Batch Data Set Block
BDSET-1C One-Batch String Data Set Block
0 to 17 Set individual data
BDSET-2L Two-Batch Data Set Block
BDSET-2C Two-Batch String Data Set Block
BDA-L Batch Data Acquisition Block
Acquire individual
Batch String Data Acquisition 0 to 17
BDA-C data
Block
*1: Parameter mm is defined as follows.
mm=0: Set 0 to all data.
mm=1 to 16: Set specified data only (DTn).
mm=17: Set all data.

Status Manipulation of Faceplate Block

The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to
manipulate the status of various functions of the faceplate block.
Table 2.2.13-16 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Action rule

Action description
Output signal Action specification column (Y/N)

Y Change block mode.

Element symbol.MODE Block mode
N No action.
Y Change block status.
Element symbol.BSTS Block status
N Cancel block status.
Y Change alarm status.
Element symbol.ALRM Alarm status except NR
N Cancel alarm status.
Cancel the specified alarm
Y
detection.
Element symbol.AF Alarm status except NR
Execute the specified alarm
N
detection.

Alarm status excluding NR, Y Mask the specified alarm.

Element symbol.AOFS
AOF (*1) N Unmask the specified alarm.

Perform alarm group

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks... Page 13 of 19

Y confirmation.
Element symbol.AFLS AFL
N No action.
Y Set batch step number.
Element symbol.SV(*2) 1 to 99
N No action.
Set manipulated command
Element symbol.PV01 Y
0, 1 value.
to 03(*2)
N No action.
Set manipulated command
Element symbol.MV01 Y
0, 1 value.
to 10
N No action.

Element symbol.SWCR Y Change switch display color.

0 to 15
[n] (*3) N No action.

Element symbol.SWST Y Switch flashing status ON/OFF

0, 1
[n](*3) N No action.
Change the switch operation
Element symbol.SWOP Y
-15 to 15 disable status.
[n] (*3)
N No action.
*1: AOF specification is only effective for changing the alarm masking specification. This operation
performs alarm masking on all alarms except NR.
*2: Effective only for BSI block.
*3: n is the subscript of the 1 dimensional array. This subscript is the number of the push button switches
on a faceplate block. This number varies with the type of faceplate block.

Status Manipulation of Sequential Function Chart (SFC)

Block
The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to
manipulate the status of various functions of the sequential function chart (SFC) block.
Table 2.2.13-17 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Action rule column

Action description
Output signal Action specification (Y/N)

Element Y Block mode change command

MAN, AUT
symbol.MODE N No action
Block status change
Y
Element symbol.BSTS RUN, PAUS, STOP, ABRT command
N No action
Cancel the specified alarm
Y
detection
Element symbol.AF Alarm status except NR
Execute the specified alarm
N
detection

Alarm status except NR, Y Mask the specified alarm

Element symbol.AOFS
AOF (*1) N Unmask specified alarm
Perform alarm group
Y
Element symbol.AFLS AFL confirmation
N No action
Y Set data
Element symbol.data

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks... Page 14 of 19

item Data value N No action

Change PV’s data status to
Y
Element symbol.PV =CAL CAL
N Cancel PV’s CAL data status
Y Switch to CAL or release CAL
Element symbol.PV =XCAL (*2)
N No action
*1: AOF specification is only effective for changing the alarm masking specification. This operation
performs alarm masking on all alarms except NR.
*2: The Output Timing of the sequence table that =XCAL is applied should be set to [Output Only When
Condition Changes (C)].

Sequential Function Chart Block Data Item that can be

Described as a Data Value in the Action Specification
The following table lists the sequential function chart block data item which can be described as a
data value in the action specification, and their setting ranges.
• STEPNO: 1 to 99
• SWCR[5]: 0 to 15
• SWST[5]: 0, 1
• SWOP[5]: -15 to 15

Status Manipulation of Unit Instrument

The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to
manipulate the status of various functions of the unit instrument.
Table 2.2.13-18 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column Action rule column

Action description
Output signal Action specification (Y/N)

Element Y Unit mode change command

MAN, SEMI, AUT
symbol.MODE N No action

Unit status change Y Unit status change command

Element symbol.UBSC
command name N No action
Cancel the specified alarm
Y
detection.
Element symbol.AF Alarm status except NR
Execute the specified alarm
N
detection.

Alarm status except NR, AOF Y Mask the specified alarm.

Element symbol.AOFS
(*1) N Unmask specified alarm.
Perform alarm group
Y
Element symbol.AFLS AFL confirmation.
N No action

Element Y Change SFC step number.

1 to 99
symbol.STEPNO N No action
*1: AOF specification is only effective for changing the alarm masking specification. This operation
performs alarm masking on all alarms except NR.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks... Page 15 of 19

Status Manipulation of Process I/O

The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to
manipulate the status of various functions of the process I/O.
Table 2.2.13-19 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule column
Action Action description
Output signal (Y/N)
specification
Y Contact output ON (Latched output)
H
N Contact output OFF (Latched output)
Contact output ON (Unlatched output)
Y
(*1)
L
No action
N
Element Contact output OFF (*2)
symbol.PV Y Cause flashing state.
F
N Stop the flashing state. (*3)
Output one-second pulse to the relevant
Y
bit (*4)
P
No action
N
Turn off the ON-state pulse. (*5)
*1: This action can be specified only on FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box on the Constant tab of the FCS
Properties sheet is selected while the process timing of the sequence table is TC (Periodic Execution
and Output only when the condition changes) or TE (Periodic Execution and Output every time the
condition becomes true), the unlatched-type contact output that was turned on when the condition
became true will be turned off when the step moves to another and the condition becomes false.
When the check box is clear, the unlatched-type contact output that was turned on when the condition
became true will not be turned off even if the step moves to another and the condition becomes false.
As long as the step does not move to another, the contact output will be turned off when the condition
becomes false regardless of whether the check box is selected.
By default, the check box is clear.
*2: This action can be specified only on FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box on the Constant tab of the FCS
Properties sheet is selected, the contact output is turned off while the condition is true. The action of N
will be ignored if the condition is false.
When the check box is clear, no action is performed for N.
By default, the check box is clear.
*3: Even though the flashing state stops, the contact output itself remains ON. Turn off the contact output
using a different action signal with a latched contact output.
*4: Not available in LFCS2 and LFCS. For LFCS2 and LFCS to give a pulse output, first to set the point mode
of the output terminal on I/O module into Pulse Output (PO), then put a latched type symbol (H) or
none latched type symbol (L) in the action columns of sequence table.
*5: This action can be specified only on FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box on the Constant tab of the FCS
Properties sheet is selected, the ON-sate pulse output will be turned off.
When the check box is clear, no action is performed for N. However, in LFCS2, no action is performed
for N even if the checked box is selected.
By default, the check box is clear.

SEE For more information about pulse output, refer to:

ALSO “ Pulse Contact Output : FFCS series/KFCS2/KFCS/SFCS/PFCS” in “ Manipulating Status

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks... Page 16 of 19

Output of I/O Module” in A3.2.2, “Contact Output” in Field Control Stations Reference (IM
33J15A10-01EN)
“ Pulse Contact Output : LFCS2/LFCS” in “ Manipulating Status Output of I/O Module” in
A3.2.2, “Contact Output” in Field Control Stations Reference (IM 33J15A10-01EN)

Status Manipulation of Global Switch

The syntax in action signal description for manipulating the global switch to perform its various
functions and the output actions corresponding to Y/N in the action rule columns of the sequence
table are shown as follows.
Table 2.2.13-20 Syntax in Action Signal Description and Output Actions Corresponding to Y/N in
Action Rule Columns

Action signal description column

Action rule column
Action Action description
Output signal (Y/N)
specification
Global switch output ON (Latched
Y
output)
H
Global switch output OFF (Latched
N
Element output)
symbol.PV Global switch output ON (Unlatched
Y
output)(*1)
L
No action
N
Global switch output OFF (*2)
*1: This action can be specified only on FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box on the Constant tab of the FCS
Properties sheet is selected while the process timing of the sequence table is TC (Periodic Execution
and Output only when the condition changes) or TE (Periodic Execution and Output every time the
condition becomes true), the unlatched-type global switch that was turned on when the condition
became true will be turned off when the step moves to another and the condition becomes false.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box is clear, the unlatched-type global
switch that was turned on when the condition became true will not be turned off even if the step
moves to another and the condition becomes false.
As long as the step does not move to another, the global switch will be turned off when the condition
becomes false regardless of whether the check box is selected.
By default, the check box is clear.
*2: This action can be specified only on FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box on the Constant tab of the FCS
Properties sheet is selected, the global switch is turned off while the condition is true. The action of N
will be ignored if the condition is false.
When the check box is clear, no action is performed for N.
By default, the check box is clear.

Status Manipulation of Common Switch

The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to
manipulate the status of various functions of the common switch.
Table 2.2.13-21 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule column
Action Action description
Output signal (Y/N)
specification

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks... Page 17 of 19

Common switch output ON (Latched

Y
output)
H
Common switch output OFF (Latched
N
Element output)
symbol.PV Common switch output ON (Unlatched
Y
output)(*1)
L
No action
N
Common switch output OFF (*2)
*1: This action can be specified only on FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box on the Constant tab of the FCS
Properties sheet is selected while the process timing of the sequence table is TC (Periodic Execution
and Output only when the condition changes) or TE (Periodic Execution and Output every time the
condition becomes true), the unlatched-type common switch that was turned on when the condition
became true will be turned off when the step moves to another and the condition becomes false.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box is clear, the unlatched-type common
switch that was turned on when the condition became true will not be turned off even if the step
moves to another and the condition becomes false.
As long as the step does not move to another, the common switch will be turned off when the
condition becomes false regardless of whether the check box is selected.
By default, the check box is clear.
*2: This action can be specified only on FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box on the Constant tab of the FCS
Properties sheet is selected, the common switch is turned off while the condition is true. The action of
N will be ignored if the condition is false.
When the check box is clear, no action is performed for N.
By default, the check box is clear.

Status Manipulation of Annunciator Message

The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to
manipulate the status of various functions of the annunciator message.
Table 2.2.13-22 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule column
Action Action description
Output signal (Y/N)
specification
Y Annunciator output (Latched output)
H Cancel the annunciator output
N
(Latched output)
Element symbol.PV Annunciator output (Unlatched output)
Y
(*1)
L
No action
N
Cancel the annunciator output(*2)
Repeated warning specification
Y
Element symbol.RP ON, OFF (ON: Repeated warning, OFF: Cancel)
N No action

Element Y Mask the specified alarm.

AOF
symbol.AOFS N Unmask the specified alarm.

Element Y Perform alarm group confirmation.

AFL
symbol.AFLS N No action
*1: This action can be specified only on FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box on the Constant tab of the FCS

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks... Page 18 of 19

Properties sheet is selected while the process timing of the sequence table is TC (Periodic Execution
and Output only when the condition changes) or TE (Periodic Execution and Output every time the
condition becomes true), the unlatched-type annunciator output that was turned on when the condition
became true will be turned off when the step moves to another and the condition becomes false.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box is clear, the unlatched-type
annunciator output that was turned on when the condition became true will not be turned off even if
the step moves to another and the condition becomes false.
As long as the step does not move to another, the annunciator output will be turned off when the
condition becomes false regardless of whether the check box is selected.
By default, the check box is clear.
*2: This action can be specified only on FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box on the Constant tab of the FCS
Properties sheet is selected, the annunciator output is turned off while the condition is true. The action
of N will be ignored if the condition is false.
When the check box is clear, no action is performed for N.
By default, the check box is clear.

Status Manipulation of Sequence Message Output

The manipulation contents and description symbolic convention of the action signals when
performing status manipulation for the various message functions for sequence control are indicated
below.
The status manipulation of sequence message output can be used in a sequence table that sends an
output only when conditions are changed.
The messages used in sequence controls include the messages attached with parameters
(constants) and the messages without parameters. Usage of the sequence control messages for
manipulating sequence signals varies with the messages with or without parameters.
The sequence control messages without parameters consist of the following types of messages:
• Print message output (%PR)
• Operator guide message output (%OG)
• Multimedia function message output (%VM)
• Sequence message request (%RQ)
• Event message output for supervisory computer (%CP)
• PICOT supervisory computer event message output (%M3)
The sequence control messages attached with parameters consist of the following types of
messages:
• Print message attached with parameters (%PR)
• Signal event message output (%EV)
• SFC/SEBOL return event message output (%RE)
Table 2.2.13-23 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule column
Action Action description
Output signal (Y/N)
specification
Sequence message output without
Y
NON parameter

Element N No action
symbol.PV Sequence message output with
Y
mm (*1) parameter
N No action
*1: Integer type data (2-byte unsigned integer type data) can be specified for mm.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.13 Description of Action Signal: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks... Page 19 of 19

Range: Integer from 0 to 65535

Status Manipulation of Communication I/O and

Expanded Communication I/O
The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal to
manipulate the status of various functions of the communication I/O and expanded communication
I/O.
Table 2.2.13-24 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule column
Action Action description
Output signal (Y/N)
specification
Y Relevant bit ON (Latched output)
H
N Relevant bit OFF (Latched output)
Element
symbol.PV Relevant bit ON (Unlatched output)
Y
L (*1)
N Relevant bit OFF(*2)
*1: This action can be specified only on FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box on the Constant tab of the FCS
Properties sheet is selected while the process timing of the sequence table is TC (Periodic Execution
and Output only when the condition changes) or TE (Periodic Execution and Output every time the
condition becomes true), the relevant unlatched-type bit that was turned on when the condition
became true will be turned off when the step moves to another and the condition becomes false.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box is clear, the relevant unlatched-type
bit that was turned on when the condition became true will not be turned off even if the step moves to
another and the condition becomes false.
As long as the step does not move to another, the relevant bit will be turned off when the condition
becomes false regardless of whether the check box is selected.
By default, the check box is clear.
*2: This action can be specified only on FFCS series, KFCS2, and LFCS2.
When the [CENTUM-XL Compatible Sequence Tables] check box on the Constant tab of the FCS
Properties sheet is selected, the relevant bit is turned off while the condition is true. The action of N will
be ignored if the condition is false.
When the check box is clear, no action is performed for N.
By default, the check box is clear.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.14 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Sequence Table Page 1 of 8

2.2.14 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for

Sequence Table
In the status manipulation for sequence table, in addition to data setting and status change, a series
of processing from condition testing to status manipulation can be performed by one-shot execution
of the sequence table.
For status manipulation of a sequence table with rules extended to multiple sequence tables, a tag
name for the extending sequence table must be specified.
There exist several types of status manipulations for sequence table as shown below.
• Execution of the entire sequence table
• Execution of the corresponding rule number in sequence table
• Execution of a particular step(s)
• Setting of a sequence table execution step label
• Change of the sequence table block mode

Execution of the Entire Sequence Table

▼ Action Signal Description - Sequence Table
The sequence table indicated by an element symbol of the action signal from the referencing
sequence table (branched sequence table) is activated to perform one-shot execution.
If the branched sequence table is a nonstep type, the entire table is subject to execution. If the
branched sequence table is a step type, the relevant steps according to the step processing in the
branched sequence table are subject to execution.
It is possible to further branch from a branched sequence table to other sequence table to perform
condition testing and actions for the first branched sequence table. Nesting is available up to seven
levels including the first sequence table.

When the Branched Sequence Table is a Nonstep Type

The entire branched sequence table is executed.
The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description for the action signal used to
execute the entire branched sequence table.
Table 2.2.14-1 Symbolic Convention and Action Description for Action Signal

Action signal description

Action rule Action description
Output signal Action specification
Y Execute the specified table
Element symbol.ACT ON
N Disable

When the conditions described in the condition rule are satisfied, the sequence table number listed
in the action signal symbol column will be one-shot executed to branch to the activated sequence
table. After executing all condition testing and actions, it returns to the action rule processing in the
branching sequence table.

When the Branched Sequence Table is a Nonstep Type

Description examples for the nonstep-type branched sequence tables are shown below.
Assume that “Output Only when Conditions Change” is specified for the output timing.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.14 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Sequence Table Page 2 of 8

Figure 2.2.14-1 Description Examples of Nonstep-Type Sequence Table Execution

The following explains the details of action rule processing in the description examples shown above.
• If the conditions in Rule 01 of Table ST005 are satisfied, the DO001.PV.H=Y operation will be
executed and all the conditions from rules 01 to 32 will then be tested after branching to Table
ST015. If conditions are satisfied at Table ST015, operations will be executed for the rules whose
conditions have been satisfied. It will then return to Table ST005 action rule processing to
execute the DO0014.PV.H=Y operation.
• Neither Rule 02 nor 03 on table ST005 is associated with the action rule processing because no
action descriptions for Table ST015 are listed in either rule.
• If the conditions in Rule 04 of Table ST005 are satisfied, the DO001.PV.H=N operation will be
executed and all the conditions from rules 01 to 32 will then be tested after branching to Table
ST015. If conditions are satisfied at Table ST015, operations will be executed for the rules whose
conditions have been satisfied. It will then return to Table ST005 action rule processing to
execute the DO0014.PV.H=Y and DO0035.PV.H=Y operations.
• If the periodic execution is specified for the processing timing of Table ST015, in addition to one-
shot execution caused by status manipulation, periodic execution will also be performed at Table
ST015.

When the Branched Sequence Table is a Step Type

Description examples for the step-type branched sequence table is shown below. Assume
that “Output Only when Conditions Change” is specified for the output timing.
If the branched sequence table is a step type, steps will be executed under the step management of
the branched sequence table.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.14 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Sequence Table Page 3 of 8

Figure 2.2.14-2 Description Examples of Step-Type Sequence Table Execution

The following explains the details of action rule processing in the description examples shown above.
• If the conditions in Rule 01 of Table ST005 are satisfied, the DO001.PV.H=Y operation will be
executed to branch to Table ST015. If the execution step label (PV) is Step 2, the condition
testing for rules 02 and 03 of Step 2 will be performed. If conditions are satisfied, operations for
the rules whose conditions have been satisfied will be executed. It will then return to Table
ST005 to execute the DO0014.PV.H=Y operation.
• If the step label is described on the branched sequence table, a processing will be executed
according to the step management of the branched sequence table, regardless of the step label
on the branching sequence table.

When There Exist Steps 00 and n in the Branched Sequence

Table
Description examples of the branched sequence table with steps 00 and n are shown below. Assume
that “Output Only when Conditions Change” is specified for the output timing.

Figure 2.2.14-3 Description Examples of Step-Type Sequence Table Execution

The following explains the details of the action rule processing in the description examples shown

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.14 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Sequence Table Page 4 of 8

above.
If the conditions in Rule 01 of Table ST005 are satisfied, the D000001.PV.H=Y operation will be
executed to branch to Table ST015. If the execution step label (PV) at Table ST015 is Step 2 at the
time, the condition testing for Rule 01 of Step 00 and Rule 04 of Step 2 will be performed. If
conditions are satisfied at Table ST015, operations for the rules whose conditions are satisfied, will
be executed. It will then return to Table ST005 to execute the DO0014.PV.H=Y operation.

Execution of the Corresponding Rule Number in the

Sequence Table
One-shot execution of the sequence table is performed, with the same rule number as the current
rule at the branch source as an execution target. This is used to expand the condition signal and
action signal over 64 signals in the nonstep type sequence table.
The table below lists the symbolic convention and description of action signal to execute the
corresponding rule numbers.
Table 2.2.14-2 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule column Action description
Output signal Action specification
Y Execute the same table
Element symbol.SD C
N Disable

• When the branch source is a step type and the branch destination is a nonstep type:
Although execution of the corresponding rule number is meaningless, the corresponding rules will
be executed.
• When the branched table is a step type:
Because execution of the same rules will be meaningless, the system will halt without executing
any actions.
It is possible to branch further from the branched sequence table to other sequence table, and
perform condition testing and operation for the first branched sequence table. Nesting is available
up to seven levels, including the first sequence table.
Description examples of the status manipulation of corresponding rule numbers are shown below.
Assume that “Output Only when Conditions Change” is specified for the output timing.

Figure 2.2.14-4 Description Examples of Corresponding Rule Number Execution

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.14 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Sequence Table Page 5 of 8

The following explains the details of the action rule processing in the description examples shown
above.
• If the conditions in Rule 01 of Table ST005 are satisfied, the DO001.PV.H=Y operation will be
executed, and the condition testing of Rule 01 will be conducted after branching to Table ST015.
If conditions are satisfied, DO0050.PV.H=Y, DO0052.PV.H=Y, and DO0054.PV.H=N operations
will be executed. It will then return to Table ST005 to execute the DO0014.PV.H=Y operation.
• Neither rule 02 nor 03 of Table ST005 is associated with Table ST015.
• If the conditions in Rule 04 of Table ST005 are satisfied, the DO0001.PV.H=N and
DO0011.PV.H=N operations will be executed to branch to Table ST015. Condition testing will
then be performed for Rule 04. If conditions are satisfied, operations for the rules whose
conditions have been satisfied will be executed. DO0053.PV.H=Y, DO0054.PV.H=Y, and
DO0061.PV.H=Y operations will be executed. It will then return to Table ST005 to execute the
DO0014.PV.H=Y and DO0035.PV.H=Y operations.

Executing a Particular Step in the Sequence Table

The following describes the action signal’s symbolic convention and the action description for
executing a particular step in the specified sequence table.
Table 2.2.14-3 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule column (Y/N) Action description(*1)
Output signal Action specification(*1)
Y Execute steps xx and 00
Element symbol.SA xx
N Disable
*1: xx: Specify the step label using 2 or less alphanumeric characters.

It is possible to further branch from the branched sequence table to other sequence table, and
perform condition testing and operation for that branched sequence table. Up to seven levels of
nesting are possible including the first sequence table.
The action rule subject to execution varies by the type of sequence table (nonstep, step) at the
execution source and execution destination.
Table 2.2.14-4 Execution Target Rules by Sequence Table Type

Branch source Branch destination Action rule subject to execution

Nonstep type All rules
Nonstep type
Step type Rules in specified step and step 00
Nonstep type All rules
Step type
Step type Rules in specified step and step 00

When the conditions described in the condition rule are satisfied, the sequence table number listed
in the action signal symbol column will be one-shot executed to branch to the destination sequence
table. After executing condition testing and actions for rules in Step 00 and steps specified by the
branched sequence table, it returns to the action rule processing in the branching sequence table.
If the specified step does not exist in the branched sequence table, an error will occur and the step
will not be executed. However, in spite of the error, if Step 00 exists in the branched sequence
table, only that step will be executed.
If “execution of a particular step” is performed for the nonstep-type sequence table, all rules will be
subject to execution.
A description example of executing a particular step is shown below.
Assume that “Output Only when Conditions Change” is specified for the output timing.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.14 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Sequence Table Page 6 of 8

Figure 2.2.14-5 Description Example of Executing Action Rule Processing

The following describes the action rule processing for the above example.
• If the conditions in Rule 01 of Table ST005 are newly satisfied, the DO001.PV.H=Y operation will
be performed to branch to Table ST015. Following the condition testing conducted for rules 02
and 03 of Step A2 in the branched sequence table, if the conditions are newly satisfied, relevant
operations will be performed. It will then return to Table ST005 to execute the DO0014.PV.H=Y
operation.
• Neither Rule 02 nor 03 in Table ST005 is associated with Table ST015.
• If the conditions in Rule 04 of Table ST005 are satisfied, the DO0001.PV.H=N and
DO0011.PV.H=N operations will be performed to branch to Table ST015. Following the condition
testing for rules 02 and 03 of Step A2 in the branched sequence table, if the conditions are newly
satisfied, relevant operations will be performed. It will then return to table ST005 to execute the
DO0014.PV.H=Y and DO0035.PV.H=Y operations.

Setting Execution Step Label in the Sequence Table

Execution step label (PV) of the sequence table is set. Unlike “executing a particular step,” this
operation merely sets a step label for the execution step label (PV) of a specified sequence table.
This setup operation alone will not execute the step. It is not until the execution step label (PV) is
activated after the setup that the step is executed.
The table below lists the symbolic convention and action description of the action signal for setting
the execution step label.
Table 2.2.14-5 Symbolic Convention and Action Description of the Action Signal

Action signal description column

Action rule column (Y/N) Action description(*1)
Output signal Action specification(*1)
Y Set the step name xx
Element symbol.PV xx
N Disable
*1: xx: Specify the step label using 2 or less alphanumeric characters.

A description example of specifying the execution step label of a specified sequence table is shown
below. Assume that “Output Only when Conditions Change” is specified for the output timing.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.14 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Sequence Table Page 7 of 8

Figure 2.2.14-6 Description Example of Setting Execution Step Label

The following describes the action rule processing for the above description example.
• When DI0013 becomes “OFF,” “A1” will be set on the execution step label in sequence tables
ST010, ST011 and ST012.
• When DI0013 becomes “ON,” “A1” will be set on the execution step label in the ST013 sequence
table.

Block Mode Change in Sequence Table

By describing the block mode change of the other sequence table in the sequence table action
signal, halt (change to MAN mode)/restart (change to AUT mode) of the other specified sequence
table is manipulated.
The sequence table changed to the manual (MAN) mode will retain the status at the time of block
mode change. When “changed output” is specified for the output timing, the states of halt and
restart are compared upon restarting the processing to execute the status manipulation for the
changed condition rules.
The table below lists the symbolic convention of the action signal and action description for changing
the block mode.
Table 2.2.14-6 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule column (Y/N) Action description
Output signal Action specification
Y Table mode change command
Element symbol.MODE AUT, MAN, O/S
N Disable

Pause and Restart a Sequence Table

Some sequence tables are running in a fixed scan cycle while some others are staring, pausing or
restarting in accordance with process procedures. To pause a running sequence table, and to restart
a paused sequence table is possible. The scripts may be described in a sequence table for a
sequence table’s Pause and Restart are shown as follows.
Table 2.2.14-7 Syntax for Output Signal Scripts and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action rule column (Y/N) Action description
Output signal Action specification

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.14 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Sequence Table Page 8 of 8

Y Starts or restarts sequence table

Element symbol.XS ON
N Pause Sequence table

When Y is scripted in an action rule, if the condition of that rule establishes, the sequence table
scripted in the Element symbol column will be started or restarted. When the restarted sequence
table is running in the [Output Only When Condition Changes (C)] timing, the restarted will compare
the current conditions with the conditions before it was paused, only the rules that the conditions
have been changed will perform the output actions. If the sequence table is a [Periodic Execution
Type], the sequence table will continue to run until it receives another pause command.
When N is scripted in an action rule, if the condition of that rule establishes, the sequence table
scripted in the Element symbol column will be paused.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.15 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for a Logic Chart from a Seque... Page 1 of 1

2.2.15 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for a

Logic Chart from a Sequence Table
In the status manipulation for a logic chart, a logic chart block mode can be changed. In addition,
the specified logic chart can be one-shot executed.

One-Shot Execution of a Logic Chart from a Sequence

Table
▼ Action Signal Description - Logic Chart
The syntax in action signal description for one-shot executing a logic chart and the output actions
corresponding to Y/N in the action rule columns of the sequence table are shown as follows.
Table 2.2.15-1 Syntax in Action Signal Description and Output Actions Corresponding to Y/N in
Action Rule Columns

Action signal description

Action rule Action description
Output signal Action specification
Y Execute a logic chart
Element symbol.ACT ON
N Disable

• The output of an executed logic chart can execute another logic chart. The output signal can be
nested up to seven times, including the branching sequence table.
• If one-shot execution of a logic chart fails for one of the following reasons, a system alarm will be
triggered.
• The output of an executed logic chart to execute another logic chart is nested over seven times,
including the branching sequence table.
• The function block connected to the input terminal is in O/S mode.
• The function block connected to the input terminal is udder online maintenance.

Changing the Block Mode of a Logic Chart from a

Sequence Table
The block mode of the specified logic chart may be changed. Changing the block mode allows the
logic chart to be paused (with the MAN mode specified) or resumed (with the AUT mode specified).
The syntax in action signal description for changing a block mode and the output actions
corresponding to Y/N in the action rule columns of the sequence table are shown as follows.
Table 2.2.15-2 Syntax in Action Signal Description and Output Actions Corresponding to Y/N in
Action Rule Columns

Action signal description

Action rule Action description
Output signal Action specification
Y Change a block mode
Element symbol.MODE AUT, MAN, O/S
N Disable

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.2.16 Data Items of the Sequence Table Block (ST16) Page 1 of 1

2.2.16 Data Items of the Sequence Table Block (ST16)

The data items of the ST16 block is shown below.

Data Item
Table 2.2.16-1 Table Data Items of the Sequence Table Block (ST16)

Symbol Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

PV Executing step name x 100 steps Start step name
MODE Mode x ---- O/S (MAN)
ALRM Alarm status ---- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ---- 0
AF Alarm detection ---- 0
AOFS Alarm in hibition ---- 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ---- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally.
Blank: Entry is not permitted.

SEE For more information about valid block mode of the ST16, refer to:
ALSO 2.1.2, "Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3 Logic Chart Block (LC64, LC64-E) Page 1 of 3

2.3 Logic Chart Block (LC64, LC64-E)

Logic Chart Block (LC64, LC64-E) may combine or arrange the signals of other function blocks, process
I/O and software I/O into an application for interlock sequence control.
LC64-E block is available in FFCS-C and FFCS-V.

Logic Chart Block (LC64, LC64-E)

▼ Logic Chart
Logic Chart Block is the function block that describes the relations of the input signals, the output signals
and the logic calculation operators in the interlock diagram form, so that it can perform its main function,
the interlock sequence control using the same expressions as those used on the logic chart blue prints.
An architecture of LC64 and LC64-E Logic Chart Block is shown as follows.

Figure 2.3-1 Function Block Diagram of Logic Chart Block (LC64)

A LC64-E block has 32 input terminals (Q01 to Q32) and 32 output terminals (J01 to J32), the calculation
input values (RV01 to RV32) and the calculation output values (CPV01 to CPV32) can be input or output
respectively through these terminals.
When a calculation value RVxx is input through an input terminal Qxx, the logic calculation will be
performed based on the calculation value, the calculation result CPVyy will be output through an output
terminal Jyy.

Figure 2.3-2 Function Block Diagram of Logic Chart Block (LC64-E)

The connection methods and destinations for I/O terminals of Logic Chart Block (LC64, LC64-E) are
shown below.
Table 2.3-1 Connection Methods and Destinations for I/O Terminals of Logic Chart Block (LC64)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O
terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Q01 to
- - x - - x x x
Q32

J01 to - - - x - x x x

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3 Logic Chart Block (LC64, LC64-E) Page 2 of 3

J32
*1: x: Connection available
-: Connection not available

Table 2.3-2 Connection Methods and Destinations for I/O Terminals of Logic Chart Block (LC64-E)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O
terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Q01 to
- - x - - x x x
Q32
J01 to
- - - x - x x x
J32
*1: x: Connection available
-: Connection not available

The input and output connections can be set by entering the connection information and data description
on the client area of the logic chart editing window.
In the case of LC64-E block, on control drawing builder, the condition signal and the action signal can be
wired.

Figure 2.3-3 Outline of the Logic Chart

The following two models of logic chart blocks are available:

• Logic Chart with 32 Inputs, 32 Outputs and 64 Logic Elements (LC64)
• External Connection Logic Chart Block (LC64-E)

SEE For more information about wiring the condition and action signals, refer to:
ALSO 1., “Editing Logic Chart” in Engineering Reference Vol.2 (IM 33J10D11-01EN)

Logic Chart with 32 Inputs, 32 Outputs and 64 Logic Elements

(LC64)
LC64 block is a sequence control function block with 32 input and 32 output signal channels and it can
handle 64 logic operators. Since the input and output signal channels are fixed, the small logic chart with
only 8 input and 8 output signal channels can not be created.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3 Logic Chart Block (LC64, LC64-E) Page 3 of 3

External Connection Logic Chart Block (LC64-E)

LC64-E block is available in FFCS-C and FFCS-V. Similar to LC64 block, it is a sequence control function
block with 32 input and 32 output signal channels and it can handle 64 logic operators. Since the input
and output signal channels are fixed, the small logic chart with only 8-input and 8-output signal channels
can not be created.

SEE For more information about the specific actions of LC64-E, refer to:
ALSO 2.3.15, "LC64-E Specific Actions"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.1 Configuration of a Logic Chart Page 1 of 3

2.3.1 Configuration of a Logic Chart

A logic chart consists of condition signals, action signals and logic operators.

General Outlook of a Logic Chart

A general outlook of a logic chart is shown as follows.

Figure 2.3.1-1 Configuration of the Entire Logic Chart

Outline of Logic Chart Elements

The logic chart elements are shown as follows.

Processing Timing
The processing timing of a logic chart consists of start timing and output timing.
Start timing refers to the timing at which control algorithm of the logic chart is executed upon
receipt of input signal. Output timing indicates the conditions under which action signals are output
at the time a periodic start type or one-shot start type logic chart is executed.
The output timing of logic charts is fixed to “output each time.” If the logical value acquired by logic
operation is true, output signals are output whenever started.
“Start timing” can be set on each logic chart block.
• Start timing
Select from “Periodic Execution Type (T),” “One-shot Processing Type (O),” “Startup at Initial
Cold Start/Restart (I)” or “Restricted Initial Execution Type (B).”
• Output timing
“Output Each Time Conditions are Satisfied”

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.1 Configuration of a Logic Chart Page 2 of 3

Scan Period
Periodic start logic charts are activated in each scan period as defined here. Among the periodic
started logic charts, the logic charts activated in the basic period have the items “Control Period”
and “Control Phase” to be defined in addition to scan period.
“Scan period,” “control period,” and “control phase” can be defined for each logic chart.
• Scan period
Select from “Basic Scan”, “Medium-speed Scan” (*1) or “High-speed Scan.”
• Control period
1 to 16 seconds.
• Control phase
0 to 15 seconds.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

SEE For more information about processing timing, refer to:

ALSO 7.3, “Process Timing for Sequence Control Block” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-
01EN)
For more information about scan period, refer to:
7.1.1, “Scan Period” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)
For more information about control period and control phase, refer to:
7.3.6, “Control Period and Control Phase for Logic Chart Blocks (LC64, LC64-E)” in Function
Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Order of Logic Calculation

For the execution order of logic calculation, the matrix expansion or manual expansion can be
selected.

Condition Signals
The input information such as tag names and data items or other specific condition scripts should be
entered for condition signals.

Comment
For the input signals or output signals, their service comments can be described using up to 24
alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters. A comment corresponding to a condition or
action signal can be automatically entered.

SEE For more information about comment entry, refer to:

ALSO “ Input Element Symbol” in 1.6, “Element Symbol Type and Element Resource Count” in
Engineering Reference Vol.2 (IM 33J10D11-01EN)

Logic Chart Area

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.1 Configuration of a Logic Chart Page 3 of 3

The logic calculation process can be expressed in logic chart diagram form.

Action Signals
The output information such as tag names and data items or other specific manipulation scripts
should be entered for action signals.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.2 Creating a Logic Chart Block Page 1 of 2

2.3.2 Creating a Logic Chart Block

To create a logic chart block, the settings related to the sequence control information should be
entered in each setting area of the logic chart edit window.

Configuration of Logic Chart Edit Window

The figure below shows the configuration of the logic chart edit window.

Figure 2.3.2-1 Configuration of Logic Chart Edit Window

To create a logic chart, the information for sequence connection (condition signals, action signals,
logic operators, parameters of the applied logic operators) needs to be entered in each setting area
of the logic chart edit window.
The setting areas are listed below.
• Processing timing setting area
• Execution order of logic calculation setting area
• Client area

Processing Timing Setting Area

In processing timing area, the existing settings for the processing timing and scan period are
displayed. Data can be specified and changed at the Processing Timing and Scan Period on the
Processing Timing setup area. The processing timing, scan/control periods and control phase can
also be specified at the Set Start Timing dialog box.
An example of processing timing setting dialog box is shown as below.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.2 Creating a Logic Chart Block Page 2 of 2

Figure 2.3.2-2 Processing Timing Setting Dialog Box

SEE For more information about processing timing, refer to:

ALSO 7.3, “Process Timing for Sequence Control Block” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-
01EN)

Execution Order of Logic Calculation Setting Area

For the execution order, either matrix expansion or manual expansion can be selected in this setting
area.

TIP Clicking [Execution Order] on [View] menu may display execution order of the logic elements on
the client area of the logic chart edit window.
Moreover, this setting is also applied to the logic chart view and to the self-documentation
printing.

Client Area
The client area is used to put the logic operators symbols on the matrix for describing the logic
calculation processing in logic chart format.

SEE For more information about logic calculation processing, refer to:
ALSO 2.3.5, "Logic Calculation Processing of Logic Chart"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.3 Logic Chart Processing Flow Page 1 of 1

2.3.3 Logic Chart Processing Flow

In the logic chart, the logic calculation is performed based on the result of input processing. Output
processing is then performed for the output action to the operation target.

Logic Chart Processing Flow

The figure below shows the logic chart processing flow.

Figure 2.3.3-1 Logic Chart Processing Flow

Input Processing
The true or false status of a condition signal is determined by the condition test performed on the
input signal.

Logic Calculation Processing

The logic calculation is based on the result of condition test of the input signal (true = 1, false = 0).
The logic calculation algorithm is expressed by combinations of logic operators.

Output Processing
Status manipulation output is determined based on the result of logic calculation processing. The
status manipulation will be output as the output signals to the operation target. The status
manipulation can send commands such as starting, data setting, and status change to the contact
output terminals or to other function blocks.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.4 Input Processing of Logic Chart Page 1 of 1

2.3.4 Input Processing of Logic Chart

The input processing gives a true or false status signal based on the result of condition test performed on
each of the multiple input signals.

Input Processing of Logic Chart

Logic chart function block samples input signals via its input terminals from the connected destinations.
Then the condition test is performed based on these signals.
The result of the condition test is referred to as condition signal status. The condition signal status True
or False will be passed to the logic calculation function in the block.
If the function block connected to the input terminal is a one-shot started block, the result of the
calculation performed in the one-shot started function block can also be used as the signal for condition
test.
When referencing the signal from the one-shot started function block fails, and the failure is caused by
one of the following reasons, a system alarm will be triggered.
• In the condition column of the referenced sequence table, the reference target is another sequence
table, the sub-reference is nested more than 7 times.
• The function block connected to the input terminal is in O/S mode.
• The function block connected to the input terminal is under online maintenance.
If an input terminal is not connected or a condition element is not defined, the condition test result will
give a True status unconditionally.
When the condition test can not access the current signal status, or can not trigger the one-shot started
block to start, it will use the previously used signal status for the condition test. This result will be
further used in the logic calculation processing.
A block or an element database connected is abnormal, the connected function block, process I/O or
global switch (*1) is under online maintenance are the main obstacles for accessing the input signal.
*1: The global switch can be used in FCSs except standard PFCS.

Online maintenance is one of the main obstacles for accessing the input signal and
starting the one-shot started block. The duration of an online maintenance varies
with the size and type of the modified contents for the online maintenance. When
the modified contents are in large size, the online maintenance may last for tens of
seconds.
When the condition test can not access the current signal status, or can not trigger
the one-shot started block to start, the condition test uses the previously used
signal status. Since this status is kept in the logic chart, cautions should be taken
in the following case.
• When the logic chart block itself is one-shot execution type or the connected
function block is one-shot start type, and the access failure is caused by O/S
mode, the previous signal status might be a signal kept for a long time. If the
one-shot has not been started for at least one time, the status signal kept
might be a 0 (False).
With consideration of the online maintenance in above mentioned case, when
designing a sequence control, especially the sequence control loop related to the
hazardous process controls, it is required to add an error process subroutine, or to
set the related blocks into MAN mode on the builder for online downloading.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.5 Logic Calculation Processing of Logic Chart Page 1 of 5

2.3.5 Logic Calculation Processing of Logic Chart

The logic calculation processing performs the logic calculation described in logic chart. The logic
calculation is based on the input signal status and the calculated result is output as an action signal.

Logic Calculation Processing

The logic calculation based on the signal status (True = 1, False = 0) is performed at each scan
cycle when the block is periodic type or at each time the block starts when the block is one-shot
started type. The result of the calculation will be output to other logic elements in the logic chart or
sent out as an action signal. In most of cases, a logic element gives an action signal only when the
calculation result is True.

Logic Operation Elements

The logic chart is described with combinations of logic elements in the logic chart block. The detailed
specifications of the logic operation elements will be explained in the following sections. The logic
operation element shares the same specification with corresponding logic operation block.

TIP • When an input is directly wired to an output, it is still counted as one logic operation element.
• SRS, WOUT or CMP is counted as 2 logic operation elements.

AND: Logic Product

It gives one output based on multiple inputs. When all the inputs are True, the output becomes
True. The maximum number of inputs is 20.

Figure 2.3.5-1 AND symbols

OR: Logic Sum

It gives one output based on multiple inputs. When any of inputs is True, the output becomes True.
The maximum number of inputs is 20.

Figure 2.3.5-2 OR symbols

NOT: Negation
It gives the inverse of the input as an output.

Figure 2.3.5-3 NOT symbol

SRS1-R (1 output), SRS2-R (2 outputs): Flip-Flop (Reset-

Dominant)
It gives one output or two outputs shown in the following truth table based on the set and reset

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.5 Logic Calculation Processing of Logic Chart Page 2 of 5

input signals.
One flip-flop operation is counted as two logic operation elements.

Figure 2.3.5-4 SRS1-R and SRS2-R symbols

Table 2.3.5-1 Table Reset-Dominant Truth Table

S 0 1 0 1
Input
R 0 0 1 1
OUT1 Latched(*1) 1 0 0
Output
OUT2 Latched(*1) 0 1 1
*1: The previous state is maintained.

SRS1-S (1 output), SRS2-S (2 outputs): Flip-Flop (Set-

Dominant)
It gives one output or two outputs shown in the following truth table based on the set and reset
input signals.
One flip-flop operation is counted as two logic operation elements.

Figure 2.3.5-5 SRS1-S and SRS2-S symbols

Table 2.3.5-2 Set-Dominant Truth Table

S 0 1 0 1
Input
R 0 0 1 1
OUT1 Latched(*1) 1 0 1
Output
OUT2 Latched(*1) 0 1 0
*1: The previous state is maintained.

WOUT: Wipeout
It gives an output which is an inverse of reset signal when reset signal is true, otherwise, it gives the
set signal as output, shown in the following truth table based on the set and reset input signals.
One wipeout operation is counted as two logic operation elements.
Its symbol is shown below.
(W. O)
Table 2.3.5-3 WOUT Truth Table

S 0 1 0 1
Input
R 0 0 1 1

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.5 Logic Calculation Processing of Logic Chart Page 3 of 5

Output OUT 0 1 0 0

OND: On-Delay Timer

When the input status changes from 0 to 1, the internal timer starts. When the set time t elapsed,
its output changes from 0 to 1. When the input status changes to 0, the output will be reset to 0
immediately.

Figure 2.3.5-6 On-Delay Timer symbol

Figure 2.3.5-7 Behavior of On-Delay Timer

OFFD: Off-Delay Timer

When the input status changes from 1 to 0, the internal timer starts. When the set time t elapsed,
its output changes from 1 to 0. When the input status changes to 1, the output will be reset to 1
immediately.

Figure 2.3.5-8 Off-Delay Timer symbol

Figure 2.3.5-9 Behavior of Off-Delay Timer

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.5 Logic Calculation Processing of Logic Chart Page 4 of 5

TON: One-Shot (Rise Trigger)

When the input status changes from 0 to 1, it gives an output 1 for a one scan cycle. The output is
always 0 except for that 1 scan cycle.

Figure 2.3.5-10 One-Shot (Rise Trigger) symbol

Figure 2.3.5-11 Behavior of One-Shot (Rise Trigger)

TOFF: One-Shot (Fall Trigger)

When the input status changes from 1 to 0, it gives an output 1 for a one scan cycle. The output is
always 0 except for that 1 scan cycle.

Figure 2.3.5-12 One-Shot (Fall Trigger) symbol

Figure 2.3.5-13 Behavior of One-Shot (Fall Trigger)

CMP-GE: Comparator
It compares the logic values of input 1 and input 2. It gives an output 1 when input 1 is greater than
or equal to input 2, otherwise it gives an output 0.
One Comparator operation is counted as two logic operation elements.

Figure 2.3.5-14 CMP-GE symbol

Table 2.3.5-4 CMP-GE Truth Table

IN1 0 0 1 1

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.5 Logic Calculation Processing of Logic Chart Page 5 of 5

Input IN2 0 1 0 1
Output OUT 1 0 1 1

CMP-GT: Comparator
It compares the logic values of input 1 and input 2. It gives an output 1 when input 1 is greater than
input 2, otherwise it gives an output 0.
One Comparator operation is counted as two logic operation elements.

Figure 2.3.5-15 CMP-GT symbol

Table 2.3.5-5 CMP-GT Truth Table

IN1 0 0 1 1
Input
IN2 0 1 0 1
Output OUT 0 0 1 0

CMP-EQ: Comparator
It compares the logic values of input 1 and input 2. It gives an output 1 when input 1 is equal to
input 2, otherwise it gives an output 0.
One Comparator operation is counted as two logic operation elements.

Figure 2.3.5-16 CMP-GT symbol

Table 2.3.5-6 CMP-EQ Truth Table

IN1 0 0 1 1
Input
IN2 0 1 0 1
Output OUT 1 0 0 1

Execution Order of Logic Calculation

The Execution Order indicates in which order logic elements in logic charts are executed, which
includes Matrix Expansion and Manual Expansion.
• Matrix expansion
Logic operators in logic charts are executed from the left column to the right, and from the upper
element to the lower in the same column.
• Manual expansion
The execution order automatically assigned to the logic operation elements according to their
position can be manually changed.
The execution order of logic operation elements can be specified on the logic chart edit window. The
default setting for the execution order is matrix expansion.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.6 Output Processing of Logic Chart Page 1 of 1

2.3.6 Output Processing of Logic Chart

The output processing of the logic chart gives an action signal to the operation target. The action
signal is the result availed from the logic calculation processing.

Output Processing of Logic Chart

The output processing of the logic chart performs status manipulation to the specified output
terminal in accordance with the action signal. The action signal is availed from the True or False
result of the logic calculation in the logic chart function block.
When the action signal is specified to a function block to be one-shot started, the block will be one-
shot started when the action signal is output to it.
When output to the one-shot function block fails, and the failure is caused by one of the following
reasons, a system alarm will be triggered.
• In the action column of the destination sequence table, the output signal is output to another
logic chart. Moreover, the output is redirected to another logic chart. The output is nested more
than 7 times.
• The function block connected to the output terminal is in O/S mode.
• The function block connected to the output terminal is udder online maintenance.
When the output action is to set a datum or to change status, if the connected destination, a block
or an element, is under online maintenance, the output will be skipped then the processing
continues.
When the output action is to change the block mode of the connected destination block, if the
output processing has an error, the status change of the connected destination block will not be
performed.
For the logic chart that has multiple output terminals, each terminal outputs the action signal in
accordance with logic calculation True or False result related to the terminal.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 1 of 19

2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other

Function Blocks and I/O Data
Various types of data, block mode and status can be referenced for condition test performed in
logic chart. I/O data including the process I/O, software I/O, communication I/O and expanded
communication I/O (*1) can also be referenced.
*1: Expanded communication I/Os are available in FFCS-C and FFCS-V.

Function Blocks and I/O Data that can be Referenced

from Logic Chart
The function blocks that can be referenced from a logic chart are as follows:
• Switch instrument blocks
• Timer Block (TM)
• Software Counter Block (CTS)
• Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP)
• Code Input Block (CI)
• Code Output Block (CO)
• Relational Expression Block (RL)
• Resource Scheduler Block (RS)
• Local Switch Block (LSW)
• Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)
• Regulatory Control Blocks
• Calculation Blocks
• Faceplate Blocks
• SFC Blocks
• Unit Instrument Blocks
• Sequence Table Blocks
• Logic Chart Blocks
In addition, the following I/O data can also be referenced from a logic chart:
• Process I/O (contact I/O)
• Software I/O (internal switch, annunciator message)
• Communication I/O and expanded communication I/O
Note the following points when referencing other function blocks or I/O data:
• When O/S is specified as the condition specification for block mode reference, the test result will
be False when the block is in the compound block mode, i.e., O/S and another basic block mode
exist simultaneously.
• When MAN or AUT is specified as the condition specification for block mode reference, the test
result is True even in the compound block mode as long as the specified basic block mode exists.
• The status of pulse width output cannot be referenced.

Referencing Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced

Switch Instrument Block
The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a switch instrument block and
enhanced switch instrument block as condition test reference signal in a logic chart and the

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 2 of 19

True/False representation in the logic chart are shown as follows.

Table 2.3.7-1 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

True/False Satisfiable condition
Input signal Condition specification
Answerback value matches
True
specification
Element symbol.PV. 0, 1, 2
Answerback value does not match
False
specification
True Data status matches specification
Element
Data status Data status does not match
symbol.PV= False
specification
True Output value matches specification
Element symbol.MV. 0, 1, 2 Output value does not match
False
specification
True Data status matches specification
Element
Data status Data status does not match
symbol.MV= False
specification

Element True Tracking switch in specified state

0,1
symbol.TSW. False Tracking switch not in specified state

Element True Tracking switch in specified state

Data status
symbol.TSW= False Tracking switch not in specified state

Element True Backup switch in specified state

0, 1
symbol.BSW. False Backup switch not in specified state
True Block mode matches specification
Element AUT, MAN, CAS, ROUT, TRK,
symbol.MODE. O/S Block mode does not match
False
specification
True Block is in ROUT (MAN) mode
BUM
False Block is not in ROUT (MAN) mode

Element True Block is in ROUT (AUT) mode

BUA
symbol.XMODE. False Block is not in ROUT (AUT) mode
True Block is in ROUT (CAS) mode
BUC
False Block is not in ROUT (CAS) mode
True Block status matches specification
Element
NR, SIM, ANCK Block status does not match
symbol.BSTS. False
specification

Element NR, IOP, OOP, ANS+, ANS-, True Specified alarm occurring
symbol.ALRM. PERR, CNF False No occurrence of specified alarm
True Alarm is in IOP or IOP- status.
Element
IOP Alarm is in neither IOP nor IOP-
symbol.XALRM. False
status.

Element PERR, AFL (*1), NR, IOP, OOP, True Specified alarm in flashing state
symbol.AFLS. ANS+, ANS-, CNF False Specified alarm in non-flashing state
Canceling the specified alarm
NR, IOP, OOP, ANS+, ANS-, True
Element symbol.AF. detection
PERR, CNF
False Detecting the specified alarm

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 3 of 19

Element True IOP or IOP- detection is disabled

IOP
symbol.XAF. False IOP and IOP- detection is enabled
True Suppressing the specified alarm
Element NR, IOP, OOP, ANS+, CNF, ANS-
symbol.AOFS. , PERR, AOF (*2) Canceling the specified alarm in
False
suppression
Sequence setpoint value matches
True
Element specification
0, 1, 2
symbol.CSV. Sequence setpoint value does not
False
match specification
True Data status matches specification
Element
Data status Data status does not match
symbol.CSV= False
specification
Remote manipulated output value
True
Element matches specification
0, 1, 2
symbol.RMV. Remote manipulated output value
False
does not match specification
True Data status matches specification
Element
Data status Data status does not match
symbol.RMV= False
specification

Element True Bypass switch in specified state

0, 1
symbol.BPSW. False Bypass switch not in specified state
True Data status matches specification
Element
Data status Data status does not match
symbol.BPSW= False
specification
*1: The condition specification of the AFL is the reference in all flashing state.
*2: The condition specification of the AOF is the reference in all suppressing alarm state.

Referencing Timer Block (TM)

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a timer (TM) block as condition
test reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in the logic chart are shown
as follows.
Table 2.3.7-2 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

True/False Satisfiable condition
Input signal Condition specification
True Block mode matches specification
Element
AUT, O/S Block mode does not match
symbol.MODE. False
specification

Element STOP, RUN, PAUS, NR, PALM, True Block status in specified state
symbol.BSTS. CTUP False Block status not in specified state

Element True Alarm status in specified state

NR
symbol.ALRM. False Alarm status not in specified state

Element True Specified alarm in flashing state

AFL (*1), NR
symbol.AFLS. False Specified alarm in non-flashing state
True Canceling the specified alarm detection
Element symbol.AF. NR
False Detecting the specified alarm

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 4 of 19

True Suppressing the specified alarm

Element
NR, AOF (*2) Canceling the specified alarm in
symbol.AOFS. False
suppression
*1: The condition specification of the AFL is the reference in all flashing state.
*2: The condition specification of the AOF is the reference in all suppressing alarm state.

Referencing Software Counter Block (CTS)

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a software counter (CTS) block
as condition test reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in the logic chart
are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.7-3 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

True/False Satisfiable condition
Input signal Condition specification
True Block mode matches specification
Element symbol.MODE. AUT, O/S
False Block mode does not match specification
True Block status in specified state
Element symbol.BSTS. STOP, RUN, NR, PALM, CTUP
False Block status not in specified state

Referencing Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP)

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a pulse train input counter
(CTP) block as condition test reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in
the logic chart are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.7-4 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

True/False Satisfiable condition
Input signal Condition specification
True Block mode matches specification
Element
AUT, O/S Block mode does not match
symbol.MODE. False
specification

STOP, RUN, PAUS, NR, PALM, True Block status in specified state
Element symbol.BSTS.
CTUP False Block status not in specified state

Element True Alarm status in specified state

CNF, NR, IOP
symbol.ALRM. False Alarm status not in specified state
True Alarm is in IOP or IOP- status.
Element
IOP Alarm is in neither IOP nor IOP-
symbol.XALRM. False
status.
True Specified alarm in flashing state
Element symbol.AFLS. AFL (*1), CNF, NR, IOP
False Specified alarm in non-flashing state
Canceling the specified alarm
True
Element symbol.AF. CNF, NR, IOP detection
False Detecting the specified alarm
True IOP or IOP- detection is disabled.
Element symbol.XAF. IOP
False IOP and IOP- detection is enabled.
True Suppressing the specified alarm

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 5 of 19

Canceling the specified alarm in

Element symbol.AOFS. CNF, NR, IOP, AOF (*2) False
suppression
True Data status matches specification
Element symbol.PV= Data status Data status does not match
False
specification
*1: The condition specification of the AFL is the reference in all flashing state.
*2: The condition specification of the AOF is the reference in all suppressing alarm state.

Referencing Code Input Block (CI)

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a code input (CI) block as
condition test reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in the logic chart
are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.7-5 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

True/False Satisfiable condition
Input signal Condition specification
True Block mode matches specification
Element symbol.MODE. AUT, O/S
False Block mode does not match specification
True Block status matches specification
Element symbol.BSTS. NR, LO, HI, ERR
False Block status does not match specification
True Data status matches specification
Element symbol.PV= Data status
False Data status does not match specification

Referencing Code Output Block (CO)

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a code output (CO) block as
condition test reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in the logic chart
are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.7-6 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

True/False Satisfiable condition
Input signal Condition specification
True Block mode matches specification
Element symbol.MODE. AUT, O/S
False Block mode does not match specification
True Block status matches specification
Element symbol.BSTS. NR, LO, HL
False Block status does not match specification
True Data status matches specification
Element symbol.PV= Data status
False Data status does not match specification

Referencing Relational Expression Block (RL)

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a relational expression (RL)
block as condition test reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in the logic
chart are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.7-7 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 6 of 19

Condition
Input signal True/False Satisfiable condition
specification
True Relationship of two data in specified state
Element symbol.X01 to
EQ, GT, GE, LT, LE, AND Relationship of two data not in specified
16. False
state

The Meanings of the condition specifications are as follows:

Table 2.3.7-8 Meanings of the Condition Specifications

Symbol Name Meanings

EQ Equal to Data 1 = data 2
GT Greater than Data 1 > data 2
GE Great than or equal to Data 1 ≥ data 2
LT Less than Data 1 < data 2
LE Less than or equal to Data 1 ≤ data 2
AND Logical product The logic product of each pair of bits in data 1 and data 2

Referencing Resource Scheduler Block (RS)

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a resource scheduler (RS) block
as condition test reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in the logic chart
are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.7-9 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

Condition True/False Satisfiable condition
Input signal
specification
True Block mode matches specification
Element symbol.MODE. AUT, O/S
False Block mode does not match specification
Usage request state matches specification
Element symbol.RQ01 True
0, 1 (0: No request 1: Requesting)
to 32.
False Usage state does not match specification
Permission state matches specification
Element symbol.PM01 True
0, 1 (0: No permission 1: Permitted)
to 32.
False Permission state does not match specification
Maximum allowable number matches
True
specification
Element symbol.PMH. 0 to 32
Maximum allowable number does not match
False
specification

Referencing Local Switch Block (LSW)

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a local switch (LSW) block as
condition test reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in the logic chart
are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.7-10 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

True/False Satisfiable condition
Input signal
Condition

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 7 of 19

specification
Switch status matches specification
True
Element symbol.PV01 to (0: OFF, 1: ON)
0, 1
32. Switch status does not match
False
specification

Referencing Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a Valve Monitoring (VLVM)
Block as condition test reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in the logic
chart are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.7-11 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

Condition True/False Satisfiable condition
Input signal
specification
True Block mode matches specification
Element symbol.MODE. AUT, O/S
False Block mode does not match specification
True Specified alarm occurring
Element symbol.ALRM. NR
False No occurrence of specified alarm
True Specified alarm in flashing state
Element symbol.AFLS. NR, AFL (*1)
False Specified alarm in non-flashing state
True Canceling the specified alarm detection
Element symbol.AF. NR
False Detecting the specified alarm
True Suppressing the specified alarm
Element symbol.AOFS. NR, AOF (*2)
False Canceling the specified alarm in suppression
Valve abnormal matches specification
Element symbol.PV01 True
0, 1 (0: Normal 1: Error)
to 16.
False Valve abnormal does not match specification
Representative valve abnormal matches
specification
True
(0: All valves normal 1: At least one error
Element symbol.PVR. 0, 1 occurred)
Representative valve abnormal does not
False
match specification
Message suppression matches specification
True
(0: Not suppressed 1: Suppressed)
Element symbol.MCSW. 0, 1
Message suppression does not match
False
specification
*1: The condition specification of the AFL is the reference in all flashing state.
*2: The condition specification of the AOF is the reference in all suppressing alarm state.

Referencing Regulatory Control Block

The syntax for applying the block mode, block status, alarm status and data status of a regulatory
control block as condition test reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in
the logic chart are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.7-12 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 8 of 19

Condition signal description column

Condition True/False Satisfiable condition
Input signal
specification
True Block mode in specified state
Element symbol.MODE. Block mode
False Block mode not in specified state
Block is in ROUT (MAN) or RCAS (MAN)
True
mode.
BUM
Block is not in ROUT (MAN) or RCAS
False
(MAN) mode.
Block is in ROUT (AUT) or RCAS (AUT)
True
mode.
Element symbol.XMODE. BUA
Block is not in ROUT (AUT) or RCAS (AUT)
False
mode.
Block is in ROUT (CAS) or RCAS (CAS)
True
mode.
BUC
Block is not in ROUT (CAS) or RCAS (CAS)
False
mode.
True Block status in specified state
Element symbol.BSTS. Block status
False Block status not in specified state
True Specified alarm occurring
Element symbol.ALRM. Alarm status
False No occurrence of specified alarm
True Alarm is in IOP or IOP- status.
IOP
False Alarm is in neither IOP nor IOP- status.
Element symbol.XALRM.
True Alarm is in VEL+ or VEL- status.
VEL
False Alarm is in neither VEL+ nor VEL- status.
True Specified alarm in flashing state
Element symbol.AFLS. Alarm status, AFL (*1)
False Specified alarm in non-flashing state
True Canceling the specified alarm detection
Element symbol.AF. Alarm status
False Detecting the specified alarm
True IOP or IOP- detection is disabled.
Element symbol.XAF. IOP
False IOP and IOP- detection is enabled.
True Suppressing the specified alarm
Element symbol.AOFS. Alarm status, AOF (*2) Canceling the specified alarm in
False
suppression

Element symbol, Data True Data value matches specification

Data value
item. False Data value does not match specification

Element symbol, Data True Data status matches specification

Data status
item= False Data status does not match specification
*1: The condition specification of the AFL is the reference in all flashing state.
*2: The condition specification of the AOF is the reference in all suppressing alarm state.

Data Items of Regulatory Control Blocks for Condition Test

The data items of the regulatory control blocks and the range of the data values that can be put in
the condition column for condition test are listed as follows.
Table 2.3.7-13 Data Items of Regulatory Control Blocks and Range of Data Values for Condition

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 9 of 19

Test

Block code Name Data item Setting range

TSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PID PID Controller Block PSW 0 to 3
RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PI-HLD Sampling PI Controller Block PSW 0 to 3
RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PID-BSW PID Controller Block with Batch Switch PSW 0 to 3
RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PID-TP Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block PSW 0 to 3
BSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF-E Enhanced 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF-G 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF-GE Enhanced 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
PD-MR PD Controller Block with Manual Reset
RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
PI-BLEND Blending PI Controller Block RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
RST 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
PID-STC Self-Tuning PID Controller Block
RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 10 of 19

STC -1 to 3
TSW 0, 1
MLD Manual Loader Block
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
MLD-PVI Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
MLD-SW Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW PSW 0 to 3
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
BPSW 0 to 4
MC-2 2-Position Motor Control Block SIMM 0 to 1
CSV 0 to 2
PV 0 to 2
MV 0 to 2
TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
BPSW 0 to 4
MC-2E Enhanced 2-Position Motor Control Block SIMM 0 to 1
CSV 0 to 2
PV 0 to 2
MV 0 to 2
TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
BPSW 0 to 4
MC-3 3-Position Motor Control Block SIMM 0 to 1
CSV 0 to 2
PV 0 to 2
MV 0 to 2
TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
BPSW 0 to 4
MC-3E Enhanced 3-Position Motor Control Block SIMM 0 to 1
CSV 0 to 2
PV 0 to 2
MV 0 to 2
TSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
RATIO Ratio Set Block
RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
ZONE 1 to 13
PG-L13 13-Zone Program Set Block ZSTR 1 to 13

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 11 of 19

ZEND 1 to 13
SW 0 to 4
BSETU-2 Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block EMSW 0, 1
ZONE 0 to 11
SW 0 to 4
BSETU-3 Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block EMSW 0, 1
ZONE 0 to 11
PSW 0 to 3
VELLIM Velocity Limiter Block BSW 0, 1
BPSW 0, 1
SW 0 to 4
SS-H/M/L Signal Selector Block
SEL 0 to 3
PSW 0 to 3
AS-H/M/L Autoselector Block SW 0 to 4
SEL 0 to 3
SW 1 to 3
SS-DUAL Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block
SEL 1 to 2
TSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
FFSUM Feedforward Signal Summing Block
FSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
XCPL Non-Interference Control Output Block PSW 0 to 3
RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
SPLIT Control Signal Splitter Block
SW 0 to 2
SW 0 to 5
ALM-R Representative Alarm Block
SV 0 to 15
SBSD YS Instrument Batch Set Station Block SV 0 to 8
SLBC YS Instrument Batch Controller Block SV 0 to 8

Referencing Calculation Block

The syntax for applying the block mode, block status, alarm status and data status of a calculation
block as condition test reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in the logic
chart are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.7-14 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

Condition True/False Satisfiable condition
Input signal
specification
True Block mode matches specification
Element symbol.MODE. AUT, O/S
False Block mode does not match specification
True Block status matches specification
Element symbol.BSTS. Block status

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 12 of 19

False Block status does not match specification

True Alarm status in specified state
Element symbol.ALRM. CNF, NR
False Alarm status not in specified state
True Alarm is in IOP or IOP- status.
IOP
False Alarm is in neither IOP nor IOP- status.
Element symbol.XALRM.
True Alarm is in VEL+ or VEL- status.
VEL
False Alarm is in neither VEL+ nor VEL- status.
True Specified alarm in flashing state
Element symbol.AFLS. Alarm status, AFL (*1)
False Specified alarm in non-flashing state
True Canceling the specified alarm detection
Element symbol.AF. CNF, NR
False Detecting the specified alarm
True IOP or IOP- detection is disabled.
Element symbol.XAF. IOP
False IOP and IOP- detection is enabled.
True Suppressing the specified alarm
Element symbol.AOFS. CNF, NR, AOF (*2) Canceling the specified alarm in
False
suppression
True Calculation execution result is not 0
Element symbol.ACT. ON
False Calculation execution result is 0

Element symbol.Data True Data value matches specification

Data value (*3)
item. False Data value does not match specification
True Data status of specified data matches
Element symbol.Data
Data status Data status of specified data does not
item= False
match
*1: The condition specification of the AFL is the reference in all flashing state.
*2: The condition specification of the AOF is the reference in all suppressing alarm state.
*3: Only integers can be handled as data values, When the data type of the data item is a floating-point
type, the comparison is made by rounding off the value.

Data Items of Calculation Blocks for Condition Test

The data items of the calculation blocks and the range of the data values that can be put in the
condition column for condition test are listed as follows.
Table 2.3.7-15 Data Items of Calculation Blocks and Range of Data Values for Condition Test

Block code Name Data item Setting range

DLAY Dead-Time Block
DLAY-C Dead-Time Compensation Block RST 0, 1
AVE-M Moving-Average Block
INTEG Integration Block
SW 0, 1, 2
AVE-C Cumulative-Average Block
SW-33 Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block SW 0 to 3
BDSET-1L One-Batch Data Set Block
BDSET-1C One-Batch String Data Set Block
SW 0 to 3
BDSET-2L Two-Batch Data Set Block
BDSET-2C Two-Batch String Data Set Block

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 13 of 19

SW-91 One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block SW 0 to 9

DSW-16 Selector Switch Block for 16 Data
SW 0 to 16
DSW-16C Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data
BDA-L Batch Data Acquisition Block
SW 0 to 17
BDA-C Batch String Data Acquisition Block
RV1 0, 1
AND (*1) Logical AND Block RV2 0, 1
CPV 0, 1
RV1 0, 1
OR (*1) Logical OR Block RV2 0, 1
CPV 0, 1
RV 0, 1
NOT (*1) Logical NOT Block
CPV 0, 1
RV1 0, 1
SRS1-S (*1) Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output RV2 0, 1
CPV1 0, 1
RV1 0, 1
SRS1-R (*1) Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output RV2 0, 1
CPV1 0, 1
RV1 0, 1
RV2 0, 1
SRS2-S (*1) Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs
CPV1 0, 1
CPV2 0, 1
RV1 0, 1
RV2 0, 1
SRS2-R (*1) Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs
CPV1 0, 1
CPV2 0, 1
RV1 0, 1
WOUT (*1) Wipeout Block RV2 0, 1
CPV 0, 1
RV 0, 1
OND (*1) ON-Delay Timer Block
CPV 0, 1
RV 0, 1
OFFD (*1) OFF-Delay Timer Block
CPV 0, 1
RV 0, 1
TON (*1) One-Shot Block (Rising-Edge Trigger)
CPV 0, 1
RV 0, 1
TOFF (*1) One-Shot Block (Falling-Edge Trigger)
CPV 0, 1
GT (*1) Comparator Block (Greater Than) CPV 0, 1
GE (*1) Comparator Block (Greater Than or Equal) CPV 0, 1
EQ (*1) Equal Operator Block CPV 0, 1
*1: Logic Operation blocks can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 14 of 19

Calculation Blocks whose Results can be Referenced by One-

Shot Execution
The one-shot executable calculation blocks whose calculation results can be referenced for condition
test with “element symbol. ACT.ON” script are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.7-16 One-Shot Executable Blocks for Condition Test

Block type Block code Name

ADD Addition Block
MUL Multiplication Block
Arithmetic Calculation
DIV Division Block
AVE Averaging Block
AND Logical AND Block
OR Logical OR Block
NOT Logical NOT Block
SRS1-S Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output
SRS1-R Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output
SRS2-S Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs
SRS2-R Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs
Logic Operation Blocks (*1)
WOUT Wipeout Block
GT Comparator Block (Greater Than)
GE Comparator Block (Greater Than or Equal)
EQ Equal Operator Block
BAND Bitwise AND Block
BOR Bitwise OR Block
BNOT Bitwise NOT Block
CALCU General-Purpose Calculation Block
General-Purpose Calculation
CALCU-C General-Purpose Calculation Block with String I/O
*1: Logic Operation blocks can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Referencing Faceplate Block

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a faceplate block as condition
test reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in the logic chart are shown
as follows.
Table 2.3.7-17 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

Condition True/False Conditions for true status
Input signal
specification
True Block mode in specified state
Element symbol.MODE. Block mode
False Block mode not in specified state
Block is in ROUT (MAN) or RCAS (MAN)
True
mode.
BUM
False
Block is not in ROUT (MAN) or RCAS

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 15 of 19

(MAN) mode.
Block is in ROUT (AUT) or RCAS (AUT)
True
mode.
BUA
Block is not in ROUT (AUT) or RCAS
False
Element symbol.XMODE. (AUT) mode.
Block is in ROUT (CAS) or RCAS (CAS)
True
mode.
BUC
Block is not in ROUT (CAS) or RCAS
False
(CAS) mode.
True Block status in specified state
Element symbol.BSTS. Block status
False Block status not in specified state
True Specified alarm occurring
Element symbol.ALRM. Alarm status
False No occurrence of specified alarm
True Alarm is in IOP or IOP- status.
IOP
False Alarm is in neither IOP nor IOP- status.
Element symbol.XALRM. True Alarm is in VEL+ or VEL- status.
VEL Alarm is in neither VEL+ nor VEL-
False
status.
True Specified alarm in flashing state
Element symbol.AFLS. Alarm status, AFL (*1)
False Specified alarm in non-flashing state
True Canceling the specified alarm detection
Element symbol.AF. Alarm status
False Detecting the specified alarm
True IOP or IOP- detection is disabled.
Element symbol.XAF. IOP
False IOP and IOP- detection is enabled.
True Suppressing the specified alarm
Element symbol.AOFS. Alarm status, AOF (*2) Canceling the specified alarm in
False
suppression
Batch step number matches
True
1 to 99 (Valid only for specification
Element symbol.SV.
BSI blocks) Batch step number does not match
False
specification
True Switch status matches specification
Element symbol.PV01 to
0, 1 Switch status does not match
10. False
specification
Manipulated command value matches
True
Element symbol.MV01 to specification
0, 1
10. Manipulated command value does not
False
match specification
True Data status matches specification
Element symbol.Data
Data status Data status does not match
item= False
specification
Switch display color matches
True
Element symbol.SWCR[1 specification
0 to 15
to n]. (*3) Switch display color does not match
False
specification
Switch flashing status matches
True
specification

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 16 of 19

Element symbol.SWST[1 Switch flashing status does not match

0, 1 False
to n]. (*3) specification
Switch operation prohibited status
True
Element symbol.SWOP[1 matches specification
-15 to 15
to n]. (*3) Switch operation prohibited status does
False
not match specification
*1: The condition specification of the AFL is the reference in all flashing state.
*2: The condition specification of the AOF is the reference in all suppressing alarm state.
*3: n indicates the number of elements in a one-dimensional array. This is the number of push-button
switches in a faceplate block, and varies with the type of each faceplate block.

Referencing SFC Block

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a SFC block as condition test
reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in the logic chart are shown as
follows.
Table 2.3.7-18 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

Condition True/False Conditions for true status
Input signal
specification
True Block mode in specified state
Element symbol.MODE. MAN, SEMI, AUT, O/S
False Block mode not in specified state

RUN, PAUS, STOP, True Block status in specified state

Element symbol.BSTS.
ABRT False Block status not in specified state
True Specified alarm occurring
Element symbol.ALRM. Alarm status
False No occurrence of specified alarm
True Specified alarm in flashing state
Element symbol.AFLS. Alarm status, AFL (*1)
False Specified alarm in non-flashing state
True Canceling the specified alarm detection
Element symbol.AF. Alarm status
False Detecting the specified alarm
True Suppressing the specified alarm
Element symbol.AOFS. Alarm status, AOF (*2) Canceling the specified alarm in
False
suppression

Element True Data value matches specification

Data value
symbol.Dataitem. False Data value does not match specification
True Data status matches specification
Element
Data status Data status does not match
symbol.Dataitem= False
specification
*1: The condition specification of the AFL is the reference in all flashing state.
*2: The condition specification of the AOF is the reference in all suppressing alarm state.

Range of Data Value When Referencing the Data Items for

Condition Test
The ranges of data values when referencing SFC data items in a logic chart for condition test are
shown as follows.
• STEPNO: 1 to 99

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 17 of 19

• SWCR[5]: 0 to 15
• SWST[5]: 0, 1
• SWOP[5]: -15 to 15

Referencing Unit Instrument

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a unit instrument block as
condition test reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in the logic chart
are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.7-19 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

Condition True/False Conditions for true status
Input signal
specification
True Unit mode in specified state
Element symbol.MODE. MAN,SEMI, AUT,O/S
False Unit mode not in specified state
True Unit status in specified state
Element symbol.BSTS. Unit status
False Unit status not in specified state
True Specified alarm occurring
Element symbol.ALRM. Alarm status
False No occurrence of specified alarm
True Specified alarm in flashing state
Element symbol.AFLS. Alarm status, AFL (*1)
False Specified alarm in non-flashing state
True Canceling the specified alarm detection
Element symbol.AF. Alarm status
False Detecting the specified alarm
True Suppressing the specified alarm
Element symbol.AOFS. Alarm status, AOF (*2) Canceling the specified alarm in
False
suppression
True SFC step number matches specification
Element
1 to 99 SFC step number does not match
symbol.STEPNO. False
specification
*1: The condition specification of the AFL is the reference in all flashing state.
*2: The condition specification of the AOF is the reference in all suppressing alarm state.

Referencing Process I/O

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a process I/O as condition test
reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in the logic chart are shown as
follows.
Table 2.3.7-20 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

Condition True/False Conditions for true status
Input signal
specification
Contact I/O ON/OFF state matches
True
Element specification
ON, OFF
symbol.PV. Contact I/O ON/OFF state does not match
False
specification
True Contact I/O data status matches specification
Element

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 18 of 19

symbol.PV= Contact I/O data status does not match

Data status False
specification

Referencing Global Switch

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a global switch as condition test
reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in the logic chart are shown as
follows.
Table 2.3.7-21 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

True/False Conditions for true status
Input signal Condition specification
True Specified global switch status is True.
Element symbol.PV. ON, OFF
False Specified global switch status is False.
True Data status of global switch is BAD.
Element symbol.PV= BAD
False Data status of global switch is not BAD.

Referencing Common Switch

The syntax for applying the data of a common switch as condition test reference signal in a logic
chart and the True/False representation in the logic chart are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.7-22 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

Condition True/False Conditions for true status
Input signal
specification
Specified internal status switch ON/OFF state
True
Element matches specification
ON, OFF
symbol.PV. Specified internal status switch ON/OFF state does
False
not match specification

Referencing Annunciator Message

The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of an annunciator message as
condition test reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False representation in the logic chart
are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.7-23 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description

column
True/False Conditions for true status
Condition
Input signal
specification
Annunciator occurrence state matches specification
True
Element (On: Occurred OFF: No occurrence)
ON, OFF
symbol.PV. Annunciator occurrence state does not match
False
specification

Element True Flashing state

AFL
symbol.AFLS. False Steady state (non-flashing state)

Element True Alarm suppressing state

AOF
symbol.AOFS.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.7 Condition Signal Description: Referencing Other Function Blocks and I/O Data Page 19 of 19

False Steady state (non-alarm suppressing state)

Repeated warning status is consistent with
True specification (ON: Wait for repeated warning OFF:
Element NR)
ON, OFF
symbol.RP.
Repeated warning state is not consistent with
False
specification

Referencing Communication I/O and Expanded

Communication I/O
The syntax for applying the various types of data and data status of a Communication I/O and a
Expanded Communication I/O as condition test reference signal in a logic chart and the True/False
representation in the logic chart are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.7-24 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

Condition True/False Conditions for true status
Input signal
specification
Specified bit ON/OFF state matches
True
Element symbol.PV. specification
ON, OFF
(*1) Specified bit ON/OFF state does not match
False
specification
True Specified bit data status matches specification
Element symbol.PV= Data status Specified bit data status does not match
False
specification
*1: Only discrete type element may be referred.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.8 Syntax for Condition Signal Description: Referencing Logic Chart Page 1 of 1

2.3.8 Syntax for Condition Signal Description: Referencing

Logic Chart
When referencing a logic chart for condition test, a block mode and an alarm status of a logic chart
can be used as a reference signal in other logic charts.

Referencing Logic Chart Block Mode

The specified logic chart block mode can be used as reference signal in logic charts. The syntax for
applying the logic chart block mode as condition test reference signal and the True/False
representation are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.8-1 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

True/False Conditions for true status
Input signal Condition specification
True Specified Block mode is True.
Element symbol.MODE. O/S, MAN, AUT
False Specified Block mode is False.

The following points should be taken into consideration when referencing a logic chart block mode.
• When O/S is specified as the condition specification for block mode reference, the test result will
be False when the block is in the compound block mode, i.e., O/S and another basic block mode
exist simultaneously.
• When MAN or AUT is specified as the condition specification for block mode reference, the test
result will be True even in the compound block mode as long as the specified basic block mode
exists.

Referencing Logic Chart Alarm Status

The specified alarm status of a logic chart can be used as reference signal in logic charts. The syntax
for applying the alarm status of logic chart as condition test reference signal and the True/False
representation are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.8-2 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

True/False Conditions for true status
Input signal Condition specification
True Specified Alarm Status is True.
Element symbol.ALRM. NR
False Specified Alarm Status is False.
True Specified Alarm symbol is flashing.
Element symbol.AFLS. AFL (*1), NR
False Specified Alarm symbol is not flashing.
True Alarm Detection Disabled is True.
Element symbol.AF. NR
False Alarm Detection Disabled is False.
True Alarm Inhibition is True.
Element symbol.AOFS. NR, AOF (*2)
False Alarm Inhibition is False.
*1: The condition test for Alarm Symbol Flashing can only test the flashing status of each block or symbol,
can not test the flashing status of each alarming item.
*2: The condition test for Alarm Inhibition can only test the inhibition status of each block or symbol, can
not test the inhibition status of each alarming item.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.9 Syntax for Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table in a Logi... Page 1 of 3

2.3.9 Syntax for Condition Signal Description: Referencing

Sequence Table in a Logic Chart
When referencing a sequence table for condition test, the true or false status of the condition for
one-shot execution of the referenced sequence table as well as the block mode and status of the
sequence table can be applied.
To reference a sequence table whose number of rules is extended over multiple sequence tables,
the tag name of the base sequence table needs to be specified.

Referencing the Entire Sequence Table

A specified sequence table can be one-shot started and the True/False status of the entire sequence
table’s condition can be referenced by a logic chart.
The syntax for referencing an entire sequence table condition as the condition test signal in a logic
chart and the True/False representation are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.9-1 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

Condition True/False Conditions for true status
Input signal
specification
True At least one target condition rule is satisfied.
Element
R None of the target condition rules is
symbol.SD. False
satisfied.

The following should be taken into account when referencing the entire sequence table.
• When referencing the entire sequence table, only condition signal descriptions of the referenced
sequence table are valid. Ignore any signal description.
• If no Y/N pattern exists in the condition rule of referenced sequence table, the status of rule
condition is false. If the Y/N pattern of such condition rule is unspecified, the status becomes
unconditionally true in the periodic processing of the above sequence table.
• When there exist no steps to be executed in the referenced sequence table, the previous
true/false status of condition is maintained as a current reference result.
• When Step 00 exists in the reference destination, rules that belong to Step 00 will also be
executed. However, when no steps exist as an execution target, the reference result of Step 00
is ignored.
• Other sequence tables can be referenced in the referenced sequence table condition column. In
this case, up to seven levels of nests (including the first sequence table) are possible.

Referencing a Particular Step in a Sequence Table

A specified sequence table can be one-shot started and a particular step of the sequence table can
be referenced by a logic chart.
The syntax for a particular sequence table step reference as the condition test signal in a logic chart
and the True/False representation are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.9-2 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

Condition specification True/False Conditions for true status(*1)
Input signal
(*1)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.9 Syntax for Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table in a Logi... Page 2 of 3

At least one of the conditions for steps 00 and

True
Element xx is satisfied.
xx
symbol.SA. None of the conditions for steps 00 and xx is
False
satisfied.
*1: xx: Specify a step label using 2 or less alphanumeric characters.

The following should be taken into account when referencing a corresponding rule number.
• When referencing a particular step in a sequence table, only condition signal descriptions of the
referenced sequence table are valid. Ignore any action signal description.
• If no Y/N pattern exists in the condition rule of referenced sequence table, the status of rule
condition is false. If the Y/N pattern of such a condition rule is unspecified, the status becomes
unconditionally true in the periodic processing of the above sequence table.
• Other sequence tables can be referenced in the referenced sequence table condition column. In
this case, up to seven levels of nests (including the first sequence table) are possible.

Referencing Sequence Table Step Label

A sequence progress state can be confirmed by referencing the related sequence table step labels.
However, it only check if the sequence step corresponding to the specified sequence step label is
being processed or not, it does not involve the conditions test of the step’s True/False status.
The syntax for a Sequence Table Step Label Reference as the condition test signal in a logic chart
and the True/False representation are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.9-3 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

Condition specification True/False Conditions for true status(*1)
Input signal
(*1)
True Current execution step label is xx.
Element
xx Current execution step label is other than
symbol.PV. False
xx.
*1: xx: Specify a step label using 2 or less alphanumeric characters.

Referencing Sequence Table Block Mode

The specified sequence table block mode can be used as reference signal in a logic chart. The
syntax for applying the sequence table block mode as condition test reference signal in a logic chart
and the True/False representation are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.9-4 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation

Condition signal description column

True/False Conditions for true status
Input signal Condition specification
True Specified Block mode is True.
Element symbol.MODE. O/S, MAN, AUT
False Specified Block mode is False.

The following points should be taken into consideration when referencing a sequence table block
mode.
• When O/S is specified as the condition specification for block mode reference, the test result will
be False when the block is in the compound block mode, i.e., O/S and another basic block mode
exist simultaneously.
• When MAN or AUT is specified as the condition specification for block mode reference, the test

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.9 Syntax for Condition Signal Description: Referencing Sequence Table in a Logi... Page 3 of 3

result will be True even in the compound block mode as long as the specified basic block mode
exists.

Referencing Sequence Table Alarm Status

The specified alarm status of a sequence table can be used as reference signal in a logic chart. The
syntax for applying the alarm status of sequence table as condition test reference signal in a logic
chart and the True/False representation are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.9-5 Syntax for Condition Signal Description and True/False Representation of Y/N in
Condition Rule Columns

Condition signal description column

True/false Conditions for true status
Input signal Condition specification
True Specified Alarm Status is True.
Element symbol.ALRM. NR
False Specified Alarm Status is False.
True Specified Alarm symbol is flashing.
Element symbol.AFLS. AFL (*1), NR
False Specified Alarm symbol is not flashing.
True Alarm Detection Disabled is True.
Element symbol.AF. NR
False Alarm Detection Disabled is False.
True Alarm Inhibition is True.
Element symbol.AOFS. NR, AOF (*2)
False Alarm Inhibition is False.
*1: The condition test for Alarm Symbol Flashing can only test the flashing status of each block or symbol;
it can not test the flashing status of each alarming item.
*2: The condition test for Alarm Inhibition can only test the inhibition status of each block or symbol; it can
not test the inhibition status of each alarming item.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks and ... Page 1 of 16

2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for

Other Function Blocks and I/O Data
Logic chart block can be used to manipulate the execution, the mode or status change of other
function blocks as well as the status change of process I/O, software I/O, communication I/O and
expanded communication I/O.(*1)
*1: Expanded communication I/Os are available only in FFCS-C and FFCS-V.

Function Blocks and I/O Data that can be Manipulated

from Logic Chart
The function blocks for which status manipulation can be performed from a logic chart are as
follows:
• Switch instrument blocks
• Timer Block (TM)
• Software Counter Block (CTS)
• Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP)
• Code Input Block (CI)
• Code Output Block (CO)
• Resource Scheduler Block (RS)
• Local Switch Block (LSW)
• Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)
• Regulatory Control Blocks
• Calculation Blocks
• Faceplate Blocks
• SFC Blocks
• Unit instrument Blocks
• Sequence Table Blocks
• Logic Chart Blocks
In addition, status manipulation can be performed from a logic chart for the following I/O data:
• Process I/O
• Software I/O (internal switch, annunciator message, sequence message output)
• Communication I/O and expanded communication I/O

Status Manipulation of Switch Instrument Block and

Enhanced Switch Instrument Block
The syntax for applying the various functions of a switch instrument block and an enhanced switch
instrument block as status manipulation signal in a logic chart and the actions corresponding to
True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.10-1 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications

Element True Block mode change command

MAN, AUT, CAS,ROUT, O/S
symbol.MODE. False No action

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks and ... Page 2 of 16

Release detection of specified

True
alarm
Element symbol.AF. ANS+, ANS-, IOP,PERR, OOP, CNF
Perform detection of specified
False
alarm

Element True Disables IOP and IOP- detection

IOP
symbol.XAF. False Enables IOP and IOP- detection
Perform suppression of specified
True
Element ANS+, ANS-, PERR, CNF, IOP, AOF alarm
symbol.AOFS. (*1), OOP Release suppression of specified
False
alarm
Perform group verification of
Element True
AFL alarms
symbol.AFLS.
False No action
Setting of sequence setpoint value
True
0, 1, 2 (CSV) (*2)
False No action
True Set CSV to 0
P0
Element False Set CSV to 2
symbol.CSV.
True Set CSV to 1
P1
False No action
True Set CSV to 2
P2
False Set CSV to 0

Element True Tracking switch (0; OFF, 1; ON)

0, 1
symbol.TSW. False No action

Element True Bypass switch (0; OFF, 1; ON)

0, 1
symbol.BPSW. False No action

Element True Backup switch (0; OFF, 1; ON)

0, 1
symbol.BSW. False No action
True Switch to CAL or release CAL
Element symbol.PV. =XCAL (*3)
False No action
*1: The AOF specification is valid only with respect to the change in the alarm suppression specification.
This operation performs alarm suppression for all alarms with the exception of the NR alarm.
*2: Sequence setpoint value (CSV) data is written when the switch instrument manipulated output value
(MV) is set from another function block. If the switch instrument block or the enhanced switch
instrument block is in AUT or CAS state, output is executed after the sequence setpoint value (CSV) is
written in the manipulated output value (MV).
*3: The type of logic chart that =XCAL is applied should be set to [One-Shot Processing Type (O)].

Status Manipulation of Timer Block (TM)

The syntax for applying the various functions of a Timer Block (TM) as status manipulation signal in
a logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.10-2 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications
True Timer stop command
STOP

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks and ... Page 3 of 16

False No action
True Timer startup command
START
False Timer stop command(*1)
Element symbol.OP. True Restart command
RSTR
False No action
True Pause command
WAIT
False Restart command (*1)
*1: When connected to the function blocks other than logic chart and sequence table blocks via sequence
connection, the true actions are valid while the false actions are invalid.

Status Manipulation of Software Counter Block (CTS)

The syntax for applying the various functions of a software counter (CTS) block as status
manipulation signal in a logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as
follows.
Table 2.3.10-3 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications
True Operation manipulation of software counter
ON
False No action
Element symbol.ACT.
True Software counter stop command
OFF
False No action

Status Manipulation of Pulse Train Input Counter Block

(CTP)
The syntax for applying the various functions of a Pulse Train Input Counter (CTP) block as status
manipulation signal in a logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as
follows.
Table 2.3.10-4 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications
True Pulse-input counter stop command
STOP
False No action
True Pulse-input counter start command
START
False No action
Element symbol.OP.
True Restart command
RSTR
False No action
True Pause command
WAIT
False No action
True Release detection of specified alarm
Element symbol.AF. IOP, CNF
False Perform detection of specified alarm
True Disables IOP and IOP- detection
Element symbol.XAF. IOP
False Enables IOP and IOP- detection

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks and ... Page 4 of 16

True Perform suppression of specified alarm

Element symbol.AOFS. IOP, CNF, AOF (*1)
False Release suppression of specified alarm
True Perform group verification of alarms
Element symbol.AFLS. AFL
False No action
*1: The AOF specification is valid only with respect to the change in the alarm suppression specification.
This operation performs alarm suppression for all alarms with the exception of the NR alarm.

Status Manipulation of Code Input Block (CI)

The syntax for applying the various functions of a Code Input (CI) block as status manipulation
signal in a logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.10-5 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications
True Code-input read command
Element symbol.ACT. ON
False No action

Status Manipulation of Code Output Block (CO)

The syntax for applying the various functions of a Code Output (CO) Block as status manipulation
signal in a logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.10-6 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications
True Code output command
Element symbol.ACT. ON
False No action

Status Manipulation of Resource Scheduler Block (RS)

The syntax for applying the various functions of a Resource Scheduler (RS) Block as status
manipulation signal in a logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as
follows.
Table 2.3.10-7 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

Action True/False Manipulation description
Output signal
Specifications
Usage cancel/request command for specified
Element True
0, 1 number (1: request, 0: cancel)
symbol.RQ01 to 32.
False No action
True Setting of maximum allowed number (m≤32)
Element symbol.PMH. 0 to 32
False No action
Group resources all request/cancel (ON: request,
True
Element symbol.ACT. ON, OFF OFF: cancel)
False No action

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks and ... Page 5 of 16

Status Manipulation of Local Switch Block (LSW)

The table below lists the symbolic convention of action signal and action description for executing
status manipulation on various functions of the LSW block.
Table 2.3.10-8 Symbolic Convention of Action Signal and Action Description

Action signal description column

Action True/False Manipulation description
Output signal
Specifications
Set an individual switch to ON
Element symbol.PV01 to True
L (Unlatched)
32.
False Set an individual switch to OFF
True Set 32 switches at a time
Element symbol.PVA. ON, OFF
False No action

Status Manipulation of Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)

The syntax for applying the various functions of a Valve Monitoring (VLVM) Block as status
manipulation signal in a logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as
follows.
Table 2.3.10-9 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

Action True/False Manipulation description
Output signal
Specifications
Message suppression (1: suppress 0: do not
Element True
0, 1 suppress)
symbol.MCSW.
False No action

Status Manipulation of Regulatory Control Block

The syntax for applying the various functions of a regulatory control block as status manipulation
signal in a logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.10-10 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications

MAN, CAS, RCAS, AUT, ROUT, True Block mode change command
Element symbol.MODE.
PRD, O/S False No action
Release detection of specified
True
alarm
Element symbol.AF. Alarm status excluding NR
Perform detection of specified
False
alarm
True Disables IOP and IOP- detection
Element symbol.XAF. IOP
False Enables IOP and IOP- detection
Perform suppression of specified
True
Alarm status excluding NR, AOF alarm
Element symbol.AOFS.
(*1)
False Release suppression of specified

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks and ... Page 6 of 16

alarm
Perform group verification of
True
Element symbol.AFLS. AFL alarms
False No action

Element symbol.Data True Data setting

Data value
Item False No action
True Switch PV to CAL status
Element symbol.PV= CAL
False Release PV from CAL status
True Switch to CAL or release CAL
Element symbol.PV. =XCAL (*2)
False No action
True Switch to CAL or release CAL
Element symbol.SUM0. =XCAL (*2)
False No action
*1: The AOF specification is valid only with respect to the change in the alarm suppression specification.
This operation performs alarm suppression for all alarms with the exception of the NR alarm.
*2: The type of logic chart that =XCAL is applied should be set to [One-Shot Processing Type (O)].

Data Items of Regulatory Control Blocks for Status

Manipulation
The data items of the regulatory control blocks and the range of the data values that can be applied
for status manipulation are listed as follows.
Table 2.3.10-11 Data Items of Regulatory Control Blocks and Range of Data Values for Status
Manipulation

Block code Name Data item Setting range

TSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PID PID Controller Block PSW 0 to 3
BSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PI-HLD Sampling PI Controller Block PSW 0 to 3
BSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PID-BSW PID Controller Block with Batch Switch PSW 0 to 3
BSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PID-TP Time-Proportioning ON/OFF Controller Block PSW 0 to 3
BSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks and ... Page 7 of 16

PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF-E Enhanced 2-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF-G 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
ONOFF-GE Enhanced 3-Position ON/OFF Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
PD-MR PD Controller Block with Manual Reset
BSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
PI-BLEND Blending PI Controller Block BSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
RST 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
CSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
PID-STC Self-Tuning PID Controller Block
BSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
STC -1 to 3
TSW 0, 1
MLD Manual Loader Block
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
MLD-PVI Manual Loader Block with Input Indicator
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
MLD-SW Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW PSW 0 to 3
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
MC-2 2-Position Motor Control Block BPSW 0 to 4
SIMM 0 to 1
CSV 0, 1, 2, P0, P1, P2 (*1)
TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
MC-2E Enhanced 2-Position Motor Control Block BPSW 0 to 4
SIMM 0 to 1
CSV 0, 1, 2, P0, P1, P2 (*1)
TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
MC-3 3-Position Motor Control Block BPSW 0 to 4
SIMM 0 to 1

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks and ... Page 8 of 16

CSV 0, 1, 2, P0, P1, P2 (*1)

TSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
MC-3E Enhanced 3-Position Motor Control Block BPSW 0 to 4
SIMM 0 to 1
CSV 0, 1, 2, P0, P1, P2 (*1)
TSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
RATIO Ratio Set Block
BSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
ZONE 1 to 13
PG-L13 13-Zone Program Set Block ZSTR 1 to 13
ZEND 1 to 13
SW 0 to 4
BSETU-2 Flow-Totalizing Batch Set Block EMSW 0, 1
ZONE 0 to 11
SW 0 to 4
BSETU-3 Weight-Totalizing Batch Set Block EMSW 0, 1
ZONE 0 to 11
PSW 0 to 3
VELLIM Velocity Limiter Block BSW 0, 1
BPSW 0, 1
SS-H/M/L Signal Selector Block SW 0 to 4
PSW 0 to 3
AS-H/M/L Auto-Selector Block
SW 0 to 4
SS-DUAL Dual-Redundant Signal Selector Block SW 1 to 3
TSW 0, 1
PSW 0 to 3
FFSUM Feedforward Signal Summing Block
FSW 0, 1
RSW 0, 1
TSW 0, 1
XCPL Non-Interference Control Output Block PSW 0 to 3
RSW 0, 1
BSW 0, 1
SPLIT Control Signal Splitter Block
SW 0 to 2
RST 0, 1
PTC Pulse Count Input Block
HSW 0, 1
SW 0 to 5
ALM-R Representative Alarm Block
SV 0 to 15
SBSD YS Instrument Batch Set Station Block SV 0 to 8
SLBC YS Instrument Batch Controller Block SV 0 to 8
*1: The values set to the CSV varied according to the data in the manipulation rule column and setting

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks and ... Page 9 of 16

range as shown below.

0: CSV=0 when the manipulation rule column is “TRUE,” disabled when “FALSE.”
1: CSV=1 when the manipulation rule column is “TRUE,” disabled when “FALSE.”
2: CSV=2 when the manipulation rule column is “TRUE,” disabled when “FALSE.”
P0: CSV=0 when manipulation rule column is “TRUE,” CSV=2 when “FALSE.”
P1: CSV=1 when manipulation rule column is “TRUE,” disabled when “FALSE.”
P2: CSV=2 when manipulation rule column is “TRUE,” CSV=0 when “FALSE.”

Status Manipulation of Calculation Block

The syntax for applying the various functions of a calculation block as status manipulation signal in a
logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.10-12 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications
One-shot startup (with
True
mm (*1) parameter)
False No action
Element symbol.ACT.
One-shot startup (without
True
ON parameter)
False No action
Release detection of specified
True
alarm
Element symbol.AF. Alarm status excluding NR
Perform detection of specified
False
alarm
True Disables IOP and IOP- detection
Element symbol.XAF. IOP
False Enables IOP and IOP- detection
Perform suppression of specified
True
Alarm status excluding NR, AOF alarm
Element symbol.AOFS.
(*2) Release suppression of specified
False
alarm
Perform group verification of
True
Element symbol.AFLS. AFL alarms
False No action

Element symbol.data True Data setting

Data value
item. False No action
True Set PV data status to CAL
Element symbol.CPV= CAL Release the CAL data status of
False
CPV
True Switch to CAL or release CAL
Element symbol.CPV. =XCAL (*3)
False No action
True Switch to CAL or release CAL
Element symbol.CPV1. =XCAL (*3)
False No action
True Switch to CAL or release CAL
Element symbol.CPV2. =XCAL (*3)
False No action
*1: mm is required parameter for one-shot execution of the batch data setting block and batch data
collection block. Data that will be set during a one-shot execution according to the mm value.
mm=0: All setting data are set to 0.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 10 of 16

mm=1 to 16: Only the specified data (DTn) is set.

mm=17: All data will be set.
*2: The AOF specification is valid only with respect to the change in the alarm suppression specification.
This operation performs alarm suppression for all alarms with the exception of the NR alarm.
*3: The type of logic chart that =XCAL is applied should be set to [One-Shot Processing Type (O)].

Data Items of Calculation Blocks for Status Manipulation

The data items of the calculation blocks and the range of the data values that can be applied for
status manipulation are listed as follows.
Table 2.3.10-13 Data Items of Calculation Blocks and Range of Data Values for Status
Manipulation

Block code Name Data item Setting range

DLAY Dead-Time Block
DLAY-C Dead-Time Compensation Block RST 0, 1
AVE-M Moving-Average Block
INTEG Integration Block
SW 0, 1, 2
AVE-C Cumulative-Average Block
SW-33 Three-Pole Three-Position Selector Switch Block SW 0 to 3
BDSET-1L One-Batch Data Set Block
BDSET-1C One-Batch String Data Set Block
SW 0 to 3
BDSET-2L Two-Batch Data Set Block
BDSET-2C Two-Batch String Data Set Block
ADL Interstation Connection Block SIMM 0, 1
SW-91 One-Pole Nine-Position Selector Switch Block SW 0 to 9
DSW-16 Selector Switch Block for 16 Data
SW 0 to 16
DSW-16C Selector Switch Block for 16 String Data
BDA-L Batch Data Acquisition Block
SW 0 to 17
BDA-C Batch String Data Acquisition Block

One-Shot Executable Calculation Blocks

The one-shot executable calculation blocks can be applied for status manipulation are shown as
follows.
Table 2.3.10-14 One-Shot Executable Calculation Blocks for Status Manipulation

Block Type Model Name Description

ADD Addition Block
MUL Multiplication Block
Arithmetic Calculation
DIV Division Block
AVE Averaging Block
AND Logical AND Block
OR Logical OR Block
NOT Logical NOT Block
SRS1-S Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output
SRS1-R Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 1 Output

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 11 of 16

SRS2-S Set-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs

SRS2-R Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop Block with 2 Outputs
WOUT Wipeout Block
GT Comparator Block (Greater Than)
Logic Operation (*1) GE Comparator Block (Greater Than or Equal)
EQ Equal Operator Block
BAND Bitwise AND Block
BOR Bitwise OR Block
BNOT Bitwise NOT Block
CALCU General-Purpose Calculation Block
General-purpose Calculation
CALCU-C General-Purpose Calculation Block with String I/O
BDSET-1L One-Batch Data Set Block
BDSET-1C One-Batch String Data Set Block
BDSET-2L Two-Batch Data Set Block
Calculation Auxiliary
BDSET-2C Two-Batch String Data Set Block
BDA-L Batch Data Acquisition Block
BDA-C Batch String Data Acquisition Block
*1: Logic Operation Blocks can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Calculation Blocks Requiring One-Shot Parameter mm

The calculation blocks that require mm parameter for one-shot execution when applied for status
manipulation are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.10-15 One-Shot Parameter Required Calculation Blocks for Status Manipulation

Block Parameter setting Range (mm)

Name Comments
code (*1)
BDSET-1L One-Batch Data Set Block
One-Batch String Data Set
BDSET-1C
Block
0 to 17 Individual data setting
BDSET-2L Two-Batch Data Set Block
Two-Batch String Data Set
BDSET-2C
Block
BDA-L Batch Data Acquisition Block
Individual data
Batch String Data Acquisition 0 to 17
BDA-C acquisition
Block
*1: Data that will be set during a one-shot execution according to the mm value.
mm=0: All setting data are set to 0.
mm=1 to 16: Only the specified data (DTn) is set.
mm=17: All data will be set.

Status Manipulation of Faceplate Block

The syntax for applying the various functions of a faceplate block as status manipulation signal in a
logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.10-16 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 12 of 16

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications
True Change block mode
Element symbol.MODE. Block mode
False No action
True Change block status
Element symbol.BSTS. Block Status
False Release block status
True Change alarm status
Element symbol.ALRM. Alarm Status excluding NR
False Release alarm status
Release detection of specified
True
alarm
Element symbol.AF. Alarm Status excluding NR
Perform detection of specified
False
alarm
Perform suppression of specified
True
Alarm status excluding NR, alarm
Element symbol.AOFS.
AOF (*1) Release suppression of specified
False
alarm
Perform group verification of
True
Element symbol.AFLS. AFL alarms
False No action
True Process number setting
Element symbol.SV. (*2) 1 to 99
False No action

Element symbol.PV01 to 03. True Set manipulated command value

0,1
(*2) False No action

Element symbol.MV01 to True Set manipulated command value

0, 1
10. False No action

Element symbol.SWCR[1to True Change color of switch display

0 to 15
n] (*3) False No action

Element symbol.SWST[1 to True ON/OFF of switch flashing status

0,1
n] (*3) False No action
Changing of switch control
Element symbol.SWOP[1 to True
-15 to 15 disable status
n] (*3)
False No action
*1: The AOF specification is valid only with respect to the change in the alarm suppression specification.
This operation performs alarm suppression for all alarms with the exception of the NR alarm.
*2: Only Valid with BSI Block.
*3: n indicates the number of elements in a one-dimensional array. This is the number of push-button
switches in a faceplate block, and varies with the type of each faceplate block.

Status Manipulation of SFC Block

The syntax for applying the various functions of an SFC block as status manipulation signal in a logic
chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.10-17 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications
True Block mode change command

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 13 of 16

Element symbol.MODE. MAN, AUT False No action

True Block status change command
Element symbol.BSTS. RUN, PAUS, STOP, ABRT
False No action
Release detection of specified
True
alarm
Element symbol.AF. Alarm Status excluding NR
Perform detection of specified
False
alarm
Perform suppression of specified
True
Alarm Status excluding NR, AOF alarm
Element symbol.AOFS.
(*1) Release suppression of specified
False
alarm
Perform group verification of
True
Element symbol.AFLS. AFL alarms
False No action

Element symbol.Data True Data setting

Data Value
Item. False No action
True Set PV data status to CAL
Element symbol.PV= CAL
False release the CAL data status of PV
True Switch to CAL or release CAL
Element symbol.PV. =XCAL (*2)
False No action
*1: The AOF specification is valid only with respect to the change in the alarm suppression specification.
This operation performs alarm suppression for all alarms with the exception of the NR alarm.
*2: The type of logic chart that =XCAL is applied should be set to [One-Shot Processing Type (O)].

Range of Data Value When Manipulating the Data Items

The ranges of data values when manipulating the SFC data items in a logic chart for status
manipulation are shown as follows.
• STEPNO: 1 to 99
• SWCR[5]: 0 to 15
• SWST[5]: 0, 1
• SWOP[5]: -15 to 15

Status Manipulation of Unit Instrument

The syntax for applying the various functions of a unit instrument block as status manipulation
signal in a logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.10-18 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications
True Unit mode change command
Element symbol.MODE. MAN, SEMI, AUT
False No action

Unit status change command True Unit status change command

Element symbol.UBSC.
name False No action
Release detection of specified
True
Element symbol.AF. Alarm status excluding NR alarm

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 14 of 16

Perform detection of specified

False
alarm
Perform suppression of specified
True
Alarm status excluding NR, AOF alarm
Element symbol.AOFS.
(*1) Release suppression of specified
False
alarm
Perform group verification of
True
Element symbol.AFLS. AFL alarms
False No action

Element True Change SFC step number

1 to 99
symbol.STEPNO. False No action
*1: The AOF specification is valid only with respect to the change in the alarm suppression specification.
This operation performs alarm suppression for all alarms with the exception of the NR alarm.

Status Manipulation of Process I/O

The syntax for applying the various functions of a process I/O as status manipulation signal in a
logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.10-19 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications
True Contact output ON (nonlatched)
L
False Contact output OFF
Element symbol.PV.
True Cause flashing state
F
False Stop the flashing state (*1)
*1: Even though the flashing state stops, the contact output itself remains ON. Turn off the contact output
using a different action signal with an unlatched contact output.

Status Manipulation of Global Switch

The syntax for applying the various functions of a global switch as status manipulation signal in a
logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
The status manipulation can be only applied to the global switches assigned in the same control
station of the logic chart.
Table 2.3.10-20 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications
True Turn ON specified global switch. (Nonlatched)
Element symbol.PV. L
False Turn OFF specified global switch.

Status Manipulation of Common Switch

The syntax for applying the various functions of a common switch as status manipulation signal in a
logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.10-21 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 15 of 16

Output signal Action Specifications True/False Manipulation description

True Common switch output ON (nonlatched)
Element symbol.PV. L
False Common switch output OFF

Status Manipulation of Annunciator Message

The syntax for applying the various functions of an annunciator message as status manipulation
signal in a logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.10-22 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

Action True/False Manipulation description
Output signal
Specifications

Element True Annunciator output ON (nonlatched)

L
symbol.PV. False Annunciator output OFF
Repeated warning specification (ON: Repeated
Element True
ON, OFF warning, OFF: Release)
symbol.RP.
False Disable

Element True Perform suppression of specified alarm

AOF
symbol.AOFS. False Release suppression of specified alarm

Element True Perform group verification of alarms

AFL
symbol.AFLS. False Disable

Status Manipulation of Sequence Message Output

The syntax for applying the various functions of a Sequence Message Output as status manipulation
signal in a logic chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
The following types of sequence message output are supported:
• Print message output
• Operator guide message output
• Multimedia function message output
• Sequence message request
• PICOT supervisory computer event message output
• Event message output for supervisory computer
• Signal event message output
• SFC/SEBOL return event message output
Table 2.3.10-23 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications
True Message output without parameter
NON
False Disable
Element symbol.PV.
True Message output with parameter
mm (*1)
False Disable
*1: mm can specify integer data (2-byte long integer data).
Range: Integer from 0 to 65535.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.10 Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation for Other Function Blocks a... Page 16 of 16

Status Manipulation of Communication I/O and

Expanded Communication I/O
TThe syntax for applying the various functions of a communication I/O and expanded
communication I/O as status manipulation signal in a logic chart and the actions corresponding to
True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.10-24 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action specification
True The bit turns ON (nonlatched)
Element symbol.PV. L
False The bit turns OFF

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.11 Syntax for Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation of Logic Chart Page 1 of 1

2.3.11 Syntax for Action Signal Description: Status

Manipulation of Logic Chart
Logic chart status manipulation can change the block mode of a logic chart, it can also start a logic
chart for one-shot execution.

Logic Chart One-Shot Execution

The following scripts can be used to define an output signal element to start a logic chart one-shot
execution.
Table 2.3.11-1 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Action
Output signal Action Specifications
True Execute logic chart
Element symbol.ACT. ON
False Disable

• When action signal specified to start an one-shot execution of a function block, the target block
can start another block for one-shot execution. The chain start can be nested seven times.
• When output to the one-shot function block fails, and the failure is caused by one of the following
reasons, a system alarm will be triggered.
• The destination logic chart is used to start another logic chart, and the chain start is nested more
than seven times.
• The function block connected to the output terminal is in O/S mode.
• The function block connected to the output terminal is udder online maintenance.

Logic Chart Block Mode Change

The block mode of a logic chart can be changed. Changing the block mode of the logic chart can
manipulate the logic block to pause the execution (MAN mode) or to restart the execution (AUT
mode).
The following scripts can be used to define an output signal element to change block mode of a logic
chart block.
Table 2.3.11-2 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications
True Change the block’s mode
Element symbol.MODE. AUT, MAN, O/S
False Disable

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.12 Syntax for Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation of Sequence Table f... Page 1 of 3

2.3.12 Syntax for Action Signal Description: Status

Manipulation of Sequence Table from Logic Chart
The status manipulation to sequence table blocks can not only change the data or data status in the
sequence table, but also can start a sequence table and control the whole processing of the
sequence table from the condition test to status manipulation output.
When manipulating or referencing a sequence table whose number of rules is extended over
multiple sequence tables, the tag name of the base sequence table needs to be specified.
The following types of status manipulation may be applied to sequence tables.
• Referencing an entire sequence table
• Executing a particular sequence table step
• Setting a execution label to a sequence table step
• Changing a sequence table block mode

Executing an Entire Sequence Table

A sequence table defined to an output operation element in a logic chart (transition destination
sequence table) can be started for a one-shot execution.
When the transition destination sequence table is not a step type sequence table, the entire
sequence table will be executed. When the transition destination sequence table is a step type
sequence table, the step corresponding to the transition process in the sequence table will be
executed.
From the transition sequence table, another sequence table can be started as a transition table for
condition test or status manipulation. The chain start can be nested for 7 times including the first
sequence table.
Table 2.3.12-1 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action Specifications
True Execute the specified table
Element symbol.ACT. ON
False Disable

Executing a Particular Step in a Sequence Table

The syntax for executing a particular sequence table step in a logic chart and the actions
corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.12-2 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description

column
True/False Manipulation description(*1)
Action specification
Output signal
(*1)
Branch to step xx in the specified table and execute
Element True
xx steps xx and 00.
symbol.SA.
False Disable
*1: xx: Specify a step label with up to two alphanumeric characters.

From the transition sequence table, another sequence table can be started as a transition table for
condition test or status manipulation. The chain start can be nested for 7 times including the first

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.12 Syntax for Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation of Sequence Table f... Page 2 of 3

sequence table.
The action rule of the sequence table behaves as follows according to the types (step type or
nonstep type) of the execution origin and the execution destination sequence tables.
Table 2.3.12-3 Execution Target Action Rule in Accordance with Types of Sequence Table

Branching source Branching destination Execution target action rule

Nonstep type Rules for a specified step and step 00
Nonstep type
Step type All rules
Nonstep type Rules for a specified step and step 00
Step type
Step type All rules

When a logic chart starts a sequence table specified in the output operation element, the started
sequence table run its transition to start the transition destination sequence table. The transition
destination sequence table will run its step 00 and the transition specified step for condition test and
the status manipulation.
If the specified transition step of the transition sequence table can not be found, an error will be
generated, the step can not be executed. However, if the transition sequence table has step 00, the
step 00 will be executed.
When execute an entire sequence table to a non step type sequence table, all rules will be executed.

Setting an Execution Label to a Step in a Sequence Table

An execution label can be set to a sequence table step, this action is different from the executing a
particular sequence table step, it only set the execution label to a specified sequence table step but
does not execute the step. The set step will be executed first when the sequence table is started the
next time.
The syntax for setting an execution label to a sequence table step as the action signal in a logic
chart and the actions corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.12-4 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Action signal description column

True/False Manipulation description(*1)
Output signal Action specification(*1)
True Set execution label to step xx
Element symbol.PV. xx
False Disable
*1: xx: Specify a step label with up to two alphanumeric characters.

Changing Sequence Table Block Mode

The block mode of a sequence can be changed from a logic chart. Changing the block mode of a
sequence table block can manipulate the sequence table to pause the execution (MAN mode) or to
restart the execution (AUT mode).
When a sequence table is paused by changing to MAN mode, the state of the sequence table will be
kept.
The syntax for changing a sequence table block mode as an action signal in a logic chart and the
actions corresponding to True/False are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.12-5 Syntax for Action Signal Description and Actions Corresponding to True/False

Manipulation signal description column

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action specification

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.12 Syntax for Action Signal Description: Status Manipulation of Sequence Table f... Page 3 of 3

True Change the block’s mode

Element symbol.MODE. AUT, MAN, O/S
False Disable

Pause and Restart a Sequence Table

Some sequence tables are running in a fixed scan cycle while some others are staring, pausing or
restarting in accordance with process procedures. To pause a running sequence table, and to restart
a paused sequence table is possible. The scripts may be described in a sequence table for a
sequence table’s Pause and Restart are shown as follows.
Table 2.3.12-6 Syntax for Output Signal Scripts and Action Description

Manipulation signal description column

True/False Manipulation description
Output signal Action specification
True Starts or restarts sequence table
Element symbol.XS. ON
False Pause Sequence table

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.13 Behavior of Logic Chart Internal Timer Page 1 of 1

2.3.13 Behavior of Logic Chart Internal Timer

Logic chart block has an internal timer to control the processes of itself.

Behavior of Internal Timer

The process timer of a logic chart is used to execute the on-delay timer and the off-delay timer. The
timer starts when the logic chart itself changes to AUT mode.
Setting range: 0 - 10000 (sec.)
Table 2.3.13-1 Timer Specification

Item Remarks
Number of timers Total number of logic operators (64)
Mode and status The timer itself has neither a mode nor status.
Pause Not supported
When PT = 0 or the input signal changes
Start condition
(on-delay timer 0 to 1; off-delay timer 1 to 0)
Start action 0 start
1. The input signal inverses from the start status
Stop condition 2. Block changes to MAN mode
3. Timer count up (PT ≥ ST)
Stopped by stop condition 1, the elapsed time reset. Stopped by stop condition 2 or 3,
Stop Action
the elapsed time is kept.
Timer set value
Set on HIS ( 0 - 10000 sec.)
(ST)

On-delay timer behaves as illustrated below.

Figure 2.3.13-1 Behavior of on-delay timer

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.14 Data Items of Logic Chart Block - LC64, LC64-E Page 1 of 1

2.3.14 Data Items of Logic Chart Block - LC64, LC64-E

The table below shows the data items of the Logic Chart Block (LC64, LC64-E):

Data Items
Table 2.3.14-1 Data Items of the Logic Chart Block (LC64, LC64-E)

Data Item Data Name Entry permitted or Not (*1) Range Default
MODE Block mode x O/S (AUT)
ALRM Alarm status - NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status - 0
AF Alarm detection - 0
AOFS Alarm inhibition - 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x 0
ST01 - 64 Set time of internal timer x 0 to10000 (sec.) 0 (sec.)
PT01 - 64 Elapsed time of internal timer x 0 to10000 (sec.) 0 (sec.)
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
-: Entry is not permitted

LC64-E block has the following additional data items:

Table 2.3.14-2 Data Items of the Logic Chart Block (LC64-E)

Data Entry permitted

Data Name Range Default Description
Item or Not (*1)
RV01 to Calculated RVxx is the calculated value based
- 0, 1 0
RV32 (*2) input value on the input signal of Qxx terminal.
CPV01 to Calculated CPVxx is the calculated output value
- 0, 1 0
CPV32 output value to output through Jxx terminal.
*1: - : Entry is not permitted
*2: The signal will not be updated unless the block mode is in AUT.

SEE For more information about valid block mode of the LC64, refer to:
ALSO 2.1.2, "Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.15 LC64-E Specific Actions Page 1 of 3

2.3.15 LC64-E Specific Actions

This section describes the specific actions of LC64-E block.
LC64-E block can perform the following specific actions:
• Retains the internal status of logic calculation elements during online maintenance.
• Selective behavior on FCS initial start
The above mentioned internal status of logic calculation elements means the calculation results or
the elapsed time of timers.

Retains the internal status of logic calculation elements

during online maintenance
When changing the I/O signals or logic calculation elements during the online maintenance, the
internal status of the existing logic calculation elements can be inherited when restarting the LC64-E
block. Nevertheless, the internal status of newly added logic calculation elements will be restarted
with the initial internal status.

Internal status of existing logic calculation elements

When restarting the LC64-E block, the previous calculation results and the elapsed time of timers of
the existing logic calculation elements can be inherited.

Internal status of newly added logic calculation elements

When restarting the LC64-E block, the internal status of newly added logic calculation elements will
be restarted with the initial internal status.

TIP • Once a logic calculation element is created, even if the condition and action signals or the
execution orders are changed, the element will always retain its internal status unless it is
deleted.
• When backup the project of a control system from a process site to transfer the project to
another system, and then add new logic calculation elements to the LC64-E so as to change
the logic algorithm. And then import the changed project to the control system of the process
site. In this case, the internal status of all the originally existed elements in the modified LC64-
E will be retained while the internal status of all the added logic elements (*1) will be
initialized.
However, if a LC64-E function block is added in the different system and then import to the
system in the process site, the internal status of all the logic calculation elements in the LC64-
E block will be initialized.
The imported file here means the builder file (.edf file).
• When importing builder file in text format, the internal status of all the logic calculation
elements will be initialized.
• After online maintenance, the logic calculation result of LC64-E may be different from the
LC64. For instance, when flip-flop element is used and both the S and R signals are zeros.
• Do not change the logics of LC64-E after snapshot save is performed unless the snapshot load
is completed.
*1: If a new element with an identical tag of the existing element in the existing system is added, the
internal status of this element will be initialized.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.15 LC64-E Specific Actions Page 2 of 3

Selective Behavior on FCS Initial Start

▼ LC64-E starts with its internal status intact when FCS performs an initial start (except offline
download)
When FCS performs an initial start, the behavior of logic calculation elements on keeping or resetting
previous status is selectable.
To keep the previous status of LC64-E after FCS initial start, the option of [LC64-E starts with its
internal status intact when FCS performs an initial start (except offline download)] on [Constant 3]
tab of FCS properties sheet should be selected. By default, this option is not selected.
When this option is selected, all the logic elements except OFFD used in the LC64-E block will hold
their statuses prior to the FCS initial start.

TIP When FCS performs an offline downloading, the statuses of all the logical elements used in LC64-
E blocks will be initialized regardless if this option is selected or not. However, the time-up
parameters of timers will use the saved tuning parameters. If the tuning parameters have never
been saved, the initial time-up parameter, 0 will be used.

How the logic elements in the LC64-E block act when this option is checked or not checked after an
FCS initial start is indicated as follows:

TIP Here, the actions when FCS performs an initial start (not the including the initialization performed
after offline downloading) will be explained.

SRS1-R, SRS2-R, SRS1-S and SRS2-S Elements

When these elements in used in a running logic, if both inputs of Set (S) and Reset (R) are zeros
(0), the outputs OUT1 and OUT2 will keep the previous values.
However, after an initial start, if both inputs of Set (S) and Reset (R) are zeros (0), the outputs
OUT1 and OUT2 will behave as follows:
• If initialization of the internal status is enabled:
Both OUT1 and OUT2 will change to zeros.
• If initialization of the internal status is disabled:
Both OUT1 and OUT2 will keep the previous values.

OND Element
In case of initializing the internal status is disabled, after an initial start, the OND element will hold
the previous value for elapsed time right before the FCS stopped.
In case that the IN signal of OND is 1 and the elapsed time count was stopped by FCS stop. In this
case, when FCS restarted after an initial start
• If initialization of the internal status is enabled:
The elapsed time count will be reset to zero, and then start a new count from zero.
• If initialization of the internal status is disabled:
The previous elapsed time count will be kept, and then start time count from the previous value.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.15 LC64-E Specific Actions Page 3 of 3

In case that the IN signal of OND is 1 and the elapsed time count was stopped before the FCS stop.
In this case, when FCS restarted after an initial start
• If initialization of the internal status is enabled:
The OUT and the elapsed time count will be reset to zero, and then start a new count from zero.
• If initialization of the internal status is disabled:
The OUT and the previous elapsed time count will be kept.

OFFD Element
The previous elapsed time parameter of OFFD cannot be kept after a FCS initial start. Regardless if
this option is checked or not, after a FCS initial start, the OUT and elapsed time count will be reset
to zeros.

Self-Holding Circuit of Logic Elements Except OFFD

If initialization of the internal status is disabled, all the logic calculation results and the elapsed time
counts of the logic elements except OFFD will be kept. Therefore, if the self-holding circuit of logic
elements except OFFD are created, the parameters before the FCS initial start will be kept. Other
than self-holding circuits, if the self-recurrent circuits are created, the parameters before the FCS
initial start can also be kept and used for logic calculation.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.3.16 Creating LC64-E Block Page 1 of 1

2.3.16 Creating LC64-E Block

How to create LC64-E block is shown as follows:

Notices
Note the followings when creating the LC64-E block.
• When designating an input signal on Logic Chart Edit Window, an input element for getting input
terminal (Q01 to Q32) is required.
• If a Q terminal is not connected with a signal, the corresponding RV will hold its previous value.
(For an example, if Q02 terminal is not connected with a signal, RV02 will hold its previous
value.)

Other function block references LC64-E logic calculation

result
Other function block can reference the LC64-E logic calculation result without wiring connection with
LC64-E output terminal. In this case, you can directly link the logic calculation result variable CPV01
to CPV32 to an input terminal of the other function block.

Figure 2.3.16-1 Other function block references LC64-E logic calculation result

Expand logic calculation

On Control Drawing Builder, wiring the two LC64-E function blocks, the logic calculation can be
expanded.
For an example, there are two LC64-E blocks with tag names of LC01 and LC02. Linking the two
blocks means to connect the calculation results CPV01 to CPV32 of LC01 to the input terminals Q01
to Q32 of LC02.
In this way, the calculation results of LC01 can be used as input signals by LC02 to continue the
logic calculation.

Figure 2.3.16-2 Linking two LC64-E blocks

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 1 of 1

2.4 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced

Switch Instrument Block
The switch instrument blocks are used to start, stop, monitor and manipulate the status of various
types of devices. The switch instrument block with 1 input discrete-status alarm is also available to
be used for generating an alarm based on whether the input signal is ON or OFF.
This section describes the switch instrument blocks and enhanced switch instrument blocks.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 1 of 17

2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block

The switch instrument block is a function block which is often used to start/stop motors and pumps and monitor or
manipulate open-close state of the motor-operated valves. In most cases, this type of blocks is used in combination with
the sequence table block (ST16, ST16E) and the Logic Chart Block (LC64, LC64-E).
Enhanced switch instrument block (*1) is a switch instrument block with enhanced capabilities for connecting to FF
faceplate blocks and fieldbus function blocks and for connecting to the I/O terminals not next to each other.
This section describes the switch instrument blocks, excluding the switch instrument block with 1 input discrete-status
alarm.
*1: Enhanced switch instrument block can be applied to all Field control stations except standard PFCS. When using enhanced
switch instrument block, it is necessary to add the option [DIOENH] on the [Constant] tab of the FCS properties sheet.

SEE For more information about the switch instrument block with 1 input discrete-status alarm, refer to:
ALSO 2.4.2, "Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input Discrete-status Alarm"

Switch Instrument Block

▼ Connection
A function block chart of the switch instrument block is shown below.

Figure 2.4.1-1 Function Block Chart of the Switch Instrument Block

There exist 10 different types of switch instrument blocks, excluding the switch instrument block with 1 input discrete-
status alarm, according to the difference in the number of answerback input points and output points.
The list of switch instrument blocks, excluding the switch instrument block with 1 input discrete-status alarm, is as follows:
• SI-1: Switch instrument block with 1 Input
• SI-2: Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs
• SO-1: Switch Instrument Block with 1 Output
• SO-2: Switch instrument block with 2 Outputs
• SIO-11: Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 1 Output
• SIO-12: Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 2 Outputs
• SIO-21: Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 1 Output
• SIO-22: Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 2 Outputs
• SIO-12P: Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 2 One-Shot Outputs
• SIO-22P: Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 2 One-Shot Outputs
The table below shows the connection methods and connection destinations of the switch instrument block I/O terminals.
Table 2.4.1-1 Connection Method and Connection Destination of Switch Instrument Block I/O Terminals

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

Code I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 2 of 17

SI-1 Answerback
IN x - - - Δ x x -
SI-2 I/O terminal
Remote/local
TSI x - - - Δ x x x
I/O terminal
Output
SO-1 OUT - x - - Δ x x -
terminal
SO-2
Interlock
INT switch input x - - - Δ x x x
terminal
Answerback
SIO- IN input x - - - Δ x x -
11 terminal
SIO- Remote/local
TSI x - - - Δ x x x
12 I/O terminal
SIO-
Answerback
21
SWI bypass input x - - - Δ x x -
SIO-
terminal
22
SIO- Output
OUT - x - - Δ x x -
12P terminal
SIO- Interlock
22P INT switch input x - - - Δ x x x
terminal
*1: x: Connection available
-: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91).

Enhanced Switch Instrument Block

▼ Connection
A function block chart of the enhanced switch instrument block (*1)is shown below.
*1: Enhanced switch instrument block can be applied to all Field control stations except standard PFCS. When using enhanced
switch instrument block, it is necessary to add the option [DIOENH] on the [Constant] tab of the FCS properties sheet.

Figure 2.4.1-2 Function Block Chart of the Enhanced Switch Instrument Block

A list of enhanced switch instrument blocks is shown as follows.

• SI-1E: Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input
• SI-2E: Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs
• SO-1E: Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Output
• SO-2E: Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Outputs
• SIO-11E: Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 1 Output
• SIO-12E: Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 2 Outputs
• SIO-21E: Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 1 Output

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 3 of 17

• SIO-22E: Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 2 Outputs

• SIO-12PE: Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input, 2 One-Shot Outputs
• SIO-22PE: Enhanced Switch Instrument Block with 2 Inputs, 2 One-Shot Outputs
The table below shows the connection methods and connection destinations of the enhanced switch instrument block I/O
terminals.
Table 2.4.1-2 Connection Method and Connection Destination of Enhanced Switch Instrument Block I/O Terminals

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

Code I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Answerback
IN/IN1
I/O terminal x - - - Δ x x x
(*2)
SI-1E 1
SI-2E Answerback
IN2
I/O terminal x - - - Δ x x x
(*3)
2
Remote/local
TSI x - - - Δ x x x
I/O terminal
OUT/
Output
SO- OUT1 - x - - x x x x
terminal 1
1E (*4)
SO- OUT2 Output
2E - x - - x x x x
(*5) terminal 2
Interlock
INT switch input x - - - Δ x x x
terminal
Answerback
IN/IN1
input x - - - Δ x x x
(*6)
terminal 1
Answerback
IN2
SIO- input x - - - Δ x x x
(*7)
terminal 2
11E
SIO- Remote/local
TSI x - - - Δ x x x
12E I/O terminal
SIO-
Answerback
21E
SWI bypass input x - - - Δ x x -
SIO-
terminal
22E
SIO- OUT/
Output
12PE OUT1 - x - - x x x x
terminal 1
SIO- (*8)
22PE OUT2 Output
- x - - x x x x
(*9) terminal 2
Interlock
INT switch input x - - - Δ x x x
terminal
*1: x: Connection available
-: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a switch block (SW-33, SW-91).
*2: IN terminal of SI-1E. IN1 terminal of SI-2E.
*3: IN2 terminal of SI-2E.
*4: OUT terminal of SO-1E. OUT1 terminal of SO-2E.
*5: OUT2 terminal of SO-2E.
*6: IN terminal of the blocks with only one input. IN1 terminal of the blocks with two inputs.
*7: IN2 terminal of the blocks with two inputs.
*8: OUT terminal of the blocks with only one output. OUT1 terminal of the blocks with two outputs.
*9: OUT1 terminal of the blocks with two outputs.

If the OUT1 terminal and the OUT2 terminal are connected to different output modules or if OUT1
terminal and the OUT2 terminal are connected to FF faceplate blocks or fieldbus function blocks, the
simultaneity of the two outputs are not guaranteed. The same phenomenon happens to IN1 and IN2
terminals under the same circumstances.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 4 of 17

Example of Using Switch Instrument Block

An outline of the function manipulating the motor-operated valve is explained in the switch instrument block (SIO-22P)
faceplate shown below.

Figure 2.4.1-3 Functional Schematic Diagram of Switch Instrument Block (SIO-22P)

Process Timing
The process timing of switch instrument block and enhanced switch instrument block is periodic type. Only the basic scan
period can be used for the switch instrument block and enhanced switch instrument block.

List of Switch Instrument Block Functions

The switch instrument block function varies by the type of the block. The following table lists the major functions of switch
instrument blocks.
Table 2.4.1-3 List of Switch Instrument Block Functions by Block Type (1/2)

Code(*1)
Function
SI-1 SI-2 SO-1 SO-2 SIO-11
Number of answerback points 1 2 1
Number of output points 1 2 1
Block mode x x x x x
Block status x x x x x
Alarm status x x x x x
Answerback input x x x
Answerback inconsistency alarm check x
Remote/local input x x x
Answerback check x
Output signal conversion x x x
Answerback bypass x
Answerback tracking x
Calibration x x x
Mode change interlock x x x

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 5 of 17

Initialization manual mode x x x

Manual mode fallback x x x x x
Simulation x x x x x
*1: x: Yes
Blank: No

Table 2.4.1-4 List of Switch Instrument Block Functions by Block Type (2/2)

Code(*1)
Function
SIO-12 SIO-21 SIO-22 SIO-12P SIO-22P
Number of answerback points 1 2 2 1 2
Number of output points 2 1 2 2 2
Block mode x x x x x
Block status x x x x x
Alarm status x x x x x
Answerback input x x x x x
Answerback inconsistency alarm check x x x
Remote/local input x x x x x
Answerback check x x x x x
Output signal conversion x x x x x
Answerback bypass x x x x x
Answerback tracking x x x x x
Calibration x x x x x
Mode change interlock x x x x x
Initialization manual mode x x x x x
Manual mode fallback x x x x x
Simulation x x x x x
*1: x: Yes
Blank: No

SEE For more information about the types of alarm processing possible for the switch instrument blocks, refer to:
ALSO 2.1.1, "Alarm Processing of Sequence Control Blocks"
For more information about alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

List of Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Functions

The enhanced switch instrument block function varies by the type of the block. The following table lists the major functions
of enhanced switch instrument blocks.
Table 2.4.1-5 List of Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Functions by Block Type (1/2)

Code(*1)
Function
SI-1E SI-2E SO-1E SO-2E SIO-11E
Number of answerback points 1 2 1
Number of output points 1 2 1
Block mode x x x x x
Block status x x x x x
Alarm status x x x x x
Answerback input x x x
Answerback inconsistency alarm check x
Answerback inconsistency alarm mask
Remote/local input x x x
Answerback check x
Output signal conversion x x x

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 6 of 17

Output tracking x x x
Answerback bypass x
Answerback tracking x
Calibration x x x
Mode change interlock x x x
Initialization manual mode x x x
Manual mode fallback x x x x x
Simulation x x x x x
*1: x: Yes
Blank: No

Table 2.4.1-6 List of Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Functions by Block Type (2/2)

Code(*1)
Function
SIO-12E SIO-21E SIO-22E SIO-12PE SIO-22PE
Number of answerback points 1 2 2 1 2
Number of output points 2 1 2 2 2
Block mode x x x x x
Block status x x x x x
Alarm status x x x x x
Answerback input x x x x x
Answerback inconsistency alarm check x x x
Answerback inconsistency alarm mask x x x
Remote/local input x x x x x
Answerback check x x x x x
Output signal conversion x x x x x
Output Tracking x x x x x
Answerback bypass x x x x x
Answerback tracking x x x x x
Calibration x x x x x
Mode change interlock x x x x x
Initialization manual mode x x x x x
Manual mode fallback x x x x x
Simulation x x x x x
*1: x: Yes
Blank: No

SEE For more information about the types of alarm processing possible for the enhanced switch instrument blocks, refer to:
ALSO 2.1.1, "Alarm Processing of Sequence Control Blocks"
For more information about alarm processing, refer to:
5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Answerback Input
▼ Direction of Answerback
In answerback input function, the limit switch signal indicating the valve’s open/close status is entered from the
answerback input terminal to generate the answerback input value (PV). Contact input and internal switch can be specified
as the answerback signal input for the switch instrument blocks. For enhanced switch instrument blocks, the contact input,
internal switch, FF faceplate block and fieldbus function block can be specified as the answerback signal input. The
answerback input signal is converted into the answerback input value (PV) inside the switch instrument. This answerback
input value varies depending upon the answerback input direction and the input status of the valve limit switch. The table
below lists the answerback input values.
Table 2.4.1-7 List of Answerback Input Value

Valve limit switch status

Direction of Answerback (*1)
Number of answerback Answerback input value

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 7 of 17

points n n+1 (PV)

ON - 2
Direct
OFF - 0
1
ON - 0
Reverse
OFF - 2
ON OFF 2
OFF OFF 1
Direct
OFF ON 0
ON ON Hold previous PV value (*2)
ON OFF 0
OFF OFF Hold previous PV value (*2)
Reverse
OFF ON 2
ON ON 1
2
OFF ON 2

Inverted connection direct action OFF OFF 1

(*3) ON OFF 0
ON ON Hold previous value (*2)
OFF ON 0

Inverted connection reversed action OFF OFF Hold previous value (*2)
(*3) ON OFF 2
ON ON 1
*1: “n” in the table indicates the element number specified to connect to IN terminal of switch instrument blocks and enhanced
switch instrument blocks, or the IN1 terminal of enhanced switch instrument blocks. The answerback input signal read from the
element n represents the status of “open;” vise versa, when the connection is inverted, the answerback input signal read from
the element n represents the status of “close.”
n+1” in the table indicates the element number succeeding the element number “n” that is specified to connect to IN terminal of
switch instrument blocks, or the element number specified to connect to IN2 terminal of enhanced switch instrument blocks. The
answerback input signal read from the element n+1 represents the status of “close;” vise versa, when the connection is
inverted, the answerback input signal read from the element n+1 represents the status of “open.”
*2: This is an abnormal event in which input from full-open signal and full-close signal occurs simultaneously. The answerback
inconsistency alarm (PERR) occurs.
*3: Inverted connection cannot be defined for enhanced switch instrument block.

The answerback input direction is specified in the Function Block Detail Builder.
• Direction of Answerback
Switch Instrument Block: Select from [Direct], [Reverse], [Inverted connect direct action], or [Inverted connect
reversed action].
Enhanced switch instrument block: Select from [Direct] or [Reverse].
Default is [Direct].

Data Status Accompanied by Alarms

If a full-open signal and a full-close signal are input simultaneously, or at least one of the input destinations of the input
target element is abnormal, the data status of the answerback input value (PV) becomes invalid (BAD).
If the data status of the answerback input value becomes invalid (BAD), the input open alarm (IOP) will occur.
If the invalid data value is caused by the simultaneous input of full-open and full-close signals, the answerback
inconsistency alarm (PERR) will occur.
The status of answerback signal will be stored in the answerback raw signal (RAW), besides the answerback input value
(PV). Even if the answerback input function fails, the answerback raw data (RAW) will follow the actual answerback signal.

Conditions under Which Answerback Input Function Fails

The answerback input function fails under the following conditions:
• Simulation state (SIMM=1)
• Calibrating (PV.CAL=1)
• During answerback bypass (BPSW=1)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 8 of 17

Actions of Answer-Back Inconsistency Alarm Check

The answerback inconsistency alarm check is a function that determines whether two answerback input signals indicate full-
open and full-close simultaneously in the switch instrument blocks (SI-2, SIO-21, SIO-22, or SIO-22P) and the enhanced
switch instrument block (SI-2E, SIO-21E, SIO-22E or SIO-22PE).
If it is determined that two answerback input signals indicated full-open and full-close simultaneously, an answerback
inconsistency alarm (PERR) occurs.
If the two answer-back input signals stop indicating full-open and full-close simultaneously while the alarm is being
generated, the alarm is returned to normal state.

Answer-Back Inconsistency Alarm Mask

▼ Inhibit Answerback Error Alarm
When IN1 terminal and the IN2 terminal of an enhanced switch block are connected to FF faceplate blocks or fieldbus
function blocks, the simultaneity of the two inputs is not guaranteed. If the both the ON and OFF answerbacks exist at the
same time even for a very short time, the Answer-Back Inconsistency Alarm (PERR) may occur. To prevent the alarm
occurring under this circumstance, the alarm can be masked by stop the alarm check for a certain time period (Mask Time)
after the manipulated output (MV) changes. The data item MTM can be used for setting this answer-back inconsistency
alarm mask time.
For enhanced switch instrument block, the answer-back inconsistency alarm mask can be set on the function block detail
builder.
Inhibit Answerback Error Alarm: Choose between [No] and [Yes].
The default setting is [No].

TIP SI-2E block has the Answer-Back Inconsistency Alarm check capability but cannot be masked. If the alarm need to be
masked, it is necessary to use an application program such as a sequence table block to enable or disable the alarm
check after the MV changes.

Remote/Local Input
The remote/local input function switches the block mode depending on the status of the on-site operation push-button
(remote/local input signal) input from the remote/local input terminal (TSI). For remote/local signals, the contact input and
internal switch can be specified. The state of remote/local input signal is stored in the tracking switch (TSW). The block
mode will be changed depending on the state of tracking switch (TSW).
Table 2.4.1-8 Remote/Local Input of the Switch Instrument Block and the Enhanced Switch Instrument Block

On-site operation remote/ local switching Input signal to TSI input terminal Tracking switch (TSW) Block mode
Remote OFF 0 Cancel TRK
Local ON 1 TRK

If there exists no connection for the remote/local input terminal (TSI), the block mode external to the block function can
set the tracking switch (TSW) directly.
The following is an example of description to the sequence table action signal column for setting the switch instrument
(Tag name=SU0100) tracking switch (TSW) to 1.

The cprresponding logic chart is shown below:

Figure 2.4.1-4 Example of a Logic Chart

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 9 of 17

Answerback Check
▼ Answerback Check, Answerback Abnormal Alarm
The answerback check function checks if final control elements such as a valve is working as specified by the output from
the switch instrument block or the enhanced switch instrument block.
If there exists answerback check specification, operations are checked by comparing the answerback input value (PV) and
manipulated output value (MV) regularly, except for a certain period after a change in the output. If there is any
inconsistency between the answerback input value (PV) and the manipulated output value (MV), the answerback error
alarm (ANS+ or ANS-) will occur.

Conditions for Answerback Error Alarm Occurrence

Answerback error alarm occurs under the following conditions:
• Open-side answerback error alarm (ANS+)
MV=2 and PV≠2
• Close-side answerback error alarm (ANS-)
MV=0 and PV≠0
Presence/absence of the answerback error alarm can be specified in the Function Block Detail Builder.
• Answerback Abnormal Alarm
Select from “Close,” “OFF Direction,” “Both” or “No.”
The default is “Both.”

Conditions for Recovery from Answerback Error Alarm

Recovery from the answerback error alarm is possible under the following conditions.
• Open-side answerback error alarm (ANS+)
When PV changes to PV=2, or MV changes to MV≠2
• Close-side answerback error alarm (ANS-)
When PV changes to PV=0, or MV changes to MV≠0

Answerback Check Suppression Timer

It takes a certain length of time from changing the manipulated output value (MV) to completing the final control element
operation. Consequently, when there is a change in manipulated output value, even if there is any inconsistency between
the answerback input value (PV) and the manipulated output value (MV), the alarm will not be activated for a certain
length of time (answerback check suppression time: MTM) after the change. If the manipulated output value (MV) is
changed, the block status will become answerback check inhibition (ANCK), starting the answerback check suppression
timer.
If there is any inconsistency between the answerback input value (PV) and the manipulated output value during the period
between the time-up of answerback check suppression timer and the next change in the manipulated output value (MV),
the answerback error alarm (ANS±) will be activated.
The answerback check inhibition (ANCK) will be canceled when there is an inconsistency between the answerback input
value (PV) and the manipulated output value (MV), or when the answerback check suppression timer expires.
Elapsed time of the answerback check suppression timer (PTM) indicates the time elapsed after activating the answerback
check suppression timer. When there is an inconsistency between the answerback input value (PV) and the manipulated
output value (MV) or when the answerback check suppression timer expires, the answerback check suppression timer will
stop counting, retaining the count value.
The operation range of the answerback check suppression time (MTM) is from 0 to 10,000 seconds.

Answerback Check Monitoring

The answerback check monitoring is specified in the Function Block Detail Builder.
Answerback Check : Choose [Both sides], [Open], [Close], or [No].
The default is [Both sides].
When either “Open” or “Close” is specified, answerback check will not be performed even if there is any inconsistency on
the side not specified. On the other hand, if monitoring both sides is specified, the alarm will be activated when an
inconsistency is detected on either side. The alarm will be canceled when both sides satisfy their recovery conditions.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 10 of 17

Monitoring Both Sides

The answerback check time will be activated upon rising and falling of the output. If there exists any inconsistency
between the answerback input value (PV) and the manipulated output value during the period between the time-up of
answerback check suppression timer and the next change in the manipulated output value (MV), the answerback error
alarm (ANS+) or close-side answerback error alarm (ANS-) will be activated.

Figure 2.4.1-5 Operation Diagram of Both-Side Monitoring

Monitoring Open-Side
The answerback check time will be activated upon rising (OFF→ON) (MV=0→2) of the manipulated output. If there exists
any inconsistency between the answerback input value (PV) and the manipulated output value during the period between
the time-up of answerback check suppression timer and the next change of the manipulated output value (MV) to 0, the
open-side answerback error alarm (ANS+) will be activated.

Figure 2.4.1-6 Operation Diagram of Open-Side Monitoring

Monitoring Close-Side
The answerback check time will be activated upon falling (ON→OFF) (MV=2→0) of the manipulated output. If there exists
any inconsistency between the answerback input value (PV) and the manipulated output value during the period between
the time-up of answerback check suppression timer and the next change of the manipulated output value (MV) to 2, the
close-side answerback error alarm (ANS-) will be activated.

Figure 2.4.1-7 Operation Diagram of Close-Side Monitoring

Conditions under Which Answerback Check Function Fails

Answerback check function fails under the following conditions:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 11 of 17

• Simulation state (SIMM): SIMM=1

• On-site manual operation mode (TRK): TSW=1
• During answerback bypass: BPSW=1
• MV=1
• Calibrating (PV.CAL=1)
• Input data error
• Initialization manual mode (IMAN)

Answerback Bypass
The answerback bypass function stops the answerback input function and answerback check function, forcing the
answerback input value (PV) and the manipulated output value (MV) to match. The status of the answerback bypass
switch will be input via the answerback bypass input terminal (SWI). The contact input and internal switch can be specified
to the input terminal. If there is no connection to the SWI input terminal, the answerback bypass switch (BPSW) can be
specified directly from outside the function block.
The answerback bypass function is available only when the answerback bypass switch (BPSW) is set to 1.
The table below shows the relationship between the answerback bypass input terminal and the answerback bypass switch.
Table 2.4.1-9 Relationship between Answerback Bypass Input Terminal and Answerback Bypass Switch

Item SWI input terminal ON SWI input terminal OFF

Answerback bypass switch (BPSW) 1 0
Answerback bypass function Execute Stop

Output Signal Conversion

▼ Output Action Direction
The output signal conversion function outputs a contact signal to the output destination specified by the output terminal
depending on the manipulated output value (MV). The manipulated output value (MV) from the switch instrument block or
the enhanced switch instrument block varies by the block mode.
• When in Manual (MAN) Mode
The output value is the values set on HIS.
• When in Automatic (AUT) or Cascade (CAS) Mode
The output value is the value set by other blocks such as sequence control block (CSV).
• When in Remote Output (ROUT) Mode
The output value is the value remotely set from a supervisory computer (RMV).
• When in On-site Manual (Tracking) (TRK) Mode
The output value is the value of the answerback input value (PV) if it is not in simulation status and answerback
tracking is specified.
The output contact signal varies with the direction of output action. Output action direction can be set on the Function
Block Detail Builder.
• Output action direction
Switch instrument block: Select from [Direct], [Reverse], [Inverted connect Direct action] or [Inverted connect
Reversed action].
Enhanced switch instrument Select from [Direct] or [Reverse].
block:
The default is [Direct].
Table 2.4.1-10 Manipulated Output Value (MV) and Output Status

Output status (*1)

Number of output point Output action direction MV
n n+1
2 ON -
Direct action
1 0 OFF -
(Two-position type) 0 ON -
Reverse action
2 OFF -
2 ON OFF
Direct action 1 OFF OFF
0 OFF ON

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 12 of 17

2 OFF ON
Reverse action 1 ON ON
0 ON OFF
2 OFF ON
2
Inverted connection Direct action (*2) 1 OFF OFF
(Three-position type)
0 ON OFF
2 ON OFF
Inverted connection Reversed action (*2) 1 ON ON
0 OFF ON

2 2 ON OFF
Direct action
(Pulse type) 0 OFF ON
*1: “n” in the table indicates the element number specified to connect to OUT terminal of switch instrument blocks and enhanced
switch instrument blocks, or the OUT1 terminal of enhanced switch instrument blocks.“n+1” in the table indicates the element
number succeeding the element number “n” that is specified to connect to OUT terminal of switch instrument blocks, or the
element number specified to connect to OUT2 terminal of enhanced switch instrument blocks.
*2: Inverted connection cannot be defined for enhanced switch instrument block.

Output Action may be illustrated as follows:

Figure 2.4.1-8 Output Action (Action Direction = Direct Action)

Output Tracking : Enhanced Switch Instrument Block

Output tracking is an output processing of enhanced switch instrument block. The output tracking forces the manipulated
output value (MV) to match value of the connected destination.
If an enhanced switch instrument block is connected in a cascade loop with FF faceplate block or fieldbus function block,
the enhanced switch block starts output tracking when the cascade loop is disconnected and its block changes to IMAN
mode.
Output tracking starts under the following circumstances:
• When the block becomes IMAN mode.
• When the block changes from service off (O/S) mode to MAN, AUT or CAS mode.
• When the I/O module connected to the output terminals recovered from failure.
• When the cascade loop is disconnected.

TIP The output tracking of switch instrument block starts under the following circumstances:
• When the block becomes IMAN mode.
• When the block changes from service off (O/S) mode to MAN, AUT or CAS mode.
• When the I/O module connected to the output terminals recovered from failure.

MV Action on Setting CSV: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 13 of 17

▼ MV of Switch Instrument/MC Instrument follows its CSV change

When CSV is changed by a sequence table or by a function block, whether the MV of switch instrument block or enhanced
switch instrument block to instantaneously follow the CSV change or to follow the change at the next execution time can
be specified.
On the Constant tab of FCS Properties sheet, if the option of [MV of Switch Instrument/MC Instrument follows its CSV
change] is checked, the MV will follow the CSV right after the CSV is changed. Otherwise, the MV will follow the CSV at the
next execution time of the switch instrument block or enhanced switch instrument block. By default, this option is not
checked.
Moreover, the option is valid not only for changing the CSV by sequence table blocks, but also valid for changing the CSV
by the logic chart blocks, calculation blocks as well as manipulating the CSV on an HIS.
• When the Option is Checked
When the CSV is set from a sequence table, the MV of the switch instrument block or enhanced switch instrument block
will instantaneously follow the CSV change.
For example, if the CSV of a switch instrument block SO-1 is set to CSV=2, the direct MV action may be illustrated as
follows:

Figure 2.4.1-9 CSV, MV and Actual Output when the Option is Checked: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2

• When the Option is Unchecked

When the CSV is set from a sequence table, the MV of the switch instrument block or enhanced switch instrument block
will follow the CSV change at the next execution time of the switch instrument block or enhanced switch instrument
block.
For example, if the CSV of a switch instrument block SO-1 is set to CSV=2, the direct MV action may be illustrated as
follows:

Figure 2.4.1-10 CSV, MV and Actual Output when the Option is Unchecked: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2

Answerback Tracking
▼ Answerback Tracking
The answerback tracking function forces the manipulated output value (MV) to coincide with the answerback input value
(PV) (MV=PV) during the on-site manual operation mode (TRK). The presence/absence of the answerback tracking
function can be specified in the Function Block Detail Builder.
Answerback Tracking: Select from “Yes’’ or “No.’’

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 14 of 17

The default is “Yes.”

Calibration
The calibration function allows manual setting of the input signal. The calibration function is activated when the data status
of the answerback input value (PV) becomes calibration (CAL). This state is called the calibration status. Change to the
calibration status can be executed from the human-machine interface station (operation and monitoring functions).
The following describes the switch instrument block and enhanced switch instrument block actions during the calibration
status.
• Answerback input value (PV) can be set manually.
• The manual fall back condition is satisfied and the block mode becomes manual (MAN). The output function is
performed.
• Bypass the alarm process for the answerback input value (PV).
• Bypass the answerback input and answerback check function.

Simulation
The simulation function simulates only the internal processing of the switch instrument block/the enhanced switch
instrument block in order to test the operation of devices using the switch instrument block/the enhanced switch
instrument block. There exists two main status in the switch instrument block/the enhanced switch instrument block:
normal status and simulation status.
The status shifts to simulation when the switch instrument block/the enhanced switch instrument block simulation switch
(SIMM) is set to ON (=1).

Setting the Simulation Status

Upon setting the switch instrument block simulation switch (SIMM) to ON (=1), the status shifts to simulation (Block
status: SIM). The status can be set in the tuning view of operation and monitoring functions.

Canceling the Simulation Status

Upon setting the switch instrument block simulation switch (SIMM) to OFF (=0), the simulation status will be canceled
(block status: NR). The status can be canceled in the tuning view of operation and monitoring functions.

Actions under Simulation Status

The table below lists the actions of the switch instrument block/the enhanced switch instrument block functions during
simulation status.
• Block mode: Same as the normal state except IMAN
• Block status: SIM
• Alarm status: Always NR (Normal)
• Answerback input: No action except for including raw input data value.
• Remote/Local Input: Same as the normal state
• Answerback check:
Checking and alarming action is stopped. After the answerback check suppression time is elapsed, MV value is set to PV
value. When the answerback check is “No,” MV value is immediately set to PV value.
• Answerback bypass: No action except for including data from SWI.
• Output signal conversion: Output action is stopped.
• Answerback tracking: No action
• Alarm function: No action
• Calibration function: Same as the normal state.
The following describes the switch instrument block/the enhanced switch instrument block action in the first scan period
after canceling the simulation status.
• For a status-output type, the contact state of the output destination (element connected to output terminal) is read
back as the manipulated output value (MV).
• For a pulse-output type (SIO-12P, SIO-22P, SIO-12PE, SIO-22PE), if the answerback tracking function is “Yes,” the
manipulated output value (MV) is matched to the answerback input value (PV).

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 15 of 17

Mode Change Interlock

This function prevents the automatic operation of the switch instrument block/the enhanced switch instrument block.
When the internal switch status of the interlock switch input terminal connection destination is turned ON, the block mode
change command to the automatic operation status (AUT, CAS, ROUT) is disabled. At the same time, the manual fall back
condition becomes satisfied, and the block mode is changed to manual mode (MAN).
Any data containing a logical value such as the contact I/O and the internal switch can be specified to the connection
destination of the interlock switch input terminal regardless of the element type.

Initialization Manual
The initialization manual function is an error processing functions. It suspends the control action by changing the block
mode to the initialization manual mode (IMAN). The initialization manual][ function will be activated when a temporary
abnormal state occurred at the output destination of manipulated output value can be restarted automatically upon
recovery from the abnormal state, for instance, during on-line maintenance.
• When the initialization manual function is activated, the control action is stopped when the block mode is in the status
that allows automatic controls as in the automatic mode (AUT). The previous manipulated output value (MV) is
retained. However, the manual operation will not be available if the initialization manual mode is enabled, even if the
mode is changed from IMAN (AUT) to IMAN (MAN). Upon returning from the initialization manual (IMAN) mode, the
manipulated output value (MV) will track the PV value of the output destination.
• The initialization manual mode (IMAN) is reset upon recovery of the occurrence conditions, returning to the previous
block mode. If the block mode change is executed during the initialization manual mode (IMAN), the block mode will be
the mode specified upon recovery of IMAN conditions.

SEE For more information about initialization manual conditions, refer to:
ALSO “ The Initialization Manual Condition” in 6.1.5, “Block Mode Transition Condition” in Function Blocks Overview (IM
33J15A20-01EN)

Manual Mode Fallback

The manual fallback function is one of the error processing functions. It forces the control to stop by changing the block
mode to the manual mode (MAN) regardless of the current operation status. If the manual mode (MAN) is activated by the
manual fallback function, the block mode of the switch instrument block/the enhanced switch instrument block remains
manual mode (MAN) even after the recovery of an error.
The following describes manual fallback conditions for the switch instrument block/the enhanced switch instrument block.
• When the switch connected to the INT terminal is ON. (When the block mode change interlock condition is established.)
(*1)
• When the data status of the answerback input value (PV) changes to calibration (CAL).
• When the data status of the manipulated output value (MV) becomes output failure (PTPF).(*1)
• When the manipulated output value (MV) is connected to a process I/O and FCS initial cold start occurs.(*1)
*1: If the simulation switch (SIMM) is ON (= 1), MAN fallback does not occur even if the condition is established.

Data Items – Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch

Instrument Block
Table 2.4.1-11 Data Items of the Switch Instrument Blocks (SI-1, SI-2) and the Enhanced Switch Instrument Block
(SI-1E, SI-2E)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
BSTS Block status ----- NR
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- 0
AF Alarm detection ----- 0
AOFS Alarm inhibition ----- 0
PV Answerback input value Δ (*2) 0 to 2 0

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 16 of 17

RAW Raw input data 0 to 3 -----

SIMM Simulation switch x 0, 1 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL

Table 2.4.1-12 Data Items of the Switch Instrument Blocks (SO-1, SO-2) and the Enhanced Switch Instrument Block
(SO-1E, SO-2E)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (MAN)
BSTS Block status ----- NR
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- 0
AF Alarm detection ----- 0
AOFS Alarm inhibition ----- 0
MV Manipulated output value Δ (*2) 0 to 2 0
RMV Remote manipulated output value Δ (*3) 0 to 2 0
CSV Sequence setpoint value x 0 to 2 0
SIMM Simulation switch x 0, 1 0
TSW Tracking switch Δ (*4) 0, 1 0
BSW Backup switch x 0, 1 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the block mode is MAN
*3: Entry is permitted when the block mode is ROUT
*4: Entry is permitted when no data is specified to the input connection terminal

Table 2.4.1-13 Data Items of the Switch Instrument Blocks (SIO-11, SIO-12, SIO-21, SIO-22, SIO-12P, SIO-22P) and
the Enhanced Switch Instrument Block (SIO-11E, SIO-12E, SIO-21E, SIO-22E, SIO-12PE, SIO-22PE)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (MAN)
BSTS Block status ----- NR
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- 0
AF Alarm detection ----- 0
AOFS Alarm inhibition ----- 0
PV Answerback input value Δ (*2) 0 to 2 0
RAW Answerback raw signal 0 to 3 -----
MV Manipulated output value Δ (*3) 0 to 2 0
RMV Remote manipulated output value Δ (*4) 0 to 2 0
CSV Sequence setpoint value x 0 to 2 0
MTM Answerback check masking time (seconds) x 0 to 10000 4
PTM Elapsed time (seconds) 0 to 10000 0
SIMM Simulation switch x 0, 1 0
BPSW Answerback bypass switch Δ (*5) 0, 1 0
TSW Tracking switch Δ (*5) 0, 1 0
BSW Backup switch x 0, 1 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.1 Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block Page 17 of 17

*1: x:Entry is permitted unconditionally

Blank:Entry is not permitted
Δ:Entry is permitted conditionally
*2: Entry is permitted when the data status is CAL
*3: Entry is permitted when the block mode is MAN
*4: Entry is permitted when the block mode is ROUT
*5: Entry is permitted when no data is specified to the input connection terminal

SEE For more information about valid block modes for the switch instrument blocks and the enhanced switch instrument
ALSO block, refer to:
2.1.2, "Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks"

Block Status of Switch Instrument Block and the Enhanced Switch

Instrument Block
Table 2.4.1-14 Block Status of Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block

Block Status
Level Description
Symbol Name
3 ANCK (*1) Answerback Check Inhibition Answerback check is inhibited
SIM Simulation Simulation state, output is invalidated
1
NR Normal Normal state
*1: ANCK status is not available in SI-1, SI-2, SO-1 and SO-2.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.2 Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input Discrete-status Alarm Page 1 of 8

2.4.2 Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input Discrete-status

Alarm
The switch instrument block with 1 input discrete-status alarm is used to generate and reset an alarm based
on the value of the contact input signal. SI-1ALM is available as the switch instrument block with 1 input
discrete-status alarm. The switch instrument block with 1 input discrete-status alarm is hereinafter referred to
as SI-1ALM.

FCSs That Can Use SI-1ALM

SI-1ALM can be used on FFCS-V and FFCS-C.

SI-1ALM Function Block Diagram

The following figure shows the SI-1ALM function block diagram.

Figure 2.4.2-1 SI-1ALM Function Block Diagram

The following table shows the connection types and connection destinations of the SI-1ALM I/O terminals.
Table 2.4.2-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of SI-1ALM I/O Terminals

Connection type (*1) Connection destination (*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Data Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting setting manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Answerback
IN x - - - Δ x x x
input
Post
answerback-
OUT - x - - Δ x x x
process
output
Discrete-
status
SUB - x - - Δ x x x
alarm
output
*1: X: Connection available
-: Connection not available
Δ: Connection available only when connecting to switch blocks (SW-33, SW-91)

SI-1ALM Processing Timing

The only processing timing available for the SI-1ALM is a periodic startup. The scan period can be set to Basic
Scan, Medium-speed Scan, or High-speed Scan.

List of SI-1ALM Functions

SI-1ALM has the same functions as those of other switch instrument blocks, and SI-1ALM-specific functions.
The following table lists the functions of SI-1ALM.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.2 Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input Discrete-status Alarm Page 2 of 8

Table 2.4.2-2 List of SI-1ALM Functions That are Common to Other Switch Instrument Blocks

Function Remark
Block mode The block mode can be O/S or AUT.
Block Status The block status can be NR or SIM.
Alarm status The alarm status can be NR, IOP, IOP- or ALM.
Answerback input This refers to a contact input or software I/O to be connected to the IN terminal.
Calibration
Simulation
Set PV of %Z to zero upon You can specify to set the PV value to zero forcibly when the I/O module connected to
failure of a DI module (*1) the IN terminal fails. If not specified, the PV value before the failure is retained.
*1: If this function is enabled, delaying of PV will not work when the DI module fails. In addition, discrete-status
alarm (ALM) changes according to the PV value.

Table 2.4.2-3 List of SI-1ALM-Specific Functions

Function Function overview

This is a function to monitor the chattering of the answerback input signal during the delay
Delaying the time specified by the user. If no chattering is detected during the delay time, the answerback
answerback input signal input signal after this time period is handled as the post answerback-process output value
(PV).
The alarm status is determined based on whether the post answerback-process output value
(PV) is ON or OFF.
Discrete-status alarm
The user can specify to detect or not to detect the alarm status. The user can also specify to
judgment
set the ON or OFF status for the post answerback-process output value (PV) as the alarm
status.
Discrete-status alarm
The result of discrete-status alarm judgment is generated from the SUB terminal.
output
Output of the post ON or OFF is output from the OUT terminal based on the post answerback-process output
answerback-process value (PV).
output value The output value on the OUT terminal will be “1” when PV = 2, and “0” when PV = 0.

SEE For more information about the functions of SI-1ALM that are common to other switch instrument blocks,
ALSO refer to:
2.4.1, "Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block"
For more information about “Setting PV of %Z to zero when the DI fails”, refer to:
8.2, “Reactions at DI Module Failure: FFCS Series/KFCS2” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-
01EN)

SI-1ALM Operations
This section describes delaying of answerback input signal, discrete-status alarm judgment, and generation of
annunciator messages with data as the operations performed by SI-1ALM.

Delaying the answerback input signal

Based on the raw answerback input signal data (referred to as RAW) and the direction of answerback input
specified by the user by using the builder, the answerback input median (referred to as the RV) is generated.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.2 Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input Discrete-status Alarm Page 3 of 8

Figure 2.4.2-2 Relationship Between RAW and RV

The ON delay timer starts when RV turns ON. When the ON delay timer time is up, the post answerback-
process output value (referred to as PV) turns ON. If RV turns OFF while the ON delay timer is running, the
ON delay timer stops and the elapsed time is reset. Subsequently, when RV turns ON, the ON delay timer
starts.
When RV turns OFF after the ON delay timer time is up, the OFF delay timer starts. When the OFF delay timer
time is up, PV turns OFF. If RV turns ON while the OFF delay timer is running, the OFF delay timer stops and
the elapsed time is reset. Subsequently, when RV turns OFF, the OFF delay timer starts.

Figure 2.4.2-3 Relationship Between RV and PV

Chattering may occur when the answerback input signal turns ON or OFF. The delay timer is used to prevent
the alarm from turning ON or OFF in connection with such chattering. The following figure shows an example
of how the delay timer functions. This is an example of the operation of the ON delay timer.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.2 Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input Discrete-status Alarm Page 4 of 8

Figure 2.4.2-4 Delay Timer Operation (ON Delay Timer Example)

You can set the ON delay timer set value and the OFF delay timer set value in ONST and OFST of the tuning
parameters. You can monitor the elapsed time of each delay timer in ONPT and OFPT of the tuning
parameters.
Table 2.4.2-4 Delay Timer Tuning Parameters

Parameter Name Description

Delay time This is the ON delay timer set value. The value must be between 0 and 120 seconds.
ONST
ON Specify a multiple of the scan period as the delay time value. (*1)
Delay time This is the OFF delay timer set value. The value must be between 0 and 120 seconds.
OFST
OFF Specify a multiple of the scan period as the delay time value. (*1)
Elapse time
ONPT This parameter indicates the elapsed time of the ON delay timer (seconds). (*2)
ON
Elapse time
OFPT This parameter indicates the elapsed time of the OFF delay timer (seconds). (*2)
OFF
*1: If the specified value is not a multiple of the scan period, the delay status is canceled during the first scan period
after the specified delay time elapses.
*2: The elapsed time of delay timer can be saved or loaded by snapshot function of the Test Function.

Discrete-status alarm judgment

▼ Discrete-status Alarm, Discrete-status Alarm Set Value
When PV of SI-1ALM turns ON (PV = 2) or turns OFF (PV = 0), the SI-1ALM alarm processing function
determines whether the SI-1ALM is in an alarm state.
Based on the Discrete-status Alarm and the Discrete-status Alarm Set Value that are specified by the user by
using the builder, the discrete-status alarm is determined. During the alarm, the SI-1ALM alarm status
indicates “ALM.”
Table 2.4.2-5 Discrete-status Alarm

Value Description
YES The discrete-status alarm is detected (default).
NO The discrete-status alarm is not detected.

Table 2.4.2-6 Discrete-status Alarm Set Value

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.2 Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input Discrete-status Alarm Page 5 of 8

Value Description
ON When PV is ON, the alarm occurs (default).
OFF When PV is OFF, the alarm occurs.

The following figure shows how the discrete-status alarm is determined. The judgment varies depending on
the combination of the Discrete-status Alarm and the Discrete-status Alarm Set Value that are specified by the
builder.

Figure 2.4.2-5 When the Discrete-status Alarm is set to YES and the Discrete-status Alarm Set Value is set
to ON

Figure 2.4.2-6 When the Discrete-status Alarm is set to YES and the Discrete-status Alarm Set Value is set
to OFF

Figure 2.4.2-7 When the Discrete-status Alarm is set to NO and the Discrete-status Alarm Set Value is set
to ON

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.2 Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input Discrete-status Alarm Page 6 of 8

Figure 2.4.2-8 When the Discrete-status Alarm is set to NO and the Discrete-status Alarm Set Value is set
to OFF

Output of annunciator message with data

The result of discrete-status alarm judgment is generated from the SUB terminal. Specify an annunciator
message with data as the output destination of the SUB terminal to have the annunciator message generated
based on the judgment result of the discrete-status alarm.

SEE For more information about the annunciator message with data, refer to:
ALSO “ Annunciator Message with Data” in 2.4.1, “Creating a New FCS” in Engineering Reference Vol.1 (IM
33J10D10-01EN)

SI-1ALM I/O Relationships

The following table shows a list of SI-1ALM I/O relationships.
Table 2.4.2-7 SI-1ALM I/O Relationships

Post
Raw Discrete-
Answerback answerback- Discrete- SUB
Direction of answerback status Alarm
input median process status terminal
Answerback input signal Alarm Set status
(RV) output value Alarm output
data (RAW) Value
(PV)
ON 2 2 ALM 1
ON
OFF 0 0 - 0
YES
ON 2 2 - 0
OFF
OFF 0 0 ALM 1
Direct action
ON 2 2 - 1
ON
OFF 0 0 - 0
NO
ON 2 2 - 0
OFF
OFF 0 0 - 1
ON 0 0 - 0
ON
OFF 2 2 ALM 1
YES
ON 0 0 ALM 1
OFF
OFF 2 2 - 0
Reverse action
ON 0 0 - 0
ON
OFF 2 2 - 1
NO
ON 0 0 - 1
OFF
OFF 2 2 - 0

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.2 Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input Discrete-status Alarm Page 7 of 8

List of SI-1ALM Data Items

The following table shows a list of SI-1ALM data items.
Table 2.4.2-8 List of SI-1ALM Data Items

Data item Data item name Entry permitted or not (*1) Range Default
MODE Block mode x None O/S (AUT)
BSTS Block status - None NR
ALRM Alarm status - None NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status - None 0
AF Alarm detection specification - None 0
AOFS Alarm inhibition - None 0
RAW Raw answerback input signal data - 0, 1 0
RV Answerback input median - 0, 2 0
PV Post answerback-process output value Δ 0, 2 0
ONST Delay time ON x 0 to 120 seconds 0
OFST Delay time OFF x 0 to 120 seconds 0
ONPT Elapse time ON - 0 to 120 seconds 0
OFPT Elapse time OFF - 0 to 120 seconds 0
SIMM Simulation switch x 0, 1 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
SAID System application ID x None 0
UAID User application ID x None 0
*1: X: Entry is permitted unconditionally
-: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted during CAL

Non-Regular Operations of SI-1ALM

This section describes the non-regular operations of SI-1ALM. Possible cases for non-regular operation are as
follows:
• Initial start of FCS
• Recovery from the out of service (O/S) mode or an online maintenance
• Calibration (CAL) mode
• Simulation (SIM) mode

Operation on FCS Initial Start

On initial start of FCS, RV and PV are generated according to the value of the discrete signal that is connected
to the answerback input terminal of SI-1ALM. During the initial start, delaying of the answerback input signal
by using the delay timer does not work.
Thereafter, SI-1ALM enters normal operation.

Operation on Recovery From the Out of Service (O/S) Mode or an

Online Maintenance
On Recovery from the out of service (O/S) mode or an online maintenance, RV and PV are generated
according to the value of the discrete input that is connected to the answerback input terminal of SI-1ALM.
During the initial start, delaying of the answerback input signal by using the delay timer does not work.
Thereafter, SI-1ALM enters normal operation.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.4.2 Switch Instrument Block with 1 Input Discrete-status Alarm Page 8 of 8

Operation During Calibration Mode

During calibration mode, the alarm status is NR (normal status). A value according to the PV value is output
from the OUT terminal. A value of “0” is output from the SUB terminal.
When calibration mode is released, SI-1ALM resumes normal operation.

Operation During Simulation Mode (SIM)

During simulation mode, RV is generated according to the value of the discrete signal that is connected to the
answerback input terminal of SI-1ALM while PV retains the previous value. The alarm status is NR (normal
status). The outputs on the OUT and SUB terminals are not produced during simulation mode.
When simulation mode is released, SI-1ALM starts normal operation.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.5 Timer Block (TM) Page 1 of 9

2.5 Timer Block (TM)

The Timer Block (TM) is used to measure time in the unit of seconds or minutes.

Timer Block (TM)

▼ Connection
The Timer Block (TM) is a function block which measures time in the unit of seconds or minutes. In
addition to the basic elapsed time measuring function, the block includes the preset timer function which
notifies the time-up after a specified amount of time has elapsed, the function which performs the periodic
action, and the function which manipulates the status based on the action signals specified in the output
terminals.
The figure below is a function block diagram of the Timer Block (TM).

Figure 2.5-1 Function Block Diagram of the Timer Block (TM)

The table below lists the connection methods and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the
Timer Block (TM).
Table 2.5-1 Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of the Timer Block
(TM)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O
terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Output
OUT x x x x
terminal
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available

Operations such as the timer start or stop can be performed from the sequence control block, calculation
block, and operation and monitoring functions. The block status which indicates an operating status can
also be referenced from other function blocks.
Status manipulation is the only connection method from the OUT terminal of the Timer Block (TM). Thus,
the Timer Block (TM) manipulates the status according to the action signals specified in the OUT
terminals. The logical value of the Timer Block (TM) becomes true when the preset timer function is in
time-up status (block status: CTUP).
The figure below shows an example of connection between the Timer Block (TM) and other sequence
control block.

Figure 2.5-2 Connection Example of Timer Block (TM) and Other Sequence Control Block

Every time the Timer Block (TM) with the tag name TM001 expires, the Software Counter Block (CTS) with
the tag name COUNT01 is increased by one count.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.5 Timer Block (TM) Page 2 of 9

Process Timing
The process timing of Timer block is only based on periodical start period. The periodic start period is
based on high-speed scan period, medium-speed scan period (*1) and basic scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

Set Parameter
▼ Timer Property
The following describes the set parameters of the Timer Block (TM).
• Preset time setpoint value (PH)
0 to 100000 (second or minute)
• Pre-alarm setpoint value (DL)
PL to PH
The PL is the low-limit value (fixed at 0) of the timer elapsed time (PV).
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to set the unit for the preset time setpoint.
• Timer Property
Select from “Second timer” or “Minute timer.”
Default is “Second timer.”

Action Commands for the Timer Block (TM)

Action commands can be given to the Timer Block (TM) from the operation and monitoring functions,
other sequence control blocks, or calculation block.

Action Commands from the Operation and Monitoring Functions

Action commands can be given to the Timer Block (TM) by pressing the softkeys listed below.
• STOP
Timer stop command
• START
Timer start command
• CONTINUE
Restart command
• PAUS
Pause command

Action Commands from Sequence Control Blocks and Calculation

Blocks (CALCU, CALCU-C)
The table below describes the specified format of action signals and action description when giving action
commands to the Timer Block (TM) from sequence control blocks and the calculation block.
Table 2.5-2 Specified Format of Action Signals and Action Description

Action signal description column Y/N

Action description
Output signal Action specification True/False
Y/True Timer stop command
STOP
N/False Disable
Y/True Timer start command

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.5 Timer Block (TM) Page 3 of 9

START N/False Timer stop command (*1)

Y/True Restart command
RSTR
Element symbol.OP N/False Disable
Y/True Pause command
WAIT
N/False Restart command (*1)
*1: An action for “N” is enabled only with the sequence table.
An action for “False” is enabled only with the logic chart.

Action of the Timer Block

When the Timer Block receives an action command from the operation and monitoring functions or other
function blocks, the block status changes according to the given command. There exist four types of basic
actions for the Timer Block: Start, Stop, Pause, and Restart.
The figure below shows the relationship between the timer elapsed time (PV) and the block status, and
each basic action.

Figure 2.5-3 Basic Actions of the Timer Block (TM)

Timer Start Action

When the Timer Block (TM) receives the timer start command, it starts the counting action upon resetting
(PV=0) the timer elapsed time (PV). The block status of the Timer Block (TM) changes to “counting” (RUN-
NR). The DV indicates the timer’s remaining time (DV=PH-PV).
The figure below shows the changes in the timer elapsed time (PV) by the timer start command.

Figure 2.5-4 Timer Elapsed Time (PV) by Timer Start Command

The following describes an example of the timer start specified in the action signal column of the
sequence table.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.5 Timer Block (TM) Page 4 of 9

Figure 2.5-5 An example of specifying the timer start in the action signal column of the sequence table

Timer Stop Action

When the Timer Block (TM) receives the timer stop command, it stops the counting action while holding
the timer elapsed time (PV). The block status of the Timer Block (TM) changes to stop status (STOP).
The figure below shows the changes in the timer elapsed time (PV) by the timer stop command.

Figure 2.5-6 Timer Elapsed Time (PV) by Timer Stop Command

The following describes an example of specifying the timer stop in the action signal column of the
sequence table.

Figure 2.5-7 An example of specifying the timer stop in the action signal column of the sequence table

Timer Pause Action

When the Timer Block (TM) receives the pause command, the counting action is halted. During the pause,
the Timer Block (TM) holds the timer elapsed time (PV) or other data. As for the block status, the pause
status (PAUS) is newly added while the statuses such as counting (RUN), pre-alarm status (PALM), time-
up status (CTUP), or stop status (STOP) are held. However, the status will be changed if the preset time
setpoint value (PH), pre-alarm setpoint value (DL), or the timer elapsed time (PV) is changed during the
pause.
The following describes an example of specifying the timer pause in the action signal column of the
sequence table.

Figure 2.5-8 An example of specifying the timer pause in the action signal column of the sequence
table

Timer Restart Action

When the Timer Block (TM) in pause status receives the restart command, the counting action is
restarted. The Timer Block (TM) is released from the pause status (PAUS), and returns to the previous
block status that has been held.
The pause status (PAUS) is released when it receives the restart command. However, the elapsed time
(PV) is updated every scan period of the Timer Block (TM) itself.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.5 Timer Block (TM) Page 5 of 9

Figure 2.5-9 Pause/Restart Action of Timer

The following describes an example of specifying the timer restart in the action signal column of the
sequence table.

Figure 2.5-10 An example of specifying the timer restart in the action signal column of the sequence
table

Preset Timer
The preset timer function notifies that the specified amount of time has elapsed. The content of the
notification includes the time-up status (CTUP) based on the preset time setpoint (PH) and the pre-alarm
status (PALM) which gives prior notices before reaching the preset time.
If one of the following conditions is satisfied for the timer’s remaining time (DV=PH-PV) when the block
status is counting (RUN), the pre-alarm status (PALM) or time-up status becomes true.
• 0<DV≤DL
Pre-alarm status (PALM)
• DV=0
Time-up status (CTUP)
However, if the pre-alarm setpoint value (DL) is 0, the pre-alarm status (PALM) will not occur.
The timer block actions and the block statuses are illustrated as follows.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.5 Timer Block (TM) Page 6 of 9

Figure 2.5-11 Block Status of the Timer Block (TM)

Hold Pre-Alarm after Time-Up: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2

▼ TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after CTUP
The pre-alarm status (PALM) of a timer or counter block can be held even when the block reaches time-up
status (CTUP). This option can be set on the FCS properties sheet by checking the option of [TM/CTS/CTP
blocks hold PALM after CTUP] on the Constant tab. If this option is not checked, the pre-alarm status
(PALM) will be reset when the block reaches time-up status (CTUP). By default, this option is not checked.
If the option of [TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after CTUP] is checked, the block status will change
according to the timer’s remaining time (DV=PH-PV) and shown as follows:
• 0<DV DL: Pre-alarm status (PALM)
• DV 0: Time-up status (CTUP) and Pre-alarm status (PALM)
The figure below shows the relationship between Timer Block Status and counting action of the Timer
Block.

Figure 2.5-12 Timer Block Status with Option of Hold PALM in CTUP Status: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2

TIP Inside the FCS, the block status of TM/CTS/CTP blocks is expressed in 32 bits.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.5 Timer Block (TM) Page 7 of 9

Figure 2.5-13 Internal Bit Image for Block Status of TM/CTS/CTP Blocks: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2

If the check box of [TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after CTUP] is checked, the PALM hold bit
synchronizes with the CTUP bit (ON/OFF). The value of the data item [@BSTS] differs between the
checked [TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after CTUP] and the unchecked [TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold
PALM after CTUP] when the PALM hold bit is ON. If you refer to the block status from a Graphic
modifier conditional formula, a SEBOL program, or a supervisory computer, use the individual bit such
as the CTUP bit or the alphanumeric data BSTS, or uncheck the [TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after
CTUP] box.
After a snapshot-save in the test function, if you change the checkbox [TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM
after CTUP] and snapshot-load, the setting in the checkbox [TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after CTUP]
and the bit image indicating the block status become inconsistent.
Operation 1
1. Check the check box of [TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after CTUP]. After that, start the FCS/FCS
simulator.
2. TM/CTS/CTP blocks go into CTUP status.
3. Snapshot-save.
4. Uncheck the [TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after CTUP]. After that, restart the FCS/FCS simulator.
5. Snapshot-load the data saved in the step 3.
After the step 5, the setting of the checkbox and the bit image indicating the block status become
inconsistent. Here, if the instrument faceplate for the TM/CTS/CTP is displayed on HIS, the block
status field is blank.
The setting of the checkbox and the bit image become consistent, and the block status is displayed
normally if:
• For TM/CTP
The next scan starts, or RUN/STOP is ordered.
• For CTS
One of PH/DL/PV is changed, or ACT. ON is executed in a sequence table or a logic chart.
Operation 2
1. Uncheck the check box of [TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after CTUP]. After that, start the FCS/FCS
simulator.
2. TM/CTS/CTP blocks go into CTUP status.
3. Snapshot-save.
4. Check the [TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after CTUP]. After that, restart the FCS/FCS simulator.
5. Snapshot-load the data saved in the step 3.
After the step 5, the setting of the checkbox and the bit image indicating the block status become
inconsistent. But [CTUP] is displayed in the block status field for TM/CTS/CTP.
The setting of the checkbox and the bit image become consistent if:
• For TM/CTP
The next scan starts, or RUN/STOP is ordered.
• For CTS
One of PH/DL/PV is changed, or ACT. ON is executed in a sequence table or a logic chart.

Periodic Action
▼ Periodic Action
When timer block reaches time-up status (CTUP), the timer block can be restarted to count again.
This periodic action can be set using the Function Block Detail Builder.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.5 Timer Block (TM) Page 8 of 9

Periodic Action: Select from “Yes” or “No.”

The default is “No.”
The action of the timer is different according to presence specified of the periodic action.

When Periodic Action Specification is “No”

When the time-up status becomes true, the elapsed time update is stopped. The PV=PH and DV=0 status
is therefore retained.
When the time-up status (CTUP) is true, the block status and the timer elapsed time (PV) will be held
even if the preset time setpoint (PH) is changed. A stop command or start command must be given
remotely in order to cancel the time-up status.

When Periodic Action Specification is “Yes”

The time-up status (CTUP) becomes true if PV≥PH and DV≤0. However, when the timing increment is
in “seconds,” the timer elapsed time (PV) is set to 1 second (when the scan period is 1 second) at the
next scanning to restart the counting action. The block status will be the status caused when PV=1. The
figure below shows the changes in the timer elapsed time (PV) when the periodic action specification
is “Yes.”

Figure 2.5-14 Change in Timer Elapsed Time (PV) When Preset Time Setpoint (PH) is 8 Seconds

Status Manipulation from the Timer Block (TM)

When the action signal by sequence connection is specified to the OUT terminal of the time block, the
Timer Block (TM) executes the status manipulation corresponding to the existing block status.
• CTUP and NOT PAUS
Executes status manipulation for the logical value True.
• NR and NOT PAUS, or PALM and NOT PAUS
Executes status manipulation for the logical value False.
• STOP or PAUS
Disable

Data Items – TM
The table below shows the data items of the Timer Block (TM):
Table 2.5-3 Data Items of the Timer Block (TM)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
BSTS Block status ----- STOP
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.5 Timer Block (TM) Page 9 of 9

AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- 0

AF Alarm detection ----- 0
AOFS Alarm inhibition ----- 0
PV Elapsed time x PL to PH 0
PH Preset time setpoint value x 0 to 100000 100000
DV Remaining time -PL to PH PH
DL Pre-alarm setpoint value x PL to PH PL
PL PV scale low limit Fixed at 0. 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

SEE For more information about valid block modes of the timer block, refer to:
ALSO 2.1.2, "Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks"

Block Status of Timer Block (TM)

Table 2.5-4 Block Status of Timer Block (TM)

Block Status
Level Description
Symbol Name
3 PAUS Pause Timer is paused
PALM Pre-Alarm Timer is running and 0<DV<=DL
2 CTUP Time Up Timer is running and DV = 0
NR Normal Timer is running and DV > DL
RUN Run Timer is running after a Start command
1
STOP Normal Timer is stopped after a Stop command

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.6 Software Counter Block (CTS) Page 1 of 4

2.6 Software Counter Block (CTS)

The Software Counter Block (CTS) is used to calculate the number of events occurred.

Software Counter Block (CTS)

▼ Connection
In addition to the basic calculating function, the CTS block includes the preset counter function which
notifies of the count-up upon calculating the specified numeric value, and the function which manipulates
the status based on the action signal specified to the output terminal.
The figure below is a function block diagram for the Software Counter Clock (CTS).

Figure 2.6-1 Function Block Diagram for the Software Counter Block (CTS)

The table below lists the connection methods and connection destinations of the I/O terminal of the
Software Counter Block (CTS).
Table 2.6-1 Connection Methods and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of the Software
Counter Block (CTS)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O
terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Output
OUT x x x x
terminal
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available

The calculating operation of the software counter can be performed from other function blocks such as
the sequence control block or the calculation block.
The figure below shows a connection example of Software Counter Block (CTS). In this example, the
CALCU block sends a one-shot start command to CTS for counting.

Figure 2.6-2 Example of Using General-Purpose Calculation Block (CALCU)

Process Timing
The process timing of CTS block is only based on one-shot start.

Set Parameter
The set parameters of the Software Counter Block (CTS) are:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.6 Software Counter Block (CTS) Page 2 of 4

• Preset setpoint (PH)

0 to 100000
• Pre-alarm setpoint (DL)
PL to PH
The PL is the low-limit value (fixed at 0) of the timer elapsed time (PV).

Operation of the Software Counter Block (CTS)

The Software Counter Block (CTS) updates the count value (PV) upon receiving the counter operation
command. It also changes the block status.
The figure below shows the basic operation of the Software Counter Block (CTS).

Figure 2.6-3 Basic Operation of the Software Counter Block (CTS)

Software Counter Update Action

Every time the Software Counter Block (CTS) receives the counter operation command, the count value
(PV) is added by 1. If the block status is in stop status (STOP) when the counter operation command is
received, the block status of the Software Counter Block (CTS) changes to “counting” (RUN-NR). The
count value (PV) is also reset (PV=1).
The following describes an example of specifying the operation of the software counter in the action signal
column of the sequence table.

Figure 2.6-4 An example of specifying the operation of the software counter in the action signal
column of the sequence table

Software Counter Stop Action

When the Software Counter Block (CTS) receives the counter stop command, it stops its calculating action
while holding the count value (PV). The block status of the Software Counter Block (CTS) changes to the
stop status (STOP).
The following describes an example of specifying the software counter stop in the action signal column of
the sequence table.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.6 Software Counter Block (CTS) Page 3 of 4

Figure 2.6-5 An example of specifying the software counter stop in the action signal column of the
sequence table

Preset Counter Function

The preset counter function notifies that the count value (PV) has reached the specified count number.
The content of notification includes the count-up status (CTUP) based on the preset setpoint (PH), and the
pre-alarm status (PALM) which gives prior notices before reaching the preset setpoint (PH).
When the remaining count value (DV=PH-PV) satisfies the following conditions while the block status is in
counting (RUN), the pre-alarm status (PALM) or the count-up status (CTUP) will be as follows:
• When 0<DV≤DL
Pre-alarm status (PALM)
• When DV≤0
Count-up status (CTUP)
Since the pre-alarm status (PALM) and the count-up status (CTUP) can not become true simultaneously,
the pre-alarm status (PALM) is canceled when DV=0, shifting to the count-up status (CTUP). Although the
count value (PV) continues to be updated even after the status shifts to the count-up, the count value
(PV) is reset when it reaches 100000. However, the block status at count-up is held as count-up status
(CTUP).
In order to cancel the count-up status (CTUP), the count value (PV) must be set remotely or a stop
command must be given. Also, when the pre-alarm setpoint (DL) is set to 0, the pre-alarm status (PALM)
will not occur.

Hold Pre-Alarm after Count-Up: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2

▼ TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after CTUP
The pre-alarm status (PALM) of a counter block can be held even when the block reaches count-up status
(CTUP). This option can be set on the FCS properties sheet by checking the option of [TM/CTS/CTP blocks
hold PALM after CTUP] on the Constant tab. If this option is not checked, the pre-alarm status (PALM) s
will be reset when the block reaches count-up status (CTUP). By default, this option is not checked.
If the option of [TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after CTUP] is checked, the block status will change
according to the remaining count value (DV=PH-PV) and shown as follows:
• 0<DV≤DL
Pre-alarm status (PALM)
• DV≤0
Count-up status (CTUP) and Pre-alarm status (PALM)

SEE For more information about the behavior in Count-up complete (CTUP) status with the checked
ALSO [TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after CTUP], refer to:
" Hold Pre-Alarm after Time-Up: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2" in " Preset Timer" in 2.5, "Timer
Block (TM)"

Status Manipulation from the Software Counter Block (CTS)

When the action signal by sequence connection is specified to the output terminal of the Software Counter
Block (CTS), the status manipulation is performed based on the block status.
• CTUP

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.6 Software Counter Block (CTS) Page 4 of 4

Executes status manipulation for the logical value True.

• NR or PALM
Executes status manipulation for the logical value False.
• STOP
Disable

Data Items – CTS

Table 2.6-2 Data Items of the Software Counter Block (CTS)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
BSTS Block status ----- STOP
PV Count value x 0 to 100000 0
PH Preset setpoint x 0 to 100000 100000
DV Remaining count value -PL to PH PH
DL Pre-alarm setpoint x PL to PH PL
PL PV scale low limit Fixed at 0. 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

SEE For more information about valid block modes of the CTS block, refer to:
ALSO 2.1.2, "Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks"

Block Status of Software Counter Block (CTS)

Table 2.6-3 Block Status of Software Counter Block (CTS)

Block Status
Level Description
Symbol Name
NR Normal Counter is running and DV > DL
2 PALM Pre-Alarm Counter is running and 0<DV<=DL
CTUP Count Up Counter is running and DV <= 0
RUN Run Counter is running after a Start command
1
STOP Normal Counter is stopped after a Stop command

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.7 Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) Page 1 of 7

2.7 Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP)

The Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) is used to count the number of processes, which are expressed
in the form of pulse signals.

Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP)

▼ Connection
The Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) is a function block that counts the number of processes, which
are expressed in the form of pulse signals. In addition to the basic counting function, it also includes the
preset counter function, which indicates the count-up state when the specified number has been counted,
and a function that manipulates the status based on the action signal specified at the output terminal.
The following is a function block diagram of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP).

Figure 2.7-1 Function Block Diagram of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP)

The table below lists connection methods and destinations for the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP).
Table 2.7-1 Connection Methods and Destinations for the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) I/O
Terminals

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O
terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Input
IN x x
terminal
Output
OUT x x x x
terminal
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available

Operations such as start or stop of the pulse counter can be performed from other function blocks such as
the sequence control block or the calculation block, as well as from the operation and monitoring
functions. The block status that indicates the operating status can be referenced from other function
blocks.
The figure below shows a signal connection example from the pulse input module.

Figure 2.7-2 Example of the Signal Connection from the Pulse Input Module

SEE For more information about the types of alarm processing possible for the CTP block, refer to:
ALSO 2.1.1, "Alarm Processing of Sequence Control Blocks"
For more information about alarm processing, refer to:

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.7 Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) Page 2 of 7

5., “Alarm Processing – FCS” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

Process Timing
The process timing of Timer block is only based on periodical start period. The periodic start period is
based on high-speed scan period, medium-speed scan period (*1) and basic scan period.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

Set Parameters - CTP

The following are the set parameters of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTS).
• Preset setpoint (PH)
0 to 100000
• Pre-alarm setpoint (DL)
PL to PH
The PL is the low-limit value (fixed at 0) of the timer elapsed time (PV).

Action Command of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block

(CTP)
The action command can be issued to the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) from the operation and
monitoring functions, other sequence control block or calculation block.

Action Command from the Operation and Monitoring Functions

Pressing a button listed below can issue an action command to the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP).
• STOP
Counter stop command
• START
Counter start command
• CONTINUE
Restart command
• PAUS
Pause command

Action Command from Other Sequence Control Block or

Calculation Block
The table below lists the description format and action description of the action signals when issuing the
action command to the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) from other sequence control block or
calculation block.
Table 2.7-2 Description Format and Action Description of Action Signals

Action signal description column Y/N

Action description
Action/Output signal Action specification True/False

Y/True Pulse input counter stop command

STOP
N/False Invalid
Y/True Pulse input counter start command
START
N/False Pulse input counter stop command (*1)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.7 Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) Page 3 of 7

Y/True Restart command

RSTR
N/False Invalid
Element symbol.OP
Y/True Pause command
WAIT
N/False Restart command (*1)
*1: Actions for “N” are valid only for the sequence table.
Actions for “False” are valid only for the logic chart.

Action of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP)

The Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) is provided with an action command from the operation and
monitoring functions or other function block, and holds block status corresponding to the command. The
basic actions of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) include four actions: the update action, stop
action, pause action and restart action.
The following describes the relationship between the count value (PV) and the block status along with the
basic action.

Pulse Train Counter Update Action

When the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) receives the counter start command, it begins counting
after resetting the count value (PV=0). When the counter start command is received, the block status
becomes the during counting status (RUN-NR). While counting, it reads the pulse input from the input
terminal during each scan period, and updates the count value (PV) by adding the pulse count that is
increased from the previous period. When the data status of input signals is “invalid (BAD)” or “I/O not
ready (NRDY),” the status is recognized as faulty and the count value (PV) is not updated.
The following shows an example of specifying the start of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) in the
action signal column of the sequence table.

Figure 2.7-3 An example of specifying the start of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) in the
action signal column of the sequence table

Pulse Train Counter Stop Action

When the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) receives the stop command for the counter, it stops the
counting operation while holding the count value (PV). The block status becomes the stop status (STOP).
The following shows an example of specifying the stop of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) in the
action signal column of the sequence table.

Figure 2.7-4 An example of specifying the stop of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) in the
action signal column of the sequence table

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.7 Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) Page 4 of 7

Figure 2.7-5 Basic Actions of the Pulse Train Counter

Pulse Train Counter Pause Action

When the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) receives the pause command, it pauses the counting
operation. At this time, the data when the pause was issued is held as the count value (PV). The pause
status (PAUS) is added in addition to the currently held block status, which is one of the counting (RUN),
pre-alarm (PALM), normal (NR), time-up (CTUP) and stop (STOP) statuses.
The following shows an example of specifying the pause of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) in
the action signal column of the sequence table.

Figure 2.7-6 An example of specifying the pause of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) in the
action signal column of the sequence table

Pulse Train Counter Restart Action

When the pausing Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) receives the restart command, it resumes the
counter operation. The Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) is released from the pause status (PAUS)
and returns to the block status that was originally held. If the original block status was the counting status
(RUN), count updating resumes from the counter value that was held then.
The pause status (PAUS) is released at the timing when it accepts a restart command. However, the count
value (PV) update timing differs, depending on the scan period of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block
(CTP) itself.
The following shows an example of specifying the restart of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) in
the action signal column of the sequence table.

Figure 2.7-7 An example of specifying the restart of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) in the
action signal column of the sequence table

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.7 Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) Page 5 of 7

Figure 2.7-8 Pause and Restart Actions

Preset Counter Function of Pulse Counter

The preset counter function indicates that the count value (PV) has reached the specified count. The
content of the notification could be the count-up status (CTUP) based on the preset setpoint (PH) or the
pre-alarm status (PALM), which indicates prior to reaching the preset setpoint (PH).
When the remaining count value (DV=PH-PV) satisfies the following conditions while the block status is in
counting (RUN), the pre-alarm status (PALM) or the count-up status (CTUP) will be as follows:
• 0<DV≤DL
Pre-alarm status (PALM)
• DV≤0
Count-up status (CTUP)
Since the pre-alarm status (PALM) and count-up status (CTUP) can not become true simultaneously, the
pre-alarm status (PALM) is canceled when DV=0, and the status shifts to the count-up (CTUP) status.
Although updating of the count value (PV) continue even after the status shifts to count-up status, the
count value (PV) is reset when it reaches 100,000 and counting continues. However, the block status is
held at the count-up status (CTUP) when it is counted.
In order to cancel the count-up status, it is necessary to set the count value (PV) externally or to issue a
stop command. Also, when the pre-alarm setpoint (DL) is set to 0, the pre-alarm status (PALM) will not
occur.

Hold Pre-Alarm after Count-Up: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2

▼ TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after CTUP
The pre-alarm status (PALM) of a counter block can be held even when the block reaches count-up status
(CTUP). This option can be set on the FCS properties sheet by checking the option of [TM/CTS/CTP blocks
hold PALM after CTUP] on the Constant tab. If this option is not checked, the pre-alarm status (PALM) s
will be reset when the block reaches count-up status (CTUP). By default, this option is not checked.
If the option of [TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after CTUP] is checked, the block status will change
according to the remaining count value (DV=PH-PV) and shown as follows:
• 0<DV≤DL
Pre-alarm status (PALM)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.7 Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) Page 6 of 7

• DV≤0
Count-up status (CTUP) and Pre-alarm status (PALM)

SEE For more information about the behavior in Count-up complete (CTUP) status with the checked
ALSO [TM/CTS/CTP blocks hold PALM after CTUP], refer to:
" Hold Pre-Alarm after Time-Up: FFCS Series/KFCS2/LFCS2" in " Preset Timer" in 2.5, "Timer
Block (TM)"

Status Manipulation from the Pulse Train Input Counter

Block (CTP)
When the action signal is specified via sequence connection to the OUT terminal of the Pulse Train Input
Counter Block (CTP), the status is manipulated based on the block status.
• CTUP and NOT PAUS
Execute status manipulation for true logical value.
• NR and NOT PAUS, or PALM and NOT PAUS
Execute status manipulation for false logical value.
• STOP or PAUS
Invalid
If an error occurs during status manipulation, the alarm status of the Pulse Train Input Counter Block
(CTP) becomes the connection failure status (CNF). This is recovered when either the cause of alarm is
removed during the status manipulation, or the pulse counter is stopped or paused.

Data Items – CTP

Table 2.7-3 Data Items of the Pulse Counter Block (CTP)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
BSTS Block status ----- NR
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- 0
AF Alarm detection ----- 0
AOFS Alarm inhibition ----- 0
PV Count value x 0 to 100000 0
PH Preset setpoint x 0 to 100000 100000
DV Remaining count value -PL to PH PH
DL Pre-alarm setpoint x PL to PH PL
PL PV scale low limit Fixed at 0. 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

SEE For more information about a list of valid block modes of the CTP block, refer to:
ALSO 2.1.2, "Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.7 Pulse Train Input Counter Block (CTP) Page 7 of 7

Block Status of Pulse train Input Counter Block (CTP)

Table 2.7-4 Block Status of Pulse train Input Counter Block (CTP)

Block Status
Level Description
Symbol Name
3 PAUS Pause Counter is paused
CTUP Count Up Counter is running and DV <= 0
2 PALM Pre-Alarm Counter is running and 0<DV<=DL
NR Normal Counter is running and DV>DL
RUN Run Counter is running after a Start command
1
STOP Normal Counter is stopped after a Stop command

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.8 Code Input Block (CI) Page 1 of 4

2.8 Code Input Block (CI)

The CI block is used to read the contact input or internal switch as a binary code or binary coded decimal
and display the integer value indicated by the code as the input code value.

Code Input Block (CI)

▼ Connection
The CI block is a function block that convert the digital input signal into code value (PV). The conversion of
digital input signals to input code values (PV) includes “No-conversion” in which the signal pattern is
interpreted as is as a binary number, and “BCD conversion” in which it is interpreted as a BCD (binary
coded decimal) code.
The following is a function block diagram of the Code Input Block (CI).

Figure 2.8-1 Function Block Diagram of Code Input Block (CI)

The table below lists connection methods and destinations for the Code Input Block (CI).
Table 2.8-1 Connection Methods and Destinations for Code Input Block (CI) I/O terminals

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O
terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Input
IN x x x
terminal
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available

The CI block input processing and code conversion are performed as one-shot execution from other
function blocks such as a sequence control block.
The following describes an example of specifying the code input block one-shot execution in the action
signal column of the sequence table.

Figure 2.8-2 An example of specifying the code input block one-shot execution in the action signal
column of the sequence table

Process Timing
The process timing of CI block is only based on one-shot start.

Number of Input Signals

▼ Number of Bits Input
The Code Input Block (CI) inputs the contact signals that continue for the number of input signal points
from the element of the input destination specified in the IN terminal. The first element corresponds to the
most significant digit. If there is a data error even at one point in the input signal, the input code value (PV)
is handled as faulty data. When an input error occurs, the previous value is held for the input code value

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.8 Code Input Block (CI) Page 2 of 4

(PV).
The input signal points are set by the Function Block Detail Builder.
Number of Bits Input: 0 to 18 points
Up to 16 points in the case of “no conversion”
Default is 0.

Bit Inversion
▼ Bit Inversion
The bit inversion of the Code Input Block (CI) inverses the ON/OFF status of the input digital signals. If the
bit inversion is specified as ‘’Non-reversed,’’ the ON/OFF status will not be inversed.
The bit inversion is set by the Function Block Detail Builder.
Bit Inversion: Select from “No” or “Yes.”
Default is “No.”

Encoding
▼ Code Conversion
The encoding of the Code Input Block (CI) interprets the input digital signal as a code and converts it into
an integer value. The converted integer value becomes the input code value (PV). The input code value
(PV) is held until the Code Input Block (CI) starts for the next time via the code input read command.
There exist two methods for encoding the digital signals:
• “No conversion,” which interprets the contact signal patterns as binary numbers.
• “BCD conversion,” which interprets the contact digital patterns as binary coded decimal (BCD) codes.
The figure below shows examples of encoding when “no conversion” and “BCD conversion” are specified.

Figure 2.8-3 Encoding When “No Conversion” and “BCD Conversion” are Specified

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.8 Code Input Block (CI) Page 3 of 4

When 6 points from %Z011101 are specified for CI001, %Z011101 to%Z011106 become the code input
data and %Z011101 is always the most significant bit.
Assuming that current ON/OFF statuses of %Z011101 to %Z011106 are as shown in the figure above, PV
(CI001) =15 when the BCD conversion is specified, and PV (CI001) =21 when the non conversion is
specified.
In the above examples, when the BCD conversion is specified, the upper 2 bits (%Z011101, 011102)
represent the ones places of 10, and the lower 4 bits (%Z011103 to 6) does the zeros places of 10.
For the BCD conversion, when the input signal patterns are meaningless as BCD code, the block status is
set to the input code error (ERR). This “meaningless pattern as BCD code” refers to the input signal pattern
indicating a value other than 0 to 9.
The figure below shows examples of when the block status is in the normal status (NR), and when it is
meaningless.

Figure 2.8-4 BCD Code Examples

The encoding function is set by the Function Block Detail Builder.

Code conversion: Select from “No” and “BCD.”
“No” is binary input, “BCD” is binary coded decimal input.
Default is “No.”

Input Data Status Testing Function

The input data status testing function investigates the conditions listed below for the encoded input code
value (PV), and determines the block status.
The following lists the conditions for the input code value (PV) for determining the block status.
• 0≤PV<PH-DL
Normal status (NR)
• PH-DL≤PV<PH
Low limit alarm status (LO)
• PV≥PH
High limit alarm status (HI)
PH: Input high limit setpoint
DL: Low limit alarm status setting range
The figure below shows the graphed conditions of the input code value (PV).

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.8 Code Input Block (CI) Page 4 of 4

Figure 2.8-5 Relationship Between Input Code Value (PV) and Block Status

The input data status testing is not performed if an input code error has occurred.

Data Items – CI
Table 2.8-2 Data Items of Code Input Block (CI)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
BSTS Block status ----- NR
PV Input code value 0 to 65535 PL
RAW Raw input data ----- -----
PH High - limit alarm setpoint x 0 to 65535 65535
DV PH – PV -PL to PH PH
DL LO width x 0 to 65535 0
PL PV scale low limit Fixed at 0. 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

SEE For more information about valid block modes of the CI block, refer to:
ALSO 2.1.2, "Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks"

Block Status of Code Input Block (CI)

Table 2.8-3 Block Status of Code Input Block (CI)

Block Status
Level Description
Symbol Name
3 ERR Code Error Invalid BCD code pattern
NR Normal 0 < PV < PH-DL
2 LO Low PH-DL =< PV < PH
HI High PV >= PH

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.9 Code Output Block (CO) Page 1 of 4

2.9 Code Output Block (CO)

The Code Output Block (CO) is used to convert the integer value which is set as the setting code value (PV)
from the operation and monitoring functions or other function block into the code pattern for output to the
contact output or internal switch, etc.

Code Output Block (CO)

▼ Connection
The Code Output Block (CO) is a function block that converts the integer value which is set as the setting
code value (PV). Converting of the setting code value (PV) has “no conversion,” which outputs the integer
value in binary, and “BCD conversion,” which outputs after converting into binary coded decimal (BCD)
options.
The following is a function block diagram of the Code Output Block (CO).

Figure 2.9-1 Function Block Diagram of the Code Output Block (CO)

The table below lists connection methods and destinations for the Code Output Block (CO) I/O terminals.
Table 2.9-1 Connection Methods and Destinations for the Code Output Block (CO) I/O Terminals

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Output
OUT x Δ x x
terminal
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection available only when connecting to switch blocks (SW-33, SW-91)

The conversion of a CO block setting code value (PV) to a code are performed as one-shot execution from
other function blocks such as the sequence control block.
The following describes an example of specifying the code output block one-shot execution in the action
signal column of the sequence table.

Figure 2.9-2 An example of specifying the code output block one-shot execution in the action signal
column of the sequence table

Process Timing
The process timing of CO block is only based on one-shot start.

Number of Output Signal

▼ Number of Bits Output
The output signal points of the Code Output Block (CO) are set by the Function Block Detail Builder.
Number of Bits Output: 0 to 18 points
Up to 16 points in the case of “no conversion.”

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.9 Code Output Block (CO) Page 2 of 4

Default is 0.

Encoding
▼ Code Conversion
The encoding function of the Code Output Block (CO) converts the integer value set as the setting code value
(PV) into bit patterns.
There exist two methods for converting an integer value into bit patterns:
• “No conversion,” converts to binary patterns.
• “BCD conversion,” converts the value into binary coded decimal (BCD) patterns.
The figure below shows examples of encoding when “no conversion” and “BCD conversion” are specified.

Figure 2.9-3 Encoding When “Non Conversion” and “BCD Conversion” are Specified

When six points from %SW0500 are specified for CO001, %SW0500 to %SW0505 will be subject to the code
output. If the code conversion is specified as “No Conversion” and code output is performed with the settings
of CO0001 and PV=21, the ON/OFF statuses of the %SW0500 to %SW0505 will be as the above left figure
while for “BCD Conversion,” the statuses of the switches will be as the above right figure.
The encoding function is set by the Function Block Detail Builder.
• Code Conversion
Select from “No” and “BCD.”
“No” yields binary output, “BCD” yields binary coded decimal output.
Default is “No.”

Bit Inversion
▼ Bit Inversion
The bit inversion of the Code Output Block (CO) inverses the ON/OFF status of the signals to be output. If the
bit inversion is specified as “No,” the ON/OFF status will not be inversed.
The bit inversion is set by the Function Block Detail Builder.
Bit Inversion: Select from “No” or “Yes.”
Default is “No.”

Set Data Status Testing Function

The set data status testing function investigates the conditions listed below for the set code value (PV), and
determines the block status.
The following lists the conditions for the set code value (PV) for determining the block status.
• 0≤PV<PH-DL
Normal status (NR)
• PH-DL≤PV<PH
Low limit alarm status (LO)
• PV≥PH

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.9 Code Output Block (CO) Page 3 of 4

High limit alarm status (HI)

PH: Alarm high limit value
DL: Low limit alarm status (LO) setting range
The figure below shows the graphed conditions of the set code value (PV).

Figure 2.9-4 Relationship between Set Code Value (PV) and Block Status

Signal Output Function

The signal output function outputs bit patterns to the continuous elements of the output destination for the
number of output signal points, starting with the element specified in the OUT terminal.
When the output destination is the contact output, if there exists even one output with a hardware failure, the
entire signal will not be output. When the hardware failure occurs, the data status of the set code value (PV)
becomes the output fail status (PTPF), and the previous set code value is held as the set code value (PV).
When a value that is too large to express with the specified output signal points is set for the set code value
(PV), only the code patterns of the available output signal points are output. This is not handled specifically as
an error.
The figures below show an example of insufficient output signal points.

Figure 2.9-5 Encoding Example for Four Output Signal Points

Data Items – CO
Table 2.9-2 Data Items of Code Output Block (CO)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- AUT
BSTS Block status ----- NR
PV Setting code value x 0 to 65535 0
PH High - limit alarm setpoint x 0 to 65535 65535
DV PH – PV -PL to PH PH
DL LO width x 0 to 65535 0
PL PV scale low limit Fixed at 0. 0

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.9 Code Output Block (CO) Page 4 of 4

OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0

UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

SEE For more information about valid block modes of the CO block, refer to:
ALSO 2.1.2, "Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks"

Block Status of Code Output Block (CO)

Table 2.9-3 Block Status of Code Output Block (CO)

Block Status
Level Description
Symbol Name
NR Normal 0 =< PV < PH-DL
2 LO Low PH-DL =< PV < PH
HI High PV >= PH

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.10 Relational Expression Block (RL) Page 1 of 3

2.10 Relational Expression Block (RL)

The Relational Expression Block (RL) is used to judge the numerical relationship or the logical product of
two data.

Relational Expression Block (RL)

▼ Relational Expression
The Relational Expression Block (RL) is executed during the condition testing process for a sequence
control block such as a sequence table, or during the condition testing process for the calculation block. It
tests for the numerical relationship or the logical product of two data, according to the relational
expression within the Relational Expression Block (RL), and returns the result of whether or not it matches
the conditions to the calling function block.
The following is a function block diagram of the Relational Expression Block (RL).

Figure 2.10-1 Function Block Diagram of Relational Expression Block (RL)

The table below lists connection methods and destinations for the Relational Expression Block (RL) I/O
terminals.
Table 2.10-1 Connection Methods and Destinations for Relational Expression Block (RL) I/O Terminals

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Q01 Data
to input x Δ x x x
Q32 terminal
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection available only when connecting to switch blocks (SW-33, SW-91)

The test objects are either two process data, or one process data and one constant data. One Relational
Expression Block (RL) can handle 16 sets of relational expressions, thus it can handle 32 individual data.
The figure below shows a connection example to another function block.

Figure 2.10-2 Connection with Another Function Block

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.10 Relational Expression Block (RL) Page 2 of 3

Process Timing
The process timing of RL block is only based on one-shot start.

Relational Expression Data

With a single set of relational expressions, either two process data or one process data and one constant
data can be judged. Other referable data such as process I/O, software I/O and function block data can
be specified as the process data. Always specify the process data on the left-hand side of the relational
expression. For the right-hand side of the relational expression, process data or constant data can be
specified. Special data such as character strings, connection data and pulse input cannot be used for the
calculation.
Constants for the constant data are set by the Function Block Detail Builder.
The following shows the relationship expression between process data and process data.
FIC101.PV: FIC102.PV

Figure 2.10-3 Relationship Expression between Process Data and Process Data

The following shows the relationship expression between process data and constant data.
FIC101.PV: 123.4

Figure 2.10-4 Relationship Expression of Process Data and Constant Data

The following shows an entry example to the condition signal column in the sequence table when testing
for RV01 > RV02 shown in the first example above.
RL0100.X01.GT -------- Y
The function block indicated by RL0100 represents the Relational Expression Block (RL).
Use the Function Block Detail Builder to pre-define the data expressed by relational expression data RV01
and RV02 as X (the first data) and Y (the second data).
X, Y: Character string of up to 34 standard width characters.
Describe the process data or a real number.
Default is blank.

Relational Expression Type

▼ Accept BAD data
When the Relational Expression Block (RL) is referenced from other function blocks for condition testing,
relational operation for the relational expression specified in X01 through X16 is performed as a one-shot
operation. There exist two types of relational expressions: the numerical comparison operation between
two data, and the logical product operation of two data. For the relational expression type, delimit the two
data with an operator and preset by each relational expression using the Function Block Detail Builder.
• Operator: Select from “CMP” and “AND”
The table below lists the operators and description of each operation.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.10 Relational Expression Block (RL) Page 3 of 3

• Numerical comparison (CMP):

Performs the numerical comparison of two data. It tests if the relationship matches the relational
expression and returns a logical value.
• Logical product (AND):
Computes logical products of two data by bit. It returns true if at least one bit satisfies the relational
expression.
The following describes an example of performing the logical product operation against two data.
%CI0100.PV & %CI0101.PV
CI0100 and CI0101 represent the Code Input Block (CI). The above example computes the logical product
of each corresponding bit of the two input code values (PV). If both corresponding bits include 1, it
returns true (1) to the calling function block.
The two data types are converted into floating point, if the relation operation type is numerical
comparison, or are converted to the unsigned integer type if the relational operation type is the logical
product.
Up to 24 alphanumeric character can be added to the 16 sets of relational expressions as comments so
that the operation is being performed by each relational expression can be indicated in text.
When the data status of the data received for the connected destination is bad (BAD), whether to use the
data for the relational expression or use the previous good data can be set on the function block detail
builder.
Accept BAD data: Choose [No] or [Yes].
The default setting is [No].
If [No] is selected, the relational expression will abandon the bad data and use the previously used good
data. However, since the relational expression is not running all the time, the previously used data may be
obsolete.
If [Yes] is selected, the data is used by the relational expression even the data status is bad.

Range of Operation
The Relational Expression Block (RL) performs the operation only for the specified relational expression
during each one-shot execution from other function blocks. When it is not called as one-shot, the previous
values remain for the relational expressions that have not been performed.

Data Items – RL
Table 2.10-2 Data Items of Relational Expression Block (RL)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

RV01 to RV32 Relational expression data ----- 0
AV01 to AV32 AND data ----- 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.11 Resource Scheduler Block (RS) Page 1 of 9

2.11 Resource Scheduler Block (RS)

The Resource Scheduler Block (RS) is used to manage the utilization of limited plant resources.

Resource Scheduler Block (RS)

When the resource usage requests exceed the number of usage limit for the Resource Scheduler
Block (RS), the usage requests are added to the queue and placed in usage request waiting status.
After that, it issues permission in sequence as the resource becomes available.
Although there are no I/O terminals for the Resource Scheduler Block (RS), data inside the block
may be referenced and set.
The following is a function block diagram of the Resource Scheduler Block (RS).

Figure 2.11-1 Function Block Diagram of Resource Scheduler Block (RS)

Issuing the usage request command and the usage request cancel command, referencing and
setting the maximum permissible number and referencing the permission status of the Resource
Scheduler Block (RS) may be performed from the sequence control blocks or calculation block.
The figure below shows an example of the lorry shipping system with a built-in pump count control.

Figure 2.11-2 Example of Lorry Shipping

In the above system example, the number of spots that can be used simultaneously for product
shipment is restricted by the total flow rate of the products that flow into the spots. In such cases,
the Resource Scheduler Block (RS) is used to control the usage status of each spot for shipping
control. By receiving a shipping request (usage request) from each spot, the Resource Scheduler
Block (RS) issues a sequential shipping permission (usage permission) to the first entry in the FIFO
(First In First Out) queue.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.11 Resource Scheduler Block (RS) Page 2 of 9

In the above system example, the product total flow rate that restricts the number of spots (the
maximum permissible number) that can be used simultaneously is determined by the number of
operating pumps. Therefore, the maximum permissible number (PMH) for the Resource Scheduler
Block (RS) is set via the function block that controls the pump count.

Process Timing
The process timing of RS block is only based on one-shot start.

Usage Request Control Function

The usage request control function controls the request queue, usage request status (RQ01 to
RQ32) and permission (PM01 to PM32) upon receiving the usage request command or the usage
request cancel command. In order to use the Resource Scheduler Block (RS) from the sequence
control block or the general-purpose calculation block, it is necessary to predefine the identification
number for each of the requesters for the resources. The requesters are identified by this number
when referencing the usage request command, usage request cancel command, usage request
(RQnn) and permission (PMnn). The numeric portion (noted as nn in this document) of the data item
name for the usage request (RQnn) and permission (PMnn) is used as the identification number.

Usage Request Command

The usage requester sends a usage request command to the Resource Scheduler Block (RS). Only a
single request at a time can be accepted from the same requester. The requester which has already
been given permission or is waiting in the usage request queue cannot send additional requests.
Two or more simultaneous requests are ignored.
When the entire resource group usage request command is received, the Resource Scheduler Block
(RS) processes the usage requests in the ascending order of request numbers. Since the permission
is restricted by the maximum permissible number (PMH), the remaining usage requests are placed in
the queue for permission.
The following describes operations when the number of usage requests is equal to or greater than
the maximum permissible number (PMH), or when less than the maximum permissible number
(PMH).
• When usage request number ≤ Maximum permissible number
It gives permission for the request by setting 1 to the corresponding usage request (RQnn) and
permission (PMnn).
• When usage request number > Maximum permissible number
Although the corresponding usage request (RQnn) is set to 1, it cannot give permission because
there are not enough resources for requests. It adds the identification number of the requester
to the queue, while the corresponding permission (PMnn) is kept at 0.

Usage Request Cancel Command

It is necessary for the requester to issue the usage request cancel command when it has used all
the resources, or when canceling the usage request. The Resource Scheduler Block (RS) resets the
corresponding usage request (RQnn) and permission (PMnn) to 0 upon receiving a usage request
cancel command. If there is an entry for the corresponding usage request in the queue, it is deleted
from the queue.
For a cancel command for a permitted usage request, if there is a request for permission in the
queue, the request is deleted after setting the permission (PMnn) of the usage request that is stored

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.11 Resource Scheduler Block (RS) Page 3 of 9

at the head of the queue. If the requester sends an entire resource group usage request cancel
command, the current usage requests are all reset to 0.

Monitoring of the Resource Usage Request Status

The requester of the resource usage monitors the resource usage availability by referencing the
permission (PMnn) of the Resource Scheduler Block (RS). By referencing the usage requests of the
Resource Scheduler Block (RS), the status of resource usage requests can be grasped.

Maximum Permissible Number Control Function

The number of resources that can be used simultaneously is set to the maximum permissible
number (PMH) from other function blocks. When the maximum permissible number setting is
changed, the maximum permissible number control function manipulates the permission status of
the resources by responding to an increase/decrease in the maximum permissible number (PMH), as
described below.

When the Maximum Permissible Number is Increased.

It increases the number of permissions that can be provided simultaneously for the increased
maximum permissible number.

When the Maximum Permissible Number is Decreased.

It will not give out new permissions until the number of current resource usage becomes less than
the maximum permissible number. For usage requests currently permitted, it holds the permission
status until the usage request cancel command is received.

Control Example with the Resource Scheduler Block (RS)

The figure below shows a tank level control example using the Resource Scheduler Block (RS) RS001
and Sequence Table Block (ST16).

Figure 2.11-3 Tank Level Control Example

This control includes ten processes that open and close the valves. These processes open valve nn if
level LO of the tank n becomes ON, and then close valve nn if the level LO is released after waiting
for the level being recovered. However, no more than three valves can be opened at a time. Also,
the valves are opened in the order in which the level LO is reached.
The identification numbers of these processes are defined as in the table below.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.11 Resource Scheduler Block (RS) Page 4 of 9

Table 2.11-1 Detecting Input and Identification Number

Contact input to detect the tank level LO Identification number

DI0001 1
DI0002 2
DI0003 3
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅
DI00010 10

Call the usage requester, usage request and permission by the corresponding number (1 to 10) of
each process identification number.
• Usage Requester 1 (DI001 : Tank 1’s level is LO)
• Usage Request 1 (Usage request 1 that has been submitted by usage requester 1 : Wants to
open valve 1.)
• Permission 1 (Permission for usage request 1 : OK to open valve 1.)
Assume that DI003, DI005, DI002 and DI006 become ON, in this respective order, when the
maximum permissible number is 3. The rules 4, 6, 3 and 7 of sequence table block 1 are satisfied,
and usage requests 3, 5, 2 and 6 are entered into the resource schedule block (RS) RS001 in this
order. Because the maximum permissible number is 3, the resource schedule block (RS) RS001
issues permissions to usage requests 3, 5 and 2 only, within the same scan.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.11 Resource Scheduler Block (RS) Page 5 of 9

Figure 2.11-4 Sequence Table Block (ST16) used for Tank Level Control (1/2)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.11 Resource Scheduler Block (RS) Page 6 of 9

Figure 2.11-5 Sequence Table Block (ST16) used for Tank Level Control (2/2)

Figure 2.11-6 Resource Scheduler Block (RS) Process

The sequence table block 2 indicates which usage request a permission is issued to.
The following describes an example of specifying the reference of permission status for usage
request 3 into the condition symbol column of the sequence table.

Figure 2.11-7 An example of specifying the reference of permission status for usage request 3
into the condition symbol column of the sequence table

“During condition signal (PM03)” corresponds to the usage request (RQ03). In this example, since
permissions 3, 5 and 2 received permissions, the rules 3, 5 and 2 of Table 2 are satisfied and the
contact outputs are outputted (valve open) according to the descriptions in the action signal column.
In order to issue permission for usage request 6 that is waiting in the queue, it is necessary for the
condition signal status of any one of the usage requests 3, 5 and 2 to be unsatisfied, and the usage
request of the same identification number that became false must be reset.

It is always necessary to issue the usage request cancel command, because

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.11 Resource Scheduler Block (RS) Page 7 of 9

the usage request is not reset automatically, even after permission is given for
the usage request. When the usage request signal is an internal switch, turn
off the internal switch (when the ON status means the usage request state)
for the next request after permission is sent, then issue the usage request
cancel command.

If the usage request that has been permitted is reset, there will be one vacancy for permission, and
permission is given to usage request 6. The following describes an example of setting permission 2
to be reset in the condition signal column of the sequence table.

Figure 2.11-8 An example of setting permission 2 to be reset in the condition signal column of
the sequence table

When Issuing the Entire Resource Group Usage Request

Command after Issuing the Entire Resource Group Usage
Request Cancel Command
When the entire resource group usage request cancel command and the entire resource group
usage request command are sent, based on rule 1 of sequence table block 1, the currently issued
permissions are all reset, then all the usage requests are sent. Usage requests 1 to 10 are stored in
ascending order in the resource scheduler. At this time, usage requests 1, 2 and 3 will be given
permission within the same scan, and usage requests 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10 will be placed in the
queue for permission.
The figure below shows the status of usage request storage.

Figure 2.11-9 Storage Status of Usage Request

When Issuing the Entire Resource Group Usage Request

Command Without the Entire Usage Request Cancel Command
When the entire resource group usage request command is issued without the entire resource group
usage request cancel command, the current usage requests that have been permitted remain as
they are, and the other usage requests are stored in the ascending order.
The figure below shows the storage status of the usage requests.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.11 Resource Scheduler Block (RS) Page 8 of 9

Figure 2.11-10 Storage Status of Usage Request

Canceling the Usage Request

The following shows an example of specifying the cancellation of usage request 2. This is the same
specification as that for resetting the usage request.

Figure 2.11-11 An example of specifying the cancellation of usage request 2

Changing the Maximum Permissible Number

The following are the methods to change the maximum permissible number to 4.
• When changing on the operation and monitoring functions
Input 4 for the data type PMH in the tuning view.
• When changing from the Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E)
Enter as below in the action signal column of the sequence table block.

Figure 2.11-12 An example of changing from the sequence table block

Data Items – RS
Table 2.11-2 Data Items of Resource Scheduler Block (RS)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- O/S (AUT)
RQ01 to RQ32 Usage request x 0/1 0
PM01 to PM32 Usage permission 0/1 0
PMH Maximum permission number x 0 to 32 32
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.11 Resource Scheduler Block (RS) Page 9 of 9

SEE For more information about valid block modes of the RS block, refer to:
ALSO 2.1.2, "Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.12 Local Switch Block (LSW) Page 1 of 1

2.12 Local Switch Block (LSW)

The Local Switch Block (LSW) is a function block that has 32 internal switches.
The LSW block is available in FFCS-V and FFCS-C.

Local Switch Block (LSW)

The LSW block itself does not perform any processing but its switches are referenced or set from
other function blocks or HIS.
The LSW block does not have process timing specification, block mode, block status, alarm status,
and I/O terminals.
The following is a function block diagram of the Local Switch Block (LSW).

Figure 2.12-1 Function Block Diagram of Local Switch Block (LSW)

Data Items of Local Switch Block (LSW)

The following table describes the data items of LSW.
Table 2.12-1 Data Items of Local Switch Block (LSW)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

PV01 to PV32 Switch status x 0/1 0
PVA Batch operation switch x 0/1 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x None 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.13 Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) Page 1 of 6

2.13 Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)

The Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) is used to monitor whether the final control element (valve) is operating properly.

Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)

▼ Valve Monitor
The Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) handles 16 sets of input signals independently, performing valve operation
monitoring and message output for each input signal. A set of input signals is comprised of a combination of one point
of valve contact output and one point (or two points) of limit switch. Also, when an error occurs in any set of the 16
sets, the message output can be extracted from the representative message output terminal (J17).
The figure below shows the function block of the Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM).

Figure 2.13-1 Function Block Diagram of the Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)

The table below lists connection methods and destinations for the Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) I/O terminals.
Table 2.13-1 Connection Methods and Destinations for Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) I/O Terminals

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Q01, Input terminal
Q03, ..., for valve x Δ x x
Q31 contact output
Q02,
Limit switch
Q04, ..., x Δ x x
input terminal
Q32
Individual
J01 to message
x x x
J16 output
terminal
Representative
message
J17 x x x
output
terminal
*1: x: Connection available
Blank: Connection not available
Δ: Connection available only when connecting to switch blocks (SW-33, SW-91)

Connect input terminals (Q01, Q03, ..., Q31) with the contact output leading to the valve. Connect input terminals
(Q02, Q04, ..., Q32) with the contact input (signals from the limit switch) that indicates the open/close status of the
valve. These two types of inputs (for example, Q01 and Q02) are compared and any mismatch present is detected. If a
mismatch is detected as a result of comparison, the valve abnormal state (PVnn) is set to 1, and messages specified in
the output terminal such as the annunciator message (%AN) and print message with data (%PR) are output.
The figure below shows an example of monitoring the valve that has one point of contact output (open signal) and one
point of limit switch input (open answer-back) using the Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM).

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.13 Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) Page 2 of 6

Figure 2.13-2 Connection of Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)

Process Timing
The process timing of VLVM block is only based on periodical start period. The periodic start period is based on basic
scan period only.

Valve Monitor Limit Switch Action

There are three types of limit switch actions, which are the input signals of the Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM). The type
needs to be selected from the three types for each valve using the Function Block Detail Builder.
• Triggers
Select from “Direct,” “Reverse,” and “Both.”
The default is “Both.”
The following lists the three types of actions:
• Direct Direction
The polarities of the valve contact output and limit switch status are matched.
• Reverse Direction
The polarities of the valve contact output and limit switch status are reversed.
• Both Direction
Two points of limit switches correspond to the valve contact output. One limit switch is for direct direction and the
other is for reverse direction.

Figure 2.13-3 Limit Switch Actions

To set the limit switch to correspond at two points for the both direction specification, assign limit switch 1 (direct
direction) to the input point specified at the input terminal, and limit switch 2 (reverse direction) to the subsequent
point of the specified point.

Valve Output Monitor Function

This function inputs the values of contact output (valve contact output) to the contact operation type final control
element and the contact input (limit switch) that represents the open/close status, then compares the values to detect a
mismatch.
The following describes the order of operations for the valve output monitoring.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.13 Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) Page 3 of 6

1. When a change in the valve contact output is detected, the action verification timer inside the Valve Monitoring
Block (VLVM) is started (PT = action confirmation elapsed time).
2. While the action confirmation timer is being started, the ON/OFF statuses of the valve contact output and limit
switch are compared. If the statuses match, the action confirmation timer expires and the system proceeds to step
4.
3. If the statuses do not match after a certain period of time (action confirmation setting time = MT) has elapsed, data
value 1 indicating an error status is stored in the valve abnormal state (PV01 to PV16).
4. After that, monitoring continues until a change occurs in the valve contact output for the next time (i.e. until the
next valve operation), and the valve abnormal state (PV01 to PV16) is updated.
The monitor action can be specified according to the timing of comparison between the limit switch and valve contact
output. The monitor action is set using the Function Block Detail Builder.
• Monitor action
Select from “Monitoring the ON side only,” “Monitoring the OFF side only” and “Monitoring both-side.”
The default is “Monitoring both-side.”
The following describes each monitor action.
• Monitoring the ON Side only
This starts the action verification timer at the rise of valve contact output (OFF→ON), and compares the statuses
only while the valve contact output is ON.
• Monitoring the OFF Side only
This starts the action verification timer at the fall of the valve contact output (ON→OFF), and compares the statuses
only while the valve contact output is OFF.
• Monitoring Both Sides
This starts the action verification timer at both the rise and fall of valve contact output, and compares the statuses
while the valve contact output is either ON or OFF.

Figure 2.13-4 Valve Output Monitoring (Monitoring Both Sides)

The table below shows the limit switch action specifications and corresponding valve output monitor actions.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.13 Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) Page 4 of 6

Figure 2.13-5 List of Valve Output Monitor Action

• When the action specification for the limit switch is “Operate in Both Direction,” set the valve abnormal state (PVnn)
to 1 if either of the two points of limit switches is a mismatch to the valve contact output.
Also, the valve abnormal state (PVnn) becomes 0 when both of the two points match the valve contact output.
• If the valve operation output is changed while the valve status is abnormal (PVnn=1), the valve abnormal state (PVnn)
to reset to 0.
• Upon comparing the valve output contact with the limit switch, if either of the input destinations has a device error
or the data status of input data is faulty (BAD), the valve abnormal states (PV01 to PV16) hold the current value.

Representative Valve Abnormal State Detection Function

The representative abnormal state (PVR) is an information item that represents the abnormal statuses for a maximum
of 16 points of valves monitored by the Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM). The representative abnormal state (PVR) is
determined by the logical OR of individual valve abnormal statuses (PV01 to PV16).

Figure 2.13-6 Logical OR of Valve Abnormal States

When there is no connection to the limit switch input terminal, the limit switch input terminal is recognized as unused,
so the valve abnormal state (PVnn) is always 0.

Message Output
VLVM block may generate an alarm message when an error occurs or recovers to notify the operator. The message
output may be specified.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.13 Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) Page 5 of 6

Message Output to the Individual Message Output Terminal

At the Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM), the operator can be notified of error occurrences and recoveries of individual
valves by specifying the message output to the output terminal via the Function Block Detail Builder.
• Individual message output terminal
Specify connection with the “annunciator message,” “print message with data,” “operator guide message”
or “internal switch.” Set one point or two points for each valve.
The following describes the output timing of messages.
• Abnormality detected message
Sends the message at the timing in which the valve abnormal state (PVnn) changes from normal to abnormal (0→1).
• Abnormality recovered message
Sends the message at the timing in which the valve abnormal state (PVnn) changes from abnormal to normal (1→0).

Message Output to the Representative Message Output Terminal

▼ Representative Message Output
At the Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM), the operator can be notified of error occurrence and recovery of one of the 16
valves by specifying the message output to the output terminal via the Function Block Detail Builder.
• Representative message output terminal
Specify connection with the “annunciator message,” “print message with data,” “operator guide message”
or “internal switch.” Set one point or two points for each valve.
Be careful that the abnormality recovered message is not output until all the valves return to their normal state.
• Abnormality detected message
Sends the message at the timing in which the representative valve abnormal state (PVR) changes from normal to
abnormal (0→1).
• Abnormality recovered message
Sends the message at the timing in which the representative valve abnormal state (PVR) changes from abnormal to
normal (1→0).

Specifying the Message Output

For the message output as a connection destination of the output terminal, the abnormality recovered message may not
be output, depending on the types of messages. The table below shows the presence/absence status of the abnormality
recovered message output.
Table 2.13-2 Presence/Absence of Abnormality Recovered Message Output

Message type Abnormality detected(*1) Abnormality recovered(*1)

Annunciator message (%AN) x x
Print message with data (%PR) x Δ
Operator guide message (%OG) x
*1: x: Present
Blank: Absent
Δ: Depends on the builder specification

Annunciator Message Output

When the annunciator message is specified as the connection destination of the message output, the abnormality
detected message and the abnormality recovered message is sent with the same number.

Output of the Print Message with Data

▼ Printout Message at Representative Recovery
When the print message with data is specified as the connection destination of the message output, the abnormality
detected message is sent with the specified message number. Furthermore, only when “Yes” is specified for the “print
message at representative recovery” or “print message at recovery” using the Function Block Detail Builder, it will send
the abnormality recovered message with the subsequent number of the specified message number.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
2.13 Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM) Page 6 of 6

• Printout Message at Recovery

Select from “Yes” and “No.”
The default is “No.”
• Printout Message at Representative Recovery
Select from “Yes” and “No.”
The default is “No.”
Specify “No” for the “Printout Message at Representative Recovery” or the “Printout Message at Recovery” when the
connection destination of the message output is other than a print message with data.

Message Output to the Internal Switch

The internal switch (%SW) can be specified as the connection destination of the message output. In this case, the valve
abnormal state is set as the ON/OFF status of the internal switch.

Message Suppressing
When the message suppression control switch (MCSW) is set to ON (=1), sending of all messages specified in the
output terminal is suppressed. When the message suppression status is on, setting of the ON/OFF status for the internal
switch at the output destination is not performed. The status of the message suppressing switch (MCSW) can be
changed by the operation and monitoring functions or other function block.

Data Items – VLVM

Table 2.13-3 Data Items of Valve Monitoring Block (VLVM)

Data Item Data Name Entry Permitted or Not(*1) Range Default

MODE Block mode x ----- AUT
ALRM Alarm status ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status ----- 0
AF Alarm detection ----- 0
AOFS Alarm inhibition ----- 0
PV01 to PV16 Valve abnormal state 0, 1 0
PVR Representative abnormal state 0, 1 0
MCSW Message suppression control switch x 0, 1 0
MT01 to MT16 Action confirmation setting time (seconds) x 0 to 10000 4
PT01 to PT16 Action confirmation elapsed time (seconds) 0 to 10000 0
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Blank: Entry is not permitted

SEE For more information about valid block modes of the RS block, refer to:
ALSO 2.1.2, "Block Mode of Sequence Control Blocks"

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3. Faceplate Blocks Page 1 of 1

3. Faceplate Blocks
This chapter explains the faceplate blocks and their basic control functions.
The faceplate blocks consist of analog faceplate blocks, sequence faceplate blocks and hybrid
faceplate blocks.
This chapter explains the function details of each type of faceplate blocks.

Faceplate Blocks
A faceplate block enables multiple function blocks to be recognized as one function block. The
function blocks that execute the faceplate function are called faceplate blocks. The following
diagram shows positioning of the faceplate function in basic control functions.

Figure 3-1 Faceplate Blocks in Basic Control Architecture

Faceplate blocks are capable of indicating and manipulating the data of multiple function blocks that
comprise a control loop. These indications and operation functions are performed on the instrument
faceplate of the operation and monitoring window. Faceplate blocks are classified into analog
faceplate blocks, sequence faceplate blocks and hybrid faceplate blocks.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.1 Types of Faceplate Blocks Page 1 of 2

3.1 Types of Faceplate Blocks

Depending upon the content of indication and manipulation, faceplate blocks are classified into three
types; analog faceplate blocks, sequence faceplate blocks and hybrid faceplate blocks.

Analog Faceplate Blocks

Analog faceplate blocks include the following function blocks that indicate and manipulate analog
data on the instrument faceplate of the monitoring and operation window.
• Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2)
Used for the indication of measured values and the setting of setpoint values.
• Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S)
Used for the setting of setpoint values and manipulated output values.
• Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3)
Used for the indication of measured values and the setting of setpoint values as well as
manipulated output.

Sequence Faceplate Blocks

Sequence faceplate blocks include the following function blocks that indicate sequence phases and
manipulate switch statuses on the instrument faceplate of the operation and monitoring window.
These faceplate blocks can be used as man-machine interfaces of the sequence control function.
• Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI)
Used for the indication of sequence phases.
• Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C)
Used for the lamp indication and operation of five push buttons.
• Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C) (*1)
Used for the lamp indication and operation of ten push buttons.
*1: Extended 10-push-button switch block (PBS10C) can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Hybrid Faceplate Blocks

A hybrid faceplate block has the functions of an analog faceplate block and those of a sequence
faceplate block.
The function blocks that are classified as hybrid faceplate blocks include the Extended Hybrid Manual
Station Block (HAS3C). The Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C) has the functions of
Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3) and those of the Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block
(PBS5C).

Example of Using the Faceplate Block

The following example shows how to use an analog faceplate block.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.1 Types of Faceplate Blocks Page 2 of 2

Figure 3.1-1 Example of Using the Faceplate Block

In the above example, the data items of TC100 (INDST3 block), TIC102 (PID controller block) and
FIC101 (PID controller block) are connected. The connected data items are shown below.
• PV of TC100 and PV of TIC102
• SV of TC100 and SV of TIC102
• MV of TC100 and MV of FIC101
• MODE of TC100 and MODE of FIC101.
By connecting these data items, the following functions can be realized.

Indication of Data Items

The values of TC100 data items are changed to the values of the connected data items.
• The value of the data item PV of TC100 is changed to that of TIC102’s PV.
• The value of SV is changed to that of TIC102’ SV, and the value of MV is changed to that of
FIC101’s MV.
• The block mode of MODE is changed to that of FIC101’s MODE. However, the mode will not
change to O/S.

Setting Operation
When a value is set to any data item of TC100 from the instrument faceplate or other setting
source, the value of the connected data item will be changed.
• When SV of TC100 is changed, SV of TIC102 will change to the same value.
• When MV of TC100 is changed, MV of FIC101 will change to the same value.
• When the block mode of TC100 is changed, MODE of FC101will change to the same block mode.
However, the mode will not change to O/S.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.2 Push Button Operation of Faceplate Blocks Page 1 of 2

3.2 Push Button Operation of Faceplate Blocks

There are three types of push buttons common to Sequence faceplate blocks and Hybrid faceplate
blocks: momentary button, alternate button and radio button.

Momentary Button Action

When button operation is performed by the operator, the manipulated command value (MVnn)
changes to “1 (ON)” for a period specified as the output time span in the unit of scan cycle. When
the specified period is elapsed, the value returns to “0 (OFF)” automatically. The following figure
shows the relationship between the manipulated command value (MVnn) and the output value when
button operation is performed.

Figure 3.2-1 Action When the Momentary Button is Specified

The manipulated command value (MVnn) remains ON for a period of time equivalent to a multiple of
the scan period.
If button operation is performed while the manipulated command value (MVnn) is ON, the value will
remain ON through the specified scan periods from the time when the last button operation was
performed.
The following figure shows the action of the momentary button when button operation is performed
while the manipulated command status is ON.

Figure 3.2-2 When Button Operation is Performed While the Manipulated Command Status is ON

Alternate Button Action

When button operation is performed by the operator, the manipulated command value (MVnn)
changes to OFF if it was ON, and to ON if it was OFF. The following figure shows the relationship

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.2 Push Button Operation of Faceplate Blocks Page 2 of 2

between the manipulated command value (MVnn) and the output value when button operation is
performed.

Figure 3.2-3 Action When the Alternate Button is Specified

When multiple button operations are performed in a single scan period, the manipulated command
value (MVnn) changes with each button operation. The change in the manipulated command value
(MVnn) will be executed immediately after the operation, while the output of the manipulated
command value (MVnn) will be executed during block processing. It must be noted that the change
in manipulated command value (MVnn) will not be transmitted to the storage destination, even when
multiple button operations are performed in a single scan period.
The following figure shows the relationship between the manipulated command value (MVnn) and
the output value when multiple button operations are performed in one scan period.

Figure 3.2-4 When Multiple Button Operations are Performed in One Scan Period

Radio Button Action

When the operator pushes one button (MVnn) ON, all other manipulated command values (MVnn) will
be turned OFF forcibly.
Switches that are turned OFF forcibly while the “radio button” is in use are limited to those that
support the button operation function.
When the “radio button” is in use, even a switch whose operation disable status is ON will be turned
OFF forcibly once other switches are turned ON.
Depending upon the operation timing, multiple switch statuses may turn ON simultaneously. In this
case, only the switch with the smallest number of manipulated command values (MVnn) that are ON
will remain so. All other switch statuses will be turned OFF forcibly.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.3 Block Mode and Status of Faceplate Blocks Page 1 of 1

3.3 Block Mode and Status of Faceplate Blocks

The block mode and status of the faceplate block are different from the block mode and status of
other function blocks. In this section, the block mode and status that are specific to the faceplate block
are explained.

SEE For more information about block mode and status, refer to:
ALSO 6., “Block Mode and Status” in Function Blocks Overview (IM 33J15A20-01EN)

The Block Mode of the Faceplate Block

The block mode of a faceplate block agrees with the connected destination function block, except for
the out of service (O/S) mode.
The faceplate block periodically refers to the connected destination function block to keep the mode
agree with each other. On the other hand, if the block mode of the faceplate block changes, the
connected destination function block changes too.

The Block Status of the Faceplate Block

The block status of a faceplate block agrees with the connected destination function block.
The faceplate block periodically refers to the connected destination function block to keep the status
agree with each other.

The Alarm Status of the Faceplate Block

The alarm status of a faceplate block agrees with the connected destination function block, except for
the connection failure alarm (CNF) or normal (NR) status.
The faceplate block periodically refers to the connected destination function block to keep the alarm
status agree with each other.

The Data Status of the Faceplate Block

In the faceplate block, the three types of analog data, namely, the process variable (PV), setpoint
value (SV), and manipulated output value (MV), are treated as “data with data status.” The data status
of the faceplate block agrees with the data status of the connected destination function block. If there
is no block connected, the data status is determined by the status of its own data.

The Status Change Message

In the faceplate block, a status change message is sent when a change has occurred to the block
mode or block status.
Also, the status change message bypass function is provided to suppress the status change message.
The status change message bypass action is determined by the value which is specified in the builder
of the block itself, regardless of the existence or absence of a block mode connection or block status
connection.
However, in the absence of a block status connection, a status change message is sent even when the
block status does not change if the same status as the current one has been specified as the block
status.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.3.1 Block Mode of Faceplate Blocks Page 1 of 3

3.3.1 Block Mode of Faceplate Blocks

The block mode of a faceplate block agrees with the block mode of connected destination function
block, except for the off-service (O/S) mode.
Depending on the existence of the block mode connection, the faceplate block takes different action
when the block mode is changed.

Behavior of Faceplate with Block Mode Connection

The faceplate block periodically refers to the connected destination function block to keep the block
mode agree with each other. The faceplate block periodically refers to the connected destination
function block to keep the block mode agree with each other. On the other hand, if the block mode
of the faceplate block is changed, the block mode of the connected destination function block
changes too.
When connect with other blocks, the data item MODE is specified of the destination tag to the
terminal (JMOD). If a data item other than MODE is specified, it may not work properly. A faceplate
block cannot be connected to another faceplate block.

The Block Mode that can be Established

The types of the block mode (AUT, MAN, etc.) that can be established for the faceplate block
depend on the types of the block mode that can be connected as destination block. Whether or not
a mode change is possible also depends on whether the mode change is enabled or not of the
connected destination block.

Off-Service (O/S) Mode Related Actions when Block Mode

Change
When link the block mode change of the faceplate block to the out of service (O/S) mode of
connected destination block, the faceplate takes different action. The out of service (O/S) mode
related actions are specified as follows:
Table 3.3.1-1 Block Mode Change Action Specifications Regarding O/S (1/2)

Change operation at the faceplate block Action of the connection destination block
O/S→MAN O/S→MAN
O/S→MAN AUT→MAN
O/S(MAN)→MAN O/S→MAN
O/S(MAN)→O/S No change
MAN→O/S No change

TIP MAN indicates a mode other than O/S. Actions are the same for all mode other than O/S.

Table 3.3.1-2 Block Mode Change Action Specifications Regarding O/S (2/2)

Change operation at the connection destination block Action of the faceplate block
O/S→MAN O/S→O/S
O/S→MAN O/S(MAN)→MAN
MAN→O/S O/S→O/S

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.3.1 Block Mode of Faceplate Blocks Page 2 of 3

MAN→O/S MAN→O/S(MAN)

TIP MAN indicates a mode other than O/S. Actions are the same for all mode other than O/S.

• The block mode of the faceplate block changes to out of service (O/S)
Only the mode of the faceplate block becomes out of service (O/S), the mode of the connected
destination function block does not change.
• The block mode of the connected destination block is changed to out of service (O/S)
The block mode of the faceplate block does not become out of service (O/S) but becomes O/S
(MODE) which is a compound block mode. “MODE” of O/S (MODE) indicates either the MAN, AUT
or CAS mode. If the block mode of the faceplate block is displayed as “MAN O/S” on the
operation and monitoring function or described as “O/S (MAN)” in this chapter, it means that the
connected destination is in the out of service (O/S) mode and the faceplate block is in the
manual (MAN) mode.
• Actions that take place when a mode change is performed against the faceplate block while the
faceplate block is in the out of service (O/S) mode or O/S (MAN)
When a block mode change is performed directly against the faceplate block, the same block
mode change command is sent simultaneously to the connected destination function block of the
faceplate block.
• When a mode change is performed to the connected destination function block while the
faceplate block is in the out of service (O/S) mode
The faceplate block remains in the out of service (O/S) mode.

Behavior of Faceplate without Block Mode Connection

When there is no block mode connection, the block modes that are unique to the faceplate block are
used, as shown in the table below. Block mode can be changed only by external operations outside
the faceplate block, unless the block is returning from an O/S over transition state.
Table 3.3.1-3 Behavior of Faceplate Mode without Block Mode Connection

Block mode
Description
Symbol Name
O/S Out of service Indicates a state in which all functions are stopped.
MAN Manual
SEMI (*1) Semi-automatic
AUT Automatic
Specific meanings of each mode can be defined freely using the application.
CAS Cascade
RCAS Remote cascade
ROUT Remote output
*1: SEMI (semi-automatic) has the same priority as AUT and MAN, and is mutually exclusive with the two.

Interlock Condition for Faceplate Block Mode Change

Like other function blocks, the faceplate block has an interlock switch input terminal (INT) which
activates the block mode change interlock function. The block mode change interlock function takes
effect according to the status of the switch connected to the terminal (INT) of the faceplate block
itself. Whether the faceplate block is connected to other function block or not is irrelevant.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.3.1 Block Mode of Faceplate Blocks Page 3 of 3

However, if the connected destination block and the faceplate block use the different signal for block
mode change interlock, the faceplate block will follow the block mode change of the connected
destination function block.
Thus, when the block mode is restricted under the faceplate block’s interlock condition , the
connected destination block can not change block mode again.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.3.2 Block Status of Faceplate Blocks Page 1 of 1

3.3.2 Block Status of Faceplate Blocks

The block status of the faceplate block agrees with the block status of the connected destination function
block. If there is no destination connection, a unique block status is used.

Behavior of Faceplate with Block Status Connection

The faceplate block periodically refers to the connected destination block status to keep their block status
agree with each other.
To establish block status connection, connect the data item BSTS (block status) of the destination tag to
the terminal (JBST) of faceplate block. When a data item other than BSTS is specified, the faceplate
block does not operate properly. A faceplate block cannot be connected to another faceplate block.
When block status connection establishes, the connected destination function block’s is read via JBST
terminal, status change can be performed only from the faceplate block.
The types of the block status (STOP, RUN, etc.) for the faceplate block depend on the types of the block
status available for the connected destination block.

Behavior of Faceplate without Block Status Connection

▼ USER1(Faceplate Block)
When there is no block status connection, the block status strings defined on the user- defined Status
Character String Builder unique to the faceplate block can be used. The default status strings for
faceplate blocks are shown in the table below.
Table 3.3.2-1 Behavior of Faceplate Status without Block Status Connection

Block status
Priority Position (Bit Column)
Symbol Name
FAIL Fail 2
ABRT Abort 3
3
IDLE Idle 4
SIML Simulation 5
RUN Run 17
STOP Stop 18
STUP Startup 19
1
HOLD Hold 20
WAIT Wait 21
END End 23
SDWN Shutdown 25
0 ESD Emergency shutdown 26
RSTR Restart 28

The character strings for faceplate block status are the user-defined status character string defined in
column USER1 on the Status Character String Builder.
In the table, the position 33 (Bit Column) is system reserved, can not be used.
A block status string can be defined with up to 8 alphanumeric characters including underscore ( _ ).
The block status character string of the faceplate block can be changed by application programs are the
strings in the table positions 2, 3, 4, 5, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 23, 25, 26 and 28. The strings are defined to
other positions (Bit) cannot be used by the application programs.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.3.3 Alarm Status of Faceplate Blocks Page 1 of 2

3.3.3 Alarm Status of Faceplate Blocks

The alarm status of a faceplate block agrees with the connected destination function block’s alarm
status, except for the connection failure (CNF) or normal (NR) status. If there is no connection
destination, a unique alarm status is used.
The alarm-related functions such as alarm acknowledgment, alarm detection specification and alarm
inhibition functions are available.

Behavior of Faceplate with Alarm Status Connection

The faceplate block periodically refers to the connected destination block’s alarm status to keep their
alarm status agree with each other.
To establish the alarm status connection, connect the data item ALRM of the destination tag to the
terminal (JALM) of the faceplate block. If a data item other than ALRM is used, it does not work
properly. A faceplate block cannot be connected to another faceplate block.
If alarm status connection establishes, any alarm status change operation on the faceplate block
becomes invalid.
The types of the alarm status (IOP, HI, etc.) for the faceplate block depend on the types of alarm
status available for the connected destination block.
When the connected destination block changes to connection failure (CNF) alarm status, the
faceplate block does not change to connection failure (CNF).

Behavior of Faceplate without Alarm Status Connection

When there is no alarm status connection, the alarm strings defined on the User-defined Status
Character String Builder unique to the faceplate block can be used. The default alarm strings for
faceplate blocks are shown in the table below.
Table 3.3.3-1 Behavior of Faceplate Alarm Status without Alarm Status Connection

Alarm status
Position (Bit)
Symbol Name
NR Normal status 9
OOP Output open alarm 10
IOP High input open alarm 11
IOP- Low input open alarm 12
ESTP Emergency stop alarm 13
HIHI High-High alarm 15
LOLO Low-Low alarm 16
HI High alarm 17
LO Low alarm 18
DV+ Positive deviation alarm 21
DV- Negative deviation alarm 22
TRP Trip alarm 25
SCBL Scramble alarm 26
INT Interlock alarm 27
ERR Error alarm 28

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.3.3 Alarm Status of Faceplate Blocks Page 2 of 2

DISC Discrete alarm 29

BLCK Block alarm 30
CNF Connection failure alarm 32

The alarm status of faceplate block is indicated with the character string set of USER9 in the table
on the User-defined Status Character String Builder. The block alarm status character string of the
faceplate block can be changed by application programs are the strings in the table positions 10, 11,
12, 13, 17, 18, 25, 26, 27 and 28.
The character strings defined to the positions 15, 16, 21, 22, 29 and 30 are used when the
ALARM_SUM of fieldbus block is linked through fieldbus module (ACF11).

SEE For more information about column USER9 on user-defined character string builder, refer to:
ALSO “ User-Defined Alarm Status Character String” in 7.4, “Alarm Status Character String and
Alarm Processing” in Human Interface Stations Reference Vol.2 (IM 33J05A11-01EN)

Alarm-Related Functions
The alarm-related functions such as alarm acknowledgment, alarm detection specification and alarm
inhibition functions are available for a faceplate block. They can be set on the data items named
alarm flashing status (AFLS), alarm detection specification (AF), and alarm inhibition specification
(AOFS), respectively.
The settings on the faceplate block itself determines the alarm-related functions. Whether the
faceplate is connected with other function block is irrelevant.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.3.4 Data Status of Faceplate Blocks Page 1 of 1

3.3.4 Data Status of Faceplate Blocks

A faceplate block has three types of analog data, the process variable (PV), setpoint value (SV), and
manipulated output value (MV). They are referred as “data with data status.” The data status of the
process variable (PV), setpoint value (SV), and manipulated output value (MV) agree with the data
status of the connected destination block. If there is no block connected, the data status is
determined by the status of the data setting block.

Faceplate with Data Connection

The data status agrees with the data status of the connected destination function block.
When data from the terminal connected function block have bad value (BAD) status, the data set to
the faceplate as it is anyway.
The faceplate blocks, except for batch status block (BSI), only read process variable (PV) from the
connected destination blocks. The PV can not be changed from the faceplate. Therefore, to set the
process variable (PV) of the faceplate block to CAL will result in a setting error. If you really want to
change the PV to calibration state you can do it directly on the connected destination block.

Faceplate without Data Connection

When there is no data connection, the data status depends on the data status of its own data.
For the faceplate blocks that have no connection with other blocks, data can be set externally such
as from the operation and monitoring function. In this case, the bad value (BAD) data status is reset.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.4 Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2) Page 1 of 3

3.4 Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2)

The Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2) is a faceplate block used for indication.

Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2)

▼ Connection Information
The Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2) is a faceplate block used for indication.
Here is a function block diagram of the Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2).

Figure 3.4-1 Function Block Diagram of Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2)

INDST2 block process timing is periodic type. The scan period can be set to Basic Scan, Medium-speed Scan
(*1) or High-speed Scan.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

The figure below shows an example of the instrument faceplate of the Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block
(INDST2) displayed in the operation and monitoring window.

Figure 3.4-2 Display Example of Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.4 Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2) Page 2 of 3

The table below shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Dual-
Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2).
Table 3.4-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Dual-Pointer
Indicating Station Block (INDST2)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Block
JMOD mode x x - - - - - x
connection
Block
JBST status x - - - - - - x
connection
Alarm
JALM status x - - - - - - x
connection
PV
JPV x - - - - - - x
connection
SV
JSV x x - - - - - x
connection
SVH
J01 x x - - - - - x
connection
SVL
J02 x x - - - - - x
connection
Interlock
INT switch x - - - Δ x x x
input
*1: x: Connection available
-: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a selector switch block (SW-33, SW-91).

Analog Data Display Function

The Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2) references the analog data at the connection destination
of the I/O terminals shown below during each scan period, and stores data values and data statuses as data
items.
If no I/O connection terminal is connected, the values currently stored in the data items are held.
Table 3.4-2 Target I/O Terminals of the Analog Data Display and Corresponding Data Items

I/O terminal Data item

JPV Process variable (PV)
JSV Setpoint value (SV)
J01 Setpoint high limit (SVH)
J02 Setpoint low limit (SVL)

Analog Data Operation Function

When setting operation is performed to any data items of the Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2),
the set data item values will be set to the connection destination of the corresponding I/O terminals shown
below:
Table 3.4-3 Target I/O Terminals of the Analog Data Operation Function and Corresponding Data Items

I/O terminal Data item

JSV Setpoint value (SV)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.4 Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2) Page 3 of 3

J01 Setpoint high limit (SVH)

J02 Setpoint low limit (SVL)

The setting of analog data to the connection destination is performed during the periodic scan that
immediately follows the setting operation to the data item of the Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block
(INDST2).

Data Items - INDST2

Table 3.4-4 Data Items of Dual-Pointer Indicating Station Block (INDST2)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(MAN)
BSTS Block status Δ ----- 0
ALRM Alarm status Δ ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status x ----- 0
Alarm detection
AF x ----- 0
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS x ----- 0
specification
PV Process variable PV engineering unit value SL
Value in the same engineering unit
SV Setpoint value x SL
as PV
SVH Setpoint high limit x SL to SH SH
SVL Setpoint low limit x SL to SH SL
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
Value in the same engineering unit
SH Scale high limit - -----
as PV
Value in the same engineering unit
SL Scale low limit - -----
as PV
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
-: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.5 Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S) Page 1 of 4

3.5 Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S)

The Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S) is a faceplate block used for operation.

Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S)

▼ Connection Information
Here is a function block diagram of the Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S).

Figure 3.5-1 Function Block Diagram of Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S)

INDST2S block process timing is periodic type. The scan period can be set to Basic Scan, Medium-speed Scan
(*1) or High-speed Scan.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

The figure below shows an example of the instrument faceplate of the Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block
(INDST2S) displayed in the operation and monitoring window.

Figure 3.5-2 Display Example of Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.5 Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S) Page 2 of 4

The table below shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Dual-
Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S).
Table 3.5-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of the I/O Terminals of Dual-Pointer Manual
Station Block (INDST2S)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Block
JMOD mode x x - - - - - x
connection
Block
JBST status x - - - - - - x
connection
Alarm
JALM status x - - - - - - x
connection
SV
JSV x x - - - - - x
connection
MV
JMV x x - - - - - x
connection
SVH
J01 x x - - - - - x
connection
SVL
J02 x x - - - - - x
connection
MH
J03 x x - - - - - x
connection
ML
J04 x x - - - - - x
connection
Interlock
INT switch x - - Δ x x x
input
*1: x: Connection available
-: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a selector switch block (SW-33, SW-91).

Analog Data Display Function

The Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S) references the analog data at the connection destination of
the I/O terminals shown below during each scan period, and stores data values and data statuses as data
items.
If no I/O connection terminal is connected, the values currently stored in the data items are held.
Table 3.5-2 Target I/O Terminals of Analog Data Display and Corresponding Data Items

I/O terminal Data item

JSV Setpoint value (SV)
JMV Manipulated output value (MV)
J01 Setpoint high limit (SVH)
J02 Setpoint low limit (SVL)
J03 Manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH)
J04 Manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML)

The display form of the manipulated output value (MV) is set in the Function Block Detail Builder.
• MV Display Style
Select from “Auto determination” or “User Define.”

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.5 Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S) Page 3 of 4

The default setting is “Auto determination.”

When “Automatic Determination” is selected, the engineering unit and scale range of the manipulated output
value (MV) will be the same with the connected block.
When “User Define” is selected, the engineering unit and scale range of the manipulated output value (MV)
needs to be defined regardless the connected destination. The engineering unit and scale range of the
manipulated output value (MV) determines the display type of the MV.
The engineering unit and scale range of the manipulated output value (MV) are set in the Function Block
Detail Builder.
• MV Engineering Unit Symbol
MV engineering unit.
The default setting is “%.”
• MV Range
The high limit and low limit values of the maximum range of the manipulated output value.
The default setting is “100.0” for the high limit value and “0.0” for the low limit value.

Analog Data Operation Function

When setting operation is performed to any data items of the Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S),
the set data item values will be set to the connection destination of the corresponding I/O terminals shown
below:
Table 3.5-3 Target I/O Terminals of Analog Data Operation and Corresponding Data Items

I/O terminal Data item

JSV Setpoint value (SV)
JMV Manipulated output value (MV)
J01 Setpoint high limit (SVH)
J02 Setpoint low limit (SVL)
J03 Manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH)
J04 Manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML)

The setting of analog data to the connection destination is performed during the periodic scan that
immediately follows the setting operation to the data item of the Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S).

Data Items - INDST2S

Table 3.5-4 Data Items of Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(MAN)
BSTS Block status Δ ----- 0
ALRM Alarm status Δ ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status x ----- 0
AF Alarm detection specification x ----- 0
AOFS Alarm masking specification x ----- 0
Value in the same engineering
SV Setpoint value x SL
unit as PV
MV Manipulated output value x MV engineering unit value MSL
Manipulated variable high-limit
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
setpoint
Manipulated variable low-limit
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
setpoint

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.5 Dual-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST2S) Page 4 of 4

SVH Setpoint high limit x SL to SH SH

SVL Setpoint low limit x SL to SH SL
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
Value in the same engineering
SH Scale high limit - -----
unit as SV
Value in the same engineering
SL Scale low limit - -----
unit as SV
Value in the same engineering
MSH MV scale high limit - -----
unit as MV
Value in the same engineering
MSL MV scale low limit - -----
unit as MV
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
-: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.6 Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3) Page 1 of 4

3.6 Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3)

The Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3) is a faceplate block used for indication operation.

Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3)

▼ Connection Information
Here is a function block diagram of the Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3).

Figure 3.6-1 Function Block Diagram of Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3)

INDST3 block process timing is periodic type. The scan period can be set to Basic Scan, Medium-speed Scan
(*1) or High-speed Scan.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

The figure below shows an example of the instrument faceplate of the Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block
(INDST3) displayed in the operation and monitoring window.

Figure 3.6-2 Display Example of Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.6 Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3) Page 2 of 4

The table below shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Triple-
Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3).
Table 3.6-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of I/O Terminals of Triple-Pointer Manual
Station Block (INDST3)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Block
JMOD mode x x - - - - - x
connection
Block
JBST status x - - - - - - x
connection
Alarm
JALM status x - - - - - - x
connection
PV
JPV x - - - - - - x
connection
SV
JSV x x - - - - - x
connection
MV
JMV x x - - - - - x
connection
SVH
J01 x x - - - - - x
connection
SVL
J02 x x - - - - - x
connection
MH
J03 x x - - - - - x
connection
ML
J04 x x - - - - - x
connection
Interlock
INT switch x - - - Δ x x x
input
*1: x: Connection available
-: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a selector switch block (SW-33, SW-91).

Analog Data Display Function

The Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3) references the analog data at the connection destination of
the I/O terminals shown below during each scan period, and stores data values and data statuses as data
items.
If no I/O connection terminal is connected, the values currently stored in the data items are held.
Table 3.6-2 Target I/O Terminals of Analog Data Display and Corresponding Data Items

I/O terminal Data item

JPV Process variable (PV)
JSV Setpoint value (SV)
JMV Manipulated output value (MV)
J01 Setpoint high limit (SVH)
J02 Setpoint low limit (SVL)
J03 Manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH)
J04 Manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML)

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.6 Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3) Page 3 of 4

The display form of the manipulated output value (MV) is set in the Function Block Detail Builder.
• MV Display Style
Select from “Auto determination” or “User Define.”
The default setting is “Auto determination.”
When “Automatic Determination” is selected, the engineering unit and scale range of the manipulated output
value (MV) will be the same with the connected block.
When “User Define” is selected, the engineering unit and scale range of the manipulated output value (MV)
needs to be defined regardless the connected destination. The engineering unit and scale range of the
manipulated output value (MV) determines the display type of the MV.
The engineering unit and scale range of the manipulated output value (MV) are set in the Function Block
Detail Builder.
• MV Engineering Unit Symbol
MV engineering unit.
The default setting is “%.”
• MV Range
The high limit and low limit values of the maximum range of the manipulated output value.
The default setting is “100.0” for the high limit value and “0.0” for the low limit value.

Analog Data Operation Function

When setting operation is performed to any data items of the Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3),
the set data item values will be set to the connection destination of the corresponding I/O terminals shown
below:
Table 3.6-3 Target I/O Terminals of Analog Data Operation and Corresponding Data Items

I/O terminal Data item

JPV Process variable (PV)
JSV Setpoint value (SV)
JMV Manipulated output value (MV)
J01 Setpoint high limit (SVH)
J02 Setpoint low limit (SVL)
J03 Manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH)
J04 Manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML)

The setting of analog data to the connection destination is performed during the periodic scan that
immediately follows the setting operation to the data item of the Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3).

Data Items - INDST3

Table 3.6-4 Data Items of Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3)

Data Entry Permitted or Not

Data Name Range Default
Item (*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(MAN)
BSTS Block status Δ ----- 0
ALRM Alarm status Δ ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status x ----- 0
AF Alarm detection specification x ----- 0
AOFS Alarm masking specification x ----- 0
PV Process variable - PV engineering unit value SL

SV Setpoint value x Value in the same engineering SL

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.6 Triple-Pointer Manual Station Block (INDST3) Page 4 of 4

unit as PV
MV Manipulated output value x MV engineering unit value MSL
Manipulated variable high -limit
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
setpoint
Manipulated variable low -limit
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
setpoint
SVH Setpoint high limit x SL to SH SH
SVL Setpoint low limit x SL to SH SL
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
Value in the same engineering
SH Scale high limit - -----
unit as PV
Value in the same engineering
SL Scale low limit - -----
unit as PV
Value in the same engineering
MSH MV scale high limit - -----
unit as MV
Value in the same engineering
MSL MV scale low limit - -----
unit as MV
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
-: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.7 Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI) Page 1 of 6

3.7 Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI)

The Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI) is a sequence faceplate block that has internal functions to display
sequence phase signals and to operate three push button switches.

Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI)

▼ Connection Information
Here is a function block diagram of the Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI).

Figure 3.7-1 Function Block Diagram of Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI)

BSI block process timing is periodic type. The scan period can be set to Basic Scan, Medium-speed Scan (*1)
or High-speed Scan.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

The figure below shows an example of the instrument faceplate of the Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI)
displayed in the operation and monitoring window.

Figure 3.7-2 Display Example of Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI)

The table below shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Batch
Status Indicator Block (BSI).

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.7 Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI) Page 2 of 6

Table 3.7-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of I/O Terminals of Batch Status Indicator
Block (BSI)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Block
JMOD mode x x - - - - - x
connection
Block
JBST status x - - - - - - x
connection
Alarm
JALM status x - - - - - - x
connection
SV
SET x - - - - - - x
connection
PV01
Q01 x x - - - x x x
connection
PV02
Q02 x x - - - x x x
connection
PV03
Q03 x x - - - x x x
connection
Interlock
INT switch x - - - Δ x x x
input
*1: x: Connection available
-: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a selector switch block (SW-33, SW-91).

Phase Signal Display Function

▼ Process Name 1 to 16
The phase signal display function is a function that displays the name of the phase being executed at the
plant, on the instrument faceplate of the operation and monitoring window. The Batch Status Indicator Block
(BSI) performs processing in the following order.
• References the data at the connection destination of the SV connection terminal (SET), and stores the
referenced value as the current phase step number (SV).
• Select the current phase signal (PHAS[SV]) from process signals (PHAS[n]) based on the value stored as
the current phase step number (SV), and sets it as the current phase signal (PV).
• If no data is linked to the SET terminal, PHAS[SV] is selected by using the value held as SV.
• If the value of the current phase step number (SV) is 17 or larger, the value of the current phase signal
(PV) is held as is.
• If the value of the current phase step number (SV) is 17 or larger, the current phase signal (PV) will be
changed when character string data is set to the signal.
Up to 16 phase signals can be defined in the Function Block Detail Builder. Phase signals are defined as one-
dimensional array data (PHAS[n]) whose elements are character strings containing 16 alphanumeric
characters.

Switch Status Input Function

The switch status input function of the Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI) determines whether the switch
statuses (PV01 to PV03) are ON or OFF in accordance with the status data value of the connection destination.

Action of the Switch Status Input Function

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.7 Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI) Page 3 of 6

The Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI) references the status information at the connection destination of input
connection terminals (Q01 to Q03) during each scan period. If the value of the referenced status information
is “0,” then the switch status becomes OFF. If the value is other than “0,” then the switch status becomes ON.
When the switch status is OFF, the values of PV01 to PV03 are “0.” When the switch status is ON, the values
of PV01 to PV03 are “1.”

Operating Conditions of the Switch Status Input Function

Depending upon the connection status of the I/O terminal and the switch type setting, data reference and the
switch status (PVnn) determination may or may not be performed.
Table 3.7-2 Operating Conditions of the Switch Status Input Function

I/O connection Switch type Data reference(*1) Switch status determination(*1)

No connection ------ - -
Not used - -
Lamp x x
Connection
Button x x
Button with lamp x x
*1: x: Performed
-: Not performed

Lamp Indication Function

▼ Label for OFF, Label for ON, Display Color for OFF, Display Color for ON
The lamp indication function of the Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI) changes the indication color of the push
button switch and the indication content of its switch label when the value of each switch status (PV01 to
PV03) is changed.

Action of the Lamp Indication Function

When the ON/OFF status of each switch (PV01 to PV03) changes, the values of the corresponding switch
indication color (SWCR1 to SWCR3) and switch label (SWLB1 to SWLB3), which are data items, will change.
Accordingly, the indication color and switch label of the push button switch, which is located on the
instrument faceplate of the Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI), will change.
The setting of the indication color and switch label of the push button switch can be changed by using the
Function Block Detail Builder.
The following are the default set values of each switch indication color and label.
• Display color at ON: Red
• Display color at OFF: White
• Label at ON: ON
• Label at OFF: OFF

Operating Conditions of the Lamp Indication Function

Depending upon the connection status of the I/O terminal and the switch type setting, indication color
determination and switch label determination may or may not be performed.
Table 3.7-3 Operating Conditions of the Lamp Indication Function

I/O connection Switch type Indication color determination(*1) Switch label determination(*1)
No connection ------ - -
Not used - -

Connection Lamp x x
Button - -

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.7 Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI) Page 4 of 6

Button with lamp x x

*1: x: Performed
-: Not performed

Button Operation Function

The button operation function of the Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI) sets the value of each switch status
(PV01 to PV03) to the connection destination when button operation is performed by the operator.

Action of the Button Operation Function

When button operation is performed by the operator on the instrument faceplate, or when data is set to PV01
to PV03 from outside the block, the corresponding switch status (PV01 to PV03) will change. How the switch
status changes depends on the setting of the button action.
When the value of PV01, PV02, or PV03 has been changed, that value (PV01 to PV03) is set to the connection
destination of the corresponding I/O terminal (Q01 to Q03). This setting is executed during the first periodic
scan following the setting operation to the data item of the Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI).

Operating Conditions of the Button Operation Function

Depending upon the connection status of the I/O terminal and the switch type setting, switch status (PVnn)
determination and data output may or may not be performed.
Table 3.7-4 Operating Statuses of the Button Operation Function

I/O connection Switch type Switch status determination(*1) Data output(*1)

No connection ------ - -
Not used - -
Lamp - -
Connection
Button x x
Button with lamp x x
*1: x: Performed
-: Not performed

Button Action
▼ Button Action
The button action references the ways in which the switch status changes when button operation is
performed by the operator.
The button action of the Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI) is defined in the Function Block Detail Builder. Two
types of button actions are available for selection: “check button” and “radio button.”
• Check button action
When button operation is performed by the operator, the switch status changes. The status changes to
OFF (0) if it was ON (1), and to ON (1) if it was OFF (0). Multiple switches can be turned ON
simultaneously.
• Radio button action
When button operation is performed by the operator, all switches other than the one that has been turned
ON (1) by the operation will be turned OFF (0) forcibly.
• Switches that are turned OFF forcibly while the “radio button” is in use are limited to those that support
the button operation function.
• When the “radio button” is in use, even a switch whose operation disable status is ON will be turned OFF
forcibly once other switches have been turned ON.
• In some circumstances, such as when switch statuses are referenced by the lamp indication function,
multiple switch statuses may become ON simultaneously. In this case, only the switch with the smallest

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.7 Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI) Page 5 of 6

number among the switches that are ON will remain so. All other switch statuses will be turned OFF forcibly.
When any switch status is turned OFF forcibly, its PVnn value will be set to the connection destination of
the corresponding I/O terminal, as is the case with the button operation function.

Switch Flashing Function

The switch flashing function flashes the lamp of each switch on the instrument faceplate.
When the switch flashing status (SWST[n]) is set to “1” through data setting, the lamp indication on the
instrument faceplate starts flashing. When the switch flashing status (SWST[n]) is set to “0,” the lamp
indication returns to a normal state.

Switch Operation Disable Function

The switch operation disable function is a function that disables switch operation from the instrument
faceplate. This function can enable or disable operation of the status (PVnn) and flashing status (SWST[n]) of
each switch.
When a numeric value of 0 or less is set as the switch operation disable status (SWOP[n]), operation is
enabled. When a numeric value of 1 or more is set as the switch operation disable status (SWOP[n]),
operation is disabled.
Note that this function disables only the operations performed on the instrument faceplate. Even when switch
operation is disabled by this setting, other switch operations, such as the setting of data between function
blocks and data entry operation from the tuning view of the specified tag and data item names, can be
performed freely.

Data Items - Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI)

Table 3.7-5 Data Items of Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI)

Entry Permitted or
Data Item Data Name Range Default
Not(*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(MAN)
BSTS Block status Δ ----- 0
ALRM Alarm status Δ ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status x ----- 0
Alarm detection
AF x ----- 0
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS x ----- 0
specification
Equivalent to a string of 16
PV Current phase step name x -----
alphanumeric characters
Current phase step
SV Δ 1 to 99 1
number
PV01 to
Switch status 1 to 3 x 0/1 0
PV03
SWCR[1] to
Switch indication color x 0 to 15 7
[3]
SWLB[1] to Equivalent to a string of 8 alphanumeric
Switch label x -----
[3] characters
SWST[1] to
Switch flashing status x 0/1 0
[3]
SWOP[1] to Switch operation disable
x -15 to 15 0
[3] status

PHAS[1] to Phase step name x Equivalent to a string of 16 -----

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.7 Batch Status Indicator Block (BSI) Page 6 of 6

[16] alphanumeric characters

OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.8 Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C) Page 1 of 6

3.8 Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C)

The Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C) is a sequence faceplate block that holds status data of five
push button switches.

Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C)

▼ Connection Information
The Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C) is a sequence faceplate block that holds status data of five
push button switches, and changes the indication on the instrument faceplate in accordance with the status of
each push button switch. Here is a function block diagram of the Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block
(PBS5C).

Figure 3.8-1 Function Block Diagram of Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C)

PBS5C block process timing is periodic type. The scan period can be set to Basic Scan, Medium-speed Scan
(*1) or High-speed Scan.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

The figure below shows an example of the instrument faceplate of the Extended 5-push-button switch block
(PBS5C) displayed in the operation and monitoring window.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.8 Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C) Page 2 of 6

Figure 3.8-2 Display Example of Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C)

The table below shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Extended
5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C).
Table 3.8-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of I/O Terminals of Extended 5-Push-Button
Switch Block (PBS5C)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Block
JMOD mode x x - - - - - x
connection
Block
JBST status x - - - - - - x
connection
Alarm
JALM status x - - - - - - x
connection
PV01
Q01 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV02
Q02 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV03
Q03 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV04
Q04 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV05
Q05 x - - - - x x x
connection
MV01
B01 - x - - - x x x
connection
MV02
B02 - x - - - x x x
connection
MV03
B03 - x - - - x x x
connection
MV04
B04 - x - - - x x x
connection

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.8 Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C) Page 3 of 6

MV05
B05 - x - - - x x x
connection
Interlock
INT switch x - - - Δ x x x
input
*1: x: Connection available
-: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a selector switch block (SW-33, SW-91).

Switch Status Input Function

The switch status input function of the Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C) determines whether the
switch statuses (PV01 to PV05) are ON or OFF in accordance with the status data value of the connection
destination.

Action of the Switch Status Input Function

The PBS5C Block references status of terminals connected to input terminals Q01 to Q05 at established scan
periods. When the referenced status is 0, a switch turns OFF and the values of PV01 and PV05 are 0. When it
is other than 0, a switch turns ON and the values are 1.

Operating Conditions of the Switch Status Input Function

Depending upon the connection status of the I/O terminal and the switch type, data reference and the switch
status (PVnn) determination may or may not be performed.
Table 3.8-2 Operating Conditions of the Switch Status Input Function

I/O connection Switch type Data reference(*1) Switch status determination(*1)

No connection ------ - -
Not used - -
Lamp x x
Connection
Button - -
Button with lamp x x
*1: x: Performed
-: Not performed

Lamp Indication Function

▼ Label for OFF, Label for ON, Display Color for OFF, Display Color for ON
The lamp indication function of the Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C) changes the indication
color of the push button switch and the indication content of its switch label when the value of each switch
status (PV01 to PV05) is changed.

Action of the Lamp Indication Function

When the ON/OFF status of each switch (PV01 to PV05) changes, the values of the corresponding switch
indication color (SWCR[1] to SWCR[5]) and switch label (SWLB[1] to SWLB[5]), which are data items, will
change. Accordingly, the indication color and switch label of the push button switch, which is located on the
instrument faceplate of the Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C), will change.
The setting of the indication color and switch label of the push button switch can be changed by using the
Function Block Detail Builder.
The following shows the default set values of each switch indication color and label.
• Display color at ON: Red
• Display color at OFF: White

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.8 Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C) Page 4 of 6

• Label at ON: ON
• Label at OFF: OFF

Operating Conditions of the Lamp Indication Function

Depending upon the connection status of the I/O terminal and the switch type setting, indication color
determination and switch label determination may or may not be performed.
Table 3.8-3 Operating Conditions of the Lamp Indication Function

I/O connection Switch type Indication color determination(*1) Switch label determination(*1)
No connection ------ - -
Not used - -
Lamp x x
Connection
Button - -
Button with lamp x x
*1: x: Performed
-: Not performed

Button Operation Function

The button operation function of the Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C) changes manipulated
command values (MV01 to MV05) when button operation is performed by the operator.

Action of the Button Operation Function

When button operation is performed by the operator on the instrument faceplate, or when data is set to
manipulated command values (MV01 to MV05) from outside the block, the manipulated command values
(MV01 to MV05) will change. How each value changes varies depending upon the button operation setting.
When the value of any manipulated command value (MV01 to MV05) is changed, that manipulated command
value (MV01 to MV05) will be set to the connection destination of the corresponding output connection
terminal (B01 to B05). This setting of data to the connection destination is executed during the first periodic
scan following the setting operation to the data item of the Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C).

Operating Conditions of the Button Operation Function

Depending upon the connection status of the I/O terminal and the switch type setting, manipulated command
value (MVnn) determination and data output may or may not be performed.
Table 3.8-4 Operating Conditions of the Button Operation Function

I/O connection Switch type Manipulated command value determination(*1) Data output(*1)
No connection ------ - -
Not used - -
Lamp - -
Connection
Button x x
Button with lamp x x
*1: x: Performed
-: Not performed

Button Action
▼ Button Action
The button action references the ways in which the switch status changes when button operation is
performed by the operator.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.8 Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C) Page 5 of 6

The button action of the Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C) is set in the Function Block Detail
Builder. Three types of button action are available for selection; “momentary button,” “alternate button,”
and “radio button.” The default is “momentary button.”
When the “momentary button” is selected, output time span must be set. The output time span is set in the
Function Block Detail Builder.

Switch Flashing Function

The switch flashing function flashes the lamp of each switch on the instrument faceplate.
When the switch flashing status (SWST[n]) is set to “1” through data setting, the lamp indication on the
instrument faceplate starts flashing. When the switch flashing status (SWST[n]) is set to “0,” the lamp
indication returns to a normal state.

Switch Operation Disable Function

The switch operation disable function is a function that disables switch operation from the instrument
faceplate. This function can enable or disable operation of the manipulated output value (MVnn) and flashing
status (SWST[n]) of each switch.
When a numeric value of 0 or smaller is set as the switch operation disable status (SWOP[n]), operation is
enabled.
When a numeric value of 1 or greater is set as the switch operation disable status (SWOP[n]), operation is
disabled. Note that this function disables only the operations performed on the instrument faceplate. Even
when switch operation is disabled by this setting, other switch operations, such as the setting of data between
function blocks and data entry operation from the tuning view of the specified tag and data item names, can
be performed freely.

Reconfirmation Operation
A dialog box for reconfirming the switch operation is displayed.
In the dialog, an OFF switch label is displayed when the current switch status (PVnn) is ON and an ON switch
label is displayed when the switch status is OFF.

Data Items - PBS5C

Table 3.8-5 Data Items of Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C)

Entry Permitted or
Data Item Data Name Range Default
Not(*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(MAN)
BSTS Block status Δ ----- 0
ALRM Alarm status Δ ----- NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status x ----- 0
Alarm detection
AF x ----- 0
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS x ----- 0
specification
PV01 to
Switch status 1 to 5 x 0/1 0
PV05
SWCR[1] to
Switch indication color x 0 to 15 7
[5]
SWLB[1] to Equivalent to a string of 8
Switch label x -----
[5] alphanumeric characters

SWST[1] to

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.8 Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C) Page 6 of 6

[5] Switch flashing status x 0/1 0

SWOP[1] to Switch operation disable
x -15 to 15 0
[5] status
AKLB[1] to Equivalent to a string of 8
Reconfirmation label x -----
[5] alphanumeric characters
MV01 to Manipulated command 1
x 0/1 0
MV05 to 5
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.9 Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C) Page 1 of 6

3.9 Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C)

The Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C) (*1) is a sequence faceplate block that holds status data of
ten push button switches.
*1: PBS10C block can be used in FCSs except PFCS.

Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C)

▼ Connection Information
Here is a function block diagram of the Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C).

Figure 3.9-1 Function Block Diagram of Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C)

PBS10C block process timing is periodic type. The scan period can be set to Basic Scan, Medium-speed Scan (*1)
or High-speed Scan.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

The figure below shows an example of the instrument faceplate of the Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block
(PBS10C) displayed in the operation and monitoring window.

Figure 3.9-2 Display Example of Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C)

The table below shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of the Extended 10-

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.9 Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C) Page 2 of 6

Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C).

Table 3.9-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of I/O Terminals of Extended 10-Push-Button
Switch Block (PBS10C)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Block
JMOD mode x x - - - - - x
connection
Block
JBST status x - - - - - - x
connection
Alarm
JALM status x - - - - - - x
connection
PV01
Q01 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV02
Q02 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV03
Q03 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV04
Q04 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV05
Q05 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV06
Q06 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV07
Q07 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV08
Q08 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV09
Q09 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV10
Q10 x - - - - x x x
connection
MV01
B01 - x - - - x x x
connection
MV02
B02 - x - - - x x x
connection
MV03
B03 - x - - - x x x
connection
MV04
B04 - x - - - x x x
connection
MV05
B05 - x - - - x x x
connection
MV06
B06 - x - - - x x x
connection
MV07
B07 - x - - - x x x
connection
MV08
B08 - x - - - x x x
connection
MV09
B09 - x - - - x x x
connection
MV10
B10 - x - - - x x x
connection

Interlock

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.9 Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C) Page 3 of 6

INT SW input x - - - Δ x x x
*1: x: Connection available
-: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a selector switch block (SW-33, SW-91).

Switch Status Input Function

The switch status input function of the Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C) determines whether the
switch statuses (PV01 to PV10) are ON or OFF in accordance with the status data value of the connection
destination.

Action of the Switch Status Input Function

The PBS10C Block references status of terminals connected to input terminals Q01 to Q10 at established scan
periods. When the referenced status is 0, a switch turns OFF and the values of PV01 and PV10 are 0. When it is
other than 0, a switch turns ON and the values are 1.

Operating Conditions of the Switch Status Input Function

Depending upon the connection status of the I/O terminal and the switch type, data reference and the switch
status (PVnn) determination may or may not be performed.
Table 3.9-2 Operating Conditions of Switch Status Input Function

I/O connection Switch type Data reference(*1) Switch status determination(*1)

No connection — - -
Not used - -
Lamp x x
Connection
Button - -
Button with lamp x x
*1: x: Performed
-: Not performed

Lamp Indication Function

▼ Label for OFF, Label for ON, Display Color for OFF, Display Color for ON
The lamp indication function of the the Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C) changes the indication
color of the push button switch and the indication content of its switch label when the value of each switch status
(PV01 to PV10) is changed.

Action of Lamp Indication Function

When the ON/OFF status of each switch (PV01 to PV10) changes, the values of the corresponding switch
indication color (SWCR[1] to SWCR[10]) and switch label (SWLB[1] to SWLB[10]), which are data items, will
change. Accordingly, the indication color and switch label of the push button switch, which is located on the
instrument faceplate of the Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C), will change.
The setting of the indication color and switch label of the push button switch can be changed by using the
Function Block Detail Builder.
The following shows the default set values of each switch indication color and label.
• Display color at ON: Red
• Display color at OFF: White
• Label at ON: ON
• Label at OFF: OFF

Operating Conditions of Lamp Indication Function

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.9 Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C) Page 4 of 6

Depending upon the connection status of the I/O terminal and the switch type setting, indication color
determination and switch label determination may or may not be performed.
Table 3.9-3 Operating Conditions of Lamp Indication Function

I/O connection Switch type Indication color determination(*1) Switch label determination(*1)
No connection — - -
Not used - -
Lamp x x
Connection
Button - -
Button with lamp x x
*1: x: Performed
-: Not performed

Button Operation Function

The button operation function of the Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C) changes manipulated
command values (MV01 to MV10) when button operation is performed by the operator.

Action of the Button Operation Function

When button operation is performed by the operator on the instrument faceplate, or when data is set to
manipulated command values (MV01 to MV10) from outside the block, the manipulated command values (MV01
to MV10) will change. How each value changes varies depending upon the button operation setting.
When the value of any manipulated command value (MV01 to MV10) is changed, that manipulate command value
(MV01 to MV10) will be set to the connection destination of the corresponding output connection terminal (B01 to
B10). This setting of data to the connection destination is executed during the first periodic scan following the
setting operation to the data item of the Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C).

Operating Conditions of the Button Operation Function

Depending upon the connection status of the I/O terminal and the switch type setting, manipulated command
value (MVnn) determination and data output may or may not be performed.
Table 3.9-4 Operating Conditions of the Button Operation Function

I/O connection Switch type Manipulated command value determination(*1) Data output(*1)
No connection — - -
Not used - -
Lamp - -
Connection
Button x x
Button with lamp x x
*1: x: Performed
-: Not performed

Button Action
▼ Button Action
The button action references the ways in which the switch status changes when button operation is performed by
the operator.
The button action of the Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C) is set in the Function Block Detail
Builder. Three types of button action are available for selection; “momentary button,” “alternate button,”
and “radio button.” The default is “momentary button.”
When the “momentary button” is selected, output time span must be set. The output time span is set in the
Function Block Detail Builder.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.9 Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C) Page 5 of 6

Switch Flashing Function

The switch flashing function flashes the lamp of each switch on the instrument faceplate.
When the switch flashing status (SWST[n]) is set to “1” through data setting, the lamp indication on the
instrument faceplate starts flashing. When the switch flashing status (SWST[n]) is set to “0,” the lamp indication
returns to a normal state.

Switch Operation Disable Function

The switch operation disable function is a function that disables switch operation from the instrument faceplate.
This function can enable or disable operation of the manipulated output value (MVnn) and flashing status (SWST
[n]) of each switch.
When a numeric value 0 or smaller is set as the switch operation disable status (SWOP[n]), operation is enabled.
When a numeric value 1 or greater is set as the switch operation disable status (SWOP[n]), operation is disabled.
Note that this function disables only the operations performed on the instrument faceplate. Even when switch
operation is disabled by this setting, other switch operations, such as the setting of data between function blocks
and data entry operation from the tuning view of the specified tag and data item names, can be performed freely.

Reconfirmation Operation
A dialog box for reconfirming the switch operation is displayed.
In the dialog, an OFF switch label is displayed when the current switch status (PVnn) is ON and an ON switch label
is displayed when the switch status is OFF.

Data Items - PBS10C

Table 3.9-5 Data Items of Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C)

Entry Permitted or Not

Data Data Name Range Default
(*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x
(MAN)
BSTS Block status Δ 0
ALRM Alarm status Δ NR
AFLS Alarm flashing status x 0
Alarm detection
AF x 0
specification
Alarm masking
AOFS x 0
specification
PV01 to PV10 Switch status 1 to 10 x 0/1 0
SWCR[1] to
Switch indication color x 0 to 15 7
[10]
SWLB[1] to Equivalent to a string of 8 alphanumeric
Switch label x
[10] characters
SWST[1] to
Switch flashing status x 0/1 0
[10]
SWOP[1] to Switch operation disable
x -15 to 15 0
[10] status
AKLB[1] to Equivalent to a string of 8 alphanumeric
Reconfirmation label x
[10] characters
MV01 to Manipulated command 1
x 0/1 0
MV10 to 10
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x 0

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.9 Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C) Page 6 of 6

*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally

-: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.10 Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C) Page 1 of 7

3.10 Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C)

The Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C) is a faceplate block that has a faceplate block for
indication operation and status data for five push button switches.

Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C)

▼ Connection Information
Here is a function block diagram of the Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C).

Figure 3.10-1 Function Block Diagram of Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C)

HAS3C block process timing is periodic type. The scan period can be set to Basic Scan, Medium-speed Scan
(*1) or High-speed Scan.
*1: The medium-speed scan period can only be used for the FFCS series, KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, and LFCS.

The figure below shows an example of the instrument faceplate of the Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block
(HAS3C) displayed in the operation and monitoring window.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.10 Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C) Page 2 of 7

Figure 3.10-2 Display Example of Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C)

The table below shows the connection types and connection destinations of the I/O terminals of Extended
Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C).
Table 3.10-1 Connection Types and Connection Destinations of I/O Terminals of Extended Hybrid Manual
Station Block (HAS3C)

Connection type(*1) Connection destination(*1)

I/O terminal Data Data Condition Status Terminal Process Software Function
reference setting testing manipulation connection I/O I/O block
Block
JMOD mode x x - - - - - x
connection
Block
JBST status x - - - - - - x
connection
Alarm
JALM status x - - - - - - x
connection
PV01
Q01 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV02
Q02 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV03
Q03 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV04
Q04 x - - - - x x x
connection
PV05
Q05 x - - - - x x x
connection
MV01
B01 - x - - - x x x
connection
MV02
B02 - x - - - x x x
connection
MV03
B03 - x - - - x x x
connection
MV04
B04 - x - - - x x x
connection

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.10 Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C) Page 3 of 7

MV05
B05 - x - - - x x x
connection
PV
JPV x - - - - - - x
connection
SV
JSV x x - - - - - x
connection
MV
JMV x x - - - - - x
connection
SVH
J01 x x - - - - - x
connection
SVL
J02 x x - - - - - x
connection
MH
J03 x x - - - - - x
connection
ML
J04 x x - - - - - x
connection
Interlock
INT switch x - - - Δ x x x
input
*1: x: Connection available
-: Connection not available
Δ: Connection is available only when connecting to a selector switch block (SW-33, SW-91).

Analog Data Display Function

The Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C) references the analog data at the connection destination
of the I/O terminals shown below during each scan period, and stores data values and data statuses as data
items.
If no I/O connection terminal is connected, the values currently stored in the data items are held.
Table 3.10-2 Target I/O Terminals of Analog Data Display and Corresponding Data Items

I/O terminal Data item

JPV Process variable (PV)
JSV Setpoint value (SV)
JMV Manipulated output value (MV)
J01 Setpoint high limit (SVH)
J02 Setpoint low limit (SVL)
J03 Manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (MH)
J04 Manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML)

The display form of the manipulated output value (MV) is set in the Function Block Detail Builder.
• MV Display Style
Select from “Automatic Determination” or “User Define.”
The default setting is “Automatic Determination.”
When “Automatic Determination” is selected, the engineering unit and scale range of the manipulated output
value (MV) will be the same with the connected block or device.
When “User Define” is selected, set the engineering unit and scale range of the manipulated output value
(MV). The engineering unit and scale range of the manipulated output value (MV) are set in the Function
Block Detail Builder.
• MV Engineering Unit Symbol
MV engineering unit.
The default setting is “%.”
• MV Range

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.10 Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C) Page 4 of 7

The high limit and low limit values of the maximum range of the manipulated output value.
The default setting is “100.0” for the high limit value and “0.0” for the low limit value.

Analog Data Operation Function

When setting operation is performed to any data items of the Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C),
the set data item values will be set to the connection destination of the corresponding I/O terminals shown
below:
Table 3.10-3 Target I/O Terminals of Analog Data Operation and Corresponding Data Items

I/O terminal Data item

JSV Setpoint value (SV)
JMV Manipulated output value (MV)
J01 Setpoint high limit (SVH)
J02 Setpoint low limit (SVL)
J03 Manipulated variable high-limit setpoint (ML)
J04 Manipulated variable low-limit setpoint (ML)

The setting of analog data to the connection destination is performed during the periodic scan that
immediately follows the setting operation to the data item of the Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block
(HAS3C).

Switch Status Input Function

The switch status input function of the Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C) determines whether
the switch statuses (PV01 to PV05) are ON or OFF in accordance with the status data value of the connection
destination.

Action of Switch Status Input

The HAS3C Block references status of terminals connected to input terminals Q01 to Q05 at established scan
periods. When the referenced status is 0, a switch turns OFF and the values of PV01 and PV05 are 0. When it
is other than 0, a switch turns ON and the values are 1.

Operating Conditions of Switch Status Input

Depending upon the connection status of the I/O terminal and the switch type setting, data reference and the
switch status (PVnn) determination may or may not be performed.
Table 3.10-4 Operating Conditions of the Switch Status Input

I/O connection Switch type Data reference(*1) Switch status determination(*1)

No connection ------ - -
Not used - -
Lamp x x
Connection
Button - -
Button with lamp x x
*1: x: Performed
-: Not performed

Lamp Indication Function

▼ Label for OFF, Label for ON, Display Color for OFF, Display Color for ON
The lamp indication function of the Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C) changes the indication
color of the push button switch and the indication content of its switch label when the value of each switch

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.10 Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C) Page 5 of 7

status (PV01 to PV05) is changed.

Action of Lamp Indication

When the ON/OFF status of each switch (PV01 to PV05) changes, the values of the corresponding switch
indication color (SWCR[1] to SWCR[5]) and switch label (SWLB[1] to SWLB[5]), which are data items, will
change. Accordingly, the indication color and switch label of the push button switch, which is located on the
instrument faceplate of the Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C), will change.
The setting of the indication color and switch label of the push button switch can be changed by using the
Function Block Detail Builder.
The default set values of each switch indication color and label are shown as follows.
• Display color at ON: Red
• Display color at OFF: White
• Label at ON: ON
• Label at OFF: OFF

Operating Conditions of Lamp Indication

Depending upon the connection status of the I/O terminal and the switch type setting, indication color
determination and switch label determination may or may not be performed.
Table 3.10-5 Operating Conditions of Switch Indication

I/O connection Switch type Indication color determination(*1) Switch label determination(*1)
No connection ------
Not used
Lamp x x
Connection
Button
Button with lamp x x
*1: x: Performed
-: Not performed

Button Operation Function

The button operation function of the Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C) changes manipulated
command values (MV01 to MV05) when button operation is performed by the operator.

Action of Button Operation

When button operation is performed by the operator on the instrument faceplate, or when data is set to
manipulated command values (MV01 to MV05) from outside the block, the manipulated command values
(MV01 to MV05) will change. The value to be set varies depending upon the button operation setting.
When a value is set to any manipulated command value (MV01 to MV05), the manipulated command value
(MV01 to MV05) is set to the connection destination of the output terminal (B01 to B05). This setting is
executed during the first periodic scan after the switch status setting.

Operating Conditions of Button Operation

Depending upon the connection status of the I/O terminal and the switch type setting, manipulated command
value (MVnn) determination and data output may or may not be performed.
Table 3.10-6 Operating Conditions of Button Operation

I/O connection Switch type Manipulated command value determination(*1) Data output(*1)
No connection ------ - -

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.10 Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C) Page 6 of 7

Not used - -
Lamp - -
Connection
Button x x
Button with lamp x x
*1: x: Performed
-: Not performed

Button Action
▼ Button Action
The button action references the ways in which the switch status changes when button operation is
performed by the operator.
The button action of the Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C) is set in the Function Block Detail
Builder. Three types of button action are available for selection; “momentary button,” “alternate button,”
and “radio button.” The default is “momentary button.”
When the “momentary button” is selected, output time span must be set. The output time span is set in the
Function Block Detail Builder.

Switch Flashing Function

The switch flashing function flashes each switch on the instrument faceplate.
When 1 is set to the switch flashing state (SWST[n]), the lamp of the faceplate flashes; When 0 is set, the
lamp turns to the normal state.

Switch Operation Disable Function

The switch operation disable function is a function that disables switch operation from the instrument
faceplate. This function can enable or disable operation of the manipulated output value (MVnn) and flashing
status (SWST[n]) of each switch.
When a numeric value of 0 or less is set as the switch operation disable status (SWOP[n]), operation is
enabled. When a numeric value of 1 or more is set as the switch operation disable status (SWOP[n]),
operation is disabled.
Note that this function disables only the operations performed on the instrument faceplate. Even when switch
operation is disabled by this setting, other switch operations, such as the setting of data between function
blocks and data entry operation from the tuning view of the specified tag and data item names, can be
performed freely.

Reconfirmation Operation
A dialog box for reconfirming the switch is displayed.
In the dialog, an OFF switch label is displayed when the current switch status (PVnn) is ON and an ON switch
label is displayed when the switch status is OFF.

Data Items - HAS3C

Table 3.10-7 Data Items of Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C)

Entry Permitted or
Data Item Data Name Range Default
Not(*1)
O/S
MODE Block mode x -----
(MAN)
BSTS Block status Δ ----- 0
ALRM Alarm status Δ ----- NR

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
3.10 Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C) Page 7 of 7

AFLS Alarm flashing status x ----- 0

AF Alarm detection specification x ----- 0
AOFS Alarm masking specification x ----- 0
PV01 to
Switch status 1 to 5 x 0/1 0
PV05
PV Process variable - PV engineering unit value SL
Value in the same engineering unit
SV Setpoint value x SL
as PV
MV Manipulated output value x MV engineering unit value MSL
Manipulated variable high-
MH x MSL to MSH MSH
limit setpoint
Manipulated variable low-limit
ML x MSL to MSH MSL
setpoint
SVH Setpoint high limit x SL to SH SH
SVL Setpoint low limit x SL to SH SL
SWCR[1] to
Switch indication color x 0 to 15 7
[5]
SWLB[1] to Equivalent to a string of 8
Switch label x -----
[5] alphanumeric characters
SWST[1] to
Switch flashing status x 0/1 0
[5]
SWOP[1] to Switch operation disable
x -15 to 15 0
[5] status
AKLB[1] to Equivalent to a string of 8
Reconfirmation label x -----
[5] alphanumeric characters
MV01 to
Manipulated command 1 to 5 x 0/1 0
MV05
OPMK Operation mark x 0 to 64 0
UAID User application ID x ----- 0
Value in the same engineering unit
SH Scale high limit - -----
as PV
Value in the same engineering unit
SL Scale low limit - -----
as PV
Value in the same engineering unit
MSH MV scale high limit - -----
as MV
Value in the same engineering unit
MSL MV scale low limit - -----
as MV
*1: x: Entry is permitted unconditionally
-: Entry is not permitted
Δ: Entry is permitted conditionally

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
Revision Information Page 1 of 2

Revision Information
Title : Function Blocks Reference Vol.2
Manual No. : IM 33J15A31-01EN

May. 2020/7th Edition/R6.07.10 or later

1.15 Updated descriptions in “ Calculation Algorithm” and “ Set Parameters.”
1.16 Updated descriptions in “ Calculation Algorithm” and “ Set Parameters.”

Aug. 2019/6th Edition/R6.07

“Copyright and Trademark Notices” Updated descriptions in “ Trademarks.”

Aug. 2018/5th Edition/R6.06

1.3.1 Updated descriptions in " Output Processing Possible in Each Calculation Block."

Apr. 2017/4th Edition/R6.04

2.1 Updated descriptions in " Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block."
2.1.1 Added descriptions.
2.1.2 Added descriptions.
2.4 Updated descriptions.
Changed " Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block" to
2.4.1, "Switch Instrument Block and Enhanced Switch Instrument Block" and added
descriptions.
Changed " Switch Instrument Block" to " Switch Instrument Block" and added description.
Changed " Enhanced Switch Instrument Block" to " Enhanced Switch Instrument Block."
2.4.2 Newly added.

Jun. 2016/3rd Edition/R6.03

2.1 Added descriptions to " Sequence Element Blocks."
2.1.1 Added descriptions.
2.1.2 Added descriptions.
2.2.10 Added descriptions to " Function Blocks and I/O Data that can be Referenced from a
Sequence Table."
Added " Local Switch Block Reference (LSW)."
2.2.13 Added descriptions to " Function Blocks and I/O Data for Which Status Manipulation can
be Performed from Sequence Table."
Added " Status Manipulation of Local Switch Block (LSW)."
2.3.7 Added descriptions to " Function Blocks and I/O Data that can be Referenced from Logic
Chart."
Added " Referencing Local Switch Block (LSW)."
2.3.10 Added descriptions to " Function Blocks and I/O Data that can be Manipulated from Logic
Chart."
Added " Status Manipulation of Local Switch Block (LSW)."
2.4 Added descriptions to " Manual Mode Fallback."
2.12 Newly added.
2.13 Revised descriptions in " Annunciator Message Output."

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022
Revision Information Page 2 of 2

Dec. 2015/2nd Edition/R6.02

1.46 Added descriptions in " Inter-Station Communication Period."

Mar. 2015/1st Edition/R6.01

Newly published.

file:///C:/Program%20Files%20(x86)/YOKOGAWA/IA/iPCS/Products/CENTUMVP/Pr... 8/6/2022